initial commit of ebook 25538HEADmain

304 files changed, 19383 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/25538-8.txt b/25538-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a10d6b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6367 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by 
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Four American Indians
+       King Philip, Pontiac, Tecumseh, Osceola
+
+Author: Edson L. Whitney
+        Frances M. Perry
+
+Release Date: May 20, 2008 [EBook #25538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+   FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS
+
+   KING PHILIP
+   TECUMSEH
+   PONTIAC
+   OSCEOLA
+
+   A BOOK FOR YOUNG AMERICANS
+
+   BY
+
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY and FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+   NEW YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO
+
+   AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
+
+
+   Copyright, 1904, by
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY and FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+   Four Am. Ind.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+THE STORY OF KING PHILIP
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. PHILIP'S PEOPLE                                               9
+
+     II. PHILIP'S CHILDHOOD HOME                                      12
+
+    III. MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS                                   15
+
+     IV. PHILIP HEARS OF THE ENGLISH                                  19
+
+      V. PHILIP MEETS THE ENGLISH                                     23
+
+     VI. PHILIP'S EDUCATION                                           26
+
+    VII. PHILIP'S DAILY LIFE                                          30
+
+   VIII. PHILIP'S RELATIONS WITH THE ENGLISH                          34
+
+     IX. PHILIP BECOMES GRAND SACHEM                                  37
+
+      X. PHILIP'S TROUBLES WITH THE WHITES                            39
+
+     XI. PHILIP AND THE INDIAN COUNCILS                               42
+
+    XII. KING PHILIP'S WAR                                            45
+
+   XIII. THE LAST DAYS OF PHILIP                                      48
+
+
+THE STORY OF PONTIAC
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. THE MEETING OF PONTIAC AND THE ENGLISH                       53
+
+     II. PONTIAC'S CHILDHOOD                                          59
+
+    III. PONTIAC'S EDUCATION                                          62
+
+     IV. THE CHIEF                                                    66
+
+      V. THE PLOT                                                     70
+
+     VI. THE SEVENTH OF MAY                                           74
+
+    VII. HOSTILITIES BEGUN                                            79
+
+   VIII. THE TWO LEADERS                                              84
+
+     IX. THE SIEGE OF DETROIT                                         89
+
+      X. IMPORTANT ENGAGEMENTS                                        95
+
+     XI. THE END OF THE SIEGE                                        101
+
+    XII. ALL ALONG THE FRONTIER                                      104
+
+   XIII. THE LAST OF PONTIAC                                         110
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. EARLY YEARS                                                 117
+
+     II. YOUTH                                                       121
+
+    III. ADVENTURES OF THE YOUNG BRAVE                               125
+
+     IV. TECUMSEH DISSATISFIED                                       128
+
+      V. TECUMSEH'S BROTHER, THE PROPHET                             133
+
+     VI. GREENVILLE                                                  137
+
+    VII. THE PROPHET'S TOWN                                          144
+
+   VIII. THE COUNCIL BETWEEN HARRISON AND TECUMSEH                   149
+
+     IX. PREPARATIONS FOR WAR                                        155
+
+      X. THE BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE                                    161
+
+     XI. REORGANIZATION OF THE INDIANS                               166
+
+    XII. TECUMSEH AND THE BRITISH                                    170
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. THE EXODUS OF THE RED STICKS                                179
+
+     II. THE FLORIDA HOME                                            183
+
+    III. THE FIRST SEMINOLE WAR                                      189
+
+     IV. GRIEVANCES                                                  194
+
+      V. THE TREATY OF PAYNE'S LANDING                               202
+
+     VI. HOSTILITIES                                                 207
+
+    VII. THE WAR OPENED                                              212
+
+   VIII. OSCEOLA A WAR CHIEF                                         219
+
+     IX. THE SEMINOLES HOLD THEIR OWN                                223
+
+      X. OSCEOLA AND GENERAL JESUP                                   228
+
+     XI. THE IMPRISONMENT OSCEOLA                                    233
+
+    XII. THE END                                                     238
+
+
+
+
+   THE STORY OF
+   KING PHILIP
+
+   BY
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF KING PHILIP
+
+I. PHILIP'S PEOPLE
+
+
+Philip, ruler of the Wampanoags, was the only Indian in our country to
+whom the English colonists gave the title of king. Why no other Indian
+ever received this title I cannot tell, neither is it known how it
+happened to be given to Philip.
+
+The Wampanoags were a tribe of Indians whose homes were in what is now
+southeastern Massachusetts and in Rhode Island east of Narragansett Bay.
+A few of them, also, lived on the large islands farther south, Nantucket
+and Martha's Vineyard.
+
+[Illustration: A GRAND SACHEM]
+
+Three centuries ago Massasoit, Philip's father, was the grand sachem, or
+ruler, of the Wampanoags. His people did not form one united tribe. They
+had no states, cities, and villages, with governors, mayors, and
+aldermen, as we have. Nor did they live in close relations with one
+another and vote for common officers.
+
+On the other hand, they lived in very small villages. A few families
+pitched their wigwams together and lived in much the same way as people
+do now when they camp out in the summer.
+
+Generally, among the Wampanoags, only one family lived in a wigwam. The
+fathers, or heads of the families in the different wigwams, came
+together occasionally and consulted about such matters as seemed
+important to them.
+
+[Illustration: WIGWAMS]
+
+Every one present at the meeting had a right to express his opinion on
+the question under consideration, and as often as he wished. All spoke
+calmly, without eloquence, and without set speeches. They talked upon
+any subject they pleased, as long as they pleased, and when they
+pleased.
+
+The most prominent person in a village was called the sagamore. His
+advice and opinion were generally followed, and he governed the people
+in a very slight manner.
+
+The Indians of several villages were sometimes united together in a
+petty tribe and were ruled by a sachem, or chief.
+
+The chief did not rule over a very large tract of country. Generally
+none of his subjects lived more than eight or ten miles away from him.
+
+He ruled as he pleased, and was not subject to any constitution or court
+of any kind. In fact, he was a leader rather than a ruler. Nevertheless,
+a wise chief never did anything of great importance without first
+consulting the different sagamores of his tribe.
+
+The chief held a little higher position in the tribe than the sagamore
+did in his village. He settled disputes. He held a very rude form of
+court, where justice was given in each case according to its merits. He
+sent and received messengers to and from other tribes.
+
+As several villages were united in a single petty tribe, so also several
+petty tribes were loosely joined together and ruled over by a grand
+sachem.
+
+The different Wampanoag tribes which owed allegiance to Philip and his
+father, Massasoit, were five in number besides the small bands on the
+islands of Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard. The village where the grand
+sachem lived was called by them Pokanoket.
+
+
+
+
+II. PHILIP'S CHILDHOOD HOME
+
+
+Massasoit had several children. The eldest son was named Wamsutta, and
+the second Metacomet. In later years, the English gave them the names of
+Alexander and Philip, which are much easier names for us to pronounce.
+
+We do not know the exact date of Philip's birth, for the Indians kept no
+account of time as we do, nor did they trouble to ask any one his age.
+It is probable, however, that Philip was born before 1620, the year in
+which the Pilgrims settled near the Wampanoags.
+
+Philip spent his boyhood days playing with his brothers and sisters, and
+with the neighbors' children; for although he was the son of a grand
+sachem, he had no special privileges above those of the other children
+around him.
+
+We are apt to think of a prince as a man that does very little work. We
+expect him to attend banquets, to be dressed in military uniform, with a
+beautiful sword at his side and many medals on his breast, to be
+surrounded by servants, and to have everybody bow down to him and stand
+ready to do his bidding.
+
+It was very different with Philip. He lived in no better way than did
+the other members of his tribe. His home was neither better nor worse
+than theirs. His food was of the same quality. His daily life was the
+same. He wore no uniform. He never heard of medals or badges. He had no
+servants. His father differed from the other Indians only in being
+their leader in time of war and in being looked up to whenever the
+chiefs of the tribe held a meeting, or council.
+
+Philip's home was not such as American boys and girls are brought up in.
+There were no toys, no baby carriages, no candy. There were no romps
+with the parents, for the Indians were a quiet, sober people, and rarely
+showed any affection for their children.
+
+Philip's father never played any games with him. In fact, in his younger
+days the boy never received very much attention from his father. He was
+taken care of by his mother. He was never rocked in a cradle, but was
+strapped in a kind of bag made of broad pieces of bark and covered with
+soft fur. Sometimes he was carried in this on his mother's back, as she
+went about her work. Sometimes he was hung up on the branch of a tree.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN BABY]
+
+The little house in which he lived was called a wigwam. It was circular,
+or oval, in shape, and made of barks or mats laid over a framework of
+small poles. These poles were fixed at one end in the ground, and were
+fastened together at the top, forming a framework shaped somewhat like a
+tent.
+
+Two low openings on opposite sides of the wigwam served as doors. These
+were closed with mats when necessary, thus making the place tight and
+warm.
+
+The wigwam had but one room. In the middle of it were a few stones
+which served as a fireplace. There was no chimney, but the smoke passed
+out through an opening at the top of the wigwam.
+
+On one side of the fireplace was a large couch made of rough boards
+raised perhaps a foot above the ground and covered with mats or skins.
+The couch was very wide, so that Philip and the rest of the children
+could lie on it side by side at night.
+
+There was no other furniture in the room. A few baskets were hung on the
+walls ready for use. A few mats were placed here and there as ornaments.
+The dishes that held Philip's food were rude vessels made of baked clay,
+of pieces of bark, of bits of hollowed stone, or of wood.
+
+[Illustration: MOUNT HOPE]
+
+There was very little desire to keep the wigwam neat and tidy. It was
+used for only a few months, and then given up for a new one that was
+built near by. In the summer it was customary to pitch the wigwam in an
+open place. In the winter it was pitched in the thick woods for
+protection from the winds and storms.
+
+Such was the home in which Philip was brought up. It differed but little
+from those of his playmates, for there was no aristocracy among the
+Indians. The place where Massasoit and his family generally lived was
+near the present site of Bristol, on a narrow neck of land projecting
+into Narragansett Bay. It is now called Mount Hope, and is twelve or
+fifteen miles southeast of Providence, Rhode Island.
+
+
+
+
+III. MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+In the early evening, during his boyhood days, Philip delighted to sit
+near the camp fire where the members of his tribe were wont to gather.
+There he eagerly listened to the stories of adventure told by his
+elders, and wished that he was old enough to enter into the sports that
+they so interestingly described.
+
+Although children were not expected to talk in the presence of their
+elders, Philip frequently showed his interest in their stories by
+asking many questions in regard to the places visited by the older
+Indians.
+
+In those days news traveled slowly from one little village to another,
+for there were neither telegraphs nor telephones; no, not even
+railroads. In fact, there were no roads, and even the paths through the
+woods were so little used that it was difficult to find one's way from
+one place to another. The Indians kept no animals of any kind, and
+always traveled from place to place on foot.
+
+One pleasant evening in June, in the year 1620, little Philip noticed
+that there was less general story-telling than usual, and that the
+Indians seemed greatly interested in a long story which one of their
+number was telling. He could not understand the story, but he frequently
+caught the words, "Squanto" and "English." These were new words to him.
+
+The next evening, as Philip and his brother were sitting by the fire,
+they asked their father what had caused the Indians to be so serious in
+their talk, and what the long story was about.
+
+"Squanto has come home," his father replied.
+
+"And who is Squanto?" asked Philip.
+
+Then his father told him a story, which was too long to be repeated
+here. But in brief it was as follows:
+
+Several years before--long, in fact, before Philip was born--a ship had
+come from across the sea. It was larger than any other vessel the
+Indians had ever seen.
+
+The only boats that Philip knew anything about were quite small, and
+were called canoes. They were made either of birch bark fastened over a
+light wooden frame, or of logs that had been hollowed by burning and
+charring.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN IN CANOE]
+
+But the boat from across the sea was many times larger than any of
+theirs--so Massasoit explained to the boys--and had accommodations for a
+great many men. Instead of being pushed along by paddles, it was driven
+by the wind by means of large pieces of cloth stretched across long,
+strong sticks of wood.
+
+The Indians did not go down to the shore, but watched this boat from
+the highlands some distance inland. Finally the vessel stopped and some
+of the men came ashore. The Indians looked at the strangers in
+astonishment. Their skin was of a pale, whitish color, very different
+from that of the Indians, which was of a copper or reddish clay color.
+
+The white men, or the pale-faced men, as Massasoit called them, made
+signs of friendship to the Indians, and after a few minutes persuaded
+them to go down to the shore. There the two peoples traded with each
+other. The Indians gave furs and skins, and received in return beads and
+trinkets of various kinds.
+
+When the vessel sailed away it carried off five Indians who had been
+lured on board and had not been allowed to return to shore. These
+Indians had not been heard from since, and that was fifteen years
+before.
+
+Little Philip's eyes increased in size, and instinctively he clenched
+his fists at the thought of the wrong that had been done his people by
+the palefaces.
+
+His father went on with the story, and told him how the Indians then
+vowed vengeance on the white man; for it was a custom of the Indians to
+punish any person who committed a wrong act towards one of their number.
+
+From time to time, other vessels visited their shores, but no Indian
+could ever be induced to go on board any of them.
+
+Nine years later, another outrage was committed. The palefaces while
+trading with the Indians suddenly seized upon twenty-seven of the
+latter, took them to their vessel, and sailed away with them before
+they could be rescued. Is it any wonder that Philip felt that the whites
+were his natural enemies?
+
+After that time, Massasoit said, the Indians had refused to have any
+dealings with the whites. Whenever a white man's vessel came in sight,
+the Indians prepared to shoot any one that came ashore. And now another
+white man's vessel had arrived on the coast, and several of its crew had
+landed in spite of all that could be done to prevent them.
+
+To the great surprise of Massasoit's men, there was an Indian with these
+palefaces. And that Indian proved to be Squanto, one of the five who had
+been taken away fifteen years before.
+
+This is but a bare outline of what Massasoit told his sons. It seemed to
+the lads like a fairy tale, and for days they talked of nothing but this
+strange story.
+
+
+
+
+IV. PHILIP HEARS OF THE ENGLISH
+
+
+During the following summer young Philip heard many an interesting story
+about the English. Squanto himself came to see Massasoit several times,
+and from him Philip heard the story of his adventures across the sea.
+
+Late in the fall, long before Philip had lost his interest in the
+stories of Squanto, another English vessel arrived on the coast of the
+Indian country.
+
+On the eleventh day of November, 1620, the vessel anchored near Cape
+Cod. Sixteen palefaces came ashore. They did not act like the others who
+had preceded them. They made no effort to become acquainted with the
+Indians, but spent their time in looking around and in examining the
+country.
+
+They found four or five bushels of corn, which had been stored for the
+winter by an Indian, and carried it away to their vessel.
+
+This angered the Indians, and we can well imagine the thoughts that
+passed through the mind of the boy Philip when he heard that the English
+had stolen the corn that belonged to a poor Indian, one of his father's
+friends.
+
+[Illustration: WATCHING THE PALEFACES]
+
+The Indians talked the matter over by their camp fire, and little Philip
+listened to the story as eagerly as he had listened to the story of
+Squanto six months before.
+
+A week or so later, more news came to Mount Hope. The palefaces had
+visited the shore a second time, and on this occasion had stolen a bag
+of beans and some more corn.
+
+How Philip's anger increased as he heard his father talk the matter over
+with the other Indians!
+
+A few days afterwards Philip heard still other news of the English. They
+had come ashore a third time. The Indians had watched them from a
+distance. Finally, when a good opportunity offered itself, thirty or
+forty Indians quietly surrounded the palefaces, and at a given signal
+every one of them yelled at the top of his voice and began to shoot
+arrows at the hated visitors.
+
+For a time it looked as if the palefaces would be driven into the water.
+But soon they fired their guns, and the Indians ran away frightened at
+the noise.
+
+Philip was greatly interested in the description that was given of a
+gun. He had never so much as heard of one before, and he thought it very
+strange that any one should be afraid of little pieces of lead. He could
+not see why it was not as easy to dodge bullets as it was to dodge
+arrows.
+
+A week or two later still further news was brought to Massasoit's
+village. The palefaces had left Cape Cod and had sailed across the bay
+to Patuxet (to which the English gave the name of Plymouth). There they
+had gone ashore and had built some log cabins, evidently with the
+intention of staying for some time.
+
+This was something that the Indians could not understand. Every day some
+of them went to the top of the hill which overlooked the little
+settlement to see what the English were doing. Then they returned to
+Mount Hope with something new to tell about the palefaces, and Philip
+eagerly listened to every story that was related.
+
+Several meetings of the Indians were held during the winter, at which
+Philip was always present, and finally one of their number, whose name
+was Samoset, was sent to Plymouth to ask the English why they had
+settled in this land which belonged, of right, to the red men.
+
+Samoset returned a few days later. He told his story to the Indians
+around the camp fire, little Philip, as usual, paying great attention to
+what was said.
+
+Samoset said that the palefaces had been very kind to him, and had told
+him that they had come to this country to settle, that they wanted to
+live on the most friendly terms with the red men, and that they desired
+to pay not only for the corn and beans which they had taken, but also
+for the land on which they had built their village.
+
+At the close of his story the Indians expressed themselves as satisfied
+with the palefaces, and Philip felt that perhaps the English were not so
+bad as he had thought them to be.
+
+Samoset was then sent to the settlers to tell them that Massasoit and
+some of his friends would like to meet them for a friendly talk about
+many things that might otherwise become a cause of disagreement between
+them. He brought back word that the English eagerly welcomed the
+opportunity to meet the Indians, and had offered to see them on the
+following day.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+V. PHILIP MEETS THE ENGLISH
+
+
+The next day Massasoit and sixty of his warriors visited the English.
+They did not go into the English village, but stopped on the top of the
+hill near by.
+
+Philip was not with them, for at this time he was too young to go so far
+away from home. We can imagine his feelings, however, when he saw his
+father and the warriors start out on their journey.
+
+They were dressed in costumes that would look very strange if seen on
+our streets to-day. Their clothing was made of the raw skin of wild
+animals. Their feet were protected by moccasins made of thin deerskin.
+Each one was tall, erect, and active, with long, coarse, black hair
+falling down his back.
+
+[Illustration: A WARRIOR]
+
+None of them had any physical deformities, for it was the custom of the
+tribe to kill any child that was born deaf, dumb, blind, or lame.
+
+Each one was decked with his personal ornaments. These did not consist
+of gold, silver, diamonds, or any other precious stones so familiar to
+us. The Indians knew nothing about these. Their ornaments consisted of
+ear-rings, nose-rings, bracelets, and necklaces made out of shells or
+fish-bones or shining stones, which were very common in that
+neighborhood.
+
+Their faces were smeared with heavy daubs of paint. Each one had a
+cloak thrown over his shoulders, and he also wore a head-dress made of
+feathers or quills. To Philip it seemed as if he had never seen anything
+so imposing.
+
+We can imagine how eagerly Philip listened to the story that his father
+told when he came back home: how the settlers came out to meet him on
+the hill, and made him a present of three knives, a copper chain, and an
+ear-ring, besides several good things to eat, very different from
+anything he had ever tasted before.
+
+Then Massasoit described the treaty that he had made with the palefaces
+in which the settlers and the Wampanoags had agreed to remain friends
+and to help each other in every way they could. To make the treaty as
+strong as possible, the palefaces had written it down on paper and had
+signed their names to it. The Indians did not know how to read or write.
+That was something that they had never heard of before. But they drew
+rude pictures at the end of the writing and called these pictures their
+names.
+
+Philip never tired listening to the stories about the palefaces. He was
+still too young to be taken to their settlement, but he longed for a
+chance to see them.
+
+Suddenly, one day in the middle of the summer of 1621, about four months
+after the Indians had made their treaty with the whites, six warriors
+came into the little Indian village at Mount Hope with two men, who
+Philip saw were palefaces. They were not so tall as the Indians. They
+were thicker set, and their faces were covered with beards.
+
+Massasoit recognized them immediately, for they were some of the party
+that he had met at Plymouth. They had come on a friendly visit to him,
+and had brought him a red cotton coat and a copper chain. Philip was
+greatly pleased to see the palefaces, of whom he had heard so much. He
+listened to their stories, answered their inquiries in regard to Indian
+life, and learned what he could about their homes and customs.
+
+After this, the settlers called on the Indians many times, and Philip
+soon became very well acquainted with them.
+
+During the next few months several white men came from England and
+settled at Weymouth, a few miles north of Plymouth. These new settlers
+were not so honest as those that had settled at Plymouth. They stole
+from the Indians and otherwise injured them, and caused them to plot
+against all the whites in the country. But before their plans were
+carried out Massasoit was taken sick. The medicine man was called in.
+
+The medicine man was the physician. He had learned the medicinal virtues
+of a few simple herbs. He knew how to bind up wounds in bark with
+certain preparations of leaves, and he could also cure a few fevers. He
+went through many magical ceremonies with howls, roars, and antics of
+various kinds. If the sick man became well, the medicine man took all
+the credit; if the patient died, then the medicine man said that the bad
+spirit had too strong a hold on him.
+
+But the medicine man did not help Massasoit. Philip watched by his
+father's side and saw him grow worse day by day. He remembered how, only
+a few years before, the smallpox had carried away large numbers of the
+Indians, and now he began to think that the days of his father, too,
+were numbered.
+
+But one day a paleface, one of the leaders of the colony at Plymouth,
+came into the Indian village. He sent the medicine man away and tenderly
+nursed Massasoit himself. He gave him medicine, nourished him with
+several little delicacies, and brought him slowly back to health.
+
+Massasoit was so grateful for the kindness shown him that he told the
+palefaces of the Indian plot against them.
+
+The whites at Weymouth were driven away and the palefaces at Plymouth
+continued to live on most excellent terms of friendship with the
+Wampanoags.
+
+In the years that followed, Philip became better acquainted with the
+whites, and while he never loved them, he had great respect for their
+wisdom.
+
+
+
+
+VI. PHILIP'S EDUCATION
+
+
+During the next twenty years many more white men came and settled on or
+near the lands of the Wampanoags.
+
+In the mean time, Philip grew to manhood and received the same education
+that was given to the other young men of his tribe. It was very
+different from the education received by us to-day. The Indians had no
+schools. Philip did not learn his A B C's or the multiplication table.
+He never learned how to read or write. He knew nothing about science,
+and could not even count, or keep track of time.
+
+His education was of a different character, and was intended to make him
+brave, daring, hardy, and able to bear pain; for these things were
+thought by the Indians to be of the greatest importance.
+
+He was taught to undergo the most horrible tortures without a word of
+complaint or a sign of anguish. He would beat his shins and legs with
+sticks, and run prickly briars and brambles into them in order to become
+used to pain. He would run eighty to one hundred miles in one day and
+back in the next two.
+
+When he neared manhood he was blindfolded and taken into the woods far
+from home to a place where he had never been before.
+
+There he was left with nothing but a hatchet, a knife, and a bow and
+arrows. The winter was before him, and he was expected to support
+himself through it. If he was unable to do so, it was better for him to
+die then.
+
+Philip passed the lonely winter far away from home. Many times did he
+wish that he was back in his father's wigwam where he could talk with
+his parents and his brothers and his friends, and know what the
+palefaces were doing.
+
+But he knew that if he should return to his little village before the
+winter was over he would be branded as a coward, and never be
+considered worthy to succeed his father as sachem.
+
+[Illustration: THE YOUNG HUNTER]
+
+What, he, Philip, a prince, afraid? No, no, no! Of course he was not
+afraid. What was there to be afraid of? Had he not always lived in the
+woods? Still, he was a little lonely, and once in a while he wanted some
+one to talk with.
+
+So Philip went to work with a will. With his hatchet he cut down some
+small trees, made them into poles, and placed one end of them in the
+ground. With his knife he cut some bark from the trees and laid it over
+the poles so that he had a fairly comfortable shelter from the storms
+and winds which he knew would soon surely come. Then he spent several
+days in hunting birds and wild game in the forest. With his bow and
+arrows he shot enough to support himself through the winter.
+
+Many an adventure did he have. Many a time did he lie down at night
+without having tasted food during the whole livelong day. Many a savage
+beast did he see, and on several occasions he climbed trees, or crawled
+into caves, or ran as fast as he could, to get out of their way.
+
+But he had a strong will. He knew that the son of the grand sachem of
+the Wampanoags could do anything that any other Indian had done. And so
+he passed the long, cold winter, bravely and without complaining.
+
+In the spring, when his father and friends came after him, they found
+him well and strong. His winter's work had made him healthy and rugged.
+He was taken home, and a feast was prepared in honor of Massasoit's son
+who had returned to his home stronger than when he had gone away the
+fall before.
+
+During the next two moons--for the Indians counted by moons and not by
+months as we do--Philip led an idle life. He did no work of any kind. He
+was taking his vacation after the hard winter life he had led alone in
+the woods.
+
+But his education was not yet finished. His body had been made strong.
+It was next necessary to strengthen his constitution against the evil
+effects of poison. He again went into the forest, and daily found
+poisonous and bitter herbs and roots. These he bruised and put the
+juices into water, which he drank.
+
+Then he drank other juices which acted as antidotes and prevented his
+sickness or death. He did this day after day until his constitution
+became used to the poisons, and he was able to drink them freely without
+any harm coming to him.
+
+Then he went home. The people sang and danced and gave him another great
+feast. He was now considered a man and ready to marry and have a wigwam
+of his own.
+
+The wedding ceremony was extremely simple. There were no presents, no
+flowers, no guests, no ceremony, no banquet. Philip simply asked a
+certain woman to come and live with him. She came and was thereafter his
+wife, or squaw, as the Indians called her.
+
+We have no record of the date of his marriage, for the Indians kept no
+such records. We only know that it took place soon after his return from
+his battle with poisons in the woods.
+
+
+
+
+VII. PHILIP'S DAILY LIFE
+
+
+We should consider the daily life of Philip very monotonous. It was the
+same, day by day, year in and year out, with very little change. The
+little village where he lived contained fewer than one hundred
+inhabitants. Everybody was thoroughly acquainted with everybody else.
+
+There was no society such as we have to-day. Philip's squaw did not
+dress herself up in the afternoon, and make calls on the other squaws.
+If she wished to talk with them she went where they were, whether it was
+morning, afternoon, or evening.
+
+There were no parties, no receptions, no theaters, no art museums, no
+libraries, no books, no music, no fireworks, no holidays, no Sabbath.
+The Indians believed in a good and a bad spirit, but they had no
+churches or temples or service or worship or priests.
+
+So we cannot think of Philip sitting in the best pew in church, and
+listening to a grand sermon, preached by the most famous minister in the
+country. Philip knew nothing of sermons.
+
+He played no games that instructed his mind. He cared for only such
+games as would strengthen his body, increase his power of endurance, or
+develop his muscle or his craftiness. With the other Indians he played
+football, tossed quoits, wrestled, ran, and jumped.
+
+Occasionally he engaged with them in the war dance. This was performed
+in a very solemn manner. It represented a war campaign, or a sham
+battle, as we say. First, the Indians came together from different
+directions. Then they marched forward stealthily and quietly, lay in
+ambush, awaited the coming of the enemy, suddenly jumped out and rushed
+upon them, slaughtered them, retreated, and finally went home. The dance
+ended with the reception at home, and the torturing and killing of the
+prisoners.
+
+These were his amusements. His occupations were two in number: hunting
+and fishing.
+
+In the fall of the year, and again in the spring, he spent about three
+months in hunting. In company with his brother or some close friend, he
+went in search of a supply of meat for the use of the family, and of
+skins to sell to the white men or to use for clothing.
+
+After reaching the hunting-grounds, they built a big wigwam where they
+stayed at night. There also they stored the skins of the animals they
+had captured.
+
+Many stories might be told of the exciting adventures they had with
+bears and wolves. The woods of New England contained many moose and
+other wild animals, and generally Philip returned to his little village
+with meat enough to last all winter. Frequently he brought home as many
+as one hundred beaver skins.
+
+But Philip, like others, had bad luck sometimes. Now and then he lost
+his way in the woods, and on one or two occasions the raft on which he
+was taking his skins across the river upset and the results of his
+winter's labor were lost.
+
+He captured his game by shooting or snaring, or by catching it in
+pitfalls. When the hunting season was over he spent his time in fishing.
+Generally he caught his fish in nets, although occasionally he used a
+hook and line.
+
+When not engaged in hunting or fishing, or attending a meeting of Indian
+princes, he was generally to be found near his wigwam, asleep or
+watching his squaw at work.
+
+All the work around the wigwam was done by his wife or squaw. According
+to the Indian view she was his slave. She covered and lined the wigwam,
+plaited the mats and baskets, planted, tended, and harvested the corn
+and vegetables, cooked the food, ate the leavings, and slept on the
+coldest side of the wigwam.
+
+[Illustration: SQUAWS AT WORK]
+
+Many Indians did not care very much for their squaws, and made their
+lives miserable by treating them badly, and showing them no sympathy nor
+love in any way whatever. But we are told that Philip was better than
+the other Indians in this respect. He loved his wife and treated her as
+a companion instead of as a slave.
+
+Philip had no pots and kettles like ours. His wife roasted his meat by
+placing it on the point of a stake. She broiled it by laying it on hot
+coals or hot stones. She boiled it in rude vessels made of stone, earth,
+or wood, and heated the water by throwing hot stones into it.
+
+Philip's only garden tool was a hoe, made of clam shells or of a moose's
+shoulder-blade fastened to a wooden handle. He also had a rude axe or
+hatchet made of a piece of stone, sharpened by being scraped on another
+stone, and tied to a wooden handle. His arrows and spears were tipped
+with bone or with triangular pieces of flint. These were all home-made,
+for Philip, like other Indians, was obliged to make his own hatchets and
+arrows.
+
+Finally, Philip never went to the store to buy things to be used at
+home, for the Indians kept no stores. His wife raised the corn,
+squashes, and pumpkins, and he caught his own fish and game. These, with
+nuts, roots, and berries, gave him all the food he needed.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. PHILIP'S RELATIONS WITH THE ENGLISH
+
+
+Such was the daily life of Philip year after year, with but little
+change. Occasionally he met the palefaces in the woods or at his
+father's village. Now and then he went to Plymouth and traded with them.
+Several of them he considered to be his strong personal friends.
+
+We have already seen how greatly interested he was in his boyhood days
+at the coming of the white men and how friendly he felt toward them at
+that time. He, his father, and the other Wampanoags continued to remain
+on friendly terms with the English, although several other Indian tribes
+did not.
+
+Between the years 1628 and 1640 many white people settled forty or fifty
+miles north of Plymouth, in what is now Boston and Salem, and other
+cities and towns near Massachusetts Bay.
+
+Others settled inland on the Connecticut River, near the present
+boundary line between Massachusetts and Connecticut, about seventy-five
+miles west from Mount Hope, the home of Philip. Others settled at
+Providence, and still others on the island of Rhode Island, fifteen to
+twenty miles south of Mount Hope.
+
+The settlers on the Connecticut had trouble with the Pequots, a tribe of
+Indians living to the west of the Wampanoags, and in the war that
+followed, all the Pequots were killed. The whites also had trouble with
+the Narragansetts, who lived near Providence, outbreaks occurring every
+year or two for several years.
+
+During these years Philip and his father did nothing to injure the
+settlers in any way. They refused to aid the other Indians in their wars
+with the English, preferring to remain faithful to their early treaty
+with the whites; and the whites remained on the most friendly terms with
+them.
+
+Philip knew nothing of the Christian religion. Several attempts were
+made by the whites to convert the Indians to Christianity. In 1646, John
+Eliot translated the Bible into the Indian language, taught the Indians
+the English habits of industry and agriculture, and established near
+Boston two towns composed entirely of converted Indians.
+
+At the same time, Thomas Mayhew preached to the Wampanoags on Martha's
+Vineyard, and there converted a great many. By the year 1675, four
+thousand Indians had been converted to Christianity.
+
+But the missionaries were not successful with Philip and the Wampanoags
+at Mount Hope. They utterly refused to listen to the preachers. They
+preferred their former mode of life, and there were several good reasons
+for this preference, as they thought.
+
+Philip noticed that many white men who called themselves Christians were
+in the habit of stealing from the red men, and cheating them whenever
+they could. He could not see that the Christian religion made them more
+happy, more honest, or better than he was.
+
+Again, he noticed that, as soon as the Indians were converted, they left
+their former life and companions and joined themselves to the English.
+This tended to lessen the control of the chiefs over their tribes, and
+so reduced their power. Thus he saw that a great deal might be lost by
+changing his religion, or by urging his followers to change theirs.
+
+Nevertheless, Massasoit and his sons remained strong friends to the
+Plymouth people until 1661, when Massasoit died, being about eighty
+years of age.
+
+
+
+
+IX. PHILIP BECOMES GRAND SACHEM
+
+
+According to the custom of the Indians, Wamsutta, the eldest son of
+Massasoit, succeeded his father as grand sachem of the Wampanoags.
+
+Almost his first act was to go to Plymouth, where he made some requests
+of the settlers. These were granted. Then he asked for an English name,
+and was given the name of Alexander.
+
+He was so much pleased with this name that he asked for an English name
+for his younger brother, Metacomet. The English gave him the name of
+Philip, by which name we have been calling him in our account of his
+life.
+
+A few days later, ten armed men suddenly appeared at the place where
+Wamsutta and several of his followers were holding a feast, and arrested
+them all. Wamsutta was taken to Plymouth immediately, and charged with
+plotting with the Narragansetts against the English.
+
+Being seized by force on their own grounds, and compelled to go to
+Plymouth to answer charges based on rumor, was a new, experience for the
+Wampanoags. It was very different from the friendly manner in which they
+had been treated formerly.
+
+The English treated Wamsutta very well at Plymouth. They could prove
+nothing against him, and hence they soon let him go. On his way home he
+died.
+
+As Wamsutta left no children, he was succeeded by his brother Philip.
+There was no ceremony of crowning, no procession, no speeches. In fact,
+there was no crown at all; nor was there any ceremony of any kind. The
+other Indians merely obeyed Philip just as they had formerly obeyed his
+father and his brother.
+
+Philip and all the members of the Wampanoag tribe believed that
+Wamsutta's death was due to poison which had been given him by the
+whites when he was at Plymouth. According to the belief and custom of
+the Indians, it was Philip's duty to take vengeance on those who had
+caused his brother's death.
+
+Still, Philip made no attempt to injure the whites in any way. But the
+whites became suspicious, probably because they felt that they had done
+wrong; and very soon they summoned Philip to Plymouth to answer a charge
+of plotting against them.
+
+Philip acted very honorably in the matter. Instead of hiding in the
+forest, as he might easily have done, he went to Plymouth. There he had
+a long talk with the whites. He denied that he had plotted against them.
+He showed them that it was against his own interests to have any trouble
+with them, and as proof of his good intentions toward them, he offered
+to leave his next younger brother with them as a hostage.
+
+He agreed to continue the treaty that his father had made forty years
+before. He went further, and acknowledged himself to be a faithful
+subject of the King of England, and promised not to make war on any
+Indian tribe unless the English first gave their consent.
+
+For several years Philip was grand sachem of the Wampanoags and kept
+this treaty with great faithfulness. During this time his duties were
+similar to those which his father had had, and his life was uneventful.
+He was consulted by the other sachems of the tribe, and his advice was
+generally followed by them.
+
+Like his father, the good Massasoit, he was inclined to be conservative;
+that is, he did not like to change the established order of things. He
+was very much liked by the Indians, who felt that he tried to treat them
+all honestly and fairly.
+
+He went to Plymouth very frequently, to visit the whites and to trade
+with them. And, likewise, the whites frequently came to Mount Hope to
+see him.
+
+The relations between the whites and the Indians were such that it was
+perfectly safe for a white man to go anywhere among the Wampanoags
+unarmed. This is something that cannot be said of any other Indian tribe
+in the colonial days. The Indians, acting under orders from King Philip,
+treated the whites honestly and fairly. In fact, there was a feeling of
+great friendship between the whites and the Indians.
+
+
+
+
+X. PHILIP'S TROUBLES WITH THE WHITES
+
+
+Ten years passed by peacefully, except for one little trouble, which
+occurred in 1667, six years after Philip became sachem. An Indian told
+the people at Plymouth that Philip had said that he wished the Dutch
+would beat the English in the war which was then being carried on
+between Holland and England.
+
+The Plymouth people were very much surprised at this, and immediately
+called Philip to account. But he denied ever making any such statement,
+and offered to surrender all his arms to the English in order to show
+that he had no hostile designs against them. This satisfied the English.
+Everything went on quietly until 1671, when troubles between the two
+races finally began to arise.
+
+In that year Philip complained that the English were not living up to
+their agreement which they had made with him ten years before. At the
+request of the people of Plymouth, Philip went to Taunton, a village
+near his hunting-grounds, and talked matters over with them.
+
+He was accompanied by a band of warriors armed to the teeth and painted.
+The meeting was held in the little village church. Philip and his
+Indians sat on one side of the room and the English on the other.
+
+A man from Boston, who was thought to be friendly to both parties, was
+chosen to preside over the meeting. Then the Indians and the settlers
+made speeches, one after the other, just as is done in meetings to-day.
+
+Philip admitted that lately he had begun to prepare for war, and also
+that some of his Indians had not treated the whites justly. But he also
+showed that the English were arming themselves, and that many of them
+had cheated the Indians when dealing with them.
+
+Philip said that he preferred peace to war, and had only armed his
+warriors in self-defense. Finally, it was decided to make a new treaty.
+
+Here is a copy of the new treaty as it was drawn up. Notice the quaint
+way of expressing the ideas, and also, that many words are not spelled
+as we spell them to-day. Notice, too, how one-sided the treaty is, and
+that it is signed only by Philip and the Indians.
+
+            COPY OF THE TREATY MADE AT TAUNTON, APRIL 10, 1671.
+
+     Whereas my Father, my Brother, and my self have formerly submitted
+     our selves and our people unto the Kings Majesty of England, and
+     this Colony of New-Plymouth, by solemn Covenant under our Hand, but
+     I having of late through my indiscretion, and the naughtiness of my
+     heart, violated and broken this my Covenant with my friends by
+     taking up arms, with evill intent against them, and that
+     groundlessly; I being now deeply sensible of my unfaithfulness and
+     folly, do desire at this time solemnly to renew my Covenant with my
+     ancient Friends and my Father's friends above mentioned; and doe
+     desire this may testifie to the world against me, if ever I shall
+     again fail in my faithfulness towards them (that I have now and at
+     all times found so kind to me) or any other of the English
+     colonyes; and as a reall Pledge of my true Intentions, for the
+     future to be faithful and friendly, I doe freely ingage to resign
+     up unto the Government of New-Plymouth, all my English Armes to be
+     kept by them for their security, so long as they shall see reason.
+     For true performance of the Premises I have hereunto set my hand
+     together with the rest of my council.
+
+   In the presence of   The Mark of Philip,
+                              Chief Sachem of Pokanoket
+
+   William Davis.       The Mark of Tavoser.
+
+   William Hudson.     ---- ---- Capt. Wisposke.
+
+   Thomas Brattle.     ---- ---- Woonkaponehunt.
+
+                       ---- ---- Nimrod.
+
+
+
+But Philip doubted the sincerity of the English. He hesitated to give up
+his arms. Then the settlers ordered him to come to Plymouth and explain
+why.
+
+Instead of obeying, he went to Boston and complained there of the
+treatment he had received. He said that his father, his brother, and
+himself had made treaties of friendship with the English which the
+latter were trying to turn into treaties of subjection. He said he was a
+subject of the King of England, but not of the colony of Plymouth, and
+he saw no reason why the people of Plymouth should try to treat him as a
+subject.
+
+The people of Massachusetts again made peace between Philip and the
+settlers at Plymouth. But it could not long continue, for each side had
+now become thoroughly suspicious of the other.
+
+In 1674, an Indian reported to the settlers that Philip was trying to
+get the sachems of New England to wage war on the whites. A few days
+later, that Indian's dead body was found in a lake. The English arrested
+three Indians and tried them for the murder. They were found guilty and
+were executed, although the evidence against them was of such a
+character that it would not have been admitted in a court of justice
+against a white man.
+
+
+
+
+XI. PHILIP AND THE INDIAN COUNCILS
+
+
+Philip thought the matter over. He felt that the English had done the
+Indians great injustice.
+
+In the first place, the land had originally belonged to the Indians. It
+was not of great value to them, for they used it mainly for hunting
+purposes. So they had very willingly parted with a few acres to the
+English in return for some trinkets of very little value--such as a
+jack-knife, or a few glass beads, or little bells, or a blanket.
+
+Then the English had forbidden the Indian to sell his land to any white
+man. He was allowed to sell only to the colonial government. This was
+done in order to protect him from white men who wanted to cheat him; but
+Philip only saw that it prevented his giving away something of little
+value to himself, and getting something he wanted in return.
+
+Before the English came, the woods were full of game and the streams
+were full of fish. Now Philip noticed that the game was going from the
+woods and the fish from the rivers. He felt that the Indians were
+becoming poorer and the English were getting richer.
+
+Only the poorer lands were owned by the Indians now. All the best were
+in the hands of the white men.
+
+Philip was also tired of the airs of superiority assumed by the whites.
+They looked upon the Indians as fit only for servants and slaves. He
+thought that his people were as good as the whites. He felt that the
+bonds of love and sympathy between the two races had been broken.
+
+In spite of his many complaints and requests, the English had failed to
+punish unprincipled white men who had done wrong to the Indians.
+
+Finally, those Indians who had been converted to Christianity had left
+their old tribes and their former modes of life. This had weakened the
+power of the Indians, and Philip began to think that the English were
+Christianizing the Indians simply for the purpose of getting control of
+their lands.
+
+Philip felt that the question was too deep a one for him to solve. He
+called the sachems of the Wampanoags together, and talked the matter
+over with them. Several meetings were held, and every member expressed
+himself on the subject very freely.
+
+The question then arose, what should they do? It very soon became
+evident that two opposite opinions were held.
+
+It was not the custom of the Indians to vote on any questions that were
+discussed at their meetings. They talked the matter over and then
+adopted the plan that most of them thought was best. But at this time
+they were unable to decide what to do in order to get back that which
+they had lost, and how to prevent losing any more. And so they kept on
+talking over plans.
+
+Fifty-five years of peace and friendship with the English had resulted
+in giving the white men all the land of any value, while the Wampanoags
+were decreasing in numbers and each year were finding it more and more
+difficult to live.
+
+The young warriors urged immediate action. They wanted war, and wanted
+it then, and desired to keep it up until the English should be driven
+out of the country.
+
+Philip was opposed to this. He knew how strong the English were, and
+that it would be impossible to drive them out. He saw that the time had
+gone by when the English could be expelled from the country. He threw
+his influence with the older warriors, and for a while succeeded in
+holding the younger men in check. He felt that the Indians could never
+be successful in a war with the English when the tribe owned only thirty
+guns and had no provisions laid aside to carry them through the war.
+
+
+
+
+XII. KING PHILIP'S WAR
+
+
+Philip did his best to keep at peace with the English. For a while he
+succeeded. But his young warriors began to steal hogs and cattle
+belonging to the settlers, and on one pleasant Sunday in June, 1675,
+when the people were at church, eight young Indians burned a few houses
+in the village of Swansea, the nearest town to the Wampanoag
+headquarters at Mount Hope. The whites immediately raised a few troops,
+marched after the Indians, and had a little skirmish with them.
+
+Philip was not with his warriors at the time. The attack on the whites
+had been made against his express orders. When he heard that the Indians
+and settlers had really had a battle, he wept from sorrow, something
+which an Indian rarely does.
+
+Everything seemed to go wrong. He tried to make peace with the whites,
+but they would not listen to him. The young warriors no longer paid any
+attention to what he said. They went on destroying property and killing
+cattle.
+
+After leaving Swansea, they went to Taunton and Middleboro, where they
+burned several houses and killed a few persons. But troops soon arrived
+from Boston and Plymouth, and in a few days the Indians were driven back
+to their homes at Mount Hope.
+
+The English hurried on after them, and the war that followed is known in
+history as King Philip's War.
+
+Philip and the Indians swam across Narragansett Bay and went to some of
+their friends in the Connecticut Valley. There they obtained the help of
+the Nipmucks, who had never been very friendly towards the English.
+
+We do not know where Philip was during the war. He knew that he would be
+held responsible for it, although he had done everything in his power to
+prevent it. For a year the war was carried on, one hundred miles away
+from his home, and never once was he known to have been connected with
+any fighting, nor was he even seen by the English during that time. Some
+of them thought that he was directing the war, but really it was carried
+on by other tribes of Indians that had not been very friendly towards
+the whites. The Wampanoags seem to have had very little connection with
+the war.
+
+The Indians attacked the English towns in the Connecticut Valley, and
+the more exposed places on the frontier of the colony where the people
+were few and scattered.
+
+No battle was fought in the open field. The Indians did not fight in
+that way. They secretly surrounded a town, rushed in from all sides,
+killed as many people as possible, took what property they could carry
+away, and burned all that remained.
+
+They knew all the paths in the forests, swamps, and thickets. They were
+fast runners, and went rapidly from town to town.
+
+Their favorite method of fighting was in an ambuscade. That was
+something peculiar to the Indians. The English had never heard of that
+way of fighting before they came to America. The Indians would lie down
+flat on the ground or stand behind trees or in a bush or thicket. When
+the enemy came along with no suspicion that any one was near, the
+Indians suddenly gave a yell and fired their arrows or guns at them.
+This would startle them and generally cause them to run away.
+
+[Illustration: HOUSE PROTECTED BY PALISADES]
+
+The war was one of the most dreadful in the history of our country. A
+farmer left his home in the morning not knowing whether he would ever
+see his wife and children again. His gun was always in his hand.
+Laborers were cut off in the field. Reapers, millers, women at home, and
+people on their way to and from church were killed.
+
+Nearly every town in the Connecticut Valley was destroyed by the
+Indians, and the people suffered terribly. The Indians were very
+successful during the first year of the war. They lost but few warriors
+and did an immense amount of injury to the whites. This caused the young
+warriors to believe that Philip and the old warriors were wrong, and
+that it was really possible for them to drive the English from the
+country.
+
+
+
+
+XIII. THE LAST DAYS OF PHILIP
+
+
+During the winter there was very little fighting. In the spring the
+Indians did not fight with any spirit. They had begun to get tired of
+the war. Many wished for peace. The Narragansetts who had been helping
+in the war had suffered a terrible defeat from the English.
+
+The English began to understand better the Indian method of fighting.
+They attacked the Indians wherever they could find them. They surprised
+several large forces of Indians in different places. Then it began to
+look as if Philip and the old warriors were right and the young warriors
+were wrong.
+
+Several sachems had been killed. The Indians had no stores of corn. The
+English tore up every field that the Indians planted. Finally, the
+Indians gave up hope. They were being starved out. During the summer of
+1676, large numbers of them surrendered to the whites.
+
+Philip was not seen from the time he swam across Narragansett Bay until
+in July, 1676, when he returned to his old home at Mount Hope. His wife
+and son had been captured earlier in the spring, and he knew that the
+cause of the Indians was lost.
+
+He wanted to see his old home once more, the place where he had lived
+for sixty years, but which he felt he was now going to lose forever. We
+can see him as he returned to his home, now desolated by war, his wigwam
+destroyed, his cornfield trodden down, his family taken from him, his
+friends taken captive in the war. He felt that the war was wrong, that
+his young warriors had been too hasty in starting it without making
+proper preparations for it. He looked into the future. It seemed very
+dark to him.
+
+The war indeed was nearly over. The Wampanoags were talking about
+surrendering. Philip knew that surrender meant death for him. He refused
+even to think of it. When one of his warriors suggested it to him he
+killed him on the spot.
+
+The English soon learned that Philip had returned to his old home. They
+surrounded him. On the twelfth day of August, 1676, he was shot in an
+ambuscade by the brother of the Indian he had killed for suggesting that
+he surrender.
+
+And now, see how barbarous the English settlers could be. They cut off
+his hands and quartered his body, leaving it to decay on four trees.
+They carried his head to Plymouth, and placed it on the end of a pole.
+Then they appointed a public day of thanksgiving.
+
+Philip's wife and children were taken to the Bermudas and sold as
+slaves, in common with the other Indians captured in the war. Thus the
+Wampanoag tribe of Indians came to an end.
+
+Philip was unjustly blamed by the Plymouth people for starting the war.
+They thought that he was in league with several other tribes in New
+England and New York, and that he intended to drive out the English if
+he could. That was why they fought so desperately, and at the end of the
+war removed the remnants of the tribe from New England. It is true that
+the Indians would have been obliged to move in time. Philip undoubtedly
+saw that, but he believed that peace was best and he urged it on his
+followers. The English did not know this, and the result was that Philip
+was held responsible for a war which he had opposed from the outset.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF
+
+PONTIAC
+
+BY
+
+FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF PONTIAC
+
+
+
+
+I. THE MEETING OF PONTIAC AND THE ENGLISH
+
+
+Though the French were still fighting stubbornly at sea, the French war
+was over in America. Canada had been surrendered to the British, and
+England's banners waved over Quebec. Yet the tidings of defeat had not
+reached the French garrisons on the Great Lakes.
+
+In the fall of 1760 Major Robert Rogers, with two hundred British
+rangers, set out in fifteen whale boats, to carry to the interior the
+news of the surrender and to take possession of the French forts on the
+lakes.
+
+This was a somewhat dangerous task. For, although no resistance was to
+be feared from the French, the savages who were in league with them
+could not be counted on to understand or believe the changed state of
+affairs. Indeed, it was doubtful if they would even allow the British a
+hearing before attacking them.
+
+Rogers and his men, however, coasted along the shores of Lake Erie
+without adventure until early in November. Then the weather became so
+stormy and the lake so rough that the commander decided to go ashore and
+camp in the forest until the tempest had passed.
+
+The rangers were glad to feel the solid earth under their feet and to
+find shelter from the driving wind and rain. Nevertheless, they soon
+realized that the forest was not without its dangers.
+
+They had not been long ashore when a large band of Indians entered the
+camp. These Indians said that Pontiac, chief of the Ottawas, had sent
+them before him to demand of the Englishmen how they dared to come into
+his country without his permission.
+
+Before nightfall the famous warrior himself stood in the presence of the
+English commander and his officers and spoke in this fashion:
+"Englishmen, I am Pontiac, greatest councilor and warrior of the
+Ottawas. This land belongs to my people. You are the enemies of my
+people. You are the enemies of our brothers, the French. Why do you
+bring armed warriors into my country without asking my consent? You can
+not go farther until Pontiac leaves your path."
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC AND ROGERS]
+
+To this haughty speech Rogers answered: "Brother, we come to tell you
+that the war is over. Our mighty English warriors have made your French
+brothers shake with fear. We have slain their war chiefs; we have taken
+their strong villages. They have begged us for mercy. They have promised
+to be the dutiful and obedient children of the English king if we will
+lay down the hatchet and fight against them no more. They have given us
+their guns, their forts, and all the land of Canada. I have come into
+your country to take Detroit. I shall not fight with your brothers, the
+French; I shall not shoot them. I shall show their commander a paper and
+he will pull down his flag and he and his men will come out of the fort
+and give me their guns. Then I shall go in with my men and put up my
+flag.
+
+"The English king is terrible in war. He could punish the Indians and
+make them cry for mercy, as he has the French. But he is kind and offers
+to his red children the chain of friendship. If you accept it he is
+ready to shut his eyes to the mischief the French have put you up to in
+the past, and to protect you with his strong arm."
+
+Pontiac listened gravely to every word the white man spoke. But his dark
+face gave no token of what was passing in his mind. Now, Indians despise
+rashness, and it is their custom to deliberate over night before
+answering any important question. So, with the dignity of one who knows
+no fear and craves no favor, the greatest councilor of the Ottawas
+replied simply: "Englishmen, I shall stand in your path till morning. In
+the meantime if your warriors are cold or hungry the hands of my people
+are open to you." Then he and his chiefs withdrew, and slipped silently
+back through the dripping forest to their camp.
+
+The English rangers slept with their guns at hand that night. They knew
+the pride and might and treachery of Pontiac, and they feared him. They
+felt as if they were in a trap, with the raging sea before them and the
+forest alive with pitiless savages behind.
+
+But they need have had no fear, for the great chief thought not of
+massacre that night. He thought of the English who stood ready to avenge
+any harm done to their brothers; of his own race dependent on the white
+men for rum, for wampum, for guns and powder and bullets. Clearly the
+Indians must have friends among the palefaces. The French were their
+"brothers." They had given them presents, had married their maidens, had
+traded, hunted, and gone to battle with them. The English were their
+foes. But they were many and strong. They had beaten the French and
+taken their guns. The red men must let their hatred sleep for awhile.
+They would smoke the pipe of peace with the English, and the English
+would give them presents: tobacco and rum, guns and powder.
+
+[Illustration: WAMPUM]
+
+Having reached this conclusion, Pontiac and his chiefs returned to
+Rogers's camp on the following morning. There they smoked the calumet
+with the English and exchanged presents and promises of kindness and
+friendship. The men who had met as enemies parted as friends.
+
+Years later, when British armies were marching against Indians whose
+tomahawks were red with English blood, Pontiac's faith in the friendship
+of Rogers remained unshaken. The latter sent to the chief a bottle of
+rum. When advised not to drink it lest it should contain poison, Pontiac
+replied: "I did not save from death on the shores of Lake Erie a man who
+would to-day poison me," and he drained the bottle without hesitation.
+
+[Illustration: CALUMET]
+
+Though a single Indian and a single Englishman could thus overcome their
+distrust for each other, the feelings of the two races could not be so
+easily altered. The Indians looked upon the English as cruel robbers,
+whose object was to drive them from their homes and possess their lands.
+They thought of them as enemies too powerful to be withstood by open
+force and therefore to be met only with cunning and deception. Many of
+the English looked upon the savages as ignorant, filthy, and treacherous
+beings, little better than wild beasts, and thought that the world would
+be better off without them. Yet for the present both were glad to be at
+peace.
+
+The Indians found that Major Rogers had spoken truly about Detroit. When
+they saw the large French garrison yield without resistance they were
+filled with wonder, and said to one another: "These English are a
+terrible people. It is well we have made friends with them."
+
+By "making friends" with the English, the Indians had no notion of
+accepting them as masters. The French had seemed pleasant neighbors and
+valuable friends. When they occupied the fort the Indians had always
+found a warm welcome there. Their chiefs had been treated with great
+pomp and ceremony. They had received rich presents and great promises.
+They expected the English to show them the same consideration. But they
+were disappointed. The new masters of the fort had little patience with
+the Indian idlers, who loafed about at the most inconvenient times in
+the most inconvenient places, always begging, and often sullen and
+insolent. They frequently ordered them in no mild terms to be off. The
+chiefs received cold looks and short answers where they had looked for
+flattery and presents.
+
+The Indians resented the conduct of the English bitterly, and when
+Pontiac learned that they claimed the lands of his tribe, he said within
+himself: "The hatred of the Ottawas has slept long enough. It is time
+for it to wake and destroy these British who treat the red man as if he
+had no right to the land where he was born."
+
+
+
+
+II. PONTIAC'S CHILDHOOD
+
+
+We love our country principally because of the political freedom its
+government allows us. As we study its history, the lives of its heroes,
+and the struggles they have made for the liberties we enjoy, our
+patriotism grows stronger.
+
+Pontiac loved his country, too, but in a much simpler and more personal
+way, as you will understand when you have learned about the proud
+chieftain's boyhood and youth.
+
+[Illustration: SQUAW WITH PAPPOOSE]
+
+The birds scarcely know the forest so well as he did. When he was a tiny
+baby,--a fat, brown, little pappoose,--his mother used to bundle him up
+in skins, strap him to a board, and carry him on her back when she went
+to gather the bark of the young basswood tree for twine. As the strong
+young squaw sped along the narrow path, soft and springing to her
+moccasined feet with its depth of dried pine needles, the baby on her
+back was well content. Even if he felt cross and fretful the regular
+motion pleased him; the cool dim green of the forest rested him; the
+sweet smell of the pines soothed him; and the gentle murmur of the wind
+in the tree tops soon lulled him to sleep.
+
+When the mother clambered over a large tree trunk that had fallen across
+the path and the little pappoose was jolted wide awake, he did not cry.
+His beady black eyes followed every stray sunbeam and every bounding
+rabbit, or chance bird with wonder and delight. When his mother went to
+work she placed his rude cradle beside a tree where he could look on,
+out of harm's way. He was very little trouble, and she always took him
+with her when she went to get cedar bark, to gather rushes for mats and
+herbs for dyes, to pick up fagots for the fire, or to get sap from the
+sugar tree. So it happened that when he grew up Pontiac could not
+remember a time when the dark forest did not seem like home to him.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN SQUAW AT WORK]
+
+As soon as he was old enough to understand words, he heard his mother
+laughing with her neighbors about the men in the village who stayed
+about their wigwams like women. Now, he thought that a wigwam or bark
+lodge was a very pleasant place. The small, dark, oven-shaped room,
+smoky and foul with the smell of fish and dirt, was home to him--the mud
+floor, worn smooth and hard with use, was strewn with mats and skins
+which served for chairs and beds. There was a fireplace in the center,
+and over it a rack on which smoked fish hung, well out of the reach of
+the wolf-like dogs that lay about gnawing at old bones. It was usually
+dry in wet weather, warm in cold weather, and cool when the sun was hot.
+It was where he went for food when he was hungry; it was where he slept
+on soft buffalo robes and bear skins when he was tired; it was where he
+heard good stories, and, best of all, it was where his mother spent most
+of her time.
+
+But before Pontiac was many years old he knew that the wigwam was the
+place for women and children, and that it was a shame for a man not to
+follow the deer through the forest, and go upon the warpath. He saw that
+if a man stayed at home and loved ease and comfort his squaw would scold
+him with a shrill tongue. But if he went off to hunt, it was different.
+Then, when he came home for a short time, he might lounge on a bear skin
+while his squaw worked hard to make him happy, cooking his meals,
+fetching clear water from the spring, and dressing the skins he had
+brought from the hunt.
+
+Pontiac liked to watch his mother while she stood weaving the wet rushes
+into mats to cover the lodge in summer, or while she sat on the floor
+with her feet crossed under her, making baskets out of sweet grass or
+embroidering with brightly dyed porcupine quills. But if he showed his
+pleasure or offered to help her, she looked stern and shook her head,
+saying, "Go out into the field and run; then you will be swift when you
+are a man;" or "go into the forest and shoot rabbits with your little
+bow and arrow, so that you may one day be a great hunter like your
+father."
+
+All this made little Pontiac feel that the great fields and forests were
+his--his to find his pleasure in while he was a boy; his to find his
+work in when he should become a man.
+
+He learned, too, that his very life depended on the forests he loved. He
+could never forget the cruel winter days when he had asked his mother
+again and again for fish and meat, and she had told him to be still and
+wait till his father brought meat from the forest. And he had waited
+there long with his hollow-eyed mother, crouching before the feeble
+fire, starving with hunger. He had strained his ears toward the great
+white forest only to hear the wail of the winds and the howl of the
+wolves. But at last the yelp of the dogs was sure to be heard, and then
+the half-frozen hunters would appear, dragging the deer over the crusted
+snow.
+
+
+
+
+III. PONTIAC'S EDUCATION
+
+
+Pontiac's father was a war chief. But it did not follow that therefore
+Pontiac would be a war chief. He would have to prove himself strong and
+brave, a good hunter and a good warrior, or his tribe would choose some
+more able leader.
+
+Pontiac, like most small boys, took his father for his pattern. His
+ambition was to be like him. But he was told early, "Be a good Indian.
+Be a good Ottawan. Be true to your tribe. Be a strong man and help your
+people. But don't think about being chief. The greatest brave must be
+chief of the Ottawas."
+
+Yet, Indians love glory and perhaps in the bottom of their hearts
+Pontiac's father and mother hoped that he would one day be a chieftain.
+At any rate they did all they could to train him to be a worthy Indian.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WARRIOR]
+
+They were sometimes very severe with him. If he was rude to strangers or
+to old people; if he lost his temper and threw ashes at his comrades; if
+he told a falsehood, he was beaten. He had broken the laws of the Great
+Spirit, and the Great Spirit had commanded that parents should beat
+their children with rods when they did wrong. The boy understood this
+and he tried to take his punishment bravely that he might regain the
+good will of the Great Spirit. He stood quite still and endured heavy
+blows without whimpering or flinching.
+
+He learned, too, to endure hunger and great fatigue without complaint.
+He raced, and swam, and played ball, and wrestled with other boys till
+his body was strong and straight and supple. He played at hunting and
+war in the forest, until his eyes became so sharp that no sign of man or
+beast escaped them.
+
+But he did not depend altogether on his eyes for information. He could
+find his way through a forest in the dark, where the dense foliage hid
+the stars. Perhaps the wind told him the direction by the odors it
+brought. He could tell what kind of trees grew about him by the feel of
+their bark, by their odor, by the sound of the wind in the branches. He
+did not have to think much about his course when on a journey. His feet
+seemed to know the way home, or to the spring, or to the enemy's camp.
+And if he had traveled through a wilderness once he knew the way the
+next time as well as any boy knows his way to school.
+
+While Pontiac was training his body, his parents took care that he
+should not grow up in ignorance of the religion and the history of his
+people. He heard much about the Great Spirit who could see all he did
+and was angry when he said or did anything dishonest or cowardly.
+
+The laws of the Great Spirit were fixed in the boy's mind, for his
+mother was always repeating them to him. She would say as he left the
+wigwam: "Honor the gray-headed person," or "Thou shalt not mimic the
+thunder;" "Thou shalt always feed the hungry and the stranger," or "Thou
+shalt immerse thyself in the river at least ten times in succession in
+the early part of the spring, so that thy body may be strong and thy
+feet swift to chase the game and to follow the warpath."[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: Translated from the Ottawa language by A. Blackbird.]
+
+In the evenings the older members of the family and some visiting
+Indians sat around the fire and told stones about the Great Spirit and
+many other strange beings, some good and some evil. They told, too,
+wonderful tales about omens and charms. The same story was told over and
+over again, so that in time little Pontiac knew by heart the legends of
+the Ottawas. He remembered and firmly believed all his life stories that
+as a child he listened to with awe, in his father's wigwam.
+
+In the same way he heard about the great deeds of the warriors of his
+tribe; and he came to think there were no people in the world quite
+equal to the Ottawas. He heard of other tribes that were their foes and
+he was eager to go to war against them.
+
+As he grew older he heard a good deal about men, not only of another
+tribe but of another race, the palefaces, who were trying to get the
+lands of the Indians. Then he thought less about being an Ottawa and
+conquering other Indians; while every day he felt more and more that he
+was an Indian and must conquer the white man. He wished he could unite
+the tribes in friendship and lead them against these strangers who were
+so many and so strong, and who had come to drive the Indians from their
+homes and hunting grounds.
+
+Such thoughts made Pontiac very serious. Obeying the commands of the
+Great Spirit, the young Indian often blackened his face with a mixture
+of charcoal and fish-oil, and went into the depths of the forest, where
+he remained for days without food, praying and thinking earnestly about
+the future.
+
+He formed his own plans, but he hid them in his heart. He practised
+keeping his feelings and thoughts to himself, and spoke only when he was
+very sure he was right. This habit soon gained him a reputation for
+gravity and wisdom.
+
+
+
+
+IV. THE CHIEF
+
+
+When he was old enough to go to battle with the tried warriors, Pontiac
+took many scalps and distinguished himself for courage. He was,
+therefore, amid great feasting and rejoicing, made a war chief of the
+Ottawas.
+
+His influence increased rapidly. The young men of his tribe felt sure of
+success when they followed Pontiac to battle. His very name made his
+foes tremble.
+
+In the council, too, his power grew. His words seemed wise to the gray
+heads, and the young warriors were ready to take up the hatchet or lay
+it down at his bidding. Because of his eloquence and wisdom, Pontiac was
+made sachem, so that he not only led his people to battle, but also
+ruled them in time of peace. He was called the greatest councilor and
+warrior of the Ottawas; yet he was not content.
+
+In Michigan, where the Ottawa Indians lived, there were other tribes of
+the Algonquin Indians. Chief among these were the Ojibwas and the
+Pottawottomies. These tribes, though related by marriage and on friendly
+terms, had separate chiefs. But gradually they came to recognize the
+great Pontiac as their principal ruler.
+
+Among the Indians of his own tribe Pontiac's word was law. Among kindred
+tribes his friendship was sought and his displeasure feared. Through all
+the Algonquin territory, from the Lakes to the Gulf, from the mountains
+to the river, the great chief's name was known and respected.
+
+Pontiac was no doubt proud and ambitious. But if he was glad to gain
+glory for himself he considered the good of his people also. To unite
+them and overpower the palefaces was the end toward which he planned.
+
+By this time he had learned that all palefaces were not alike. There
+were two great nations of them, the French and the English, and the
+Indians had found a great difference between them. The English had
+treated them with contempt and helped themselves to their lands. The
+French had come among them as missionaries and traders, with kind words
+and gifts. To be sure, they had built forts in the land, but they told
+the Indians they did this for their sake that they might protect them
+from the English, who wished to take their lands. The French seemed to
+hate the English no less than the Indians did.
+
+It is said that Pontiac planned to use the French to help him conquer
+the English, and then intended to turn upon them and drive them away. No
+doubt if the French had openly claimed the territory of the Indians, or
+in any way had shown that their professions of friendship were false,
+Pontiac would have been their enemy. But he evidently took them at their
+word and looked upon them as friends who wished to help his people.
+
+In all his dealings with the French, Pontiac was true and honorable. He
+joined them in their wars against the English. He and his Ottawas helped
+to defeat the British regulars under General Braddock at Fort Duquesne.
+He saved the French garrison at Detroit from an attack by hostile
+Indians. He trusted them when all appearances were against them. His
+acceptance of the peace offered by Major Rogers on the shore of Lake
+Erie was not a betrayal of the French. Pontiac did not forsake their
+cause until they had given it up themselves. He took a step which seemed
+for the best interests of his own people, and, at the same time, not
+hurtful to the French. We have seen that he was disappointed in the
+reward he expected.
+
+The English, having subdued the French, felt able to manage the Indians
+without difficulty. They were, therefore, more careless than ever about
+pleasing them. They refused to give the supplies which the French had
+been accustomed to distribute among the Indians. The Indians were
+obliged to provide for themselves, as in the days of Pontiac's
+childhood. They had no powder or bullets and the young men had lost
+their skill with the bow. There was suffering and death for want of
+food.
+
+Even Pontiac had been willing to profit by the generosity of the French.
+He had not only cheered himself with their firewater, but, like other
+Indians, he had been glad to give up his bow and arrow for a gun; he had
+been ready to accept corn and smoked meats in winter when game was
+scarce, and to protect himself from the cold with the Frenchmen's
+blankets.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WEAPON]
+
+He realized now that in adopting the white men's customs, in using their
+food and blankets and arms, his people had become dependent upon them.
+He remembered the stories he had heard in his childhood about the might
+of the Ottawas in the days when they depended on the chase for their
+food, and fought their battles with bows and arrows and stone hatchets.
+He wished his people would return to the old customs. In that way only
+could they regain their native hardihood and independence.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WEAPON]
+
+While Pontiac's hatred of the English grew more bitter daily, other
+Indians were not indifferent. Through all the Algonquin tribes spread
+this hatred for the English. The insolence of the garrisons at the forts
+provoked it; the cheating, the bad faith, and the brutality of the
+English trappers and traders increased it; the refusal of supplies, the
+secret influence of the French, the encroachments of English settlers,
+fanned it into fury. And when at last, in 1762, word came that the
+English claimed the land of the Algonquins their rage could no longer be
+restrained.
+
+
+
+
+V. THE PLOT
+
+
+The time was ripe for rebellion and Pontiac was ready. All over the land
+should council fires be lighted. All over the land should the hatchet be
+raised. By wile and treachery the forts should fall. By fire and
+bloodshed the settlements should be laid waste and the Englishmen driven
+into the sea. Thus spoke Pontiac, and thus spoke his messengers, who
+with war belts of black and red wampum and hatchets smeared with blood
+sought out the villages of the Algonquins. Far and wide this dark
+company went its way through forests, across prairies, in spite of storm
+or flooded stream, or mountain barrier. No camp was so secret, no
+village so remote, that the messengers of war did not find it out.
+Wherever they went the bloody plan found favor; the tokens of war were
+accepted and pledges of warlike purpose sent to Pontiac.
+
+Not far from the summering place where clustered the lodges of Pontiac
+and his kinsmen rose the walls of Fort Detroit. There Pontiac had
+suffered humiliation at the hands of the English, and upon it he planned
+to visit his vengeance.
+
+The little French military station planted on the west bank of the
+Detroit River had reached half a century's growth. It had become a place
+of some importance. Both banks of the river were studded with farmhouses
+for miles above and below the "fort," as the walled village where the
+soldiers lived was called.
+
+The fort consisted of about one hundred small houses surrounded by a
+palisade, or wall of heavy stakes, twenty-five feet high. Since gates
+are easily broken down, over every gate a block house had been built,
+from which soldiers could fire upon the approaching enemy. At the four
+corners of the palisade were bastions, or fortified projections, from
+which the inmates could see the whole length of the wall and shoot any
+one attempting to climb it, set fire to it, or do it any harm.
+
+The small log houses within were crowded together with only narrow
+passage-ways between. They were roofed with bark or thatched with straw.
+To lessen the danger of fire a wide road was left between the wall and
+the houses. Besides dwelling houses, there were in the fort the barracks
+where the soldiers stayed, the church, shops, and the council house,
+where meetings with the Indians were held.
+
+At this time the garrison consisted of about one hundred and twenty
+men. But counting the other inmates of the fort and the Canadians who
+lived along the river, there were about two thousand five hundred white
+people in the Detroit settlement. On the outskirts of the settlement
+hung the Indian villages, much as the Indian villages crowd around the
+white settlements of Alaska to-day.
+
+In the midst of the wilderness this little band of English lived
+protected by their log walls. No friends were near. Their nearest
+neighbors were the conquered French, who regarded them with jealousy and
+dislike. Not far away were their Indian enemies. Yet they thought little
+of danger.
+
+Occasionally some story of Indian treachery, some rumor of Indian
+hostility, or some omen of evil filled the garrison with vague alarm. In
+October, 1762, dense clouds gathered over the fort, and soon rain black
+as ink fell from them. This strange occurrence stirred up the fears of
+the settlers. Some said that it was a sign that the end of the world was
+at hand; others, that it was a sign of war. But by the spring of the
+next year the settlers of Detroit had ceased to think of the black rain
+and war.
+
+If a few had suffered unrest because of the Indians, their fears were
+put to flight by a visit which Pontiac made to Detroit late in April.
+With forty of his chiefs he came to the fort asking to be allowed to
+perform the peace dance before the commander. The request was granted,
+and a good-natured crowd gathered near Major Gladwin's house to see the
+Indian dance.
+
+No one thought anything of the fact that ten of the party took no part
+in the dance, but strolled around the fort prying into everything. Those
+who noticed them at all, thought their conduct showed nothing more than
+childish curiosity.
+
+No one dreamed that these men were spies, and that the sole purpose of
+the visit was to discover the strength of the garrison. The Indians left
+with promises to come again to smoke the calumet with the English when
+all their chiefs should assemble after the winter's hunt.
+
+After visiting Detroit, Pontiac sent swift-footed runners to all the
+tribes in the neighboring country, calling the chiefs to a council to be
+held in the village of the Pottawottomies.
+
+When the day for the great council arrived, all the women were sent away
+from the village so that they could not overhear the plans of the
+chiefs. At the door of the great bark lodge where the chiefs met,
+sentinels were posted to prevent interruption.
+
+When all had taken their places in the council room Pontiac rose and
+laid before his trusted chiefs his crafty plans. On the seventh of May
+the young warriors should gather on the green near Detroit to play ball,
+while the older men lay on the ground looking on, or loitered in and
+about the fort. The squaws should go about the streets with guns and
+tomahawks hidden under their blankets, offering mats and baskets for
+sale, or begging. Later Pontiac, with the principal chiefs would arrive,
+and ask to hold a council with the commander and his officers. While
+speaking in the council he would suddenly turn the wampum belt that he
+held in his hand. At that signal the chiefs should throw off the
+blankets that hid their weapons and war paint, and butcher the English
+before they could offer resistance. When the Indians outside heard the
+clamor within the council house they should snatch the guns and knives
+that the squaws carried, fall upon the surprised and half-armed
+soldiers, kill them and plunder and burn the fort, sparing only the
+French.
+
+From the Indians' point of view this seemed a brave plot. No one
+objected to the treachery. All the guttural sounds that broke from the
+throng of listeners were made for approval and applause.
+
+
+
+
+VI. THE SEVENTH OF MAY
+
+
+The Indians kept their secret well. A Canadian saw some Indians filing
+off their guns to make them short enough to hide under their blankets.
+But if his suspicions were aroused he held his peace and said no word of
+warning to the English. The appointed seventh of May was at hand and no
+alarm had been taken at the garrison.
+
+But on the evening of the sixth, Major Gladwin talked long in secret
+with his officers, then ordered half the garrison under arms. He doubled
+the guard and himself went from place to place to see that every man was
+at his post. The soldiers did not know the reason for this unusual
+watchfulness, but they understood that it meant danger.
+
+It is said that in the afternoon an Indian girl who was deeply attached
+to the English Major had brought him a pair of moccasins she had been
+embroidering for him. She lingered at the fort and seemed unwilling to
+leave. At last she begged Gladwin to go away from the fort for a day or
+two. Her conduct and request excited suspicion. The Major questioned her
+closely and discovered Pontiac's plot.
+
+[Illustration: BETRAYAL OF PONTIAC'S PLOT]
+
+Be that as it may, on the night of the sixth Major Gladwin was on the
+alert.
+
+Nothing disturbed the peace of the mild May night. In the morning one
+watchman on the walls said to another, "See, yonder they come."
+
+The man addressed looked up the stream and saw many birch canoes rapidly
+approaching the fort. "A perfect fleet!" he exclaimed.
+
+"Yes; plenty of boats, but not many Indians; only two or three in each
+canoe," replied the first.
+
+"That's true. But see how deep the canoes are in the water, and what
+heavy paddling those fellows are doing! A dozen beaver skins to one,
+every canoe's got a load of those red rascals stretched on their backs
+well out of sight."
+
+"You may be right," said the other, shaking his head. "It looks as if
+there might be some ugly work before us. They say the Major has ordered
+the whole garrison under arms. Even the shops are closed and the traders
+armed to the teeth."
+
+Most of the Indians who came in the boats went to a green near the fort
+and began a game of ball. Soon Pontiac himself was seen approaching
+along the river road at the head of sixty of his chiefs. They wore
+blankets and marched in single file without a word. When they reached
+the gate Pontiac, with his accustomed dignity, asked that he and his
+chiefs might meet their English brothers in council to discuss important
+questions.
+
+In answer to his request the gates swung open. Lines of armed soldiers
+appeared on either side. The Indians, trained to read signs, knew at
+once that their plot was discovered. Perhaps they felt that the
+treachery they had planned would be visited on their own heads. But if
+they feared, they gave no token; they said no word. They walked
+undaunted through the narrow streets, meeting armed soldiers at every
+turn.
+
+At the council house they found Major Gladwin, his assistant, Captain
+Campbell, and other officers already assembled and waiting for them. If
+any Indian had doubted the discovery of their plot, he was certain of
+it when he saw that the officers wore swords at their sides and pistols
+in their belts. It was with some reluctance that they seated themselves
+on the mats arranged for them.
+
+This was a trying moment for Pontiac. He stood there discovered,
+defeated. But he did not quail before the steady gaze of the English.
+His brow was only more haughty, his face more stern.
+
+"And why," he asked, in a severe, harsh voice, "do our brothers meet us
+to-day with guns in their hands?"
+
+"You come among us when we are taking our regular military exercise,"
+answered the commander calmly.
+
+With fears somewhat soothed, Pontiac began to speak: "For many moons the
+love of our brothers, the English, has seemed to sleep. It is now
+spring; the sun shines bright and hot; the bears, the oaks, the rivers
+awake from their sleep. Brothers, it is time for the friendship between
+us to awake. Our chiefs have come to do their part, to renew their
+pledges of peace and friendship."
+
+Here he made a movement with the belt he held in his hand, as if about
+to turn it over. Every Indian was ready to spring. Gladwin gave a
+signal. A clash of arms sounded through the open door. A drum began
+beating a charge. Within the council room there was a startled,
+breathless silence. Pontiac's hand was stayed. The belt fell back to its
+first position. The din of arms ceased. Pontiac repeated his promises of
+friendship and loyalty, and then sat down.
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC'S SPEECH]
+
+Major Gladwin answered briefly: "Brothers, the English are not fickle.
+They do not withdraw their friendship without cause. As long as the red
+men are faithful to their promises they will find the English their
+steadfast friends. But if the Indians are false or do any injury to the
+English, the English will punish them without mercy."
+
+The one object of the Indians was now to turn aside the suspicion of the
+English. After Gladwin's speech presents were exchanged, and the meeting
+broke up with a general hand-shaking. Before leaving, Pontiac promised
+that he would return in a few days with his squaws and children that
+they might shake hands with their English brothers.
+
+"Scoundrels!" laughed one officer, when the last Indian had left. "They
+were afraid to sit down. They thought they had been caught in their own
+trap. It's a pity to let them off so easily."
+
+"No," replied another, more seriously. "The Major is right. If there is
+an outbreak, the Indians must take the first step. They depend more on
+treachery than force for success; now that their plan is foiled, the
+whole trouble will probably blow over."
+
+The next day this opinion seemed verified by the appearance, of Pontiac
+with three of his chiefs. He brought a peace-pipe and approached the
+commander with smooth speeches: "Evil birds have whistled in your ears,
+but do not listen to them. We are your friends. We have come to prove
+it. We will smoke the calumet with you."
+
+Pontiac then offered his great peace-pipe. After it had been smoked in
+all solemnity, he presented it to Captain Campbell as a high mark of
+friendship.
+
+
+
+
+VII. HOSTILITIES BEGUN
+
+
+Bright and early the next morning hordes of naked savages gathered on
+the pasture land near the fort. A long quadrangle was marked out on the
+grass with lines across it. At each end of this "gridiron" two tall
+posts were erected five or six feet apart. This, as you may have
+guessed, was to prepare for an Indian game of ball.
+
+When all was ready the young men of the Ottawa tribes took their places
+on one side of the field. Opposite to them were the Pottawottomies. Each
+Indian had a long racket or bat with which he tried to drive the ball to
+the goal against the opposition of the players of the other nation. Such
+a yelling as they kept up, running and pushing and plunging and prancing
+the while! Small wonder that squaws, warriors, and chiefs should have
+come to watch so exciting a game!
+
+[Illustration: INDIANS PLAYING BALL]
+
+Still the men in the fort kept the gates closed and stayed behind their
+walls, as if they took no interest in the game. They were really
+watching with some uneasiness the vast crowd of Indians so close at
+hand.
+
+When the game was finished Pontiac went to the gate of the fort. His
+chiefs attended him and a motley crowd of warriors, squaws, and
+children came trooping after. The great chief shouted in a loud voice,
+demanding admission. He received answer that he might come in if he
+wished, but the rest would have to keep out. With injured dignity he
+asked if his followers were not to be allowed to enjoy the smoke of the
+calumet.
+
+The English commander, tired of false speech, gave a short answer,
+refusing flatly to let the Indians in. Thereupon Pontiac's brow darkened
+and he strode off to the river in high dudgeon.
+
+The others withdrew a little and stood in groups, muttering and
+gesticulating. Then with wild whoops they bounded off to join their
+comrades who lay stretched on the earth around the ball grounds. After a
+brief parley, some started with blood-curdling yells toward a house
+across the fields where an English woman lived with her children; others
+leaped into their canoes and paddled off to an island where an English
+farmer lived alone.
+
+Before sunset the men at the fort heard the exultant scalp yell of the
+Indians, and knew that the first blood of the war had been shed.
+
+In the meantime Pontiac hastened with gloomy rage to his own village
+across the river. It was deserted by all but a few squaws and old men.
+These Pontiac ordered to pack the camp luggage and make all ready for
+removal, as soon as the men came with their canoes to carry the camp
+equipment to the Detroit side of the river.
+
+All labored to do their chief's will, while he went apart and blackened
+his face.
+
+At nightfall the braves came in with the scalps they had taken. A pole
+was driven into the ground in the open space where the tents had been.
+The warriors gathered about it, their bodies decked with paint and eagle
+feathers.
+
+Pontiac sprang into their midst, brandishing his hatchet and striking
+violently at the pole. As he danced about, he recited the great deeds he
+and his fathers had done in war. His appalling cries, his terrible
+words, stirred the hearts of his Indians and fired their blood. All were
+in a frenzy of excitement. With wild cries they joined their chief in
+his war dance.
+
+Even the faint echo of the din these blood-thirsty demons made struck
+terror into the hearts of the watchers in Detroit. The soldiers kept
+close guard all night, expecting an attack at any moment.
+
+But not till early dawn did the war cry sound. Shrill and near it rose
+from hundreds of throats. Strong men turned pale at the clamor of yells
+and cracking rifles. It seemed that the Indians must be at the very
+walls of the fort.
+
+The guards on the ramparts, however, could see no enemy in the faint
+gray light. From behind every tree, every stone, every rise of ground,
+came the incessant flash of muskets. Bullets and blazing arrows rattled
+against the palisades. The Indians aimed at the loopholes and succeeded
+in wounding five of the English. The soldiers returned a cautious fire,
+unwilling to waste powder on an invisible foe.
+
+After an attack of six hours' duration the Indians, weary with their
+night's activity, gradually withdrew to their camps, having suffered no
+loss, but at the same time having inflicted little.
+
+Gladwin, whose spirit was manly and humane, wished if possible to avoid
+further bloodshed. The Canadians took no part in the war, and could,
+therefore, be safely used as messengers. As soon as the battle had
+subsided Major Gladwin sent a deputation of them to tell Pontiac that he
+was willing to listen to any real grievance of the Indians, and do his
+best to redress whatever wrongs they had suffered.
+
+Pontiac knew that his chief charge of injustice against the English,
+their presence in and claim to his lands, would not be considered by the
+English a real grievance. He thought the hour for talking had passed;
+the time for action had come. Treachery was his readiest weapon and he
+used it. He replied that he could consent to no terms unless they were
+made with the English in person, and asked that Captain Campbell, second
+in command at the fort, come to a council in his camp.
+
+Captain Campbell had no fear, and urged Major Gladwin to permit him to
+go. He and another Englishman, accordingly, hastened to the Indian
+village. The women and the warriors were so enraged at the sight of
+their red coats, that they would have stoned them had not Pontiac
+interfered and led them to his lodge.
+
+After a long but fruitless talk around the council fire, the English
+rose to go. But Pontiac said: "Brothers, you will sleep to-night on the
+couches the red men have spread for you." He then gave orders that his
+prisoners should be taken to the house of a Canadian, where they should
+be treated with respect, but closely guarded.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. THE TWO LEADERS
+
+
+When the officers at Detroit learned that their deputies were detained
+by the Indians, they realized that there was no hope of peace. Before
+the fort two armed schooners rode at anchor. Most of the officers wished
+to abandon the fort and seek safety by sailing away on these boats.
+
+"There is no use trying to hold the old fort against eight times our
+number," they said impatiently.
+
+But Major Gladwin had no thought of surrender. "We could not," he
+answered, "if the Indians should attempt to force the walls. But there
+is no danger of their venturing within gunshot in any numbers. They
+won't risk their red skins that way. They'll simply waste their powder
+and lead in such firing as they did this morning, and pretty soon
+they'll lose heart and drop off, leaving Pontiac to beg for peace."
+
+"I don't suppose they will unite in a charge," assented one of the
+officers. "But they will keep a sharp lookout day and night to do us
+injury. We have four walls to guard and only one hundred and twenty men
+to do it. The garrison will be exhausted in no time."
+
+"Yes, we have hard work before us," agreed the commander, "but we can do
+it. Our case is not so bad as you represent. The ship's guns protect two
+walls, so that virtually only two sides of the fort are exposed to the
+enemy. To me the most alarming feature of the siege is short rations."
+
+"The supplies are low and we cannot hope for more within three weeks.
+We'll starve to death, penned up here with no hunting and no provisions
+from the Canadian farmers," complained some, ready in their alarm to
+magnify every danger.
+
+"By taking care to prevent waste we can make the supplies last," the
+commander interrupted. "I shall buy up at once everything in the fort
+that can serve as food, put it into a common storehouse, and give to
+each person a daily allowance. If even with this care the food runs
+short, Canadians may be found who love gold better than Indians." In
+this way the courageous leader argued, until, at last, he overcame the
+fears of his aids and roused in them a spirit of resistance.
+
+Pontiac had no lack of warriors, nevertheless he, as well as the British
+leader, had his fears and difficulties.
+
+His own followers were not easily managed. He had brought them together
+from near and far with promise of easy victory over the English. After a
+short struggle many of the tribes lost heart and were ready to go back
+to their villages.
+
+The Canadians were neutral and were supposed to sympathize with the
+Indians; but Pontiac knew that many of them favored the English, and
+were ready at the slightest offense to take the side of his enemies.
+
+His campaign against the English had begun with failure. Treachery had
+failed. He had put the English on their guard and must now use open
+force.
+
+To hold a horde of savages together, to keep the fickle Canadians
+friendly, to take without cannon all the fortifications on the frontier,
+were the tasks the Indian general had set himself.
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC'S ELOQUENCE]
+
+Pontiac's personal influence over the Indians was unparalleled. He had
+lost none of his power over them by the defeat of his plan to take
+Detroit. No Indian dared reproach him with failure. All quailed before
+his terrible rage and disappointment. They brought him the scalps of the
+English they had slain. They sought to please him with loud outcries
+against the English, and promises of the bloody work they would do. He
+held all in awe of him. He commanded as if sure of being obeyed, and
+punished the slightest disobedience with extreme severity.
+
+But he did not govern by fear alone. He took care that his warriors
+should not want for food; he took care to give them grounds for hope and
+to keep them busy.
+
+No preparations had been made for a long siege. When provisions failed
+and the tribes were on the point of leaving, Pontiac had a conference
+with some Canadians and arranged that they should furnish his people
+with corn and meat. He had no money to pay for provisions, but he made
+out notes promising to pay for them at some future time. These notes
+were written on birch bark, and signed with the figure of an otter, the
+totem of the great chief. Many of the farmers feared they would never
+see the money promised them in these notes, but Pontiac paid them all
+faithfully.
+
+Pontiac knew how wasteful his people were, feasting in the day of plenty
+without thought of the morrow. He therefore employed a Canadian as his
+provision officer. This man had charge of the storehouse, and doled out
+each morning the provisions for the day.
+
+This novel arrangement increased the Indians' confidence in their
+leader. Yet some grew restless and were on the point of giving up the
+struggle as a failure.
+
+On learning this, Pontiac sent out messengers to the Wyandot Indians,
+ordering them to join him in his war against the British or prepare to
+be wiped off the face of the earth. By this stroke Pontiac turned
+threatened loss into gain. The support of the warlike Wyandots renewed
+the courage of the faint-hearted, and for a time all thought of failure
+ceased.
+
+The chiefs conduct toward the Canadians was highly praiseworthy. They
+had encouraged him to make war against the British by promising that the
+French king would send him help. Week after week passed and no help
+came. Pontiac's expectation of the arrival of a French army grew fainter
+and fainter. Still he did not lose faith in the truth of the Canadians.
+He protected them and their property from injury and theft; for there
+were many lawless young warriors who were ready to do violence to the
+French as well as to the English.
+
+While pretending to sympathize with the Indians, many of the French
+farmers were secretly helping the English by selling them food and
+reporting the movements of the Indians. Pontiac heard many reports of
+their faithlessness.
+
+One stormy evening the chief entered the cabin of a Frenchman whom he
+had known for many years. With only a nod for his host he sat down
+before the dying fire. He sat there wrapt in his blanket for a long time
+without a word. At last he faced the Frenchman and said: "Old friend, I
+hear that the English have offered to give you a bushel of silver if you
+will take them my scalp."
+
+"It is false," cried the Frenchman in alarm. "I would not injure my
+friend for many bushels of silver."
+
+"Pontiac has no fear. Pontiac trusts his brother," the Indian replied,
+and stretching himself upon a bench he was soon sound asleep. The
+Frenchman could not be false to such faith and the chief slept unharmed.
+
+While successfully keeping together his warriors and strengthening the
+bond of friendship between the French and the Indians, Pontiac was
+carrying on the war against the English with vigor. His camp near
+Detroit was the center of action. From it Pontiac directed the war and
+kept constant watch over the garrison. He prevented the besieged from
+leaving their walls; he sent out parties to waylay the supplies the
+British were expecting from the East; he planned and managed expeditions
+against other forts held by the British.
+
+
+
+
+IX. THE SIEGE OF DETROIT
+
+
+The English at Detroit soon became accustomed to the discomforts and
+alarms of the siege. The women no longer trembled when the Indian war
+whoop sounded. The men no longer ran to the walls at the popping of
+muskets. The smell of gunpowder, the whiz of bullets, had lost their
+power to quicken the pulse.
+
+The days dragged slowly on. A few wan-faced men worked, many lounged in
+the narrow streets, playing games of chance, betting on the outcome of
+the war, quarreling, complaining, boasting. Now they talked vauntingly,
+telling tales of the Englishman's prowess and the Indian's cowardice.
+Again, they told dismal stories of Indian cruelty and massacre, and
+shook their heads over their own prospects.
+
+But every idler had his firelock close at hand, and all the time the
+sentinels on the bastions kept a sharp lookout. Every little while rapid
+firing broke the monotony of the long watch; the rolling drum called the
+garrison to the ramparts; wounded men groaned under the rough kindness
+of the fort surgeon; the dead received the soldiers' burial. But over
+all the old flag with its red cross, stained with rain and smoke,
+flapped defiantly.
+
+Major Gladwin went about with a cheerful face, but a heavy heart.
+Provisions were fast melting away. It seemed scarcely possible that the
+garrison would be able to hold out till the expected supplies arrived.
+He decided to send one of the schooners to meet the provision boats, to
+warn them of the hostility of the Indians and urge them to all speed.
+
+They could ill spare any of the garrison, but food must be had. So, on a
+bright spring morning one of the vessels weighed anchor and started for
+the East. Before she left the Detroit River the wind died and her sails
+hung limp.
+
+As the boat lay helplessly drifting with the current a hundred canoes
+darted out from the shore. In the foremost one the Indians had bound
+their prisoner, Captain Campbell. The British saw, and were afraid to
+fire lest they should shoot their countryman. Noticing their
+hesitation, the brave old man called out: "Don't think of me. Do your
+duty and fire." The man at the cannon still paused. A breeze stirred,
+swelled the canvas, and the schooner flew like a great gull over the
+blue waters far out of reach of the canoes.
+
+After the boat left, a gloom settled upon the little garrison at
+Detroit. With two boats in the harbor flight had seemed possible. Now
+that one of them had gone, all felt that the siege meant victory or
+death. The daily allowance of food grew smaller. The men became
+exhausted with ceaseless watching. All hope was fixed on the expected
+reinforcements.
+
+On the thirteenth of May the sentinel announced that the long looked for
+convoy was in sight. The good news spread rapidly. Soon the entire
+population of the village was hurrying to the gate that led to the
+river.
+
+The hungry, haggard-looking men that crowded the wharf sent up cheer
+after cheer as the boats approached with flags flying. Days of rest and
+plenty seemed theirs again. Here were comrades to share their vigils.
+Here was food to satisfy their hunger.
+
+As the boats drew nearer, the cheers died in throats hoarse with horror.
+No answering shout came from the boats. The English at the oars were not
+their own masters. The long expected supplies had fallen into the hands
+of the Indians. The men to whom the garrison had looked for help were
+the prisoners of the enemy.
+
+Two Englishmen escaped from their guards and succeeded in reaching the
+fort where they told their story: Ninety men had started with large
+stores of food and ammunition, early in the spring to reinforce Detroit.
+Meeting the schooner from the fort and learning the danger and need of
+the garrison, they had pushed on with all possible speed until they
+reached the mouth of the Detroit River. That night, as the boats were
+drawn up on the shore and the men were getting supper, their camp was
+suddenly surprised by a horde of Wyandot Indians. The British made an
+attempt to defend themselves. But the Indians were upon them brandishing
+their tomahawks and yelling like demons. Panic fear seized the white
+men. They dropped their guns, fled to the boats, jumped in and pushed
+off. The exultant Indians pressed after them and succeeded in retaking
+all but two of their overloaded boats. The savages were now taking their
+prisoners, about sixty in number, to the camp of Pontiac, where they
+would be tortured and put to death.
+
+The success of this bold venture probably would have ended the siege of
+Detroit with victory for Pontiac, had the Canadians been as loyal to the
+Indians as they pretended. But while they were giving the chief
+assurances of good will and future help, some of them were secretly
+succoring the English. Under the cover of night they smuggled cattle and
+sheep and hogs to the famishing garrison.
+
+Even with this aid the prospects of the little garrison were dark
+enough. Every wind seemed to blow them ill news.
+
+One afternoon the guard at the fort heard a weird chant and saw issuing
+from the distant forest a file of warriors whose naked bodies were
+smeared with black paint. Every one of them carried a pole over his
+shoulder, and the horrified watchers knew well enough that from the end
+of each pole fluttered the scalp of some Englishman. They learned from
+the Canadians that night that Fort Sandusky had been burned and its
+garrison murdered.
+
+A little later the Indians offered to exchange some prisoners with the
+English. The victims thus released by the Indians proved to be from Fort
+St. Joseph. They told how that fort had been treacherously taken and
+burned, and all the inmates but themselves slain.
+
+A traveling priest brought word that the plot which had failed at
+Detroit had succeeded only too well at Michillimackinac. Next came
+tidings of the massacres at Fort Ouatanon on the Wabash River and at
+Fort Miamis, on the Maumee.
+
+Nor was the tale of fire and blood yet ended. A fugitive from the camp
+of Pontiac reached Detroit one afternoon. It proved to be Ensign
+Christie, the commanding officer at Presqu' Isle, near the eastern end
+of Lake Erie. His story was a thrilling one. He told how his little
+garrison of twenty-seven men had fortified themselves in their block
+house and made a fierce struggle to keep back the Indians and save their
+stronghold from the flames; how at last the Indians had undermined their
+fort and threatened to apply the torch above and below at once. Then to
+escape death by fire the little band had listened to the promises of
+the Indians and yielded themselves prisoners.
+
+If these reports terrified the English at Detroit, they also
+strengthened their determination not to surrender. In spite of fatigue,
+hunger, and discouragement they fought stoutly on, until, at length,
+there came a turn in the tide of ill fortune that had surged against
+them.
+
+On the nineteenth of June news reached them that the schooner which had
+been sent to meet the provisions had returned and was entering the
+Detroit River. This cheered all, for they knew that the boat had been to
+Niagara for more supplies and more men. Still, they remembered the fate
+of the provision boats, and were worried lest mischance should befall
+the schooner.
+
+Their anxiety increased when they saw the Indians going in large
+companies down the river and heard from the Canadians that they were
+planning to attack the schooner. The British at the fort fired two
+cannon shots to let their countrymen know that they still held Detroit.
+But several days passed before they heard anything of the boat. At last
+they saw her sailing safely toward them.
+
+There were waving caps, shouts of joy, and prayers of thanksgiving among
+the little company of half-starved men who thronged at the gate to
+welcome the newcomers.
+
+They had heard that eight hundred more Ojibwa Indians were on their way
+to increase the forces of Pontiac. But what were eight hundred Ojibwas
+to sixty hardy sons of England and a schooner loaded with supplies and
+cannon!
+
+
+
+
+X. IMPORTANT ENGAGEMENTS
+
+
+Hope grew strong in Pontiac's heart as week after week his tribes and
+allies brought to his camp trophies of victory--guns, prisoners, scalps.
+But Detroit troubled him. The most violent attacks produced no effect.
+To starve the garrison seemed the only way to conquer it.
+
+When, therefore, Pontiac's messengers had brought word that the schooner
+was approaching he bent his whole energy to prevent her reaching
+Detroit. Along the river where dense underwoods grew, hundreds of
+Indians lay concealed with their canoes, waiting for the schooner.
+
+When, in the darkness of a moonless night, they saw the great boat
+sailing steadily up the narrow channel they paddled silently toward her,
+dark specks on the breast of the dark, shining river. Nearer and nearer
+they pressed. All was silent on the vessel. Surely no one had taken
+alarm. Not a shot and they had reached the boat; they were clambering
+like rats up its bulky sides--when lo! a sharp hammering on the mast
+head, a flash of muskets in the dark, a cry of defeat and rage above the
+din of battle! Cannon boomed; canoes flew high into the air; bullets did
+their work.
+
+For fourteen Indians the long struggle against the palefaces was over.
+The rest scurried to the shore as best they could, some paddling, some
+swimming. Once there, they took shelter behind some temporary
+earthworks, and opened such a fierce fire on the schooner that it was
+forced to drop down stream to a broader part of the river. For several
+days they delayed the ship, but at length she sailed boldly past, and
+was but little injured by the fire.
+
+Pontiac was sorely vexed that the ship had succeeded in reaching the
+garrison. He and his people looked upon the boats with almost
+superstitious horror. Their dislike was not lessened when one day the
+smaller schooner made her way against wind and current up to Pontiac's
+village, and there sent shot and shell roaring through the frail
+dwellings.
+
+Though no loss of life resulted, the Indians were greatly alarmed.
+Pontiac moved his camp to a safer place and then turned his attention to
+destroying the ships. Early in July he made his first attempt.
+
+Two large boats filled with birch bark and pitch pine were tied together
+and set on fire. They were then cut loose and left to float down stream.
+Keenly the Indians watched; keenly, the English. Would the fireboats go
+close enough? the first wondered with bated breath. Would they come too
+close? questioned the British. Woe on the one hand, joy on the other!
+the space between the ships and the flaming craft widens--the fireboats
+float harmlessly down the river. A second and a third attempt to burn
+the boats failed. Fortune seemed to favor the English.
+
+Pontiac began to despair of taking Detroit unaided. He called a council
+of the French. He reminded them that the English were their enemies as
+well as his. He charged them with helping the English and told them that
+the time had come for them to choose sides and fight with him or against
+him. He then offered them the war belt. His hope was that they would
+take it up and join him against the English.
+
+Now, the Canadians had become by the terms of the treaty that closed the
+French war, British subjects, but they were ashamed or afraid to admit
+it, and still deceived the Indians. They told Pontiac that much as it
+would please them to fight with him against the English, they must obey
+the commands of their father, the King of France, who had bidden them to
+remain at peace until his coming. They added that he, with a great army,
+was already on the St. Lawrence and would soon arrive to punish the
+enemies of his children and reward their friends. They advised the
+chieftain not to make an enemy of his mighty friend.
+
+When the French speaker had finished, there was a short silence. Then an
+old trapper came forward, and, picking up the war belt, declared that he
+was ready to take sides with the Indians against the English. Several of
+his rough comrades followed his example.
+
+Pontiac's hope of gaining aid from the French was thus not utterly
+defeated. Besides, he still believed their talk about the coming of the
+French king. So the French and Indians continued friends.
+
+Some of the tribes growing restless, now made peace with the English and
+deserted Pontiac. But a greater blow than the desertion of a few tribes
+was in store for the chief.
+
+Late in July he learned that twenty-two barges bearing large supplies of
+food and ammunition and almost three hundred men had made their way up
+the Detroit River in safety, protected by a dense fog. The news came so
+late that it was impossible for the Indians to oppose the progress of
+the boats, and they reached the fort with little resistance.
+
+At about two o'clock in the morning of the second day after the arrival
+of this convoy, Pontiac's spies brought him word that the English were
+coming against his camp with a great force.
+
+Swiftly and silently the Ottawas broke their camp, and with some Ojibwas
+started to meet the British. On reaching the site of their former camp,
+about a mile and a half above the fort, near the bridge that crossed a
+little stream, called from that night Bloody Run, they formed an ambush
+and waited for the British.
+
+They had barely time to hide behind their old earthworks, natural ridges
+and piles of brush. Already they heard the barking of watchdogs at the
+farmhouses along the river road, and the tramp of many feet. They
+listened and discovered that the enemy outnumbered them. What of that!
+The night was dark. They knew their ground. Their scouts would soon
+bring other tribes to help them.
+
+Every Indian was out of sight; every gun was loaded. The tramp of feet
+drew nearer. A dark mass of marching men came in sight. The quick steps
+of the advanced guard rang on the wooden bridge. All else was still. The
+vanguard had crossed the bridge and the main body of the English had
+started over, when, in front, to right, to left, burst blood curdling
+yells, blazed a fatal volley of muskets.
+
+Back only, lay safety. Those who had not fallen in the first charge
+turned and fled, followed by a rain of bullets. Panic spread along the
+line. But the brave leader of the English, Captain Dalzel, sprang to the
+front and rallied his men. They made a bold charge, as they thought,
+into the midst of the enemy; but they found none to resist them. Every
+Indian had vanished. They pressed bravely on in search of their
+assailants; but the night was black and the way was rough and
+unfamiliar. Whenever they reached a place of difficulty the Indians
+unexpectedly renewed their attack.
+
+The savages, whose eyes were accustomed to the darkness, saw the enemy
+after a parley return to the bridge. There, half of the men mounted
+guard while the others took up the dead and wounded and carried them to
+two armed boats that had accompanied them down the river.
+
+Seeing that a return to the fort was intended, the Indians turned back
+in large numbers to form another ambuscade at a point where several
+houses and barns stood near the road and cut the English off from the
+fort.
+
+They again allowed the vanguard to pass unmolested and surprised the
+center with a galling fire. The soldiers, confused by the weird and
+terrible cries of the savages and the blaze of musketry, blinded by
+smoke and flash, and stung by pelting bullets, huddled together like
+sheep.
+
+Captain Dalzel, though severely wounded, by commanding, imploring,
+fairly driving his men with his sword, at last succeeded in regaining
+order. He made a charge and as usual the Indians fled before the attack.
+As soon as the English attempted to continue their retreat the Indians
+were upon them again, firing from every fence and thicket.
+
+The gallant Dalzel was among those shot down by this fire. He died
+trying to save a wounded soldier from the scalping knife of the Indians.
+In the confusion he was scarcely missed. The officers next in command
+took charge of the retreat. In the gray dawn the remnant of Dalzel's
+army reached the fort. The Indians went off, well satisfied with their
+night's work, to count their scalps and celebrate.
+
+While the English lost about sixty men in this engagement, called the
+battle of Bloody Ridge, the number of Indians killed and wounded was not
+greater than fifteen or twenty. The Indians considered it a great
+victory and fresh warriors flocked to the camp of the Indian commander
+who seemed to be a match for the English.
+
+
+
+
+XI. THE END OF THE SIEGE
+
+
+We have seen that after the battle of Bloody Ridge many tribes that had
+before been afraid to take up the hatchet against the English, presented
+themselves at the camp of Pontiac, eager for a share in the victory at
+Detroit, which they thought would follow.
+
+Yet that English stronghold, that log palisade, was a prize out of reach
+of the chief and his warriors. The Indians kept close watch. If a head
+appeared at a loophole, bang went an Indian's gun. If a point was left
+unguarded, there was the torch applied. Fire arrows whizzed over the
+rampart in the darkness, only to burn themselves out in the broad
+roadway between the wall and the buildings. Again and again hundreds of
+painted warriors danced about the fort yelling as if Detroit, like
+Jericho, might be taken with shouting. Their spent bullets pelted the
+old fort like harmless hail. They tried to rush upon the gate, but the
+fusilade from the block house and the fire-belching cannon of the
+British drove them back helter-skelter.
+
+Late in September an incident occurred which increased the Indians' awe
+of the British. A scout brought word to Pontiac that a dispatch boat
+with a large store of provisions was on her way to the fort. As there
+were only twelve men aboard, her capture seemed an easy matter.
+
+The Indians planned a midnight attack. Three hundred of them drifted
+down the river in their light birch canoes. The night was so dark and
+they came so noiselessly that the watching English did not know of their
+approach until they were within gunshot of the boat.
+
+A cannon was fired, but its shot and shell went over the heads of the
+Indians and plowed up the black water beyond. The canoes were all about
+the ship and the savages, with knives in their teeth, were climbing up
+its sides. The crew fired once. One or two Indians fell back into the
+water; the rest came on. As they climbed nearer, the British charged
+them with bayonets, and hacked them with hatchets and knives. But where
+one man was driven back a dozen gained the deck.
+
+The little crew defended themselves desperately; they were surrounded by
+brandished tomahawks; their captain had fallen; more than half their
+number were cut down. The Indians were raising their shout of triumph.
+Then the order of Jacobs, the mate, rang out: "Blow up the ship!" he
+said. One Indian understood and gave the alarm to his fellows. With one
+accord they threw down hatchets and knives and leaped into the river.
+They made haste to reach the shore and left six bloodstained British
+sailors to take their boat in triumph to Detroit.
+
+As autumn advanced the Indians grew weary of the long siege. The
+prospect of winter with no food, the continued resistance of the
+British, and the report that a large force of armed men was coming to
+relieve Detroit, discouraged them.
+
+One tribe after another sent delegations to Major Gladwin to sue for
+peace. They told smooth stories. They had always loved the English, but
+Pontiac had compelled them to go to war. Now they were sorry they had
+obeyed him and longed to be at peace with their English brothers.
+
+Gladwin understood their deceit, but as he was in need of winter
+supplies, readily granted them a truce. The various tribes broke up
+their camps and separated for the long winter hunt.
+
+Pontiac and his Ottawas still held their ground without flinching.
+"Surely," thought the proud-hearted chief, "our French father will send
+us help before long."
+
+One day, near the close of October, a messenger did come from the
+French. The letter he brought was from M. Neyon, the commandant of Fort
+Chartres, in the Illinois country. Pontiac had written to him asking for
+aid. What had he answered? He had told the truth. He had told Pontiac
+that the French in America were now the subjects of the English king,
+and so could not fight against his people.
+
+When the great chief heard this he did not put on his war paint and lead
+his warriors against the defenseless French who had so long dealt
+falsely with him. He sat alone for a long time, thinking. The next day
+he sent a letter to Major Gladwin saying that he was now ready to bury
+the hatchet, and begging the English to forget the past.
+
+Major Gladwin thought that the French were more to blame than the
+Indians in the war, and was willing to be at peace with his red
+neighbors. So he sent Pontiac a favorable reply. A few days later the
+stern-faced chief turned his back on Detroit, and began his march to the
+Maumee River, followed by his faithful braves.
+
+
+
+
+XII. ALL ALONG THE FRONTIER
+
+
+The plan of Pontiac had been to take the forts all along the frontier by
+strategy and then destroy the defenceless English settlements.
+
+We have seen that while there were many French farmers living outside of
+the walls of Detroit there were very few English. And, in truth, in
+1763, there were not many English settlers east of the Alleghany
+Mountains. Most of the forts that had been taken from the French, except
+those on the Mississippi River, were garrisoned with English. Within
+reach of the protection of these forts, lived some British traders and
+trappers, and a few venturesome settlers. But the Mohawk Valley in New
+York, and the Susquehanna, in Pennsylvania, really formed the western
+limit of extensive English settlement.
+
+Pontiac's war belts had stirred up the Indians all along the border. In
+the summer of 1763, while he and the Ottawas and Ojibwas were besieging
+Detroit, the Delawares and Shawnees were laying waste the Pennsylvania
+frontier.
+
+Backwoodsmen, trappers or travelers, venturing into the wilderness were
+shot down without warning. Men, women, and children were miserably
+slain. Isolated farmhouses were attacked, their inmates scalped, the
+cabins burned. Churches and schools added to the blaze that swept the
+wilderness from the Great Lakes to the Ohio. One after another the
+smaller forts were taken by the Indians.
+
+Panic seized the settlers. Women left the kettle on the hearth, men the
+plow in the furrow, and fled. Some crowded for refuge into the nearest
+fort. Others feared to stop until they had reached Lancaster or even
+Philadelphia.
+
+The terrible butcheries committed by the Indians so maddened the
+frontiersmen that they forgot their civilization and resorted to methods
+as inhuman as did the Indians. Peaceable, friendly Indians were
+massacred by bands of ruffian borderers, organized for vengeance as well
+as protection. Even men in high places forgot their usual humanity. The
+commander-in-chief of the army, Sir Jeffrey Amherst, and Colonel Henry
+Bouquet planned to send smallpox among the Indians by giving them
+infected blankets. They even talked of fighting them with bloodhounds
+instead of soldiers. The Governor of Pennsylvania issued a proclamation
+offering a reward for Indian prisoners and Indian scalps.
+
+Fort Pitt, one of the most important posts on the frontier, held out
+against the attacks of the Delawares and the Shawnees. When the
+commander-in-chief of the army learned of the distress of the fort he
+sent a strong force under Colonel Bouquet to relieve it.
+
+In August, when crossing the Alleghany Mountains, Bouquet's army was
+assailed by a horde of Indians that had been lying in wait for them at
+Bushy Run. The battle which followed was hot. The British were
+courageous, but they fell in large numbers under the fire of the
+Indians, who fled before every charge, only to return like infuriated
+wasps at the moment the English fancied they had repulsed them. Night
+brought relief from the galling fire. But the battle was not over.
+
+The English were held penned up on the road without water till dawn,
+when the charge was renewed with such zest that for a time it looked as
+if there were no escape for the forces of Bouquet. The unusual boldness
+of the Indians suggested to him a stratagem.
+
+[Illustration: REDOUBT AT FORT PITT]
+
+He feigned a retreat. Thus encouraged the Indians rushed upon the
+British with war whoop and scalp cry. The forces of Bouquet divided; the
+Indians filled the breach. Then at the word of command the troops closed
+on them, charging with bayonets. Many of the Indians entrapped in this
+way fell; the rest fled.
+
+After that the English made their way to Fort Pitt without serious
+interruption. In the battle of Bushy Run the loss on both sides was
+heavy for an Indian battle. The English lost eight officers and over one
+hundred soldiers; the Indians, several chiefs and about sixty warriors.
+Though the English loss was greater than that of the Indians, it could
+be more easily made up. For that reason, and because the English had
+succeeded in reaching Fort Pitt, the expedition was regarded as a
+splendid victory for the palefaces.
+
+As winter advanced the Indians were obliged to desist from war and go
+into the forest in small companies to hunt. During the winter that
+followed the rebellion, the Indians had no help from the white people,
+and the bitter hardships they suffered did much to put them into a
+pacific frame of mind.
+
+Sir William Johnson, the king's sole agent and superintendent of Indian
+affairs, understood the red men better than most of his countrymen did.
+He lived among them on a great estate in the Mohawk Valley. He spoke
+their language and often dressed in Indian suit of slashed deerskin.
+
+In his opinion it was wasteful and unwise to fight with the Indians. He
+said the English were largely to blame for the Indian war because of
+their injustice and their want of policy in dealing with the savages. He
+advocated following the example of the French, and winning the good will
+of the Indians by flattery and presents. He believed that under that
+policy the Indians would become so dependent on the white man that they
+could be easily subdued.
+
+Early in the spring of 1764 he sent messages to the various tribes,
+warning them that two great armies of English soldiers were ready to
+start into the western forest to punish the enemies of the English, and
+inviting all who wished to make peace to meet him at Niagara.
+
+Accordingly, early in the spring, the fields around the fort at Niagara
+were dotted with Indian encampments. Among the savages were friendly
+Indians who had come to claim their reward; enemies who, through want or
+fear, were ready to make a temporary peace, and spies, who wanted to see
+what was going on.
+
+For many a long day Sir William Johnson sat in the council room at the
+fort making treaties with various tribes. All day the fumes of the
+peace-pipe filled the hall, and threats and promises were made, and
+sealed with long strings of wampum.
+
+It would have taken much less time to make one treaty with all the
+Indians, but Sir William Johnson sought to discourage the idea of a
+common cause, which Pontiac had done so much to arouse among the
+Indians. He treated each tribe as if its case were quite different from
+that of every other tribe.
+
+Some Indians were so bold that they would not even pretend to be
+friendly. The Delawares and the Shawnees replied to the Indian agent's
+message summoning them to Niagara, that they were not afraid of the
+English, but looked upon them as old women.
+
+The armies to which Sir William Johnson had referred were under the
+command of Colonel Bouquet and Colonel Bradstreet. The latter went by
+way of the Lakes to relieve Detroit, offer peace to the northern
+Indians, and subdue those who refused to submit. Bouquet, with a
+thousand men, penetrated the forests further south to compel the fierce
+Delawares and Shawnees to submission. Both succeeded.
+
+[Illustration: COUNCIL WITH COLONEL BOUQUET]
+
+Bradstreet found the northern Indians ready to come to terms. He has
+been criticised for requiring the Indians to sign papers they did not
+understand and make promises that they did not fulfill. He did not see
+Pontiac, but sent a deputation to find him and confer with him.
+
+Colonel Bouquet, on the other hand, was stern and terrible. In council
+he addressed the Indians as chiefs and warriors, instead of "brothers."
+He refused to smooth over their wrong doing or listen to the excuses
+they offered for going to war. He charged them openly with the wrongs
+they had done, and required them to surrender all their white prisoners
+and give him hostages from their own race.
+
+Many of the captives had lived among the Indians so long that they had
+forgotten their white relatives and friends. They left the Indian life
+and Indian friends with tears, and would have remained in captivity
+gladly. But Colonel Bouquet would make no exceptions.
+
+His stern measures subdued the warlike tribes completely. In the fall of
+1764 Bouquet returned to the East to receive honors and rewards for his
+services.
+
+
+
+
+XIII. THE LAST OF PONTIAC
+
+
+While other Indians were promising to bury the hatchet, Pontiac, the
+soul of the conspiracy, made no promises and smoked no peace-pipe.
+Surrounded by hundreds of warriors the chief camped on the Maumee River.
+His messengers brought him news of what was going on, and until the
+white men had taken their soldiers from the land he was content to wait
+and plan.
+
+Captain Morris, who had been sent to Pontiac's camp by Colonel
+Bradstreet, was coldly received by the great chief. Pontiac, indeed,
+granted him a hearing, but he bent upon his guest dark looks and refused
+to shake his hand. He made no flowery speeches, but declared that all
+the British were liars, and asked what new lies he had come to tell.
+After some talk Pontiac showed the captain a letter which he supposed to
+have been written by the King of France. It told the old story of the
+French army on its way to destroy the English. Captain Morris did his
+best to persuade him that the report was false. He was much impressed
+with the influence, knowledge, and sense of Pontiac--an Indian who
+commanded eighteen nations and was acquainted with the laws that
+regulated the conduct of civilized states.
+
+Pontiac would make no official promises of peace, but he was so much
+discouraged by the communications Captain Morris brought, that he said
+to one of the followers of the latter: "I shall never more lead the
+nations to war. As for them, let them be at peace with the English if
+they will; for me, I shall be at war with them forever. I shall be a
+wanderer in the woods, and if they come to seek me I will fight them
+single-handed." With much bitterness of soul did Pontiac learn that the
+forts he had taken with so much effort and loss of Indian blood, had
+been retaken by the enemy; that the war spirit he had with so much labor
+aroused had been put to sleep.
+
+But his hopes were not easily dashed. There were the letters from the
+French. The English said they were false, but the English were his
+enemies. The French were his friends. Enemies might deceive each other,
+but friends must trust each other.
+
+His confidence in the French was encouraged by the fact that several of
+the forts in the Illinois country were still occupied by French
+garrisons.
+
+Pontiac resolved to make another effort to rouse his people. He set his
+squaws to work on a wampum war belt, broad and long, containing symbols
+of the forty-seven tribes which belonged to his confederacy. When the
+belt was done he sent a delegation of chiefs to the south with it. These
+messengers were instructed to show the war belt and offer the hatchet to
+all the tribes along the Mississippi River as far south as New Orleans.
+They were then to visit the French Governor at New Orleans and invite
+him to assist them in war against their common enemy.
+
+Pontiac, in the meantime, went about among his old French friends asking
+for their help, and among the Illinois Indians urging them with threats
+and promises to join him in making war against the English. He met with
+some success, but his dreams were rudely broken by the return of his
+chiefs with the news that the Governor of New Orleans had indeed yielded
+to the British, and by the arrival of a company of British from Fort
+Pitt, offering terms of peace to the Illinois Indians. Daily Pontiac's
+allies deserted him, and accepted the terms of the English.
+
+Again the day had come when it seemed to Pontiac wise to let his hatred
+of the English sleep. He sent his great peace-pipe to Sir William
+Johnson and promised to go to Oswego in the spring to conclude a treaty
+with him.
+
+True to his promise, in the spring of 1766, Pontiac, greatest war chief
+and sachem of the Ottawas, presented himself in the council chamber of
+Sir William Johnson. There was nothing fawning in his attitude; he
+conducted himself with the dignity of a fallen monarch. "When you speak
+to me," he said, "it is as if you addressed all the nations of the
+west." In making peace he submitted not to the will of the British but
+to that of the Great Spirit, whose will it was that there should be
+peace. He made it clear that in allowing the English to take the forts
+of the French the Indians granted them no right to their lands. When he
+promised friendship for the future, he called his hearers to witness how
+true a friend he had been to the French, who had deceived him and given
+him reason to transfer his friendship.
+
+It would be hard to say how sincere Pontiac was, or how readily he would
+have let go the chain of friendship he had been forced to take up, had
+opportunity offered. He went back to his camp on the Maumee River, and
+there among his own people tried to live the life of his fathers. Little
+was heard of him for a year or two, but whenever an outbreak occurred
+among the Indians there were those who said Pontiac was at the bottom of
+it.
+
+In the spring of 1769, anxious to see his French friends once more, he
+made a visit to St. Louis. He was cordially received and spent several
+days with his old acquaintances. Then he crossed the river with a few
+chiefs to visit an assembly of traders and Illinois Indians.
+
+After feasting and drinking with some of the Illinois, Pontiac sought
+the quiet of the forest. He wandered through its dim aisles, living over
+again the hopes and ambitions of the past, which his visit with the
+French and the Illinois had vividly recalled. He had forgotten the
+present and was again the mighty warrior who had made the hearts of the
+palefaces quake with fear. Little he dreamed that behind him stood an
+assassin with up-raised tomahawk.
+
+The murderer of the great chief was an Illinois Indian who had been
+bribed to do the deed by an English trader.
+
+During his life Pontiac had tried to overcome the tribal feeling of the
+Indians, and to unite them as one people. Over his grave the old tribal
+instinct awoke. The Illinois rallied about their kinsman to protect him;
+the Ottawas flew to arms to avenge their chief--such a sachem, such a
+chief, could not be forgotten. Wrong to him could not be forgiven. The
+fury of the Ottawas was not slaked until they had avenged the death of
+their chief, through the destruction of the powerful tribes of the
+Illinois.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+BY
+
+FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+
+
+
+I. EARLY YEARS
+
+
+The great Indian leader, Pontiac, died in 1769, disappointed in his
+attempt to unite the Indians in a confederacy strong enough to withstand
+the white race. But the struggle between the red man and the white was
+not ended.
+
+At about the time of the old chief's death a child was born among the
+Shawnee Indians who was to take up the cause of his people with equally
+great courage and intelligence. This child was called Tecumseh, which
+means shooting-star.
+
+The tribe to which Tecumseh belonged had not yielded to the temptations
+offered by the white man. Although many of the tribes north of the Ohio
+River, through the influence of alms and whisky, were fast losing their
+savage virtues and becoming spiritless beggars, idle, drunken,
+quarrelsome, the Shawnees were still strong and warlike.
+
+Several of the Shawnee tribes lived together in a large village on Mad
+River, not far from the place where Springfield, Ohio, now stands. There
+they had built for themselves rude huts made of sapling logs. Around
+these lodges, on the fertile land along the river were corn fields,
+where the Indian women worked while the men hunted or went to war.
+
+In this village, on a bluff near the river, stood Tecumseh's first home.
+His father was chief of a small tribe and was highly respected for his
+courage and good sense. His mother, the daughter of a chief, was a woman
+of strong character.
+
+As Tecumseh was the son of such worthy parents, and as he was one of
+three brothers born on the same day, he was regarded even in babyhood
+with uncommon interest. The superstitious Indians believed that the
+three little boys would become extraordinary men. Two of them, Tecumseh
+and his brother, Laulewasikaw, fulfilled the largest expectations of
+their friends.
+
+The child, Tecumseh, was a bright-eyed, handsome little fellow, at once
+winning and masterful in manner. His favorite pastime was playing war.
+The boys he played with always made him chief and were as devoted to him
+as ever Indians were to a real chief.
+
+It is no wonder that at this time the Shawnee children played war; for
+their elders were almost constantly fighting with the settlers.
+
+Tecumseh's childhood was far from a peaceful, happy one. He learned
+early the oppressive gloom and the wild excitement that accompany war.
+He was called upon, now to take part in the fierce rejoicing that
+followed an Indian victory; again, to join in the mournful wailing of
+the women when the dead warriors were brought from the battlefield.
+
+But his experience of war was not limited to celebrating and mourning
+distant victories and defeats. The enemy did not spare the village in
+which he lived. He knew that when the braves were on the warpath the
+children must stay near their mother's lodge. For, several times runners
+had come in hot haste bidding the squaws flee with their pappooses to
+the forest and hide there till the palefaces had passed. It made little
+Tecumseh's heart beat hard to think of the excitement and terror of
+those days.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WARRIORS]
+
+Even in time of peace Tecumseh was accustomed to suffering and
+discontent. Food and clothing were so scarce that the Indians were often
+in want of enough to eat and wear. Children died from the effects of
+hunger and cold, and men and women grew gaunt and stern. Frequently the
+hunters came home empty-handed or bringing only small game.
+
+They attributed all their troubles to the "Long Knives," as they called
+the white men, who, they said, had stolen their hunting grounds. So when
+Tecumseh was but a child he hated the palefaces, and was glad when his
+tribe made war against them.
+
+In 1774 the Ohio Indians learned that the Virginians were coming into
+their country to destroy their villages. Accordingly, all able-bodied
+warriors took up their weapons and went with the proud chief, Cornstalk,
+to meet the enemy. Tecumseh's father and eldest brother, Cheeseekau,
+were among the number.
+
+After anxious waiting, those who had stayed behind were gladdened by the
+good news that for the present their homes were safe. But many of those
+homes had been made desolate by the battles waged in their defense.
+Cheeseekau came home from the war alone. His father had fallen in
+battle.
+
+The mother and her children ceased their wailing and for the time forgot
+their loss, as they sat by the fire with Cheeseekau and heard the young
+warrior talk of his first battle. He said that he wished to die on the
+battlefield, as his father had done, for an Indian could hope for no
+better end. He told what a good fight the Indians had made and how brave
+their leader had been.
+
+"All over the field," he said, "you could hear Cornstalk shout to his
+men 'Be strong! Be brave!' The warriors had more fear of Cornstalk's
+hatchet than of the Long Knives' guns. They did not dare to run. Some
+tried it. But Cornstalk buried his tomahawk in the head of the first,
+and the rest turned back to fight the palefaces. When the battle was
+over Cornstalk called a council and said: 'The palefaces are coming
+against us in great numbers. We can not drive them back. What shall we
+do? Shall we fight a while longer, kill a few more of them, and then
+yield? Shall we put to death our women and children and fight till we
+die?' No one spoke. Then he said: 'I see you will not fight. I will go
+and make peace with the white men.' And he made us a good peace.
+Cornstalk is the greatest chief we have had since Pontiac."
+
+Then followed stories of the great Pontiac, who had tried to make the
+Indian tribes stop fighting with one another and unite their strength
+against the white man. Thus, before Tecumseh could talk plainly, he
+heard about the heroes of his race, and learned what was expected of a
+good Indian.
+
+From this time the youthful warrior Cheeseekau took his father's place
+as head of the family. He not only provided the family with food and
+clothing, but also looked after the education of his younger brothers.
+Tecumseh was his favorite, and he strove to teach him all that was
+needful to make him a brave warrior and a good man.
+
+
+
+
+II. YOUTH
+
+
+During Tecumseh's boyhood the Revolutionary war was being fought. The
+Indians took the part of the British. It was natural that they should
+feel a more bitter hatred for the colonists who had actually taken their
+lands and fought against them, than they had for the distant mysterious
+"king," whom they had been taught to call "father," and to regard as a
+superior being. Besides, they little doubted that the king who had
+already beaten the French could subdue his own rebellious subjects. And
+they looked forward to the reward he would give them for their aid when
+the war was over.
+
+The victories of the colonists were familiar topics of discussion among
+the Indians. They spoke with increasing uneasiness of the deeds of
+Washington, Putnam, and Greene. But the name to them more terrible than
+all the rest was that of George Rogers Clark. With sinking hearts they
+heard of his victories on the frontier.
+
+In the summer of 1780 scouts brought word to the Shawnees on Mad River
+that this dreaded soldier was approaching with his army. Though alarmed,
+the Indians determined to do what they could to save the cabins and fort
+which they had built with much toil, and the growing corn upon which
+they depended for their winter food.
+
+Three hundred warriors assembled in the village. They held a hurried
+council and decided to advance to meet Clark's army and surprise it with
+an attack at daybreak. But if there was a surprise where Gen. Clark
+was concerned, he was usually the man to give it. Accordingly, the
+Indians learned with dismay that their plan could not be carried out,
+for General Clark's army by forced marches had reached and was already
+surrounding their village. The Indians had built a fort, but now they
+were afraid to use it and took refuge in their log huts. They began to
+cut holes in the walls, so that they might fire on the enemy.
+
+When General Clark heard this, he said: "Hold on a minute, and I'll make
+holes enough for them." With that he ordered up his cannon and caused it
+to be fired into the village.
+
+The Indians were so terrified that all who could do so fled into the
+woods and swamps. The rest fell an easy prey to the soldiers, who killed
+many warriors, made prisoners of the women and children, burned the
+houses, and cut down the corn.
+
+[Illustration: GEORGE ROGERS CLARK]
+
+Tecumseh and his brothers were among those who escaped the sword of
+Clark, but they could not forget the distress of their kindred.
+Tecumseh was too young to take part in this battle. Although he spent
+much time in fighting sham battles, it was not until six years later
+that he had an opportunity to fight in a real one. In 1786 he and his
+elder brother went out with a band of warriors to check or drive back
+Captain Logan, who was advancing toward Mad River.
+
+In an encounter near Dayton the boy was forced for the first time to
+face a cavalry charge. He had never imagined anything so terrifying. He
+saw those great, rushing horses, the cruel flash of steel. He forgot his
+hatred of the white man, his dreams of glory. His only thought was to
+save his life. He threw down his gun and ran.
+
+As soon as he recovered from his fright he felt very much ashamed of his
+cowardly conduct. He was eager for another opportunity to test his
+courage. Fortunately for him he did not have to wait long.
+
+Tecumseh was with a party of Indians who attacked some flatboats on the
+Ohio River. The boats were taken and all the men in charge of them were
+killed except one, who was made prisoner.
+
+This was an important occasion in the life of Tecumseh. He acted with
+such daring and bravery that the old warriors of the party were
+astonished. From that night the Shawnees spoke of Tecumseh as a brave.
+Besides winning the good opinion of others, he regained his self-respect
+and conquered fear.
+
+The memory of this victory was not pleasant to Tecumseh. It was
+followed by the burning of the prisoner. Although the burning of
+prisoners was not rare among the Shawnee Indians this was the first time
+Tecumseh had seen a man put to death in that barbarous manner, and he
+grew sick and faint with horror at the sight. But this time he was
+terrified not for himself but for another, and he was not ashamed of his
+feelings.
+
+Boy though he was, he stood before the older Indians and told them
+plainly what he thought of their cruel act. He spoke with so much power
+that he made all who heard him feel as he did about it. And they all
+agreed never again to take part in so inhuman a practice.
+
+On this night Tecumseh gave glimpses of the man he was to be. He proved
+his valor; he showed mercy; he influenced warriors by his words.
+
+
+
+
+III. ADVENTURES OF THE YOUNG BRAVE
+
+
+A short time after Tecumseh had proved himself worthy to be considered
+an Indian brave, he started with his brother Cheeseekau on a journey
+across the woods and prairies of Indiana and Illinois. The brothers were
+accompanied by a band of Kickapoo Indians. Such a journey was an
+important part of the training of young warriors.
+
+The party tramped through the country, courting hardships and adventure,
+getting acquainted with the wilderness, hunting buffaloes, visiting
+friendly tribes, learning many languages, breaking bread with
+strangers, and visiting vengeance on enemies. To fall upon the
+defenseless cabin of some sleeping frontiersman and murder him and his
+family was in their eyes a feat to boast of.
+
+But their warlike exploits were not confined to attacks on the white
+settlers. If they found friendly tribes at war with other tribes they
+joined them. In one of these battles Cheeseekau met his death, singing
+and rejoicing that it was his lot to fall like a warrior on the field of
+battle. This young man is said to have had a vision that he should die.
+Before going into battle he made a formal speech, telling his friends
+that he would be shot in the forehead in the thick of the fight, and his
+prophecy was fulfilled.
+
+After Cheeseekau's death Tecumseh took his place as leader of the
+company and continued his wanderings to the South. There he made many
+friends and had numerous stirring adventures. One evening just as he and
+his eight followers were about to go to bed their camp was attacked by
+thirty white men. Tecumseh ordered his frightened comrades to follow him
+and rushed upon the enemy with such spirit and force that his little
+company killed two of the assailants and frightened the rest away.
+
+Tecumseh returned to Ohio after an absence of three years. He discovered
+that it is not always necessary to go away from home to find adventures.
+His friends and neighbors were greatly excited about a victory which
+they had just gained over the United States troops under General Harmer.
+
+The next year, 1791, the new republic sent General St. Clair with a
+large army into the Indian country. Tecumseh's recent expedition had
+fitted him to be a good scout, and he was therefore sent out to watch
+the movements of St. Clair's troops. While he was employed scouting, the
+main body of Indians fell suddenly upon St. Clair's troops and
+completely routed them. During the next few years there was no lack of
+opportunity for the Shawnees to indulge their love of battle; for
+General Wayne, "Mad Anthony Wayne," as he was called, proved a more
+formidable foe than had General St. Clair. Tecumseh's reputation as a
+warrior was soon firmly established.
+
+He was equally noted as a hunter. Though he had long been pointed out as
+one of the best Shawnee hunters, many young men had claimed as great
+success as he. At length some one suggested a way to decide who was the
+ablest hunter.
+
+"Let us," said he, "each go alone into the forest, for three days, to
+hunt the deer, and the one who brings home the largest number of deer
+skins shall be considered the greatest hunter."
+
+All agreed to this test, and several noted hunters started out. After
+three days each returned bearing the evidence of his skill as a hunter.
+Some proudly displayed ten skins, some twelve. Last of all came Tecumseh
+with thirty-five deer skins. Then the other Indians stopped boasting,
+and declared Tecumseh the greatest hunter of the Shawnee nation.
+Tecumseh was a generous hunter as well as a skillful one. He made it his
+business to provide many who were old or sick with meat and skins.
+
+Among the Indians the hero was the man who could do most to help his
+tribe. He could do that by hunting, to supply its members with food and
+clothing, by speaking wisely in council, to lead them to act for their
+highest welfare, and by fighting to defend their rights or avenge their
+wrongs. A brave who could do all this was worthy of being a chief, even
+if he was not the eldest son of a chief.
+
+Tecumseh had shown that he could hunt, that he could speak in council,
+that he could fight. He had therefore all the requirements for a chief.
+Moreover, he had great influence with the young men of the neighboring
+tribes.
+
+
+
+
+IV. TECUMSEH DISSATISFIED
+
+
+The suffering among the Indians was so great because of the ceaseless
+war they had carried on against the white people, that in 1795 many of
+the tribes were ready to accept the terms of peace offered by the United
+States government.
+
+Accordingly, in June a treaty was made at Greenville, Ohio. The Indians
+promised to give up all claim to many thousand acres of land in the
+Northwest Territory, to live at peace with the white settlers occupying
+the land, to notify them of the hostile plans of other tribes, to
+surrender whatever prisoners they had, to give up evil doers for trial,
+to protect travelers and traders, and to recognize no "father" but the
+President of the United States.
+
+In return for all this the national government pledged itself to give
+the Indians a yearly "present" of food, blankets, powder, and other
+necessities, to respect the boundary lines and prevent settlers from
+hunting or intruding on Indian lands, and to punish white men who were
+found guilty of robbing or murdering Indians.
+
+Tecumseh would not attend the council at which the treaty was made. Much
+as he felt the need of peace he was unwilling to pay for it a price
+which he thought the white man had no right to ask. He was unwilling to
+give up the lands which the Great Spirit had allotted to the Indians,
+and which were necessary to their very existence.
+
+He foresaw that in the years of peace to which the Indians had pledged
+themselves, white men without number would come to make their homes in
+the fertile lands secured by the treaty. He foresaw that while the
+settlements flourished the tribes would become more and more dependent
+and submissive to the will of their civilized neighbors.
+
+The injurious effect of civilization upon the Indian tribes was only too
+evident to all. The Superintendent of Indian Affairs later wrote to
+President Jefferson: "I can tell at once upon looking at an Indian whom
+I may chance to meet whether he belongs to a neighboring or to a more
+distant tribe. The latter is generally well-clothed, healthy, and
+vigorous; the former, half-naked, filthy, and enfeebled by intoxication,
+and many of them are without arms excepting a knife, which they carry
+for the most villainous purposes."
+
+What wonder that the patriotic Tecumseh refused to sanction a treaty
+which he considered a step toward the downfall of his race! He
+remembered the dead hero Pontiac, and wished that the red men had such a
+chieftain to unite them and rouse their manhood. He determined
+henceforth to take Pontiac for his model and to do what he could to
+unite his people and prepare them to resist the next attempt of the
+palefaces to take the land of the redskins. With this idea in view he
+used his influence to collect from various tribes a band of followers,
+who made him their chief.
+
+The new chief was not an unworthy successor of the great Pontiac. Though
+living at a time when the Indians were beginning to lose much of their
+native vigor and virtue, Tecumseh had grown to be one of the most
+princely red men we know anything about.
+
+[Illustration: TECUMSEH]
+
+His appearance was dignified and pleasing. Colonel W. S. Hatch gave the
+following picturesque description of him: "His height was about five
+feet nine inches; his face, oval rather than angular; his mouth,
+beautifully formed, like that of Napoleon I., as represented in his
+portraits; his eyes, clear, transparent hazel, with a mild, pleasant
+expression when in repose, or in conversation; but when excited in his
+orations or by the enthusiasm of conflict, or when in anger, they
+appeared like balls of fire; his teeth, beautifully white, and his
+complexion more of a light brown or tan than red; his whole tribe, as
+well as their kindred, the Ottawas, had light complexions; his arms and
+hands were finely formed; his limbs straight; he always stood very
+erect, and walked with a brisk, elastic, vigorous step. He invariably
+dressed in Indian tanned buckskin; a perfectly well-fitting hunting
+frock descending to the knee was over his underclothes of the same
+material; the usual cape with finish of leather fringe about the neck,
+cape, edges of the front opening, and bottom of the frock; a belt of the
+same material, in which were his sidearms (an elegant silver-mounted
+tomahawk and a knife in a strong leather case); short pantaloons,
+connected with neatly fitting leggings and moccasins, with a mantle of
+the same material thrown over his left shoulder, used as a blanket in
+camp, and as a protection in storms."
+
+Tecumseh's character was not that of the typical Indian, because it was
+broader. The virtues that most Indians exercise only in the family, or,
+at best, in the tribe, he practised toward his entire race, and, to some
+extent, toward all mankind. He once said: "My tribe is nothing to me; my
+race, everything." His hatred of the white man was general, not
+personal. Able, brave men, whether red or white, he respected and
+admired. While most Indians thought it necessary to be truthful to
+friends only, Tecumseh was honest in his dealings with his enemies. He
+often set white men an example of mercy.
+
+An amusing story is told of him, which shows how kindly tolerant he was
+where he could feel nothing but contempt for a man: One evening on
+entering the house of a white man with whom he was acquainted, Tecumseh
+found a gigantic stranger there, who was so badly frightened at sight of
+him that he took refuge behind the other men in the room, begging them
+to save him. Tecumseh stood a moment sternly watching the great fellow.
+Then he went up and patted the cowering creature on the shoulder, saying
+good naturedly, "Big baby; big baby!"
+
+In 1804 and 1805, before the new chief was ready for decided action,
+Governor Harrison, of Indiana Territory, made additional treaties with a
+few weak and submissive tribes, by which he laid claim to more land.
+This measure aroused such general indignation among the more hardy and
+warlike Indians that Tecumseh felt the time had come when he might win
+them to support his cherished plan of united opposition to the whites.
+
+
+
+
+V. TECUMSEH'S BROTHER, THE PROPHET
+
+
+Tecumseh had not been alone in his anxiety for the future of his race.
+After the death of his elder brother he had made his twin brother,
+Laulewasikaw, his trusted comrade. Together they had talked over the
+decay in power and manliness that was swiftly overtaking the tribes, and
+the wrongs the red men suffered at the hands of the white. They had not
+spent their strength in useless murmurings, but had analyzed the causes
+of trouble and decided how they might be removed.
+
+[Illustration: THE PROPHET]
+
+One day after brooding deeply over these matters Laulewasikaw fell upon
+the earth in a swoon. For a long time he lay quite stiff and rigid, and
+those who saw him thought he was dead. But by and by he gave a deep moan
+and opened his eyes. For a moment he looked about as if he did not know
+where he was. On coming to his senses he explained to his friends that
+he had had a vision in which he had seen the Great Spirit, who had told
+him what to do to save the Indian people from destruction.
+
+From that time he styled himself "Prophet" and claimed to act under the
+direction of the Great Spirit. He changed his name to Tenskwatawa to
+signify that he was the "Open Door," through which all might learn the
+will of the Great Spirit.
+
+Though professing to have supernatural power himself, Tenskwatawa
+realized the degrading effect of petty superstition and the terror and
+injury the medicine men were able to bring upon the simple-minded
+Indians who believed in their charms and spells. He denounced the
+practice of sorcery and witchcraft as against the will of the Great
+Spirit.
+
+Many of the Prophet's teachings were such as we should all approve of.
+Wishing to purify the individual and family life of the Indians, he
+forbade men to marry more than one wife, and commanded them to take care
+of their families and to provide for those who were old and sick. He
+required them to work, to till the ground and raise corn, and to hunt.
+
+Some of his teachings were intended to make the Indians as a people
+independent of the white race. The Great Spirit, said Tenskwatawa, had
+made the Indians to be a single people, quite distinct from the white
+men and for different purposes. The tribes must therefore stop fighting
+with one another and must unite and live peaceably together as one
+tribe. They must not fight with the white men, either Americans or
+British. Neither must they intermarry with them or adopt their customs.
+The Great Spirit wished his red children to throw aside the garments of
+cotton and wool they had borrowed from the whites and clothe themselves
+in the skins of wild animals; he wished them to stop feeding on pork and
+beef, and bread made from wheat, and instead to eat the flesh of the
+wild deer and the bison, which he had provided for them, and bread made
+from Indian corn. Above all, they must let alone whisky which might do
+well enough for white men, but was never intended for Indians.
+
+Furthermore, Tenskwatawa taught the Indians that a tribe had no right to
+sell the land it lived on. The Great Spirit had given the red people the
+land that they might enjoy it in common, just as they did the light and
+the air. He did not wish them to measure it off and build fences around
+it. Since no one chief or tribe owned the land, no single chief or tribe
+could sell it. No Indian territory therefore could be sold to the white
+men without the consent of all tribes and all Indians.
+
+The words of the Prophet were eagerly listened to. Indians came from far
+and near to hear him. Some were so excited by what he said against
+witchcraft that they put to death those who persisted in using charms
+and pronouncing incantations.
+
+[Illustration: ECLIPSE OF THE SUN]
+
+The sayings and doings of the Shawnee Prophet soon attracted the
+attention of the Governor of Indiana Territory. Pity for the victims of
+the Prophet's misguided zeal, and alarm because of the influence
+Tenskwatawa seemed to be gaining, led Governor William Henry Harrison to
+take measures to check the popularity of a man who seemed to be a fraud
+and a mischief-maker. He sent to the Delaware Indians the following
+"speech":
+
+"My Children: My heart is filled with grief, and my eyes are dissolved
+in tears at the news which has reached me. * * * Who is this pretended
+prophet who dares to speak in the name of the Great Creator? Examine
+him. Is he more wise and virtuous than you are yourselves, that he
+should be selected to convey to you the orders of your God? Demand of
+him some proofs at least of his being the messenger of the Deity. If God
+has really employed him, He has doubtless authorized him to perform
+miracles, that he may be known and received as a prophet. If he is
+really a prophet, ask him to cause the sun to stand still, the moon to
+alter its course, the rivers to cease to flow, or the dead to rise from
+their graves. If he does these things you may believe that he has been
+sent from God. He tells you that the Great Spirit commands you to punish
+with death those who deal in magic, and that he is authorized to point
+them out. Wretched delusion! Is, then, the Master of Life obliged to
+employ mortal man to punish those who offend Him? * * * Clear your eyes,
+I beseech you, from the mist which surrounds them. No longer be imposed
+on by the arts of the impostor. Drive him from your town and let peace
+and harmony prevail amongst you."
+
+This letter increased rather than diminished the influence of the
+Prophet. He met the Governor's doubt of his power with fine scorn and
+named a day on which he would "put the sun under his feet." Strange to
+say, on the day named an eclipse of the sun occurred, and the affrighted
+savages quaked with fear and thought it was all the work of Tenskwatawa.
+
+
+
+
+VI. GREENVILLE
+
+
+Tenskwatawa met with strong opposition from some of the Indians. The
+small chiefs especially were displeased with the idea that the tribes
+should unite to form one people, as that would take away their own
+power. They, therefore, heard the Prophet with anger, and carried away
+an evil report of him.
+
+Still, many believed all that he said, and wished to gain the good will
+of the Great Spirit by doing his bidding. They were willing to leave
+their tribes to follow the Prophet. So it happened that in 1806
+Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh with their followers established a town at
+Greenville, Ohio. There all lived in accordance with the Prophet's
+teachings. They strengthened their bodies by running and swimming and
+wrestling. They lived at peace without drunkenness. They minded their
+own affairs. Now, all this was just what President Jefferson, the
+Indians' friend, had often advised the red men to do.
+
+Yet the white neighbors were greatly disturbed and wished to break up
+the Prophet's town. In the first place the town was on land that had
+been ceded to the United States, or the Seventeen Fires (as the Indians
+picturesquely named the new nation), by the treaty of Greenville. Then,
+the visiting Indians who came from all parts of the country to hear the
+words of the Prophet were a constant source of alarm to the border
+settlers. And, although he professed to preach peace, the Prophet was
+believed by many to be preparing secretly for war.
+
+Besides, innocent as most of his teachings appeared, those regarding
+property rights were hostile to the white race and decidedly annoying to
+the men who coveted the hunting grounds of the savages. The United
+States government in acquiring land from the Indians had usually
+proceeded as if it were the property of the tribe that camped or hunted
+upon it. The Indian Commissioners had had little difficulty in gaining
+rich tracts of land from weak tribes, at comparatively little expense,
+by this method. When it came to a question of land, even Jefferson had
+little sympathy for the Indians. He had not scrupled to advise his agent
+to encourage chiefs to get into debt at the trading posts, so that when
+hard pressed for money they might be persuaded to part with the lands of
+their tribes.
+
+Now Tecumseh had seen that the whole struggle between the red men and
+the white was a question of land. If the white men were kind to the
+Indians and came among them with fair promises and goodly presents,
+their object was to get land. If they came with threats and the sword,
+their object was, still, to get land. They needed the land. They could
+not grow and prosper without it. But if the white men needed land in
+order to live how much more did the Indians need it! Where a few acres
+of farm land would give a white family comfortable support, many acres
+were needed to support an Indian family by the chase. Tecumseh argued in
+this way: The Seventeen Fires unite to get our lands from us. Let us
+follow their example. Let us unite to hold our lands. Let us keep at
+peace with them and do them no harm. Let us give them no reason to fight
+with us and take our land in battle. When they offer to buy we will
+refuse to sell. If they try to force us to part with our lands we will
+stand together and resist them like men.
+
+He heartily agreed with his brother's teachings concerning property
+rights, and possibly suggested many ideas that Tenskwatawa fancied he
+received from the Great Spirit. Certain it is that Tecumseh had long
+held similar views and had done his best to spread them. Although
+Tenskwatawa was more conspicuous than Tecumseh, the latter had the
+stronger character. For a time he kept in the background and let his
+brother do the talking, but his personal influence had much to do with
+giving weight to the Prophet's words.
+
+The brothers had not been at Greenville long before they were summoned
+to Fort Wayne by the commandant there to hear a letter from their
+"father," the President of the Seventeen Fires. Tecumseh refused to go.
+He demanded that the letter be brought to him. This put the officer in a
+trying position, but there was nothing left for him to do but send the
+letter to Greenville. It proved to be a request that the Prophet move
+his town beyond the boundaries of the territory owned by the United
+States. The letter was courteous, and offered the Indians assistance to
+move and build new homes.
+
+To the President's request Tecumseh sent a decided refusal. He said:
+"These lands are ours; we were the first owners; no one has the right to
+move us. The Great Spirit appointed this place for us to light our fires
+and here we will stay."
+
+The settlement continued to be a source of annoyance to the government.
+Indians kept coming from distant regions to visit the Prophet. Rumor
+said that the brothers were working under the direction of British
+agents, who were trying to rouse the Indians to make war on the United
+States.
+
+To counteract the British influence the Governor of Ohio sent a message
+to Greenville. At a council called to consider the Governor's letter,
+the chief, Blue Jacket, and the Prophet made speeches in which they
+declared their wish to remain at peace with the British and the Long
+Knives, as they called the settlers.
+
+Tecumseh accompanied the commissioners on their return and held a
+conference with the Governor of Ohio. He spoke plainly, saying the
+Indians had little cause for friendliness to either the British or the
+people of the United States, both of whom had robbed them of their lands
+by making unjust treaties. But he assured the governor that for their
+own sake the Indians wished to remain at peace with both nations.
+
+The Governor, like all who heard Tecumseh speak, was impressed with his
+sense and honesty, and believed that the Indians were not planning war.
+
+A little later Tecumseh was again called to Springfield to attend a
+large council of Indians and white men. The council was held to
+determine who was responsible for the murder of a white man, who had
+been found dead not far from Springfield. On this occasion Tecumseh
+attracted much attention. In the first place he refused to give up his
+arms, and entered the council with the dignity of manner and the arms of
+a warrior.
+
+He made a speech of such passion and eloquence that the interpreter was
+unable to keep up with him or translate his ideas. The white men were
+left to guess his meaning by watching his wrathful face and the
+excitement of his hearers. The Indians, however, understood him
+perfectly, and when the council was over and they went to their homes
+all repeated what they could remember of the wonderful speech.
+
+The influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh increased. The excitement
+among the Indians became more general. Governor Harrison again wrote to
+the Shawnee tribes. He began by reminding them of the treaties between
+the Indians and the people of the United States:
+
+"My children, listen to me. I speak in the name of your father, the
+great chief of the Seventeen Fires.
+
+"My children, it is now twelve years since the tomahawk, which you had
+raised by the advice of your father, the King of Great Britain, was
+buried at Greenville, in the presence of that great warrior, General
+Wayne.
+
+"My children, you then promised, and the Great Spirit heard it, that you
+would in future live in peace and friendship with your brothers, the
+Americans. You made a treaty with your father, and one that contained a
+number of good things, equally beneficial to all the tribes of red
+people who were parties to it.
+
+"My children, you promised in that treaty to acknowledge no other father
+than the chief of the Seventeen Fires, and never to listen to the
+proposition of any foreign nation. You promised never to lift up the
+tomahawk against any of your father's children, and to give notice of
+any other tribe that intended it. Your father also promised to do
+something for you, particularly to deliver to you every year a certain
+quantity of goods, to prevent any white man from settling on your lands
+without your consent, or from doing you any personal injury. He promised
+to run a line between your land and his, so that you might know your
+own; and you were to be permitted to live and hunt upon your father's
+land as long as you behaved yourselves well. My children, which of these
+articles has your father broken? You know that he has observed them all
+with the utmost good faith. But, my children, have you done so? Have you
+not always had your ears open to receive bad advice from the white
+people beyond the lakes?"
+
+Although Governor Harrison writes in this letter as if he thought the
+white men had kept their part of the treaty, he had written quite
+differently to President Jefferson, telling him how the settlers were
+continually violating the treaty by hunting on Indian territory and
+reporting that it was impossible for the Indians to get justice when
+their kinsmen were murdered by white men; for even if a murderer was
+brought to trial no jury of white men would pronounce the murderer of an
+Indian guilty. "All these injuries the Indians have hitherto borne with
+astonishing patience." Thus Mr. Harrison had written to the President,
+but it was evidently his policy to try to make the Indians think they
+had no cause for complaint. In his letter to the Shawnees he went on to
+say:
+
+"My children, I have heard bad news. The sacred spot where the great
+council fire was kindled, around which the Seventeen Fires and ten
+tribes of their children smoked the pipe of peace--that very spot where
+the Great Spirit saw his red and white children encircle themselves with
+the chain of friendship--that place has been selected for dark and
+bloody councils.
+
+"My children, this business must be stopped. You have called in a number
+of men from the most distant tribes to listen to a fool, who speaks not
+the words of the Great Spirit, but those of the devil and of the British
+agents. My children, your conduct has much alarmed the white settlers
+near you. They desire that you will send away those people, and if they
+wish to have the impostor with them they can carry him. Let him go to
+the lakes; he can hear the British more distinctly."
+
+To this letter the Prophet sent a dignified answer, denying the charges
+the Governor had made. He spoke with regret rather than anger, and said
+that "his father (the Governor) had been listening to evil birds."
+
+
+
+
+VII. THE PROPHET'S TOWN
+
+
+In 1808 Tecumseh and the Prophet moved with their followers to the
+Wabash Valley, and established on the Tippecanoe River a village known
+as the Prophet's Town.
+
+Several advantages were to be gained by moving from Greenville to
+Tippecanoe, all of which probably had their weight in influencing the
+brothers to make this change. In the first place, there seems to be
+little doubt that Tecumseh wanted peace, at least until he had built up
+a confederacy strong enough to fight the Americans with some hope of
+success. At Greenville the Indians were so near the settlers that there
+was constant danger of trouble between them. And Tecumseh realized that
+any wrong done by his people might be made an excuse for the government
+to take more lands from the Indians.
+
+Then, too, this redskinned statesman realized in his way that the best
+way to prevent war was to be ready for it. He wished his people to be
+independent of the whites for their livelihood. The Wabash Valley
+offered the richest hunting grounds between the Lakes and the Ohio. Here
+they need not starve should they be denied aid by the United States
+government.
+
+The location of the new village had further political value. It was in
+the center of a district where many tribes camped, over which the
+brothers wished to extend their influence. From the new town
+communication with the British could be more easily carried on. This was
+important in view of the troubled relations existing between the United
+States and Great Britain. Tecumseh was shrewd enough to see that though
+under ordinary circumstances the Indians were not sufficiently strong to
+be very formidable to the United States government, their friendship or
+enmity would be an important consideration in the war that threatened.
+And he hoped that the Long Knives' anxiety lest they should join the
+British would prevent their doing anything to gain the ill will of the
+Indians.
+
+The brothers wished Governor Harrison to understand that their desire
+was for peace, and that they did not intend to make war unless driven to
+do so. Accordingly, in August, Tenskwatawa, with a band of followers,
+made the Governor a visit. The Indians stayed at Vincennes for about two
+weeks. Harrison was surprised to find the Prophet an intelligent and
+gifted man. He tested the sincerity of the Prophet's followers by
+questions as to their belief and by putting in their way opportunities
+to drink whisky. He was again surprised to find them very earnest in
+their faith and able to resist the fire water. In Tenskwatawa's farewell
+speech to Harrison, he said:
+
+"Father: It is three years since I first began that system of religion
+which I now practice. The white people and some of the Indians were
+against me, but I had no other intention but to introduce among the
+Indians those good principles of religion which the white people
+profess. I was spoken badly of by the white people, who reproached me
+with misleading the Indians, but I defy them to say that I did anything
+amiss. * * *
+
+"The Great Spirit told me to tell the Indians that he had made them, and
+made the world--that he had placed them on it to do good and not evil.
+
+"I told all the redskins that the way they were in was not good and they
+ought to abandon it; that we ought to consider ourselves as one man, but
+we ought to live according to our customs, the red people after their
+fashion and the white people after theirs; particularly that they should
+not drink whisky; that it was not made for them, but for the white
+people who knew how to use it, and that it is the cause of all the
+mischiefs which the Indians suffer, and that we must follow the
+directions of the Great Spirit, and listen to Him, as it was He who made
+us; determine to listen to nothing that is bad; do not take up the
+tomahawk should it be offered by the British or by the Long Knives; do
+not meddle with anything that does not belong to you, but mind your own
+business and cultivate the ground, that your women and children may have
+enough to live on.
+
+"I now inform you that it is our intention to live in peace with our
+father and his people forever.
+
+"My father, I have informed you what we mean to do, and I call the Great
+Spirit to witness the truth of my declaration. The religion which I have
+established for the last three years has been attended by all the
+different tribes of Indians in this part of the world. Those Indians
+were once different people; they are now but one; they are determined to
+practise what I have communicated to them, that has come directly from
+the Great Spirit through me."
+
+The Prophet made a favorable impression on the Governor, and after his
+visit affairs went smoothly for a time. The Prophet preached and his
+followers worked. Tecumseh traveled about north and south, east and
+west, talking with the Indians and trying to unite the tribes and to
+persuade them to follow his brother's teachings.
+
+In the meantime, settlers came steadily from the south and the east, and
+the governor felt the need of more land. Since he saw no prospect of
+immediate trouble with the British and was convinced that the Prophet
+had not been preparing the Indians for war, he determined to attempt to
+extend the United States territory.
+
+On the thirtieth of September, 1809, Governor Harrison called all the
+tribes that claimed certain lands between the White and Wabash rivers to
+a council. Only a few of the weak and degenerate tribes answered the
+summons. Nevertheless, he went through the ceremony of making a treaty
+by which the United States government claimed three million acres of
+Indian land.
+
+This act of Harrison's lighted a hundred council fires. Everywhere the
+Indians denounced this treaty. Soon word reached Vincennes that tribes
+that had before stood apart cherishing their independence had declared
+their willingness to join the brothers at Tippecanoe. At the Prophet's
+town the voice of the warrior, Tecumseh, sounded above that of the
+preacher, Tenskwatawa; and running and wrestling were said to have given
+place to the practice of shooting and wielding the tomahawk.
+
+When the annual supply of salt was sent to Tippecanoe, the Prophet
+refused to accept it, and sent word to the Governor that the Americans
+had dealt unfairly with the Indians, and that friendly relations could
+be renewed only by the nullification of the treaty of 1809.
+
+The Indians were evidently ready for war, and repeated rumors of plots
+to attack the settlements caused great anxiety among the frontiersmen.
+The Indians now recognized Tecumseh as their leader, and looked to him
+for the word of command. Realizing how much loss of life and land a
+defeat would bring to the Indians, he worked tirelessly to make his
+people ready for war, but resolved not to hazard a battle unless driven
+to do so.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. THE COUNCIL BETWEEN HARRISON AND TECUMSEH
+
+
+Governor Harrison sent agents to Tippecanoe, who brought back word that
+the Indians were preparing for war; that Tecumseh had gathered about him
+five thousand warriors, and that the British were encouraging them to go
+to war, and promising them aid. He therefore sent a letter to the
+Prophet telling him of the reports he had received, and warning him not
+to make an enemy of the Seventeen Fires. He wrote:
+
+"Don't deceive yourselves; do not believe that all the nations of
+Indians united are able to resist the force of the Seventeen Fires. I
+know your warriors are brave; but ours are not less so. But what can a
+few brave warriors do against the innumerable warriors of the Seventeen
+Fires? Our blue-coats are more numerous than you can count; our hunters
+are like the leaves of the forest, or the grains of sand on the Wabash.
+Do not think that the red-coats can protect you; they are not able to
+protect themselves. They do not think of going to war with us. If they
+did, you would in a few moons see our flag wave over all the forts of
+Canada. What reason have you to complain of the Seventeen Fires? Have
+they taken anything from you? Have they ever violated the treaties made
+with the red men? You say they have purchased lands from those who had
+no right to sell them. Show that this is true and the land will be
+instantly restored. Show us the rightful owners. I have full power to
+arrange this business; but if you would rather carry your complaints
+before your great father, the President, you shall be indulged. I will
+immediately take means to send you, with those chiefs that you may
+choose, to the city where your father lives. Everything necessary shall
+be prepared for your journey, and means taken for your safe return."
+
+[Illustration: HARRISON'S COUNCIL WITH TECUMSEH AT VINCENNES]
+
+Instead of answering this letter, Tenskwatawa said he would send his
+brother, Tecumseh, to Vincennes to confer with the Governor. Early in
+August a fleet of eighty canoes started down the Wabash for the capital.
+Tecumseh, with four hundred warriors at his back, all armed and painted
+as if for battle, was on his way to meet in council for the first time
+the man who was responsible for the treaty of 1809.
+
+The party encamped just outside of Vincennes, and on the morning
+appointed for the council Tecumseh appeared attended by forty warriors.
+He refused to meet the Governor and his officers in council on the porch
+of the Governor's house, saying he preferred to hold the conference
+under a clump of trees not far off. The Governor consented and ordered
+benches and chairs to be taken to the grove. When Tecumseh was asked to
+take a chair he replied pompously: "The sun is my father; the earth is
+my mother; on her bosom I will repose," and seated himself on the
+ground. His warriors followed his example. In his speech Tecumseh stated
+plainly the grievances of the Indians. He said:
+
+"Brother, since the peace was made, you have killed some Shawnees,
+Winnebagoes, Delawares, and Miamis, and you have taken our land from us,
+and I do not see how we can remain at peace if you continue to do so.
+You try to force the red people to do some injury. It is you that are
+pushing them on to do mischief. You endeavor to make distinctions. You
+wish to prevent the Indians doing as we wish them--to unite, and let
+them consider their lands as the common property of the whole; you take
+tribes aside and advise them not to come into this measure; and until
+our plan is accomplished we do not wish to accept your invitation to go
+to see the President. You want by your distinctions of Indian tribes in
+allotting to each a particular tract of land, to make them to war with
+each other. You never see an Indian come and endeavor to make the white
+people do so. You are continually driving the red people; when, at last,
+you will drive them into the Great Lake, where they can neither stand
+nor walk.
+
+"Brother, you ought to know what you are doing with the Indians. Perhaps
+it is by direction of the President to make these distinctions. It is a
+very bad thing and we do not like it. Since my residence at Tippecanoe
+we have endeavored to level all distinctions--to destroy village chiefs,
+by whom all mischief is done. It is they who sell our lands to the
+Americans. Our object is to let our affairs be transacted by warriors.
+
+"Brother, only a few had part in the selling of this land and the goods
+that were given for it. The treaty was afterwards brought here, and the
+Weas were induced to give their consent because of their small numbers.
+The treaty at Fort Wayne was made through the threats of Winnemac; but
+in future we are prepared to punish those chiefs who may come forward
+to propose to sell the land. If you continue to purchase of them it will
+produce war among the different tribes, and, at last, I do not know what
+will be the consequence to the white people.
+
+"Brother, I was glad to hear your speech. You said that if we could show
+that the land was sold by people that had no right to sell, you would
+restore it. Those that did sell it did not own it. It was me. Those
+tribes set up a claim, but the tribes with me will not agree to their
+claim. If the land is not restored to us you will see when we return to
+our homes how it will be settled. We shall have a great council, at
+which all the tribes will be present, when we shall show to those who
+sold that they had no right to the claim they set up; and we will see
+what will be done to those chiefs that did sell the land to you. I am
+not alone in this determination; it is the determination of all the
+warriors and red people that listen to me. I now wish you to listen to
+me. If you do not, it will appear as if you wished me to kill all the
+chiefs that sold you the land. I tell you so because I am authorized by
+all the tribes to do so. I am the head of them all; I am a warrior, and
+all the warriors will meet together in two or three moons from this;
+then I will call for those chiefs that sold you the land and shall know
+what to do with them. If you do not restore the land, you will have a
+hand in killing them."
+
+Governor Harrison began his reply by saying that the Indian tribes were
+and always had been independent of one another, and had a right to sell
+their own lands, without interference from others.
+
+Tecumseh might have answered that the Seventeen Fires had already
+recognized that the land was the common property of the tribes by
+treating with ten of them in making the Greenville purchase. But instead
+he and his followers lost their temper and jumped to their feet in a
+rage, as if to attack the Governor. And the council ended in an
+undignified row.
+
+Tecumseh regretted this very much. He sent an apology to Governor
+Harrison and requested another meeting. Another council was called and
+this time the Indians controlled their anger; but Tecumseh maintained
+till the last that the Indians would never allow the white people to
+take possession of the land they claimed by the treaty of 1809.
+
+The next day Governor Harrison, accompanied only by an interpreter,
+courageously visited Tecumseh's encampment and had a long talk with him.
+Tecumseh said the Indians had no wish for war, and would gladly be at
+peace with the Long Knives if the Governor could persuade the President
+to give back the disputed land. He said he had no wish to join the
+British, who were not the true friends of the Indians, but were always
+urging them to fight against the Americans for their own advantage.
+
+Governor Harrison said he would report to the President all that
+Tecumseh had said, but that he knew the President would not give up the
+land he had purchased.
+
+"Well," said Tecumseh, bluntly, "as the great chief is to determine the
+matter, I hope the Great Spirit will put sense enough into his head to
+induce him to direct you to give up this land. It is true, he is so far
+off he will not be hurt by the war; he may sit in his town and drink his
+wine, while you and I will have to fight it out."
+
+
+
+
+IX. PREPARATIONS FOR WAR
+
+
+A year of unrest and anxiety followed the council at Vincennes. The
+United States government made an attempt to survey the new purchase, but
+the surveyors were driven off by the Indians.
+
+Occasional outrages were committed on both sides. Horses were stolen.
+Several white men were murdered by Indians, and several Indians were
+murdered by white men.
+
+In the spring of 1811, when the usual supply of salt was sent up the
+Wabash to be distributed among the tribes, the Indians at the Prophet's
+town, instead of again rejecting it, seized it all. This was done in the
+absence of Tecumseh, who seemed in every way to seek to avoid bringing
+about war.
+
+Governor Harrison knew the treacherous nature of Indians and feared that
+Tecumseh's desire for peace might be feigned in order to throw him off
+his guard. He reasoned that it was scarcely to be expected and little to
+be wished that the United States should relinquish the territory for
+which the Indians were contending. The Indians would hardly give up the
+land without war. Delay only gave Tecumseh time to strengthen his band.
+Harrison thought it wise to force the brothers to open war or to give
+assurance of peace. Accordingly, he wrote them a letter or speech, in
+which he said:
+
+"Brothers, this is the third year that all the white people in this
+country have been alarmed at your proceedings; you threaten us with war;
+you invite all the tribes to the north and west of you to join against
+us.
+
+"Brothers, your warriors who have lately been here deny this, but I have
+received information from every direction; the tribes on the Mississippi
+have sent me word that you intended to murder me, and then to commence a
+war upon our people. I have also received the speech you sent to the
+Pottawottomies and others to join you for that purpose; but if I had no
+other evidence of your hostility to us your seizing the salt I lately
+sent up the Wabash is sufficient. Brothers, our citizens are alarmed,
+and my warriors are preparing themselves, not to strike you but to
+defend themselves, and their women and children. You shall not surprise
+us as you expect to do; you are about to undertake a very rash act. As a
+friend, I advise you to consider well of it; a little reflection may
+save us a great deal of trouble and prevent much mischief; it is not yet
+too late.
+
+"Brothers, if you wish to satisfy us that your intentions are good,
+follow the advice I have given you before: that is, that one or both of
+you should visit the President of the United States and lay your
+grievances before him. He will treat you well, will listen to what you
+say, and if you can show him that you have been injured, you will
+receive justice. If you will follow my advice in this respect it will
+convince the citizens of this country and myself that you have no design
+to attack them. Brothers, with respect to the lands that were purchased
+last fall, I can enter into no negotiations with you on that subject;
+the affair is in the hands of the President. If you wish to go and see
+him, I will supply you with the means."
+
+If either of the brothers should act upon the Governor's advice and go
+to Washington he would be virtually a hostage in the hands of the
+government, and the Indians would not dare to do the settlers any harm
+lest their leader should come to grief because of their misdoing.
+
+Tecumseh sent the Governor a brief, friendly reply, in which he promised
+to go to Vincennes himself in a short time. Governor Harrison did not
+know just what to expect from the proposed visit, but he remembered
+Pontiac's attempt to capture Detroit by surprise and he prepared to give
+his guest a warlike reception if need be.
+
+Late in July the chief arrived, attended by about three hundred Indians.
+A council was held which the Governor opened by recounting the injuries
+the white men had suffered at the hands of the Indians, and by again
+making the charge that the Indians were preparing for war. Tecumseh
+replied with a counter enumeration of injuries, and said again that the
+Indians would never give up the land in dispute, but that it was his
+wish and hope that the matter could be settled peaceably. He said that
+he was trying to build up a strong nation of red men, after the model of
+the Seventeen Fires, and that he was on his way to visit the southern
+tribes to invite them to join his league. He assured Governor Harrison
+that he had given the strictest orders that the northern Indians should
+remain at peace during his absence, and that as soon as he returned he
+would go to Washington to settle the land question.
+
+[Illustration: TECUMSEH INCITING THE CREEKS]
+
+Tecumseh then hastened to the South, where he worked to good effect
+among the Creeks and Seminoles, persuading them to join his confederacy.
+It is said that where he could not persuade he threatened. One story
+illustrating his manner of dealing with those that resisted him is as
+follows: Visiting a tribe which listened coldly to his words and seemed
+unwilling to take part in his plans he suddenly lost all patience. With
+fierce gestures and a terrible look he shouted: "You do not think what I
+say is true. You do not believe this is the wish of the Great Spirit. I
+will show you. When I reach Detroit I will stamp my foot on the earth
+and the earth will tremble and shake your houses down about your ears."
+The tale goes on to say that after due time had elapsed for Tecumseh to
+reach Detroit an earthquake shook down all the dwellings of the village
+he had left in anger. Whether this is true or not, Tecumseh certainly
+had wonderful influence over all tribes. Governor Harrison wrote to the
+Secretary of War about him: "If it were not for the vicinity of the
+United States, he would perhaps be the founder of an empire that would
+rival in glory Mexico or Peru. No difficulties deter him. For four years
+he has been in constant motion. You see him to-day on the Wabash, and in
+a short time hear of him on the shores of Lake Erie or Michigan, or on
+the banks of the Mississippi; and wherever he goes he makes an
+impression favorable to his purpose. He is now upon the last round to
+put a finishing stroke to his work. I hope, however, before his return
+that that part of the work which he considered complete will be
+demolished, and even its foundation rooted up."
+
+In the meantime Tecumseh trusted Governor Harrison with child-like
+simplicity. It seems not to have occurred to him that the Governor would
+not remain inactive until he had completed his arrangements and opened
+the war. Indeed, there were those at Washington who also thought this
+was what Harrison would and ought to do; that is, keep on the defensive
+until the Indians made some outbreak.
+
+This was not the feeling on the frontier, however. The frontiersmen were
+in no humor to sit still and wait for the Indians to scalp them at their
+plows or burn them in their beds. Their cry was, "On to Tippecanoe!"
+
+This spirit was in accord with the Governor's inclination. A man of
+action, and bred to military life, Harrison favored prompt, vigorous
+measures. He believed this a favorable time for an attack on the
+Prophet's town. Tecumseh was well out of the way, and had left orders
+for the tribes to remain at peace during his absence. As many would
+hesitate to disobey his command, there would be no united resistance.
+Besides, the Prophet had been left in charge, and a victory over him
+would destroy the Indians' faith in his supernatural power. This faith
+Harrison had come to regard as the backbone of the Indian alliance.
+Moreover, the British were not in a position to give the Indians open
+assistance and they would learn from a few battles fought without their
+aid how little trust was to be put in British promises.
+
+For these reasons, Harrison wrote to the War Department urging immediate
+action and asking for troops and authority to march against Tippecanoe.
+The troops were granted, but with the instruction that President
+Madison wished peace with the Indians preserved if possible.
+
+
+
+
+X. THE BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE
+
+
+In August, in the year 1811, Governor Harrison sent stern "speeches" to
+the Indian tribes, threatening them with punishment if they did not
+cease their preparations for war and comply with his demands.
+
+On September the twenty-fifth the Prophet's reply arrived at Vincennes.
+He gave repeated assurances that the Indians had no intention of making
+war on the settlers, and he promised to comply with whatever demands the
+Governor might make. To this message Harrison sent no answer.
+
+The Governor was now ready for action. He had a force of about a
+thousand fighting men. The militia were reinforced by three hundred
+regulars, and one hundred and thirty mounted men, under a brave
+Kentuckian, J. H. Daveiss, who wanted a share in the glory of an
+encounter with the Indians. Later two companies of mounted riflemen were
+added to this force. Harrison sent a detachment of men up the river to
+build a fort on the new land. By this act he took formal possession of
+it.
+
+He felt his hands tied by the President's instructions to avoid war with
+the Indians if possible, and awaited developments with impatience. He
+expected the Indians to oppose in some way the building of the
+fort--and his expectations were at length realized. One of the
+sentinels who kept guard while the soldiers worked on the fort was shot
+and severely wounded. Harrison thought this might be regarded as the
+opening of hostilities, and determined to march upon the Prophet's town.
+A letter from the War Department received at about this time left him
+free to carry out his plans.
+
+It was late in October before the new fort, named Fort Harrison in honor
+of the Governor, was finished, and the force ready to leave. Then
+Harrison sent messengers to the Prophet demanding that the Indians
+should return stolen horses to their owners, and surrender Indians who
+had murdered white men. He also demanded that the Winnebagoes,
+Pottawottomies and Kickapoos who were at Tippecanoe should return to
+their tribes. Without waiting for a reply or appointing a time or place
+where the Prophet's answer might find him, Harrison began his march on
+Tippecanoe. Through the disputed land the armed forces marched; on, on,
+into the undisputed territory of the Indians.
+
+Still they met with no opposition. Not an Indian was seen until November
+the sixth, when the troops were within eleven miles of Tippecanoe. And
+although many of them were seen from that time on, they could not be
+tempted to any greater indiscretion than the making of threatening signs
+in response to the provoking remarks of the interpreters. When within
+two miles of Tippecanoe, Harrison found himself and his army in a
+dangerous pass that offered the Indians a most inviting chance for an
+ambush. But he was not molested.
+
+When the troops were safe in the open country once more, Harrison held a
+conference with his officers. All were eager to advance at once and
+attack the town. They held that if there was any question about the
+right or the necessity of an attack it should have been decided before
+they started; now that they had arrived at the stronghold of the Indians
+there was only one safe course, and that was immediate attack.
+
+Perhaps the circumstances of the march had persuaded Harrison of the
+sincerity of the Indians' plan for peace, and he felt that after all the
+affair might be settled without bloodshed. At any rate, he was most
+reluctant to comply with the wishes of his aids. But at last yielding to
+their urgency he gave the order to advance and storm the town. Scarcely
+had he done so, however, before he was turned from his purpose by the
+arrival of messengers from the Prophet begging that the difficulties be
+settled without a battle. Harrison sent back word that he had no
+intention of making an attack unless the Prophet refused to concede to
+his demands. He consented to suspend hostilities for the night and give
+Tenskwatawa a hearing in the morning.
+
+Greatly against the will of his officers, who had no faith in the
+Indians' professions of friendliness and saw that every hour of delay
+might be put to good use by the Prophet, Harrison encamped for the
+night. He seems to have had little fear of an attack, as he did not
+even fortify his camp with intrenchments. But his men slept on their
+arms that night, and, although no sound from the Indian village
+disturbed the stillness, there was a general feeling of restlessness.
+
+Between four and five in the morning, in the dark that comes before the
+dawn, a sentinel's shot followed by the Indian yell brought every man to
+his feet. As the soldiers stood in the light of the camp fires, peering
+into the blackness with cocked muskets, they were shot down by savages,
+who rushed upon them with such force that they broke the line of guards
+and made an entrance into the camp. Had the number of assailants been
+greater, or had Harrison been less alert, they would doubtless have
+created a panic. But Harrison was already up and on the point of rousing
+his soldiers when the alarm sounded. With perfect self-possession he
+rode about where bullets were flying thickest, giving orders and
+encouraging his men.
+
+The brave Daveiss, having gained Harrison's consent, recklessly plunged
+with only a few followers into a thicket to dislodge some Indians who
+were firing upon the troops at close range. He was soon surrounded and
+shot down.
+
+The Indians fought with great persistence and kept up the attack for two
+hours, during which the troops held their ground with admirable
+firmness. As day dawned the Indians gradually withdrew.
+
+Harrison's situation was perilous. Counting killed and wounded he had
+already lost one hundred and fifty fighting men. The Indians might
+return at any moment in larger numbers to attack his exhausted force.
+Provisions were low and it was cold and raining. The men stood at their
+posts through the day without food or fire. All day and all night the
+soldiers kept watch. The second day, the horsemen cautiously advanced to
+the town. To their relief they found it empty. The Indians had evidently
+fled in haste, leaving behind large stores of provisions. Harrison's
+troops helped themselves to what they wanted, burned the deserted town,
+and returned to Vincennes with rapid marches.
+
+[Illustration: BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE]
+
+As a result of the battle of Tippecanoe, Harrison was the hero of the
+hour. News of the destruction of the Prophet's town carried cheer into
+every white man's cabin on the frontier.
+
+
+
+
+XI. REORGANIZATION OF THE INDIANS
+
+
+Of the six hundred Indians that Harrison estimated had taken part in the
+battle of Tippecanoe, thirty-eight were found dead on the field. Though
+that was not a large number from a white man's point of view, the
+Indians regarded the loss of thirty-eight of their warriors as no light
+matter.
+
+But that was not the heaviest blow to the confederation that Tecumseh
+and the Prophet had worked so hard to establish. Tippecanoe had been
+regarded with superstitious veneration as the Prophet's town, a sort of
+holy city, under the special protection of the Great Spirit. The
+destruction of the town, therefore, seriously affected the reputation of
+the Prophet.
+
+It is hard to tell what part the Prophet played in the attack on
+Governor Harrison's forces. In their anxiety to escape punishment from
+the United States government many Indians who were known to have taken
+part in the battle excused their conduct by saying they had acted in
+obedience to the Prophet's directions. They told strange stories of his
+urging them to battle with promises that the Great Spirit would protect
+them from the bullets of the enemy.
+
+On the other hand, the Prophet said the young men who would not listen
+to his commands were to blame for the trouble.
+
+The fact that the Indians did not follow up their advantage over
+Harrison, and instead of renewing the attack with their full force,
+fled from him, would indicate that there certainly was a large party in
+favor of peace. It seems probable that that party was made up of the
+Prophet and his most faithful followers, rather than of those Indians
+who, while pretending to be the friends of the United States and
+accusing the Prophet, admitted that they had done the fighting.
+Tenskwatawa had had advice from the British, and strict orders from
+Tecumseh to remain at peace, and he had shown in many ways his anxiety
+to appease Harrison and keep the Indians from doing violence. For some
+time the influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh had been more to restrain
+and direct than to excite the anger of the Indians which had been
+kindled by the treaty of 1809, and was ready to break out at any
+instant. It is hard, too, to believe that young warriors who had never
+been trained to act on the defensive could be constrained to wait until
+they were attacked, and so lose the advantage to be gained by surprising
+the enemy, or that they could be made to withdraw without striking a
+blow.
+
+But however blameless the Prophet may have been, he suffered for a time,
+as Harrison had supposed he would. He was the scapegoat on whom all
+placed the responsibility for the battle of Tippecanoe. Even Tecumseh is
+said to have rebuked him bitterly for not holding the young men in
+check.
+
+That Tecumseh disapproved of the affair is evident from the answer he
+sent the British, who advised him to avoid further encounters with the
+Americans:
+
+"You tell us to retreat or turn to one side should the Big Knives come
+against us. Had I been at home in the late unfortunate affair I should
+have done so; but those I left at home were--I cannot call them men--a
+poor set of people, and their scuffle with the Big Knives I compared to
+a struggle between little children who only scratch each other's faces."
+
+[Illustration: INDIANS THREATENING "THE PROPHET"]
+
+In the spring, Tecumseh presented himself at Vincennes saying that he
+was now ready to go to Washington to visit the President. The Governor,
+however, gave him a cold welcome, telling him that if he went he must go
+alone. Tecumseh's pride was hurt and he refused to go unless he could
+travel in a style suited to the dignity of a great chief, the leader of
+the red men.
+
+Harrison soon learned that the brothers were again at Tippecanoe, with
+their loyal followers, rebuilding the village and strengthening their
+forces.
+
+In April, 1812, a succession of horrible murders on the frontier alarmed
+the settlers. A general uprising of the Indians was expected daily. The
+militiamen refused to leave their families unprotected. The Governor was
+unable to secure the protection of the United States troops. Panic
+spread along the border; whole districts were unpeopled. Men, women, and
+children hastened to the forts or even to Kentucky for safety. There was
+fear that Vincennes would be overpowered.
+
+Had the Indians chosen this time to strike, they could have done
+terrible mischief. But Tecumseh's voice was still for peace. At a
+council held in May, he said:
+
+"Governor Harrison made war on my people in my absence; it was the will
+of God that he should do so. We hope it will please the Great Spirit
+that the white people may let us live in peace. We will not disturb
+them, neither have we done it, except when they come to our village with
+the intention of destroying us. We are happy to state to our brothers
+present that the unfortunate transaction that took place between the
+white people and a few of our young men at our village, has been settled
+between us and Governor Harrison; and I will further state that had I
+been at home there would have been no bloodshed at that time.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"It is true, we have endeavored to give all our brothers good advice,
+and if they have not listened to it we are sorry for it. We defy a
+living creature to say we ever advised any one, directly or indirectly,
+to make war on our white brothers. It has constantly been our misfortune
+to have our view misrepresented to our white brothers. This has been
+done by the Pottawottomies and others who sell to the white people land
+that does not belong to them."
+
+
+
+
+XII. TECUMSEH AND THE BRITISH
+
+
+Greatly as Tecumseh wished the Indians to remain at peace with the
+citizens of the United States, he saw that it was impossible for them to
+do so unless they were willing to give up their lands. The British,
+meanwhile, promised to regain for the Indians all the land north of the
+Ohio River and east of the Alleghany Mountains. They roused in the heart
+of Tecumseh the hope that the old boundaries between the territory of
+the Indians and the territory of the white man would be reëstablished.
+When war broke out in 1812, between Great Britain and the United States,
+Tecumseh joined the British at Malden. In making this alliance he was
+not influenced by any kindly feeling toward the British. He simply did
+what seemed to him for the best interests of the Indians.
+
+At the outset, fortune favored the British flag. Fort Mackinac, in
+northern Michigan, fell into the hands of a force of British and
+Indians. Detroit was surrendered to General Brock without resistance.
+Fort Dearborn, at Chicago, was burned and its garrison was massacred by
+the Indians. The English seemed in a fair way to fulfill their promise
+of driving the American settlers from the Northwest. Fort Harrison and
+Fort Wayne were the only strongholds of importance left to guard the
+frontier. These forts Tecumseh planned to take by stratagem.
+
+[Illustration: FORT DETROIT IN 1812]
+
+The victories of the British won to their side the tribes that had
+hesitated, and hundreds of warriors flocked to the standard of Tecumseh.
+He became an important and conspicuous figure in the war. His bravery,
+his knowledge of the country, and his large following made it possible
+for him to give his allies invaluable aid. Without Tecumseh and his
+Indians the British war in the West would have been a slight affair.
+
+The Americans fitted out a large military force to retake Detroit, and
+overthrow the Indians who threatened the settlements. General Harrison
+was put in command of the expedition. He set out with his army in grand
+array, but was unable to reach Detroit because of the swampy condition
+of the land over which he must march. He was forced to camp on the
+Maumee River. His advance into the territory of the Indians thwarted the
+enterprise that Tecumseh had set on foot against Fort Wayne.
+
+While Harrison was encamped at Fort Meigs there were several encounters
+between the hostile forces. A division of Harrison's army, under General
+Winchester, having allowed itself to become separated from the main
+army, was attacked on the River Raisin by a party of British and
+Indians. After a fierce struggle the remnant of General Winchester's
+force surrendered to the British. In the absence of Tecumseh many of the
+prisoners were cruelly massacred by the Indian victors.
+
+Major Richardson's description of General Winchester's men gives us a
+good idea of the hardihood of the frontier soldiers, and shows us how
+they came to be called "Long Knives" by the Indians:
+
+"It was the depth of winter; but scarcely an individual was in
+possession of a great coat or cloak, and few of them wore garments of
+wool of any description. They still retained their summer dress,
+consisting of cotton stuff of various colors shaped into frocks, and
+descending to the knee. Their trousers were of the same material. They
+were covered with slouched hats, worn bare by constant use, beneath
+which their long hair fell matted and uncombed over their cheeks; and
+these, together with the dirty blankets wrapped round their loins to
+protect them against the inclemency of the season, and fastened by broad
+leathern belts, into which were thrust axes and knives of an enormous
+length, gave them an air of wildness and savageness."
+
+[Illustration: ONE OF THE "LONG KNIVES"]
+
+Later, General Proctor, who had succeeded General Brock in command of
+the British forces at Detroit, laid siege to Fort Meigs. Tecumseh, who
+took part in the siege, was anxious to meet the enemy in open country.
+He sent the following unceremonious challenge to his old acquaintance:
+
+     "General Harrison: I have with me eight hundred braves. You have
+     an equal number in your hiding place. Come out with them and give
+     me battle. You talked like a brave when we met at Vincennes, and I
+     respected you; but now you hide behind logs and in the earth, like
+     a ground-hog. Give me answer.
+
+     TECUMSEH."
+
+When Harrison did venture to send out a detachment it was beaten by the
+Indians, and many of the Americans were made prisoners. For all the
+effort General Proctor made to prevent it, a terrible massacre might
+have followed this victory. Just as the Indians had begun to murder the
+prisoners, Tecumseh rode upon the scene of slaughter. When he saw what
+was going on he exclaimed in a passion of regret and indignation, "Oh,
+what will become of my Indians!" He rushed into the midst of the
+savages, rescued the man they were beginning to torture, and, with
+uplifted tomahawk, dared the whole horde to touch another prisoner. They
+cowered before him, deeply ashamed of their conduct.
+
+On discovering that General Proctor was present, Tecumseh demanded
+impatiently why he had not interfered to prevent the massacre. General
+Proctor answered that Tecumseh's Indians could not be controlled. To
+this Tecumseh responded with scorn: "Say, rather, you are unable to
+command. Go put on petticoats."
+
+In September, 1813, Commodore Perry's splendid victories on Lake Erie
+gave to the Americans control of the Lakes, and this made it impossible
+for the British to hold Detroit and Malden. Harrison was advancing with
+a land force to take these towns and General Proctor was eager to get
+out of his way. He began to prepare for retreat, but tried to conceal
+his purpose from Tecumseh. The latter's suspicions were aroused,
+however, and he demanded a council, in which he made his last formal
+speech. He spoke boldly and bitterly against General Proctor's course.
+He said:
+
+"You always told us you would never draw your foot off British ground;
+but now, father, we see that you are drawing back, and we are sorry to
+see our father doing so without seeing the enemy. We must compare our
+father's conduct to a fat dog that carries its tail on its back, but
+when affrighted it drops it between its legs and runs off. Father,
+listen! The Americans have not yet defeated us by land; neither are we
+sure they have done so by water; we therefore wish to remain here and
+fight our enemy, should they make their appearance. If they defeat us we
+will retreat with our father. * * * We now see our British father
+preparing to march out of his stronghold. Father, you have the arms and
+ammunition which our great father sent to his red children. If you have
+an idea of going away, give them to us and you may go and welcome. For
+us, our lives are in the hands of the Great Spirit. We are determined to
+defend our lands, and if it be His will, we wish to leave our bones upon
+them."
+
+Notwithstanding the wish of Tecumseh, General Proctor kept his purpose
+to retreat. He promised, however, that if they were pursued by the
+Americans he would turn at the first favorable site and give them
+battle. Accordingly, Tecumseh accompanied the retreating General. He
+repeatedly urged Proctor to keep his promise and face the enemy. On the
+fifth of October, Proctor learned that the American forces were at his
+heels. Valor, therefore, seemed the better part of discretion, and,
+choosing a ridge between the Thames River and a swamp, he arranged his
+forces for battle.
+
+Colonel Richard M. Johnson managed the charge of the Americans. One
+division of his regiment, under command of his brother, attacked and
+quickly routed the British regulars under General Proctor. The other
+division he himself led against Tecumseh's Indians.
+
+The Indians waited under protection of the thick brush until the
+horsemen were within close range; then in response to Tecumseh's war cry
+all fired. Johnson's advance guard was nearly cut down. The horses could
+not advance. Johnson ordered his men to dismount and a terrible struggle
+followed. Soon Tecumseh was shot, and, the Indians missing him, gave up
+the battle and fled. One of them afterwards described the defeat in a
+few words: "Tecumseh fell and we all ran."
+
+The war was now ended in the Northwest. The Americans had regained the
+posts taken by the British; they had subdued the Indians, and gained
+possession of the lands in the Wabash Valley. The power of the Prophet
+was destroyed. Tecumseh was dead. The Long Knives had crushed forever
+the Confederacy of Tecumseh, but it had taken upward of five million
+dollars and an army of twenty thousand men to do it.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+BY FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+
+
+
+I. THE EXODUS OF THE RED STICKS
+
+
+The sun was low in the west and sent long shafts of light across the
+tops of the trees that bordered a quiet, shining lake in northern
+Florida. It shone upon a company of Indians who were straggling along
+the shore, and made their bright turbans and many colored calicoes look
+gay in spite of dirt and tatters.
+
+The company was a large one. In it were not only braves, but also squaws
+and pappooses, and a few negroes. They trooped along with the unhurried
+swiftness and easy disarray of men and women who have journeyed for many
+days and have many days of travel still before them.
+
+Here and there a strapping brave bestrode a horse, while his squaw
+trudged beside him, sharing with a black slave the burden of household
+goods. But for the most part ceremony had given way to necessity and the
+warriors went afoot, leaving the horses and mules to carry the old men,
+aged squaws, and young children, who were too feeble to walk.
+
+This was a band of Red Stick Indians who had left forever the camping
+grounds of their fathers on the Chattahoochee River, to escape the
+oppression of their powerful kinsmen, the Creek Indians. They had
+rebelled against the rule of the Creeks, because the Creeks refused them
+their share of plunder in battle, and laid claim to their lands and
+their slaves. The Red Sticks hated the Creeks so bitterly that they
+could no longer live near them. They were resolved to leave altogether
+the territory that the United States government recognized as belonging
+to the Creeks, and seek homes with the Seminoles or runaways in Florida.
+
+[Illustration: CREEK INDIANS]
+
+The Red Sticks had left the Creek country far behind them, and had
+arrived, as we have seen, in northern Florida. The land into which they
+had come was uncultivated, wild, and sweet. The lakes and rivers were
+full of fish; the forests were full of game; fruits and berries grew in
+abundance. Everything seemed to invite the wanderers to tarry there and
+build themselves homes. Still they marched on over rich brown fields,
+past dancing lakes and streams, over fertile hillsides shaded with live
+oak and magnolia. No spot, however beautiful, could induce them to pause
+for more than a few days' rest. Their object was not to find a pleasant
+camping ground but to escape the hated Creeks. They were bound for a
+distant swamp. On the borders of the Okefinokee marsh they planned to
+make their homes. There they would be reasonably safe from the enemy,
+and even if the Creeks should follow them there, the swamp would afford
+them a secure retreat.
+
+But this goal was still many miles away, and the fugitives were now
+pressing toward a little hill, where they expected to make a short halt.
+
+The young men were silent but alert. Now and again one raised his bow
+and brought down a goose or a wild turkey, and some youngster plunged
+into the thicket to find it and fetch it to his mother. Here and there
+were groups of women burdened with kettles and pans and bundles of old
+clothes, or carrying small children and raising a great clamor of
+chatter and laughter.
+
+A little apart from the main company a tall and handsome Indian woman
+plodded silently along by herself. The splendor of her kerchief had been
+faded by sun and rain; her skirts were torn by briers, but the necklace
+of silver beads wound many times about her throat retained its glory. On
+one hip rested a huge basket, packed and corded. Astride the other rode
+a sturdy-limbed boy of about four years of age. Nearly all day the child
+had run by her side without complaint. But toward evening he had begun
+to lag behind, until at last, when, after a good run, he caught up with
+his mother, he clutched her skirts to help himself along. Then she had
+stooped and picked him up with a sort of fierce tenderness and in a
+moment he had fallen asleep.
+
+Soon the Indians reached the hilltop where they were to camp for a few
+days. Their preparations for the night's rest consisted chiefly in
+building camp fires; for, though the days were warm, the nights were
+chilly. Besides, fires were needed to cook food and to keep the wild
+beasts away during the darkness. A small fire of light brush was made
+first. Then several large logs were placed about it, each with one end
+in the flame, so that they looked like the spokes of a great wheel
+radiating from a center of fire. As the ends of the logs burned away,
+the fiery ring at the center grew wider and dimmer. When a hotter fire
+was wanted, the logs were pushed toward the center till the glowing ends
+came together once more and burned briskly.
+
+On the morning after the Red Sticks went into camp on the hill, while
+others lounged and talked together, the woman wearing the necklace of
+silver beads still kept apart. She sat on the unburned end of a fire log
+and for a time paid no heed to the question her small son had repeated
+many times. At last she looked up and said: "Do not ask again about the
+baby with the blue eyes. Do not think of her. She does not cry for you.
+She plays with little Creek pappooses. She is not your sister any more.
+Go, play at shooting turkeys with black Jim. He loves you like a
+brother."
+
+The woman was the daughter of a chief. She had married a man of her own
+tribe, but after he fell in battle she married a Scotch trader, named
+Powell, who lived among the Creeks. When the time came for the flight of
+the Red Sticks her heart turned to her people. She enjoyed too much the
+glory of being a trader's wife to give up her position and her home
+without much bitterness. But she was too true an Indian to desert her
+tribe. As her husband had no notion of leaving his trading station among
+the Creeks, she had left him and her blue-eyed baby and had come with
+her kindred, bringing with her her little son, a true Indian, the child
+of her first husband.
+
+The boy played at shooting wild turkeys with black Jim that day, and
+many times afterward. As time passed he thought less and less of the
+blue-eyed sister and more and more of his comrade with a black skin.
+
+
+
+
+II. THE FLORIDA HOME
+
+
+These Red Sticks were not the first wanderers who had sought homes and
+safety in Florida. For some fifty years bands of Indians enticed by the
+rich hunting grounds, or driven by the persecutions of the Creeks, had
+left their kindred in Georgia and Alabama to try their fortunes in
+Florida.
+
+They had found other tribes in possession of the peninsula, but the
+newcomers were more warlike and soon made themselves and their claim to
+the land respected by the natives. Indeed, the immigrants soon came to
+be looked upon as the ruling people. They were called Seminoles, which
+means runaways.
+
+The Seminoles would not attend Creek councils. They refused to be bound
+by treaties made by the Creeks. In all ways they wished to be considered
+a separate and distinct people.
+
+[Illustration: SEMINOLE INDIANS]
+
+Among the Florida Indians there lived a people of another race, the
+Maroons or free negroes. In those days Florida was owned by Spain.
+Therefore, American slaves once safely within its borders were free men.
+They became Spanish subjects and their former masters had no power to
+reclaim them. Florida formed a convenient refuge, and slaves were sure
+of welcome there, especially if they were willing to exchange a white
+master for a red one. Most negroes were glad to do this, for the slaves
+of the Indians were happy, independent slaves. Their chief duty to their
+masters was to raise for them a few bushels of corn each year. Though
+the Indians in general regarded themselves as superior to the negroes,
+the two races of exiles felt strong sympathy and affection for each
+other. They lived in the same manner, observing common customs. They
+fought together against a common enemy. They even intermarried.
+
+But the country was extensive and only thinly settled; and so,
+notwithstanding the frequent increase of their force by Indians and
+negroes, warriors were still more valuable than land in the eyes of the
+Seminoles. The tribe of Red Sticks that went to Florida in 1808 was
+received with great friendliness.
+
+The Indian woman with the silver beads soon married another brave, and
+went to live on a "hammock" near Fort King, not far from the place where
+Ocala now stands. She took with her her son. He was called Powell by
+some who remembered his stepfather, the trader. But his mother called
+him Osceola, which means the rising sun. Osceola grew up loving Florida
+as his home. And, indeed, it was a home that any Indian might have
+loved.
+
+The climate was healthful for the Indians, and so warm and pleasant that
+clothing was a matter of small concern. The soil was rich, and corn and
+koontee were to be had in abundance. The forests were full of deer and
+small game.
+
+A few skins thrown over some poles afforded sufficient protection for
+ordinary weather. But if rains made a more substantial dwelling
+necessary the palmetto furnished material for posts, elevated floor, and
+thatched roof.
+
+Not least among the advantages of the Florida home were its wonderful
+waterways leading off through dense mysterious forests, where strange
+birds called and strange plants grew--a labyrinth full of danger for the
+intruder, but a safe and joyous retreat for the Seminole floating on the
+dark water in his dugout.
+
+Though the Indians could have lived comfortably in this country without
+much effort, the Seminoles did not choose to live in idleness. They saw
+the flourishing farms of the Spanish settlers and wished to have farms
+of their own.
+
+So it happened that when Osceola was a boy he saw the Indians around him
+make the beginnings of what they believed would be permanent homes. He
+saw them cultivate the soil and tend their herds of cattle and horses
+and hogs. He watched them build their dwellings and
+storehouses--palmetto lodges without walls for themselves, substantial
+log cribs for their corn and potatoes.
+
+When a child, he imitated not only the warriors and hunters, but made
+cornfields of sand with tall grass spears for cornstalks, and built
+"camps" and corncribs out of little sticks.
+
+[Illustration: FISHING WITH A SPEAR]
+
+As he grew older he often hoed the corn and ground the koontee and drove
+the cattle. He did cheerfully the work of a farmer, though he liked best
+to hunt and fish and explore. He had a strong boat made by burning out
+the heart of a large cypress log. In this he often glided swiftly and
+noiselessly down some stream where the salmon trout lived. He held in
+his right hand a tough spear, made of a charred reed with a barbed end.
+When he saw a fish almost as large as himself close at hand he hurled
+his harpoon at it with all his force. And the fish darted off, leaving a
+trail of crimson in the clear water and dragging the boat behind it; for
+the boy clung to the end of the spear and soused the wounded fish in the
+water until its strength was exhausted. Then with the help of a friend
+he dragged it into the boat, and began to watch for another fish.
+
+Osceola was so energetic that he enjoyed work for its own sake. He had
+unusual endurance, and could keep at work or play long after others were
+tired. He was a famous ball player, and distinguished himself at the
+green corn dances. There he drank without flinching such large draughts
+of the bitter "black drink" that he was nick-named by some "Asseola,"
+which means "black drink."
+
+Once when acting as a guide for a party of Spanish horsemen he asked
+them why they rode so slowly. They told him that as he was unmounted
+they traveled easily to accommodate him. He laughed and replied that
+they might go as fast as they liked, they would hear no complaint from
+him. At this they spurred their horses to a livelier pace. Then seeing
+that Osceola still seemed to be making little effort they rode faster
+and faster to test his swiftness and strength. They were soon convinced
+that the young Indian had made no idle boast, and rode the entire day as
+if all the members of the party had had horses. When they reached the
+end of their journey Osceola seemed less tired than the horsemen.
+
+Osceola was not only active and enduring. He was also generous and
+helpful. His bright face, his frank manner, and true kindness made him a
+great favorite with all who knew him, Indians, negroes, or white men.
+
+
+
+
+III. THE FIRST SEMINOLE WAR
+
+
+When Osceola was a light-hearted boy of twelve, with kind impulses
+toward every one, something happened to rouse in him a bitter hatred, a
+thirst for blood.
+
+During the War of 1812 large numbers of negroes in the South took
+advantage of the general excitement to make good their escape from
+bondage. The Indians welcomed them and shielded them from bands of slave
+hunters that made sallies into the Spanish territory for the purpose of
+recapturing them. In this the Indians were aided by the British, who saw
+an opportunity to make trouble for the republic on its southern border,
+while the United States troops were occupied on the Canadian frontier. A
+British agent built a strong fort on Spanish soil on the Appalachicola
+River. After the close of the war the British withdrew and left the
+fort, well filled with ammunition, in the hands of the Indians and
+negroes.
+
+The Seminoles and their negro friends rejoiced over this. They could not
+foresee the doom that this fort was to bring upon them.
+
+For many years the Southern people had complained bitterly against the
+Seminole Indians for "stealing," as they said, their slaves. The
+"stealing" consisted in receiving and protecting runaways. The feeling
+against the Indians was so strong that expeditions into Spanish
+territory had been made by people on the frontier to capture slaves and
+punish the Seminoles. But this fort would now be a hindrance to such
+forays, and the slaveholders demanded that it should be destroyed.
+They were so persistent in their demands that General Andrew Jackson
+gave General Gaines directions to invade Spanish territory with United
+States troops to blow up the fort and return the "stolen negroes" to
+their rightful owners.
+
+For miles up and down the Appalachicola River the land along the banks
+was cultivated and divided into small farms, where Indians and negroes
+lived. When these farmers learned of the approach of the enemy they fled
+with their wives and children to the fort for protection. Over three
+hundred men, women, and children crowded into the fort, feeling sure of
+safety. But when the troops attacked them by land and water, and the
+cannon roared about the walls of the fort, they were panic-stricken. The
+women and children shrieked and wrung their hands. The men did not know
+what to do; they rent the air with fearful yells, but made little
+attempt at resistance. What would they not have given to exchange the
+fort walls for an open boat and the endless waterways of the forest?
+
+They were not left long to fear and regret. The enemy promptly
+accomplished its purpose. A redhot ball reached the powder magazine of
+the fort. A terrible explosion followed, destroying the fort and
+bringing instant death to two hundred and seventy of its inmates.
+
+The story of the horrible death, of the mutilated bodies of the injured
+men carried off on the boats of the white men, spread all over Florida.
+At every camp fire the tale was told, and all the old savage thirst for
+vengeance was stirred in the hearts of men who had begun to care for
+crops and herds and to dream of days of peace.
+
+The Indians knew that peace with the white man was best for them. But
+Indian blood had been shed and peace was impossible. Preparations began
+at once for what was afterward known in history as the First Seminole
+War. The Indians bought arms and powder from Spanish and British
+traders. They practised shooting. They explored the country for safe
+retreats and excellent ambushes. They raised their crops and harvested
+them. A year passed before the first stroke of vengeance fell.
+
+A boat carrying supplies to Fort Scott was surprised by Indians, and its
+crew, passengers, and military escort were overpowered and killed. The
+War Department had been expecting some hostile act on the part of the
+Seminoles, and was ready for war. The massacre in the vicinity of Fort
+Scott is usually regarded as the cause of the war of 1818, though it was
+not without its cause, as has been shown.
+
+General Jackson promptly invaded Florida with a strong force of United
+States troops and Creek Indians, to punish the Seminoles. He was met by
+a motley crowd of Indians and negroes. Even children joined their
+fathers to resist the approach of the whites and Creeks. Though they did
+not present an imposing appearance, the Florida Indians and their allies
+proved to be desperate fighters.
+
+[Illustration: ANDREW JACKSON]
+
+General Jackson first moved against the settlements on the
+Appalachicola. The Indians and negroes made a stand and fought a battle,
+but were obliged to retreat. Jackson then secured the provisions the
+Indians had stored there, burned the villages and pushed on to St. Marks
+and then to the valley of the Suwanee.
+
+On this march he was much troubled by Indians who hung along his path,
+making frequent swift attacks and then vanishing in the wilderness. At
+Old Town a battle was fought in which the Maroons gave the Indians brave
+assistance. Here again the forces of Jackson were victorious. After
+suffering heavy losses, the Indians and their allies retreated. They
+were pursued by a detachment of Jackson's men and driven far to the
+south.
+
+The Indians had taken the precaution to move the negro women and
+children out of reach of the American army, fearing that they would be
+captured and carried back into slavery, but they had been less careful
+to conceal their own squaws and pappooses, and Jackson made hundreds of
+them captives.
+
+The battle of Old Town closed the war. Jackson, feeling that the Indians
+had been thoroughly beaten, withdrew from Florida, leaving fire and
+desolation in his track.
+
+The boy Osceola, strong and straight, and with the spirit of an eagle,
+had played a man's part in the war. He combined with the reckless
+courage of youth a determination that made him capable of good service
+in Indian warfare. He was a good scout and an unexcelled messenger.
+Swift and light, and sure as the arrow he shot from his bow, he had
+carried signals from chief to chief, he had crept as a spy past the
+pickets of the enemy, he had acted as runner and guide, taking women and
+children from exposed villages to the secret recesses of the forest. Nor
+had his youth exempted him from doing the more deadly work of war.
+
+The Seminoles had lost heavily in the war, but as a nation they had
+gained some things of great value. The hardships they had suffered
+together gave the various tribes a stronger feeling of fellowship than
+they had had before. Black men had fought shoulder to shoulder with red,
+and would henceforth be less their inferiors and more their friends.
+
+
+
+
+IV. GRIEVANCES
+
+
+Not many days passed after General Jackson withdrew his army from
+Florida before the Seminoles were again established on the fertile lands
+from which they had been driven. They brought with them their flocks and
+herds. Before long their simple dwellings were re-built and the Seminole
+villages seemed as prosperous as ever.
+
+The slaveholders of the South felt that Florida was still a dangerous
+neighbor. They saw that to mend matters it was necessary that Florida
+should be made a part of the United States in order that the government
+should have authority over the Seminoles. So, in the year 1821, through
+the influence of Southern statesmen the territory of Florida was
+purchased from Spain for five million dollars.
+
+Now that the people of the United States owned Florida they wished to
+occupy the land, but the Seminoles claimed it. Many were unwilling to
+recognize the justice of this claim, however; for it was held that as
+the Indians were not native tribes but were Creeks they should be
+compelled to go back to Georgia and live with their kindred.
+
+This proposal gave the Indians great alarm. They expected momentarily
+that an attempt would be made to expel them from their homes. By
+spreading a report that Jackson was coming to seize their property and
+drive them back to live with the Creeks, bands of lawless men created
+such a panic among the Indians that they fled into the forests and
+swamps, leaving their provisions and property for the plunderers to
+carry off.
+
+Border troubles increased until action could not be postponed longer. A
+council was called at Camp Moultrie in 1823, where a treaty was made
+between the United States government and the Seminole Indians.
+
+By the terms of this treaty the Indians were to give up all their land
+north of the Withlacoochee River, except a few tracts reserved for
+chiefs. They were bound to stay within the limits of the lands assigned
+them, and if found in the northern part of the territory without
+passports were to suffer thirty-nine stripes on the bare back, and give
+up their firearms. They were also pledged to assist in recapturing
+fugitive slaves, who in the future should seek refuge among them.
+
+In return for what they had given up the Seminoles were to receive from
+the United States at once, provisions for one year and six thousand
+dollars worth of cattle and hogs; and for twenty years thereafter, an
+annuity of five thousand dollars was to be paid to them. They were also
+assured that their rights would be protected. The United States promised
+"to take the Florida Indians under their care and patronage, and afford
+them protection against all persons whatsoever," and to "restrain and
+prevent all white persons from hunting, settling, or otherwise
+intruding, upon said lands."
+
+The effects of this treaty were neither beneficial nor lasting. The
+Indians were moved from their homes to the southern part of the
+peninsula, where the land was poor. While they had once been happy and
+prosperous, they now became miserable and destitute, and dependent on
+the annual allowance from the government. The lands they relinquished
+were soon occupied by white settlers, and the red men and the white were
+again neighbors. Of course, the border troubles were renewed. The white
+men would never be satisfied until the Indians were expelled from the
+peninsula altogether.
+
+The Indians were aware that the white settlers were eager to have them
+sent away. They tried to keep peace and avoid trouble. If any of their
+number violated the treaty, the Indians punished him themselves, even
+inflicting the ignominious thirty-nine stripes. The white men, however,
+were bent on making mischief. Indeed, one of the lawmakers of the
+Territory said frankly: "The only course, therefore, which remains for
+us to rid ourselves of them, is to adopt such a mode of treatment
+towards them as will induce them to acts that will justify their
+expulsion by force."
+
+The Indians had yielded many points for the sake of peace, but they were
+determined not to leave Florida. They believed that if they could abide
+by the terms of the treaty of Camp Moultrie for its full period of
+twenty years the United States government would admit their right to
+stay in Florida permanently.
+
+Osceola was most active in trying to preserve peace. He had now grown to
+manhood. He had married Morning-Dew, the daughter of a chief, and they
+were living together happily near Fort King. Osceola was not a chief,
+but he was well known and liked among the Indians. He used his influence
+to keep the rash young men from violating the treaty. He wished to see
+the Seminoles do their full duty to the white people, not because he was
+fond of the white race, but because he thought it well for the Indians
+that the peace should not be broken.
+
+[Illustration: OSCEOLA]
+
+His eagerness to keep the Indians in order made him greatly liked at
+Fort King. His services were often demanded there as guide or informer.
+But while he made every effort to keep the Indians from doing wrong, he
+did not think the white men blameless and said so frankly. He accused
+them of failure to punish men who were guilty of committing crimes
+against the Indians, of unfairness in seizing negroes, of theft of
+property, and of withholding annuities. Osceola's was a good kind of
+patriotism--he did not consider his enemies right, but he wanted his
+own people to be right, and did his best to make them so.
+
+But Indians, who are by nature revengeful, could not be expected to
+endure wrongs without some retaliation. Their complaints of injustice
+were met by the proposition that they move beyond the Mississippi, out
+of the white man's reach.
+
+The nature of their grievances is clearly shown in a "talk" which Chief
+John Hicks sent to the President in January, 1829. He said:
+
+" * * * We are all Seminoles here together. We want no long talk; we wish
+to have it short and good. We are Indians and the whites think we have
+no sense; but what our minds are, we wish to have our big father know.
+
+"When I returned from Washington, all my warriors were scattered--in
+attempting to gather my people I had to spill blood midway in my path. I
+had supposed that the Micanopy people had done all the mischief, and I
+went with my warriors to meet the Governor with two. When I met the
+Governor at Suwanee he seemed to be afraid; I shook hands with him. I
+gathered all my people and found that none was missing, and that the
+mischief had been done by others. The Governor had them put in prison. I
+was told that if one man kills another we must not kill any other man in
+his place, but find the person who committed the murder and kill him.
+One of my people was killed and his murderer's bones are now white at
+Tallahassee. Another one that had done us mischief was killed at
+Alpaha. A black man living among the whites has killed one of my people
+and I wish to know who is to give me redress. Will my big father answer?
+When our law is allowed to operate, we are quick; but they say the black
+man is subject to the laws of the white people; now I want to see if the
+white people do as they say. We wish our big father to say whether he
+will have the black man tried for the murder of one of our people. If he
+will give him up to us, the sun shall not move before he has justice
+done to him. We work for justice, as well as the white people do. I wish
+my friend and father to answer. In answer we may receive a story, for
+men going backwards and forwards have not carried straight talks.
+
+"I agreed to send away all the black people who had no masters, and I
+have done it; but still they are sending to me for negroes. When an
+Indian has bought a black man they come and take him away again, so that
+we have no money and no negroes, too. A white man sells us a negro and
+then turns around and claims him again, and our father orders us to give
+him up. There is a negro girl in Charleston that belongs to my
+daughter--her name is Patience. I want her restored to me. She has a
+husband here; she has a child about a year old. I want my big father to
+cause them to be sent to me, to do as he compels me to do, when I have
+just claims. If my father is a true friend, he will send me my property
+by our agent, who has gone to Washington. I have been told by the
+Governor that all runaway negroes must be given up, but that all those
+taken in war, were good property to us; but they have taken away those
+taken in war, and those we have raised from children. * * *
+
+"Will my father listen now to the voice of his children? He told me we
+were to receive two thousand dollars' worth of corn--where is it? We
+have received scarcely any, not even half, according to our judgment, of
+what was intended for us. If the Governor and the white people have done
+justly in this we wish our big father to let us know. We were promised
+presents for twenty-one years; we have received nothing but a few
+promises. It seems that they have disappeared before they reached us, or
+that our big father did not intend to give them to us. We were promised
+money, but we have not received a cent for this year. What has become of
+it? We wish our big father to ask the Governor. The white people say
+that we owe them, which is not true. We did take some goods of an Indian
+trader, Mr. Marsh, to whom the Governor had promised part of our money.
+We took the goods because we were afraid we should never get what was
+ours in any other way; they amounted to fifteen hundred dollars. We
+understand that Mr. Bellamy has received from the Governor sixteen
+hundred dollars; what is it for? The Indians do not owe him
+anything,--he has lost no property by us,--we have taken none of his
+cattle. If a tiger has killed one, it is charged to the Indians. If they
+stray away and are lost for a time, it is charged to the Indians. He has
+lost nothing by us; but my people have suffered loss from him. He has
+taken all the Indians' hogs that he could lay his hands on. * * * He has
+taken hogs--one hundred head--from one man. We can not think of giving
+away sixteen hundred dollars for nothing. According to the white man's
+laws, if a man takes that which does not belong to him, he has to return
+it and pay for the damages. Will our great father see that this man
+restores to us what he has unjustly taken from us, for we look to our
+big father to fulfill his promises and give us the presents and money
+that are due to us. We understand that Colonel Piles has received some
+of the money that is due to us; he is a good man; when we were perishing
+with hunger he gave us to eat and drink. He is entitled to what he has
+received. It appears that the Seminoles who have done no mischief, have
+to suffer, as well as the few that have been guilty--this does not
+appear to be right to us. By stopping our money, the Governor has
+prevented our paying just debts, the debts we owe to the licensed Indian
+traders, who have trusted us under the expectation that we would pay
+them when we received our money. Our father has put two agents to look
+over us; our agent, Colonel Humphries, has not seen any of the money or
+presents that belong to us. * * *
+
+"I am getting to be very old, and I wish my bones to be here. I do not
+wish to remove to any other land, according to what I told my father.
+When great men say anything to each other, they should have good
+memories. Why does Colonel White plague me so much about going over the
+Mississippi? We hurt nothing on this land. I have told him so before."
+
+
+
+
+V. THE TREATY OF PAYNE'S LANDING
+
+
+One day when Osceola was at Fort King he was told that a great council
+was to be held at Payne's Landing, about twenty miles from the fort. The
+Indians' "white father" had sent special messengers to talk with the
+Seminoles, and all the leading men of the nation were summoned to come
+to hear his words.
+
+Osceola knew that the message was about the Seminoles' leaving Florida.
+He was bitterly opposed to that project. He knew that some of the old
+chiefs were very easily influenced, and that the white men had a way of
+getting them to make promises in council which they afterwards
+regretted. He therefore wished that none of the Indians would attend the
+council. Then no action could be taken.
+
+He went around advising men not to go to Payne's Landing. But the white
+men sent their messengers near and far, calling in the chiefs and head
+men. Early in May the streams were full of canoes and the forest paths
+were traveled by bands of Indians on their way to Payne's Landing.
+Seeing this, Osceola decided to go to the council himself, and do what
+he could there to prevent the chiefs from making any rash agreements.
+
+Osceola was not a chief, but he was a recognized leader of the young
+men, and as he sat in the council house, stern and alert, many a glance
+was cast in his direction to see how he was impressed by the white man's
+talk.
+
+He listened to the interpreter eagerly and learned that the President
+wished the Seminoles to give up the land that had been reserved for them
+by the treaty of Camp Moultrie. In exchange they were to occupy a tract
+of land of the same extent west of the Mississippi River in Arkansas
+among the Creek Indians. A delegation of chiefs was to visit the country
+and if "they" were satisfied with the country, the Seminoles were to be
+transported to it in three divisions, one in 1833, one in 1834, and the
+last in 1835. Something was said about the payment of annuities, about
+the distribution of blankets and homespun frocks, and compensation for
+cattle and slaves stolen by the whites. But the point that concerned
+Osceola most of all was that the Seminoles were expected to leave
+Florida and live among the Creeks west of the Mississippi! Still there
+was no reason to be distressed about it, he thought, for it was to be
+done only if the Florida Indians were willing to make the change, and he
+knew that the Seminoles would never consent to leave Florida. With arms
+folded across his breast and a calm eye he watched one chief after
+another take the pen and make at the end of the treaty his mark or
+signature.
+
+A short time afterwards seven chiefs and the faithful negro interpreter,
+Abraham, left for Arkansas to examine the new country. The delegation
+returned in April, 1833.
+
+Then the Indians asked, "When will the white men meet the red to hear
+what they think about going towards the setting sun?"
+
+"There will be no council," said the agent. "You promised to go if the
+delegates liked the land. They like the land. Now you must go without
+any more talk."
+
+"No, no! We promised to go if we were suited with the land when they
+told us about it!" exclaimed the Indians.
+
+The agent repeated, "You gave your word to your white father that you
+would go if the country pleased your chiefs. The chiefs were well
+pleased." Then he added, "They met your white father's messengers on the
+new land and pledged their faith that you would go. They promised for
+you. They signed another treaty. You agreed to do as your chiefs wished.
+Your chiefs have promised your white father. There is no help for it.
+You must go."
+
+When Osceola heard this he was in a rage. The white men had got the
+chiefs away from their own people and induced them to make promises they
+had no right to make. What right had Charley A. Mathla to promise for
+him or to promise for Micanopy, the head chief of the nation?
+
+Osceola was not the only indignant one. All the Indians were in a fury
+with the government agents. They felt that they had been tricked, caught
+by a phrase they did not understand. They believed that undue influence
+had been brought to bear upon their chiefs. Had the delegates been
+allowed to return to Florida to give their report, some Indians would
+have heard it with favor, but all were angered because the chiefs had
+been influenced to make an additional treaty at Fort Gibson without
+consulting their people. But the Indians were usually as severe in their
+judgment of their own race as in their condemnation of another and they
+did not spare the chiefs who had signed the additional treaty. Men and
+women alike held them in supreme contempt. They scolded, they ridiculed
+till the men in self defense declared that they had not signed the
+treaty, and gave so many reasons why the Seminoles should not go west
+that the spirit against emigration was more positive than ever.
+
+The faith of even those Indians who had striven to keep peace with the
+United States was destroyed by the "Additional Treaty" and a general
+feeling of ill will prevailed. The Indians refused to surrender negroes
+claimed as slaves by the white people, and were so hostile that in 1834
+General Jackson, then president of the United States, determined to
+force them to leave if necessary. He had the treaties ratified by the
+Senate, appointed a new Indian agent, and ordered that preparations for
+the removal of the Indians should be pushed with all speed.
+
+In October the new Indian agent called a council. This time Osceola went
+about urging the Indians to attend and advising the chiefs about their
+talks. In the council the slender, energetic, young warrior sat next to
+the fat, inactive old chief, Micanopy. Osceola had no right to speak in
+council, but there was no man there who had more influence. If Micanopy
+wavered under the stern eye of the white man, he heard the voice of
+Osceola in his ear and did the young man's bidding.
+
+Micanopy denied signing the treaty of Payne's Landing. When shown his
+mark he declared that he had not touched the pen, though he had been on
+the point of doing so, "for," he said, "the treaty was to examine the
+country and I believed that when the delegation returned, the report
+would be unfavorable. It is a white man's treaty, and the white man did
+not make the Indian understand it as he meant it." He finished by saying
+that he had agreed to the treaty of Camp Moultrie and that by the terms
+of that treaty southern Florida belonged to the Seminoles for twenty
+years, scarcely half of which had passed.
+
+Other chiefs spoke and said bitter things. The agent became angry and
+threatened to withhold the annuity unless the Indians signed a paper
+agreeing to leave without further trouble.
+
+At this Osceola's eyes flashed fire; he sprang up like a tiger and
+declared that he did not care if the Indians never received another
+dollar of the white man's money; he and his warriors would never sign
+away their liberty and land for gold. Then, drawing his knife from his
+belt, he raised it high in the air and plunged it through document and
+table, exclaiming, "The only treaty I will sign is with this!"
+
+
+
+
+VI. HOSTILITIES
+
+
+The new Indian agent, General Thompson, had marked Osceola as a man of
+power. He thought it wise to make friends with him. So when Osceola went
+to Fort King he was cordially received by the agent. Once on returning
+from New York the latter brought Osceola a beautiful new rifle, which
+was worth one hundred dollars. Osceola was pleased with the rifle and
+pleased with this evidence of General Thompson's regard for him. But he
+was not to be bought by gifts to forsake the cause of the Seminoles.
+
+He saw that the white men were actually getting ready to move the
+Indians; they were preparing transports at Tampa and making ready for
+the sale of the Indians' cattle. Another council was called at Fort
+King.
+
+On the night before this council, Osceola spoke to a gathering of chiefs
+who had met secretly in Micanopy's village. He told them that, whatever
+happened in council, they must be prepared to resist force with force
+should the white men attempt to compel the Indians to emigrate. They
+must take advantage of every opportunity to buy powder and lead, to
+increase their store of food and ammunition. He advised them to declare
+in council their wish for peace, but to maintain firmly that they were
+determined never to leave Florida.
+
+[Illustration: ARREST OF OSCEOLA]
+
+At the council the next day, Jumper acting as spokesman for the Indians
+expressed these views. When he had finished, the agent arose and rebuked
+the Indians for breaking their word. His charge of dishonor excited the
+Indians and many lost their tempers. In the confusion that followed,
+General Clinch threatened to order in the soldiers if the Indians did
+not sign the compact to leave Florida, without further parley. This
+threat proved to be effectual. Several chiefs signed, but three of the
+leading chiefs refused to do so. For punishment General Thompson ordered
+that their names should be stricken from the list of chiefs. This
+enraged the Indians and the agent realized that he had lost more than he
+had gained by the council. He sent word to Washington that the Indians
+were in no mood to leave Florida and that there would be bloodshed if an
+attempt was made to enforce the treaty of Payne's Landing. Accordingly,
+the date for embarking was changed to a more distant date.
+
+Osceola made good use of the delay in adding to his war supplies; but
+one day he was refused powder. This indignity surprised and offended
+him. A refusal to give an Indian firearms or powder was evidence of
+distrust, and Osceola was used to respectful usage. "Am I a negro, a
+slave?" he exclaimed. "My skin is dark, but not black. I am a red man, a
+Seminole. The white man shall not treat me as if I were black. I will
+make the white man red with blood and then let him grow black in the sun
+and rain." His language became so violent that General Thompson ordered
+him put in irons and cast into prison.
+
+Alone in the dark, Osceola ceased to rave. Thoughts of a terrible
+vengeance soothed him. He planned it all carefully. After several days
+had passed he seemed repentant. He asked to see General Thompson and
+said he had spoken in anger. He expressed his friendship for the agent
+and his willingness to assist in persuading the Indians to live up to
+their treaty.
+
+After he was liberated Osceola seemed as good as his word. His manner at
+the Fort changed. He even brought in two or three sub-chiefs to sign the
+treaty. The agent was completely deceived and believed he had gained a
+powerful ally.
+
+When the Indians learned that Osceola had been put in irons they felt
+his wrong as their own and wished to visit the agent with swift
+punishment. But Osceola looked at the place on his wrist where the
+fetters had been and said: "That is my affair. Leave General Thompson to
+me. Your part is to see that no Indian leaves Florida."
+
+Almost daily something happened to show both Indians and white men that
+they could no longer live together in peace. One evening while a little
+company of Indians was camping in a hammock cooking supper, a party of
+white men came upon them, seized their rifles, examined their camping
+equipment and then fell to beating them. While they were occupied in
+this way some friends of the campers came up and seeing the plight of
+their comrades opened fire on the white men. The latter returned the
+fire and killed an Indian.
+
+While the Indians blamed the white men for this affair the white men
+held the Indians responsible for it. They ordered out the militia to
+protect the citizens and punish the Indians. Both parties believed that
+the time had come for definite action. By definite action the white men
+meant the transportation of the Seminoles, the Indians meant war. The
+former pushed forward preparations at Tampa, and issued a summons to all
+Indians to come in, sell their cattle and pledge themselves to assemble
+on the first of January 1836 for their journey. The latter held a
+council and decided that while the Indians promised to assemble at the
+beginning of the year it should be for war rather than emigration. They
+further agreed that the first Indian to sell his cattle and prepare in
+good faith to go should be punished with death.
+
+As might be inferred from this decision, there were some Seminoles whose
+loyalty to their race could not be counted on. A chief, Charley A.
+Mathla, who had been one of the delegates to visit Arkansas, was one of
+these. As he was known to be on good terms with the white people,
+Osceola ordered that he should be closely watched. He soon learned that
+there was only too much ground for his suspicion. Charley was getting
+ready to leave; he had driven his cattle to Tampa and sold them to the
+white people. If he were allowed to go unpunished other wavering ones
+would soon follow his example. Osceola wished his warriors to know from
+the start that punishment for disobedience to him would be more swift
+and terrible than anything they need fear for disobeying the white man.
+
+With a few faithful followers he hastened through the wilderness towards
+the village of Charley A. Mathla. There scouts brought him word that
+Chief Charley was on his way home from Tampa. The war party hid among
+the trees where the trail to the village passed through a hammock. They
+had not waited long before the chief came swiftly along the path.
+Osceola rose and fired. His comrades followed his example. Charley A.
+Mathla fell forward on the path without a word, dead.
+
+One of the party seized a handkerchief that the dead chief grasped in
+his hand and showed Osceola that it was full of money. Osceola took the
+offered treasure and cast the glittering coins far from him. The Indians
+watched them disappear among the green leaves with surprise and regret.
+But their leader said, "Do not touch his gold; it was bought with the
+red man's blood."
+
+
+
+
+VII. THE WAR OPENED
+
+
+In a short time news of the murder of Charley A. Mathla reached Fort
+King. With it came a rumor that the Indians were holding councils of war
+in the villages of the Big Swamp. But it was impossible for the agent to
+get definite information, as the woods were full of hostile Indian
+scouts. The runners who were on friendly terms with the men at the fort
+feared to venture beyond the protection of its guns lest they should
+suffer the fate of Charley A. Mathla.
+
+After the shooting, Osceola and his followers repaired to the fastnesses
+of Wahoo Swamp, where for some time Indians had been assembling from
+exposed villages. Here were collected vast stores of ammunition and food
+supplies, herds of cattle, women and children and old men, both red and
+black, and many warriors of the two races.
+
+Osceola was now recognized as a war chief. In council no one was
+listened to more eagerly than he. While addressing the assembled
+warriors he said: "Remember, it is not upon women and children that we
+make war and draw the scalping knife. It is upon men. Let us act like
+men. Do not touch the money of the white man or his clothes. We do not
+fight for these things. The Seminole is fighting for his hunting
+grounds."
+
+Definite plans were made for opening the war at once. Negroes living in
+the neighborhood of Fort Brooke near Tampa had brought word that Major
+E. L. Dade was to conduct reënforcements from Fort Brooke to Fort King.
+The detachment would pass on its march within a short distance of Wahoo
+Swamp and might easily be surprised and overpowered. Plans were formed
+for such an attack. Several days would probably pass, however, before
+Major Dade's force, encumbered with cannon and marching through marshes,
+would reach the point best suited for the Indians' attack.
+
+In the meantime Osceola must make a visit to Fort King. There was a
+white man there whose scalp he had sworn should be the first one taken
+in the war. With a small band of warriors he started on his errand of
+vengeance.
+
+Osceola knew General Thompson's habits. He was accustomed to take a walk
+after dinner while he smoked a cigar. Frequently he walked some distance
+from the fort, going out towards the sutler's house, where he sometimes
+had business. Osceola determined to wait for him in that vicinity.
+
+He and his comrades lay closely concealed, and watched without ceasing.
+But for several days the weather was unpleasant and the agent did not go
+beyond the fort. Still the Indians waited. At last a fine day dawned,
+and shortly after noon Osceola saw from his hiding place two men
+approaching the sutler's house. From afar he knew that one was General
+Thompson. He crept closer to the path; his friends followed; all were
+silent as serpents. The unsuspecting men came nearer, laughing and
+talking in easy security. Rising on one knee, Osceola took steady aim
+and fired. Instantly other shots rang through the still air and the two
+men lay dead on the earth.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN DEPREDATIONS]
+
+The Indians quickly scalped their victims. Then they hurried to the
+sutler's house, where they found several men at dinner; they surrounded
+the house and shot and scalped its inmates. When this was done they set
+fire to the house and took their leave with an exultant war whoop. No
+one pursued them; those who heard the shots and the war whoop, and saw
+the flaming house supposed a large war party had come to attack the
+place, and were afraid to investigate.
+
+The Indians meanwhile left the neighborhood with all speed. They had
+stayed longer than they had intended and they were anxious to reach the
+swamp in time to share in the attack on Major Dade and his men. They set
+off through the forest, a grim and terrible company, smeared with war
+paint and stained with human blood. Their knives and tomahawks were red;
+fresh scalps dangled from their belts or swung from poles carried over
+their shoulders. At the head of the company strode Osceola. On his head
+he wore a red and blue kerchief twisted to form a turban, from whose
+center waved three splendid ostrich plumes.
+
+Darkness fell before the company reached the swamp, but as they drew
+near to its outskirts they saw the luminous smoke of camp fires over the
+trees and heard faint yells. This told them they had come too late for
+the struggle, but in time to celebrate the victory. They were greeted by
+the revelers with wild shouts of delight. All joined in a hideous dance
+about a pole on which were fastened the scalps that had been taken that
+day.
+
+From the old chief, Micanopy, and his sub-chiefs, Jumper and Alligator,
+Osceola learned the details of that day's action. About two hundred
+warriors had taken their station in the outskirts of the swamp to await
+the coming of Major Dade and his one hundred and ten soldiers. They sent
+out scouts who brought them exact information concerning Dade's route
+and all his movements. They knew the information to be reliable, for
+they obtained it from Dade's guide, Louis, a slave, who was in sympathy
+with the Indians and Maroons. On the third day of their march the troops
+reached the point the Indians had decided upon as best adapted to their
+purpose. But neither Micanopy nor Osceola was present and many were
+unwilling to act without them. Some young warriors set out for
+Micanopy's camp and forced him to come with them to the scene of action.
+Even then he advised delay and it took all Jumper's eloquence to induce
+the old man to give the command for attack on the following morning.
+
+Meanwhile Dade's men spent a good night in their camp, little dreaming
+how near to them was the enemy. On the morning of the twenty-eighth of
+December they resumed their march in good spirits.
+
+The Indians had left the swamp and hidden themselves in a pine barren,
+near which the roadway wound. On one side was a deep swamp; on the
+other, a thin pine forest with a swamp beyond it. They found hiding
+places behind trees or on the ground sheltered by the saw palmetto and
+brush.
+
+From their hiding places the Indians saw the advance guard come into
+sight, reach, and pass them. Still Micanopy did not fire the signal
+shot. Now the main division was coming with Major Dade on horseback at
+the head. On marched the soldiers with unwavering tramp, tramp. The
+warriors crouched with muskets ready. Micanopy fired and Jumper raised
+the yell. Instantly the green waste was awake with the flash and bang of
+muskets, with death cries and savage yells. A white smoke hid the scene
+for a moment. When it cleared away, the road was strewn with the dead
+and dying. The Indians having reloaded their guns, rushed from their
+hiding places to finish their work.
+
+[Illustration: FLORIDA SWAMP]
+
+Some of Dade's men sprang to the thicket to seek refuge behind trees.
+They were followed and shot down. Others caught their feet in the heavy
+stems of the palmetto and, stumbling, fell an easy prey to their
+pursuers. The officers who had escaped the first fire did their best to
+rally the men. The cannon was brought into action and added its roar to
+the din of battle. But its balls went over the heads of the Indians and
+they succeeded in shooting the gunners before they could do any harm.
+
+The contest seemed over. The warriors were scattered in pursuit of
+fugitives or busy scalping the dead, when a negro brought word to Jumper
+that a number of the soldiers had collected and were building a fort of
+logs with the cannon to protect them. Jumper raised the yell and called
+together his Indians for a charge on the little company of brave men who
+were making their last stand behind tree trunks placed on the ground in
+the form of a triangle. The soldiers had exhausted their powder and were
+able to offer only a feeble resistance to the savages, who shot them
+down without mercy.
+
+The Indians carried off their own dead and wounded--three dead and five
+wounded. But they left the bodies of Dade's men to tell their own story
+to those who should find them. So well were the commands of Osceola
+heeded that months later when white troops found the dead, their money,
+watches and clothes were untouched.
+
+The battle over, the Indians returned to the swamp to await Osceola,
+count scalps, and celebrate their victory. Of one hundred and ten
+soldiers only four escaped.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. OSCEOLA A WAR CHIEF
+
+
+As a fire that has smoldered long flames up in many places at once, so
+the war broke out with several actions in quick succession. The tidings
+of the slaughter at Fort King had not become generally known and the
+Indians had not slept after Dade's massacre, before preparations were
+afoot for another assault.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN RUNNER]
+
+Scarcely had the victors wearied of shouting and dancing when an Indian,
+exhausted, not with revelry, but with swift running through forest and
+swamp, came into the camp, bringing important news. A council of chiefs
+was called. The bowl of honey water was passed around and when all had
+drunk from the deep ladle, the messenger rose to give his message. He
+told the chiefs that General Clinch had left Fort Drane with two hundred
+regulars and four hundred Florida volunteers, and was already far
+advanced into the Indian country. Indeed he was even now approaching
+the Withlacoochee River.
+
+Micanopy, with his usual caution, advised the Indians to keep out of the
+way of such a large force. But his hearers were in no mood to listen to
+his faint-hearted advice; they had been emboldened by their recent
+victories and responded to the fearless daring of Osceola. One hundred
+and fifty Indians and fifty negroes volunteered to go with Osceola and
+Alligator to intercept General Clinch and his six hundred soldiers.
+
+With one accord the warriors bounded off towards the ford of the
+Withlacoochee. There the water was only two feet deep, and as it was the
+only place where the river could be crossed without boats, there could
+be little doubt that the white general would lead his forces to this
+point before attempting to cross the river.
+
+For a day and a night the Indians waited to give their enemy a deadly
+welcome. In the neighborhood of the ford there was no sound to interrupt
+the music of the river, no sight to disturb the peace of the dense
+forest. But on the morning of the following day, scouts came skulking
+through the trees, and in a few minutes the apparently unpeopled place
+was alive with red men.
+
+The scouts brought word that General Clinch and two hundred of his men
+had already crossed the river. They had made the passage slowly and
+laboriously in an old canoe that carried only eight at a time. But they
+were now advancing on this side of the river. Many a warrior's heart
+failed him when he heard this. But Osceola's dauntless spirit rose to
+the emergency. He cheered his men with words of such good courage that
+they were soon following him with new enthusiasm to a hill, where he
+posted them in a hammock to await the enemy.
+
+On the morning of the last day of the year, General Clinch advanced
+towards the hammock. He was aware of the presence of hostile Indians,
+but not knowing of the outrages they had already committed, he felt
+reluctant to attack them. He sent messages to Osceola telling him that
+it was useless for the Indians to struggle against the white man and
+advising him not to enter upon a war that could end only with the
+destruction of his race.
+
+To this humane counsel Osceola replied with haughty independence: "You
+have guns, and so have we; you have powder and lead, and so have we; you
+have men, and so have we; your men will fight, and so will ours until
+the last drop of the Seminoles' blood has moistened the dust of his
+hunting grounds." He added, what then seemed to the whites an idle
+boast, that after a few weeks' further preparation the Seminoles would
+be ready to enter upon a five years' struggle for the hunting grounds of
+Florida.
+
+At about noon General Clinch charged up the hill. He was greeted with a
+lively fire, but his men were tried fighters and were not checked. On
+they came calmly returning the fire of the enemy. The Indians and
+negroes offered a determined resistance. If they wavered, the shrill and
+terrible "Yo-ho-e-hee" of their leader gave them new courage. Everywhere
+his white plumes waved in the thick of the fight. The fire of his
+warriors broke upon the enemy always at the most unexpected point, and
+had it not been for the bravery of General Clinch, the Indians would
+have driven the soldiers back to the river, on the other side of which
+four hundred volunteers were watching the battle. But they held their
+ground, and at last Osceola was so seriously wounded that he ordered a
+retreat.
+
+For an hour and twenty minutes the battle had raged. The loss of the
+Indians was slight. When at Osceola's signal the wild yells ceased and
+the Indians disappeared in the forest, they bore with them only three
+dead and five wounded. General Clinch had suffered much heavier loss.
+Eight of his men had been killed and forty wounded.
+
+The Seminoles were highly elated by the success of the first engagements
+of the war. They regarded the battle on the Withlacoochee as a great
+victory, and Osceola's praises were on every lip. The old and timid
+Micanopy, head chief of the Seminoles by birth, kept that title of
+honor. But Osceola who, before the war opened, was not so much as a
+sub-chief and had but two constant followers, had been the real power in
+planning the hostile acts that opened the second Seminole war. All knew
+this and they now made him head war chief of the nation. He was only
+thirty-two years old, but he had the respect of all. With his own hand
+he had taken vengeance on the great white man who had wronged him; with
+his own hand he had punished the traitor chief, Charley A. Mathla. He
+had planned the massacre of Dade's troops. With a small band of Indians
+and negroes he had engaged the forces of General Clinch for more than an
+hour, inflicting heavy loss. His words had kindled the spirit of war
+throughout Florida.
+
+On the border, lawless young men were spreading terror and desolation;
+in the month of January sixteen well stocked plantations were laid waste
+by the Indians. In the distant swamp, Indian women were moulding bullets
+for the warriors. Through all the forest paths war parties were hurrying
+towards the camp of Osceola. The leader of each carried a bundle of
+sticks, each stick representing a warrior under his command. These were
+given to Osceola--but how many sticks there were only the Seminoles
+knew.
+
+
+
+
+IX. THE SEMINOLES HOLD THEIR OWN
+
+
+The hostile actions of the Seminoles at the close of the year 1835
+convinced the War Department of the United States that the Seminole
+Indians would not submit to be driven from one section of the country to
+another like sheep. Though the combined force of Indian and negro
+warriors was not supposed to be greater than twelve hundred, their
+treacherous nature and the wildness of the country, made the task of
+subduing them so difficult as to require many times that number of
+soldiers. General Clinch was already in the field quartered at Fort
+Drane, not far from the village of Micanopy. There were several forts in
+the Indian country, but they were meagerly garrisoned. General Scott was
+made commanding general of the army in Florida, with authority to call
+on the governors of South Carolina, Georgia, and Alabama for assistance.
+He went to work at once to raise a force for an Indian war.
+
+Meanwhile Major General Gaines, who was commander of the Western
+Military Department, started to Florida with a force of more than a
+thousand men. He ventured into the Seminoles' country with the hope of
+meeting them and fighting a decisive battle. He passed the scene of the
+Dade massacre and saw the work the savages had done, and after burying
+the dead he continued his march to Fort King. But in the whole of his
+march he saw not a single Indian. He had expected to find supplies for
+his army at Fort King, but being disappointed in this, he was obliged to
+return to Tampa with all speed.
+
+While looking for the ford across the Withlacoochee River he ran into an
+Indian ambush and was so harassed by the savages that he had to give up
+his plan of crossing the river and go into camp. He had ordered General
+Clinch to meet him in this neighborhood, and he sent out expresses to
+see what prospect there was of his arrival. The Indians were gathering
+in large numbers, and he believed that if General Clinch arrived in time
+their combined forces could surround them and crush them. But his supply
+of food was so reduced that he was obliged to have his horses killed to
+provide the men with meat. All the while the Indians were lying in wait
+and assailing all who ventured beyond the fortifications of the camp.
+
+On the fifth of February a negro who spoke good English came to the camp
+and asked to see General Gaines. The latter supposed he was a messenger
+from General Clinch, and ordered that the negro be sent at once to his
+tent. To the general's surprise the negro announced that he was Cæsar,
+the slave of the Seminole chief Micanopy, and that he had been sent by
+the Indians to say that they were tired of fighting and wished to make a
+treaty of peace. General Gaines told Cæsar that he had no power to make
+treaties, but that if the chiefs would pay him a visit the next day, he
+would grant them a truce and notify the President of the United States
+that his red children wanted to be at peace.
+
+[Illustration: CÆSAR AND GENERAL GAINES]
+
+Cæsar had acted without consulting any one; he had been a favorite and
+had his own way with Micanopy until he thought himself greater than his
+master. He had grown tired of the hardships of war and decided to put a
+stop to it. When he returned and gave a report of his visit, the Indians
+were so angry that they were ready to kill him. The negroes, however,
+defended him, and Osceola, fearing trouble between the allies, used his
+influence to save him. Osceola's interference in Cæsar's behalf
+displeased some of the chiefs so much that they deserted without
+ceremony.
+
+As Osceola was ready enough to visit the camp of General Gaines to see
+his force, he went with other chiefs on the following day, as Cæsar had
+promised, to hold an interview with General Gaines. Scarcely had the
+interview begun when General Clinch arrived and seeing a crowd of
+Indians at the entrance of the camp fired on them. This action broke up
+all parley; the Indians thought they had been dealt with treacherously
+and fled.
+
+Since the Indian forces had been weakened and the strength of the enemy
+greatly increased, Osceola decided that it would be best for his
+warriors to withdraw and gave directions for them to disperse. The next
+day the two generals found their enemy gone. Their supplies were too low
+to justify an attempt to pursue them, and General Gaines returned to
+Tampa and General Clinch to Fort Drane without accomplishing anything.
+
+Though General Clinch had not attempted to follow the Indians, Osceola
+and his warriors lost no time in finding his stronghold. They succeeded
+in making his fine plantation at Fort Drane so uncomfortable that in
+July when his crops were at their best he was obliged to leave it.
+Osceola immediately took possession of the place, and occupied it with
+grim pleasure until he was driven out a month later by Major Pearce.
+
+During the spring and summer several skirmishes between the Indians and
+United States soldiers occurred, in which the Indians and their black
+allies fought with remarkable pluck, perseverance, and success.
+
+The want of troops trained for Indian fighting, the unwholesome climate,
+ignorance of the country, the absence of roads and bridges, and the
+difficulty of getting supplies had made it almost impossible to invade
+Florida without large sacrifice of life and treasure. The people of the
+United States, not appreciating the difficulties, complained so much of
+the delay that General Scott was removed from the command and General
+Jesup was promoted to the command in Florida.
+
+In November, before General Jesup assumed control, an engagement took
+place which for a time threatened to close the war. On the eighteenth of
+November a force of five hundred soldiers attacked a company of Indians.
+After a fierce battle the Indians fled, leaving twenty-five dead on the
+field. This was counted by them their first defeat, for so long as they
+carried away their dead they did not admit themselves to be defeated.
+Three days later they rallied to meet General Call, who was advancing
+upon Wahoo swamp with over a thousand men. This was the stronghold of
+the Indians. Here their provisions, their cattle, their wives and
+children were hidden. The Indians had much at stake and made a strong
+defense. At last, however, they were compelled to retreat across the
+river. But they took their stand on the opposite bank behind a sand
+ridge, prepared to fight to the death.
+
+The commander knew that if he could penetrate the Wahoo swamp
+successfully he would bring the Seminole War to an end; but before him
+rolled the swift dark waters of the Withlacoochee, and beyond waited the
+Indians like tigers at bay. He decided not to make the attempt.
+
+
+
+
+X. OSCEOLA AND GENERAL JESUP
+
+
+On the eighth of December 1836, under most favorable circumstances,
+General Jesup took command of the Florida War and entered upon an
+energetic campaign. He had under his command about eight thousand men.
+Among these were several hundred Creek Indians hired to fight the
+Seminoles with the promise of "the pay and emoluments, and equipments of
+soldiers in the army of the United States and such plunder as they may
+take from the Seminoles."
+
+It will be remembered that Osceola had told the Indians that the war was
+not against women and children. General Jesup took a different view of
+the matter. His first step was to make a series of sudden raids upon the
+villages on the Withlacoochee in which he seized unprotected women and
+children. By his frequent sorties he drove the Indians south or divided
+them. On the twelfth of January he reported that he had sent mounted men
+in pursuit of Osceola, who was hiding with only three followers and his
+family.
+
+The capture of women and children broke the spirit of the Indians. They
+felt that if their wives and children must be sent to Arkansas perhaps
+they would be happier there with them than in Florida without them.
+Accordingly many listened with favor to General Jesup's invitation to
+come to Fort Dade and hold a council to decide on terms of capitulation.
+
+On the sixth of March, 1837, five chiefs and a large number of
+sub-chiefs met General Jesup at Fort Dade. They agreed to emigrate
+according to the terms of the treaty of Payne's Landing, but insisted
+that their negroes should be allowed to accompany them. This point was
+at last conceded them, and the fifth article of the terms of
+capitulation contained these words: "The Seminoles and their allies who
+come in and emigrate to the west shall be secure in their lives and
+property; their negroes, their _bona fide_ property, shall accompany
+them west."
+
+Large numbers of Indians expressed their willingness to sign these terms
+and assembled at a point near Fort Brooke on Tampa Bay, where
+twenty-eight vessels waited in the harbor to transport them. Even
+Osceola is said to have sent word that he and his family would emigrate
+with the rest. The camp at Fort Brooke grew larger every day.
+
+General Jesup was well satisfied. He reported that the Florida war was
+ended. And indeed it might have been had the terms of the agreement been
+adhered to. But slave claims were pushed; unprincipled men went into
+the Indians' territory and seized negroes; there was bitter complaint
+against the fifth article of the compact. At last General Jesup was
+induced to change that article so that it should contain a promise by
+the Indians to deliver up all negroes, belonging to white men who had
+been taken during the war.
+
+This change was made with the knowledge and consent of only one chief,
+Alligator. When the Indians in general became aware that the terms of
+capitulation had been tampered with they were highly indignant.
+
+General Jesup appointed a day on which all negroes taken during the war
+were to be brought in, but no attention was paid to his order. He then
+sent Osceola the following message: "I intend to send exploring parties
+into every part of the country during the summer, and I shall send out
+all the negroes who belong to the white people, and you must not allow
+the Indians or their negroes to mix with them. I am sending for
+bloodhounds to trail them, and I intend to hang every one of them who
+does not come in."
+
+When Osceola received this message and learned that ninety negroes had
+already been seized by General Jesup as belonging to the whites he
+declared that the agreement had been violated and that the signers were
+therefore no longer bound by it. He instructed those encamped at Tampa
+to disperse. The old chief, Micanopy, refused to do so or to give the
+command to his people. One night early in June, Osceola entered the camp
+and visited the tent of the sleeping Micanopy. As he had always done
+before, the old man yielded to the wonderful personal influence of
+Osceola and did his bidding like a child.
+
+On the morning of the fifth of June, General Jesup was awakened by an
+officer who came hurrying to tell him that the Indians had gone. Surely
+enough the great camp had vanished in the night. The captives had fled.
+Already they were safe in their marshy fastnesses. Families were
+reunited; all had had rest and food and clothes. The coming sickly
+season would make it impossible to pursue them till their growing crops
+were harvested. The Seminole war with all its difficulties was reopened.
+
+Osceola, who a few months before had been a hunted fugitive with only
+three followers, without hope for himself or his people, was again a
+powerful war chief. With a brighter outlook his natural cheerfulness of
+disposition returned, and he hoped and planned great things for the
+coming autumn.
+
+Early in September he learned that his good friend "King Philip" had
+been captured with eleven followers by General Joseph Hernandez. King
+Philip's son, Wild Cat, came to him, saying he had been to St. Augustine
+to see his father, that the palefaces had treated him well and had
+allowed him to carry his father's messages to his friends. The old chief
+wanted Osceola to come to St. Augustine to arrange for his liberation.
+
+Osceola, always generous and ready to serve a friend, sent back to
+General Hernandez a finely wrought bead pipe and a white plume to
+indicate that the path between them was now white and safe and to
+inquire whether it would be safe for his return.
+
+Wild Cat soon returned to Osceola with presents and friendly messages
+from the general. With the hope of gaining the release of King Philip,
+Osceola started for St. Augustine with a large attendance of warriors.
+Wild Cat went in advance to announce his coming. With a great show of
+regard General Hernandez went out to meet Osceola with a store of
+supplies. He met his advance guard, and learning that Osceola would not
+arrive till evening, left word that Osceola should choose a camping
+ground near Fort Peyton, and went back to communicate with General
+Jesup.
+
+The next morning General Hernandez rode out dressed in full uniform and
+escorted by his own staff and many of the officers of General Jesup's
+staff. He found Osceola and Chief Alligator with seventy-one picked
+warriors assembled under the white flag for council. The warriors had
+brought with them the women of King Philip's family, and about one
+hundred negroes to be given up in exchange for the prisoner.
+
+After the usual greetings and ceremonies General Hernandez took out a
+paper and said that General Jesup wanted to know the Indians' answer to
+these questions: "What is your object in coming? What do you expect? Are
+you prepared to deliver up at once the slaves taken from the citizens?
+Why have you not surrendered them already as promised by Alligator at
+Fort King? Have the chiefs of the nation held a council in relation to
+the subjects of the talk at Fort King? What chiefs attended that council
+and what was their determination? Have the chiefs sent a messenger with
+the decision of the council? Have the principal chiefs, Micanopy,
+Jumper, Cloud, and Alligator, sent a messenger, and if so, what is their
+message? Why have not those chiefs come in themselves?"
+
+When Osceola heard these questions he struggled to answer. He began a
+sentence but could not finish it. Turning to Alligator he said in a low
+husky voice: "I feel choked. You must speak for me." Perhaps his
+suspicions were aroused by the questions; perhaps he saw afar the lines
+of soldiers closing round his camp--at any rate he was deeply troubled.
+
+Finding the answers given by Alligator unsatisfactory, General
+Hernandez, following the orders of General Jesup, gave the signal and
+the troops surrounding the camp closed in upon the dismayed Indians and
+marched them off to the fort.
+
+In this way was the man that the generals in Florida pronounced the war
+spirit of the Seminoles conquered.
+
+
+
+
+XI. THE IMPRISONMENT OF OSCEOLA
+
+
+Osceola and his warriors were taken by their captors to St. Augustine
+where they were imprisoned within the strong walls of the old Spanish
+castle of San Marco. It was very hard for these Indians who loved
+liberty better than life to be shut up in narrow dark cells, to be
+obliged to give up the warpath, to sit for hours, and days, and weeks,
+and months in inaction, not knowing what need their friends had of them
+but imagining the heaviest possible misfortunes for those they held
+dear.
+
+[Illustration: FORT SAN MARCO]
+
+Osceola could have stood the torture of wrenched limbs and of fire with
+haughty spirit unbent. What was that to this torture of the white man's,
+the dim light, the quiet, the narrow walls, the waiting, the not
+knowing, the fearing of evil?
+
+The warrior still held his head high, but gradually the fierce gleam in
+his eye changed to a look of gentleness, of unspeakable sadness, and his
+winning smile came to have so much sorrow in it that men said to each
+other after they left him, "His heart is breaking." He was allowed to
+see and talk with other prisoners. When Micanopy and other chiefs were
+brought to the fort he was told of their arrival. When Wild Cat, after
+fasting many days, escaped through the small window in his wall with the
+help of a rope made from his blanket, Osceola was aware of it. But none
+of these things seemed to move him.
+
+General Jesup told the chiefs that he would urge the United States
+authorities to let them and their people stay in southern Florida if
+they would agree to keep their tribes at peace, guard the frontier, and
+themselves accompany him to Washington. Micanopy showed a little
+distrust when he heard the proposition, but Osceola took off his proud
+head dress and removing one of the beautiful plumes from it handed it to
+the man who had betrayed him, saying simply: "Give this to my white
+father to show him that Osceola will do as you have said."
+
+The suggestion made by General Jesup was not considered favorably by the
+government, but he was instructed to carry out the Jackson policy of
+transportation. He had collected so many captives at St. Augustine that
+he feared trouble and decided to separate them. He sent all the negroes
+to Tampa and the Indians to Charleston, S. C. Late in December the
+Indians were shipped on the steamer Poinsett. Among them were Osceola,
+Micanopy, Alligator and Cloud. Besides the chiefs one hundred and
+sixteen warriors and eighty-two women and children were sent to Fort
+Moultrie. Osceola's two wives and little daughters were in the company.
+They arrived at Charleston on the first day of January, 1838, after a
+quiet voyage.
+
+At Fort Moultrie, Osceola was treated with much consideration; he was
+allowed to walk about the enclosure and to receive visitors in his room.
+Still he ate little and every day grew more wan and thin. All the chiefs
+were so low-spirited that great efforts were made to cheer them. A very
+popular actress was then playing at the Charleston theater, and knowing
+the Indian's love of whatever is gay and spectacular, the authorities at
+the fort decided to take the chiefs to the theater on the sixth of
+January.
+
+Public sympathy had been excited by reports of the capture,
+imprisonment, and failing health of the once terrible Osceola. The
+theater was crowded with Charleston people more anxious to see the chief
+than the beautiful actress. The Indians were led into the brilliantly
+lighted hall filled with staring men and women. They looked neither to
+the right nor to the left, but took their places in quiet and watched
+with steady eyes and unsmiling faces the entertainment provided for
+them. Osceola had made no objection to coming, but he sat amidst the
+mirth and glamor, so sad and stern that those who had brought him there
+and those who had come to see him felt rebuked. His trouble was too real
+to be easily comforted, too deep to be an amusing spectacle. The papers
+of the day recorded the strange scene of the captive Osceola at the play
+in poetry and prose.
+
+Later an incident happened in which Osceola took some interest. George
+Catlin, who had traveled for several years among the Indians and was
+regarded by them as a friend, came to the fort to paint the portraits of
+the chiefs for the United States government. When Mr. Catlin asked
+Osceola if he might paint his portrait the latter seemed greatly
+pleased. He arrayed himself in his gayest calico hunting shirt, his
+splendid plumed turban, and all his ornaments, and stood patiently while
+the artist worked. Mr. Catlin enjoyed painting the fine head, with its
+high forehead and clear eye. He made two portraits of Osceola, both of
+which are now in the collection of Indian portraits at the Smithsonian
+Institution, in Washington.
+
+Mr. Catlin came to be well acquainted with the chiefs whose portraits he
+painted, and used to have them come to his room in the evenings, where
+they all talked with great freedom. He felt deep sympathy for Osceola,
+who told him all the details of his capture. When Osceola learned that
+Mr. Catlin had been west of the Mississippi he asked him many questions
+about the country and the Indians living there.
+
+But every day Osceola's health grew more feeble and, on the day when the
+second portrait was finished, he became so ill that he was thought to be
+dying. He rallied, however, and when Mr. Catlin left a few days later,
+it was with the hope that Osceola would regain his health and strength.
+He requested the fort doctor to keep him informed about the chief's
+condition.
+
+
+
+
+XII. THE END
+
+
+The day after George Catlin left Fort Moultrie, Osceola had a severe
+attack of throat trouble. He refused to take the doctor's medicine. A
+Seminole medicine man came and gave the sick man Indian remedies.
+Osceola's wives nursed him tenderly, but in spite of all they could do
+he grew rapidly worse and died on the thirtieth of January, 1838, after
+three months of captivity.
+
+Dr. Wheedon sent the following interesting account of his death to Mr.
+Catlin:
+
+[Illustration: "MEDICINE MAN"]
+
+"About half an hour before he died, he seemed to be sensible that he was
+dying; and, although he could not speak, he signified by signs that he
+wished me to send for the chiefs and for the officers of the post, whom
+I called in. He made signs to his wives by his side, to go and bring his
+full dress which he wore in time of war; which having been brought in,
+he rose up in his bed, which was on the floor, and put on his shirt, his
+leggings and his moccasins, girded on his war belt, bullet-pouch and
+powder-horn, and laid his knife by the side of him on the floor.
+
+"He then called for his red paint and looking-glass, which latter was
+held before him. Then he deliberately painted one half of his face, his
+neck, and his throat with vermilion, a custom practised when the
+irrevocable oath of war and destruction is taken. His knife he then
+placed in its sheath under his belt, and he carefully arranged his
+turban on his head and his three ostrich plumes that he was in the habit
+of wearing in it.
+
+"Being thus prepared in full dress, he lay down a few moments to recover
+strength sufficient, when he rose up as before, and with most benignant
+and pleasing smiles, extended his hand to me and to all of the officers
+and chiefs that were around him, and shook hands with us all in dead
+silence, and with his wives and little children.
+
+"He made a signal for them to lower him down upon his bed, which was
+done, and he then slowly drew from his war-belt his scalping-knife,
+which he firmly grasped in his right hand, laying it across the other on
+his breast, and in a moment smiled away his last breath without a
+struggle or a groan."
+
+Osceola was buried with some ceremony near the fort. Officers attended
+his funeral and a military salute was fired over his grave. This show of
+respect comforted a little the grief-stricken friends of the chief.
+
+It is said that Osceola was not allowed to rest in peace, even in death.
+A few nights after his burial men of the race that despised him as a
+barbarian came by night, opened his grave and cut his head from his
+body. But openly only respect was shown to the remains of the greatest
+chief of the Seminoles. His grave was inclosed with an iron railing and
+marked with a stone bearing the following inscription:
+
+   Osceola,
+   Patriot and Warrior,
+   Died at Fort Moultrie,
+   January 30, 1838.
+
+[Illustration: REMOVAL OF SOUTHERN INDIANS]
+
+The war did not close with the death of Osceola. Wild Cat took command
+and the trouble continued till 1842. During the war the Seminoles lost
+many brave warriors; several thousand Indians and five hundred of their
+allies were driven from their homes in Florida to a strange land which
+they were obliged to share with their old enemies, the Creeks.
+
+The white men gained the lands of the Indians, a vast and rich new
+territory for settlement, removed a refuge for runaway slaves, and
+established peace on the Southern frontier. For these gains, however,
+they had paid a heavy price in treasure, in human lives, and in honor.
+
+END
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by 
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25538-8.txt or 25538-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/5/3/25538/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/25538-8.zip b/25538-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d8b9e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-8.zip
diff --git a/25538-h.zip b/25538-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb62457
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h.zip
diff --git a/25538-h/25538-h.htm b/25538-h/25538-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2200d98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/25538-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,6633 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Four American Indians, by Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+
+    div.centered {text-align: center;} /* work around for IE centering with CSS problem part 1 */
+    div.centered table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; text-align: left;} /* work around for IE centering with CSS problem part 2 */
+
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+    .figleft     {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top:
+                 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+    .figright    {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;
+                 margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;}
+
+    .footnotes        {border: dashed 1px;}
+    .footnote         {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
+    .footnote .label  {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+    .fnanchor         {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;}
+
+
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by 
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Four American Indians
+       King Philip, Pontiac, Tecumseh, Osceola
+
+Author: Edson L. Whitney
+        Frances M. Perry
+
+Release Date: May 20, 2008 [EBook #25538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+<h1>FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS</h1>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" width="50%" cellspacing="0" summary="FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS">
+<tr><th align='left'><h3><span class="smcap">King Philip</span></h3></th><th align='left'><h3><span class="smcap">Tecumseh</span></h3></th></tr>
+<tr><th align='left'><h3><span class="smcap">Pontiac</span></h3></th><th align='left'><h3><span class="smcap">Osceola</span></h3></th></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+
+   <h3>A BOOK FOR YOUNG AMERICANS</h3>
+
+   <h4>BY</h4>
+
+   <h3>EDSON L. WHITNEY and FRANCES M. PERRY</h3>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 150px;">
+<img src="images/i001.jpg" width="150" height="140" alt="" title="publisher&#39;s logo" />
+</div>
+
+   <p class="center">NEW YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO<br />
+
+   AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY<br /><br />
+
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span>
+
+
+
+Copyright, 1904, by<br />
+<span class="smcap">Edson L. Whitney</span> and <span class="smcap">Frances M. Perry</span><br />
+<br />
+Four Am. Ind.<br />
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CONTENTS" id="CONTENTS"></a>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF KING PHILIP</h2>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="65%" cellspacing="0" summary="THE STORY OF KING PHILIP">
+<tr><td align='right'>&nbsp;</td><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td><td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's People</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#I_PHILIP_PEOPLE'><b>9</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's Childhood Home</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#II_PHILIPS_CHILDHOOD_HOME"><b>12</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Massasoit and His Two Sons</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_15'><b>15</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip Hears of the English</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_19'><b>19</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip Meets the English</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_23'><b>23</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's Education</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_26'><b>26</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's Daily Life</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_30'><b>30</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's Relations with the English</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_34'><b>34</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip Becomes Grand Sachem</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_37'><b>37</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip's Troubles with the Whites</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_39'><b>39</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Philip and the Indian Councils</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_42'><b>42</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">King Philip's War</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_45'><b>45</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Last Days of Philip</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_48'><b>48</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF PONTIAC</h2>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="65%" cellspacing="0" summary="THE STORY OF PONTIAC">
+<tr><td align='right'>&nbsp;</td><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td><td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Meeting of Pontiac and the English</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_53'><b>53</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Pontiac's Childhood</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_59'><b>59</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Pontiac's Education</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_62'><b>62</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Chief</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_66'><b>66</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Plot</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_70'><b>70</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Seventh of May</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_74'><b>74</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Hostilities Begun</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_79'><b>79</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Two Leaders</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_84'><b>84</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Siege of Detroit</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_89'><b>89</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Important Engagements</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_95'><b>95</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The End of the Siege</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_101'><b>101</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">All Along the Frontier</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_104'><b>104</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Last of Pontiac</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_110'><b>110</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF TECUMSEH</h2>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="65%" cellspacing="0" summary="THE STORY OF TECUMSEH">
+<tr><td align='right'>&nbsp;</td><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td><td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Early Years</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_117'><b>117</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Youth</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_121'><b>121</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Adventures of the Young Brave</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_125'><b>125</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Tecumseh Dissatisfied</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_128'><b>128</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Tecumseh's Brother, the Prophet</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_133'><b>133</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Greenville</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_137'><b>137</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Prophet's Town</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_144'><b>144</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Council Between Harrison and Tecumseh</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_149'><b>149</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Preparations for War</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_155'><b>155</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Battle of Tippecanoe</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_161'><b>161</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Reorganization of the Indians</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_166'><b>166</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Tecumseh and the British</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_170'><b>170</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF OSCEOLA</h2>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="65%" cellspacing="0" summary="THE STORY OF OSCEOLA">
+<tr><td align='right'>&nbsp;</td><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td><td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Exodus of the Red Sticks</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_179'><b>179</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Florida Home</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_183'><b>183</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The First Seminole War</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_189'><b>189</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Grievances</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_194'><b>194</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Treaty of Payne's Landing</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_202'><b>202</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Hostilities</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_207'><b>207</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The War Opened</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_212'><b>212</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Osceola a War Chief</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_219'><b>219</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Seminoles Hold Their Own</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_223'><b>223</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Osceola and General Jesup</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_228'><b>228</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Imprisonment Osceola</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_233'><b>233</b></a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The End</span></td><td align='right'><a href='#Page_238'><b>238</b></a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<h2><br /><br />
+THE STORY OF<br />
+KING PHILIP</h2>
+
+<h4>BY</h4>
+
+<h3>EDSON L. WHITNEY<br /><br /></h3>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span><br /><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<h2><a name="I_PHILIP_PEOPLE" id="I_PHILIP_PEOPLE"></a>I. PHILIP'S PEOPLE</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 267px;">
+<img src="images/i009.jpg" width="267" height="400" alt="A GRAND SACHEM" title="" />
+<span class="caption">A GRAND SACHEM</span>
+</div>
+<p>Philip, ruler of the Wampanoags, was the only Indian in our country to
+whom the English colonists gave the title of king. Why no other Indian
+ever received this title I cannot tell, neither is it known how it
+happened to be given to Philip.</p>
+
+<p>The Wampanoags were a tribe of Indians whose homes were in what is now
+southeastern Massachusetts and in Rhode Island east of Narragansett Bay.
+A few of them, also, lived on the large islands farther south, Nantucket
+and Martha's Vineyard.</p>
+
+
+<p>Three centuries ago Massasoit, Philip's father, was the grand sachem, or
+ruler, of the Wampanoags. His people did not form one united tribe. They
+had no states, cities, and villages, with governors, mayors, and
+aldermen, as we have. Nor did they live in close relations with one
+another and vote for common officers.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand, they lived in very small villages. A few families
+pitched their wigwams together and lived<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> in much the same way as people
+do now when they camp out in the summer.</p>
+
+<p>Generally, among the Wampanoags, only one family lived in a wigwam. The
+fathers, or heads of the families in the different wigwams, came
+together occasionally and consulted about such matters as seemed
+important to them.</p>
+
+
+<p>Every one present at the meeting had a right to express his opinion on
+the question under consideration, and as often as he wished. All spoke
+calmly, without eloquence, and without set speeches. They talked upon
+any subject they pleased, as long as they pleased, and when they
+pleased.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The most prominent person in a village was called the sagamore. His
+advice and opinion were generally followed, and he governed the people
+in a very slight manner.</p>
+
+
+<p>The Indians of several villages were sometimes united together in a
+petty tribe and were ruled by a sachem, or chief.</p>
+
+<p>The chief did not rule over a very large tract of country. Generally
+none of his subjects lived more than eight or ten miles away from him.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;">
+<img src="images/i010.jpg" width="550" height="427" alt="WIGWAMS" title="" />
+<span class="caption">WIGWAMS</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>He ruled as he pleased, and was not subject to any constitution or court
+of any kind. In fact, he was a leader rather than a ruler. Nevertheless,
+a wise chief never did anything of great importance without first
+consulting the different sagamores of his tribe.</p>
+
+<p>The chief held a little higher position in the tribe than the sagamore
+did in his village. He settled disputes. He held a very rude form of
+court, where justice was given in each case according to its merits. He
+sent and received messengers to and from other tribes.</p>
+
+<p>As several villages were united in a single petty tribe, so also several
+petty tribes were loosely joined together and ruled over by a grand
+sachem.</p>
+
+<p>The different Wampanoag tribes which owed allegiance to Philip and his
+father, Massasoit, were five in number besides the small bands on the
+islands of Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard. The village where the grand
+sachem lived was called by them Pokanoket.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="II_PHILIPS_CHILDHOOD_HOME" id="II_PHILIPS_CHILDHOOD_HOME"></a>II. PHILIP'S CHILDHOOD HOME</h2>
+
+
+<p>Massasoit had several children. The eldest son was named Wamsutta, and
+the second Metacomet. In later years, the English gave them the names of
+Alexander and Philip, which are much easier names for us to pronounce.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 122px;">
+<img src="images/i013.jpg" width="122" height="280" alt="INDIAN BABY" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN BABY</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>We do not know the exact date of Philip's birth, for the Indians kept no
+account of time as we do, nor did they trouble to ask any one his age.
+It is probable, however, that Philip was born before 1620, the year in
+which the Pilgrims settled near the Wampanoags.</p>
+
+<p>Philip spent his boyhood days playing with his brothers and sisters, and
+with the neighbors' children; for although he was the son of a grand
+sachem, he had no special privileges above those of the other children
+around him.</p>
+
+<p>We are apt to think of a prince as a man that does very little work. We
+expect him to attend banquets, to be dressed in military uniform, with a
+beautiful sword at his side and many medals on his breast, to be
+surrounded by servants, and to have everybody bow down to him and stand
+ready to do his bidding.</p>
+
+<p>It was very different with Philip. He lived in no better way than did
+the other members of his tribe. His home was neither better nor worse
+than theirs. His food was of the same quality. His daily life was the
+same. He wore no uniform. He never heard of medals or badges. He had no
+servants. His father differed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> from the other Indians only in being
+their leader in time of war and in being looked up to whenever the
+chiefs of the tribe held a meeting, or council.</p>
+
+
+<p>Philip's home was not such as American boys and girls are brought up in.
+There were no toys, no baby carriages, no candy. There were no romps
+with the parents, for the Indians were a quiet, sober people, and rarely
+showed any affection for their children.</p>
+
+<p>Philip's father never played any games with him. In fact, in his younger
+days the boy never received very much attention from his father. He was
+taken care of by his mother. He was never rocked in a cradle, but was
+strapped in a kind of bag made of broad pieces of bark and covered with
+soft fur. Sometimes he was carried in this on his mother's back, as she
+went about her work. Sometimes he was hung up on the branch of a tree.</p>
+
+
+<p>The little house in which he lived was called a wigwam. It was circular,
+or oval, in shape, and made of barks or mats laid over a framework of
+small poles. These poles were fixed at one end in the ground, and were
+fastened together at the top, forming a framework shaped somewhat like a
+tent.</p>
+
+<p>Two low openings on opposite sides of the wigwam served as doors. These
+were closed with mats when necessary, thus making the place tight and
+warm.</p>
+
+<p>The wigwam had but one room. In the middle of it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> were a few stones
+which served as a fireplace. There was no chimney, but the smoke passed
+out through an opening at the top of the wigwam.</p>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 350px;">
+<img src="images/i014.jpg" width="350" height="308" alt="MOUNT HOPE" title="" />
+<span class="caption">MOUNT HOPE</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>On one side of the fireplace was a large couch made of rough boards
+raised perhaps a foot above the ground and covered with mats or skins.
+The couch was very wide, so that Philip and the rest of the children
+could lie on it side by side at night.</p>
+
+<p>There was no other furniture in the room. A few baskets were hung on the
+walls ready for use. A few mats were placed here and there as ornaments.
+The dishes that held Philip's food were rude vessels made of baked clay,
+of pieces of bark, of bits of hollowed stone, or of wood.</p>
+
+
+<p>There was very little desire to keep the wigwam neat and tidy. It was
+used for only a few months, and then given up for a new one that was
+built near by. In the summer it was customary to pitch the wigwam in an
+open place. In the winter it was pitched in the thick woods for
+protection from the winds and storms.</p>
+
+<p>Such was the home in which Philip was brought up. It differed but little
+from those of his playmates, for there was no aristocracy among the
+Indians. The place<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> where Massasoit and his family generally lived was
+near the present site of Bristol, on a narrow neck of land projecting
+into Narragansett Bay. It is now called Mount Hope, and is twelve or
+fifteen miles southeast of Providence, Rhode Island.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="III_MASSASOIT_AND_HIS_TWO_SONS" id="III_MASSASOIT_AND_HIS_TWO_SONS"></a>III. MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i015.jpg" width="600" height="360" alt="" title="MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS" />
+</div>
+
+<p>In the early evening, during his boyhood days, Philip delighted to sit
+near the camp fire where the members of his tribe were wont to gather.
+There he eagerly listened to the stories of adventure told by his
+elders, and wished that he was old enough to enter into the sports that
+they so interestingly described.</p>
+
+<p>Although children were not expected to talk in the presence of their
+elders, Philip frequently showed his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> interest in their stories by
+asking many questions in regard to the places visited by the older
+Indians.</p>
+
+<p>In those days news traveled slowly from one little village to another,
+for there were neither telegraphs nor telephones; no, not even
+railroads. In fact, there were no roads, and even the paths through the
+woods were so little used that it was difficult to find one's way from
+one place to another. The Indians kept no animals of any kind, and
+always traveled from place to place on foot.</p>
+
+<p>One pleasant evening in June, in the year 1620, little Philip noticed
+that there was less general story-telling than usual, and that the
+Indians seemed greatly interested in a long story which one of their
+number was telling. He could not understand the story, but he frequently
+caught the words, "Squanto" and "English." These were new words to him.</p>
+
+<p>The next evening, as Philip and his brother were sitting by the fire,
+they asked their father what had caused the Indians to be so serious in
+their talk, and what the long story was about.</p>
+
+<p>"Squanto has come home," his father replied.</p>
+
+<p>"And who is Squanto?" asked Philip.</p>
+
+<p>Then his father told him a story, which was too long to be repeated
+here. But in brief it was as follows:</p>
+
+<p>Several years before&mdash;long, in fact, before Philip was born&mdash;a ship had
+come from across the sea. It was larger than any other vessel the
+Indians had ever seen.</p>
+
+<p>The only boats that Philip knew anything about were quite small, and
+were called canoes. They were made<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> either of birch bark fastened over a
+light wooden frame, or of logs that had been hollowed by burning and
+charring.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 399px;">
+<img src="images/i017.jpg" width="399" height="400" alt="INDIAN IN CANOE" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN IN CANOE</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>But the boat from across the sea was many times larger than any of
+theirs&mdash;so Massasoit explained to the boys&mdash;and had accommodations for a
+great many men. Instead of being pushed along by paddles, it was driven
+by the wind by means of large pieces of cloth stretched across long,
+strong sticks of wood.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians did not go down to the shore, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> watched this boat from
+the highlands some distance inland. Finally the vessel stopped and some
+of the men came ashore. The Indians looked at the strangers in
+astonishment. Their skin was of a pale, whitish color, very different
+from that of the Indians, which was of a copper or reddish clay color.</p>
+
+<p>The white men, or the pale-faced men, as Massasoit called them, made
+signs of friendship to the Indians, and after a few minutes persuaded
+them to go down to the shore. There the two peoples traded with each
+other. The Indians gave furs and skins, and received in return beads and
+trinkets of various kinds.</p>
+
+<p>When the vessel sailed away it carried off five Indians who had been
+lured on board and had not been allowed to return to shore. These
+Indians had not been heard from since, and that was fifteen years
+before.</p>
+
+<p>Little Philip's eyes increased in size, and instinctively he clenched
+his fists at the thought of the wrong that had been done his people by
+the palefaces.</p>
+
+<p>His father went on with the story, and told him how the Indians then
+vowed vengeance on the white man; for it was a custom of the Indians to
+punish any person who committed a wrong act towards one of their number.</p>
+
+<p>From time to time, other vessels visited their shores, but no Indian
+could ever be induced to go on board any of them.</p>
+
+<p>Nine years later, another outrage was committed. The palefaces while
+trading with the Indians suddenly seized upon twenty-seven of the
+latter, took them to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> their vessel, and sailed away with them before
+they could be rescued. Is it any wonder that Philip felt that the whites
+were his natural enemies?</p>
+
+<p>After that time, Massasoit said, the Indians had refused to have any
+dealings with the whites. Whenever a white man's vessel came in sight,
+the Indians prepared to shoot any one that came ashore. And now another
+white man's vessel had arrived on the coast, and several of its crew had
+landed in spite of all that could be done to prevent them.</p>
+
+<p>To the great surprise of Massasoit's men, there was an Indian with these
+palefaces. And that Indian proved to be Squanto, one of the five who had
+been taken away fifteen years before.</p>
+
+<p>This is but a bare outline of what Massasoit told his sons. It seemed to
+the lads like a fairy tale, and for days they talked of nothing but this
+strange story.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IV_PHILIP_HEARS_OF_THE_ENGLISH" id="IV_PHILIP_HEARS_OF_THE_ENGLISH"></a>IV. PHILIP HEARS OF THE ENGLISH</h2>
+
+
+<p>During the following summer young Philip heard many an interesting story
+about the English. Squanto himself came to see Massasoit several times,
+and from him Philip heard the story of his adventures across the sea.</p>
+
+<p>Late in the fall, long before Philip had lost his interest in the
+stories of Squanto, another English vessel arrived on the coast of the
+Indian country.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>On the eleventh day of November, 1620, the vessel anchored near Cape
+Cod. Sixteen palefaces came ashore. They did not act like the others who
+had preceded them. They made no effort to become acquainted with the
+Indians, but spent their time in looking around and in examining the
+country.</p>
+
+<p>They found four or five bushels of corn, which had been stored for the
+winter by an Indian, and carried it away to their vessel.</p>
+
+<p>This angered the Indians, and we can well imagine the thoughts that
+passed through the mind of the boy Philip when he heard that the English
+had stolen the corn that belonged to a poor Indian, one of his father's
+friends.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 209px;">
+<img src="images/i020.jpg" width="209" height="350" alt="WATCHING THE PALEFACES" title="" />
+<span class="caption">WATCHING THE PALEFACES</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Indians talked the matter over by their camp fire, and little Philip
+listened to the story as eagerly as he had listened to the story of
+Squanto six months before.</p>
+
+<p>A week or so later, more news came to Mount Hope. The palefaces had
+visited the shore a second time, and on this occasion had stolen a bag
+of beans and some more corn.</p>
+
+<p>How Philip's anger increased as he heard his father talk the matter over
+with the other Indians!</p>
+
+<p>A few days afterwards Philip heard still other news of the English. They
+had come ashore a third time. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> Indians had watched them from a
+distance. Finally, when a good opportunity offered itself, thirty or
+forty Indians quietly surrounded the palefaces, and at a given signal
+every one of them yelled at the top of his voice and began to shoot
+arrows at the hated visitors.</p>
+
+<p>For a time it looked as if the palefaces would be driven into the water.
+But soon they fired their guns, and the Indians ran away frightened at
+the noise.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was greatly interested in the description that was given of a
+gun. He had never so much as heard of one before, and he thought it very
+strange that any one should be afraid of little pieces of lead. He could
+not see why it was not as easy to dodge bullets as it was to dodge
+arrows.</p>
+
+<p>A week or two later still further news was brought to Massasoit's
+village. The palefaces had left Cape Cod and had sailed across the bay
+to Patuxet (to which the English gave the name of Plymouth). There they
+had gone ashore and had built some log cabins, evidently with the
+intention of staying for some time.</p>
+
+<p>This was something that the Indians could not understand. Every day some
+of them went to the top of the hill which overlooked the little
+settlement to see what the English were doing. Then they returned to
+Mount Hope with something new to tell about the palefaces, and Philip
+eagerly listened to every story that was related.</p>
+
+<p>Several meetings of the Indians were held during the winter, at which
+Philip was always present, and finally<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> one of their number, whose name
+was Samoset, was sent to Plymouth to ask the English why they had
+settled in this land which belonged, of right, to the red men.</p>
+
+<p>Samoset returned a few days later. He told his story to the Indians
+around the camp fire, little Philip, as usual, paying great attention to
+what was said.</p>
+
+<p>Samoset said that the palefaces had been very kind to him, and had told
+him that they had come to this country to settle, that they wanted to
+live on the most friendly terms with the red men, and that they desired
+to pay not only for the corn and beans which they had taken, but also
+for the land on which they had built their village.</p>
+
+<p>At the close of his story the Indians expressed themselves as satisfied
+with the palefaces, and Philip felt that perhaps the English were not so
+bad as he had thought them to be.</p>
+
+<p>Samoset was then sent to the settlers to tell them that Massasoit and
+some of his friends would like to meet them for a friendly talk about
+many things that might otherwise become a cause of disagreement between
+them. He brought back word that the English eagerly welcomed the
+opportunity to meet the Indians, and had offered to see them on the
+following day.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;">
+<img src="images/i022.jpg" width="400" height="104" alt="" title="chapter endpiece" />
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="V_PHILIP_MEETS_THE_ENGLISH" id="V_PHILIP_MEETS_THE_ENGLISH"></a>V. PHILIP MEETS THE ENGLISH</h2>
+
+
+<p>The next day Massasoit and sixty of his warriors visited the English.
+They did not go into the English village, but stopped on the top of the
+hill near by.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was not with them, for at this time he was too young to go so far
+away from home. We can imagine his feelings, however, when he saw his
+father and the warriors start out on their journey.</p>
+
+<p>They were dressed in costumes that would look very strange if seen on
+our streets to-day. Their clothing was made of the raw skin of wild
+animals. Their feet were protected by moccasins made of thin deerskin.
+Each one was tall, erect, and active, with long, coarse, black hair
+falling down his back.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 261px;">
+<img src="images/i023.jpg" width="261" height="300" alt="A WARRIOR" title="" />
+<span class="caption">A WARRIOR</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>None of them had any physical deformities, for it was the custom of the
+tribe to kill any child that was born deaf, dumb, blind, or lame.</p>
+
+<p>Each one was decked with his personal ornaments. These did not consist
+of gold, silver, diamonds, or any other precious stones so familiar to
+us. The Indians knew nothing about these. Their ornaments consisted of
+ear-rings, nose-rings, bracelets, and necklaces made out of shells or
+fish-bones or shining stones, which were very common in that
+neighborhood.</p>
+
+<p>Their faces were smeared with heavy daubs of paint.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> Each one had a
+cloak thrown over his shoulders, and he also wore a head-dress made of
+feathers or quills. To Philip it seemed as if he had never seen anything
+so imposing.</p>
+
+<p>We can imagine how eagerly Philip listened to the story that his father
+told when he came back home: how the settlers came out to meet him on
+the hill, and made him a present of three knives, a copper chain, and an
+ear-ring, besides several good things to eat, very different from
+anything he had ever tasted before.</p>
+
+<p>Then Massasoit described the treaty that he had made with the palefaces
+in which the settlers and the Wampanoags had agreed to remain friends
+and to help each other in every way they could. To make the treaty as
+strong as possible, the palefaces had written it down on paper and had
+signed their names to it. The Indians did not know how to read or write.
+That was something that they had never heard of before. But they drew
+rude pictures at the end of the writing and called these pictures their
+names.</p>
+
+<p>Philip never tired listening to the stories about the palefaces. He was
+still too young to be taken to their settlement, but he longed for a
+chance to see them.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, one day in the middle of the summer of 1621, about four months
+after the Indians had made their treaty with the whites, six warriors
+came into the little Indian village at Mount Hope with two men, who
+Philip saw were palefaces. They were not so tall as the Indians. They
+were thicker set, and their faces were covered with beards.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Massasoit recognized them immediately, for they were some of the party
+that he had met at Plymouth. They had come on a friendly visit to him,
+and had brought him a red cotton coat and a copper chain. Philip was
+greatly pleased to see the palefaces, of whom he had heard so much. He
+listened to their stories, answered their inquiries in regard to Indian
+life, and learned what he could about their homes and customs.</p>
+
+<p>After this, the settlers called on the Indians many times, and Philip
+soon became very well acquainted with them.</p>
+
+<p>During the next few months several white men came from England and
+settled at Weymouth, a few miles north of Plymouth. These new settlers
+were not so honest as those that had settled at Plymouth. They stole
+from the Indians and otherwise injured them, and caused them to plot
+against all the whites in the country. But before their plans were
+carried out Massasoit was taken sick. The medicine man was called in.</p>
+
+<p>The medicine man was the physician. He had learned the medicinal virtues
+of a few simple herbs. He knew how to bind up wounds in bark with
+certain preparations of leaves, and he could also cure a few fevers. He
+went through many magical ceremonies with howls, roars, and antics of
+various kinds. If the sick man became well, the medicine man took all
+the credit; if the patient died, then the medicine man said that the bad
+spirit had too strong a hold on him.</p>
+
+<p>But the medicine man did not help Massasoit. Philip<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> watched by his
+father's side and saw him grow worse day by day. He remembered how, only
+a few years before, the smallpox had carried away large numbers of the
+Indians, and now he began to think that the days of his father, too,
+were numbered.</p>
+
+<p>But one day a paleface, one of the leaders of the colony at Plymouth,
+came into the Indian village. He sent the medicine man away and tenderly
+nursed Massasoit himself. He gave him medicine, nourished him with
+several little delicacies, and brought him slowly back to health.</p>
+
+<p>Massasoit was so grateful for the kindness shown him that he told the
+palefaces of the Indian plot against them.</p>
+
+<p>The whites at Weymouth were driven away and the palefaces at Plymouth
+continued to live on most excellent terms of friendship with the
+Wampanoags.</p>
+
+<p>In the years that followed, Philip became better acquainted with the
+whites, and while he never loved them, he had great respect for their
+wisdom.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VI_PHILIPS_EDUCATION" id="VI_PHILIPS_EDUCATION"></a>VI. PHILIP'S EDUCATION</h2>
+
+
+<p>During the next twenty years many more white men came and settled on or
+near the lands of the Wampanoags.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, Philip grew to manhood and received the same education
+that was given to the other young men of his tribe. It was very
+different from the education received by us to-day. The Indians had no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span>
+schools. Philip did not learn his A B C's or the multiplication table.
+He never learned how to read or write. He knew nothing about science,
+and could not even count, or keep track of time.</p>
+
+<p>His education was of a different character, and was intended to make him
+brave, daring, hardy, and able to bear pain; for these things were
+thought by the Indians to be of the greatest importance.</p>
+
+<p>He was taught to undergo the most horrible tortures without a word of
+complaint or a sign of anguish. He would beat his shins and legs with
+sticks, and run prickly briars and brambles into them in order to become
+used to pain. He would run eighty to one hundred miles in one day and
+back in the next two.</p>
+
+<p>When he neared manhood he was blindfolded and taken into the woods far
+from home to a place where he had never been before.</p>
+
+<p>There he was left with nothing but a hatchet, a knife, and a bow and
+arrows. The winter was before him, and he was expected to support
+himself through it. If he was unable to do so, it was better for him to
+die then.</p>
+
+<p>Philip passed the lonely winter far away from home. Many times did he
+wish that he was back in his father's wigwam where he could talk with
+his parents and his brothers and his friends, and know what the
+palefaces were doing.</p>
+
+<p>But he knew that if he should return to his little village before the
+winter was over he would be branded<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> as a coward, and never be
+considered worthy to succeed his father as sachem.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i028.jpg" width="600" height="434" alt="THE YOUNG HUNTER" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE YOUNG HUNTER</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>What, he, Philip, a prince, afraid? No, no, no! Of course he was not
+afraid. What was there to be afraid of? Had he not always lived in the
+woods? Still, he was a little lonely, and once in a while he wanted some
+one to talk with.</p>
+
+<p>So Philip went to work with a will. With his hatchet he cut down some
+small trees, made them into poles, and placed one end of them in the
+ground. With his knife he cut some bark from the trees and laid it over<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span>
+the poles so that he had a fairly comfortable shelter from the storms
+and winds which he knew would soon surely come. Then he spent several
+days in hunting birds and wild game in the forest. With his bow and
+arrows he shot enough to support himself through the winter.</p>
+
+<p>Many an adventure did he have. Many a time did he lie down at night
+without having tasted food during the whole livelong day. Many a savage
+beast did he see, and on several occasions he climbed trees, or crawled
+into caves, or ran as fast as he could, to get out of their way.</p>
+
+<p>But he had a strong will. He knew that the son of the grand sachem of
+the Wampanoags could do anything that any other Indian had done. And so
+he passed the long, cold winter, bravely and without complaining.</p>
+
+<p>In the spring, when his father and friends came after him, they found
+him well and strong. His winter's work had made him healthy and rugged.
+He was taken home, and a feast was prepared in honor of Massasoit's son
+who had returned to his home stronger than when he had gone away the
+fall before.</p>
+
+<p>During the next two moons&mdash;for the Indians counted by moons and not by
+months as we do&mdash;Philip led an idle life. He did no work of any kind. He
+was taking his vacation after the hard winter life he had led alone in
+the woods.</p>
+
+<p>But his education was not yet finished. His body had been made strong.
+It was next necessary to strengthen his constitution against the evil
+effects of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> poison. He again went into the forest, and daily found
+poisonous and bitter herbs and roots. These he bruised and put the
+juices into water, which he drank.</p>
+
+<p>Then he drank other juices which acted as antidotes and prevented his
+sickness or death. He did this day after day until his constitution
+became used to the poisons, and he was able to drink them freely without
+any harm coming to him.</p>
+
+<p>Then he went home. The people sang and danced and gave him another great
+feast. He was now considered a man and ready to marry and have a wigwam
+of his own.</p>
+
+<p>The wedding ceremony was extremely simple. There were no presents, no
+flowers, no guests, no ceremony, no banquet. Philip simply asked a
+certain woman to come and live with him. She came and was thereafter his
+wife, or squaw, as the Indians called her.</p>
+
+<p>We have no record of the date of his marriage, for the Indians kept no
+such records. We only know that it took place soon after his return from
+his battle with poisons in the woods.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VII_PHILIPS_DAILY_LIFE" id="VII_PHILIPS_DAILY_LIFE"></a>VII. PHILIP'S DAILY LIFE</h2>
+
+
+<p>We should consider the daily life of Philip very monotonous. It was the
+same, day by day, year in and year out, with very little change. The
+little village where he lived contained fewer than one hundred
+inhabitants. Everybody was thoroughly acquainted with everybody else.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>There was no society such as we have to-day. Philip's squaw did not
+dress herself up in the afternoon, and make calls on the other squaws.
+If she wished to talk with them she went where they were, whether it was
+morning, afternoon, or evening.</p>
+
+<p>There were no parties, no receptions, no theaters, no art museums, no
+libraries, no books, no music, no fireworks, no holidays, no Sabbath.
+The Indians believed in a good and a bad spirit, but they had no
+churches or temples or service or worship or priests.</p>
+
+<p>So we cannot think of Philip sitting in the best pew in church, and
+listening to a grand sermon, preached by the most famous minister in the
+country. Philip knew nothing of sermons.</p>
+
+<p>He played no games that instructed his mind. He cared for only such
+games as would strengthen his body, increase his power of endurance, or
+develop his muscle or his craftiness. With the other Indians he played
+football, tossed quoits, wrestled, ran, and jumped.</p>
+
+<p>Occasionally he engaged with them in the war dance. This was performed
+in a very solemn manner. It represented a war campaign, or a sham
+battle, as we say. First, the Indians came together from different
+directions. Then they marched forward stealthily and quietly, lay in
+ambush, awaited the coming of the enemy, suddenly jumped out and rushed
+upon them, slaughtered them, retreated, and finally went home. The dance
+ended with the reception at home, and the torturing and killing of the
+prisoners.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>These were his amusements. His occupations were two in number: hunting
+and fishing.</p>
+
+<p>In the fall of the year, and again in the spring, he spent about three
+months in hunting. In company with his brother or some close friend, he
+went in search of a supply of meat for the use of the family, and of
+skins to sell to the white men or to use for clothing.</p>
+
+<p>After reaching the hunting-grounds, they built a big wigwam where they
+stayed at night. There also they stored the skins of the animals they
+had captured.</p>
+
+<p>Many stories might be told of the exciting adventures they had with
+bears and wolves. The woods of New England contained many moose and
+other wild animals, and generally Philip returned to his little village
+with meat enough to last all winter. Frequently he brought home as many
+as one hundred beaver skins.</p>
+
+<p>But Philip, like others, had bad luck sometimes. Now and then he lost
+his way in the woods, and on one or two occasions the raft on which he
+was taking his skins across the river upset and the results of his
+winter's labor were lost.</p>
+
+<p>He captured his game by shooting or snaring, or by catching it in
+pitfalls. When the hunting season was over he spent his time in fishing.
+Generally he caught his fish in nets, although occasionally he used a
+hook and line.</p>
+
+<p>When not engaged in hunting or fishing, or attending a meeting of Indian
+princes, he was generally to be found near his wigwam, asleep or
+watching his squaw at work.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>All the work around the wigwam was done by his wife or squaw. According
+to the Indian view she was his slave. She covered and lined the wigwam,
+plaited the mats and baskets, planted, tended, and harvested the corn
+and vegetables, cooked the food, ate the leavings, and slept on the
+coldest side of the wigwam.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i033.jpg" width="600" height="363" alt="SQUAWS AT WORK" title="" />
+<span class="caption">SQUAWS AT WORK</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Many Indians did not care very much for their squaws, and made their
+lives miserable by treating them badly, and showing them no sympathy nor
+love in any way whatever. But we are told that Philip was better than
+the other Indians in this respect. He loved his wife and treated her as
+a companion instead of as a slave.</p>
+
+<p>Philip had no pots and kettles like ours. His wife roasted his meat by
+placing it on the point of a stake.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> She broiled it by laying it on hot
+coals or hot stones. She boiled it in rude vessels made of stone, earth,
+or wood, and heated the water by throwing hot stones into it.</p>
+
+<p>Philip's only garden tool was a hoe, made of clam shells or of a moose's
+shoulder-blade fastened to a wooden handle. He also had a rude axe or
+hatchet made of a piece of stone, sharpened by being scraped on another
+stone, and tied to a wooden handle. His arrows and spears were tipped
+with bone or with triangular pieces of flint. These were all home-made,
+for Philip, like other Indians, was obliged to make his own hatchets and
+arrows.</p>
+
+<p>Finally, Philip never went to the store to buy things to be used at
+home, for the Indians kept no stores. His wife raised the corn,
+squashes, and pumpkins, and he caught his own fish and game. These, with
+nuts, roots, and berries, gave him all the food he needed.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VIII_PHILIPS_RELATIONS_WITH_THE_ENGLISH" id="VIII_PHILIPS_RELATIONS_WITH_THE_ENGLISH"></a>VIII. PHILIP'S RELATIONS WITH THE ENGLISH</h2>
+
+
+<p>Such was the daily life of Philip year after year, with but little
+change. Occasionally he met the palefaces in the woods or at his
+father's village. Now and then he went to Plymouth and traded with them.
+Several of them he considered to be his strong personal friends.</p>
+
+<p>We have already seen how greatly interested he was in his boyhood days
+at the coming of the white men and how friendly he felt toward them at
+that time. He, his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> father, and the other Wampanoags continued to remain
+on friendly terms with the English, although several other Indian tribes
+did not.</p>
+
+<p>Between the years 1628 and 1640 many white people settled forty or fifty
+miles north of Plymouth, in what is now Boston and Salem, and other
+cities and towns near Massachusetts Bay.</p>
+
+<p>Others settled inland on the Connecticut River, near the present
+boundary line between Massachusetts and Connecticut, about seventy-five
+miles west from Mount Hope, the home of Philip. Others settled at
+Providence, and still others on the island of Rhode Island, fifteen to
+twenty miles south of Mount Hope.</p>
+
+<p>The settlers on the Connecticut had trouble with the Pequots, a tribe of
+Indians living to the west of the Wampanoags, and in the war that
+followed, all the Pequots were killed. The whites also had trouble with
+the Narragansetts, who lived near Providence, outbreaks occurring every
+year or two for several years.</p>
+
+<p>During these years Philip and his father did nothing to injure the
+settlers in any way. They refused to aid the other Indians in their wars
+with the English, preferring to remain faithful to their early treaty
+with the whites; and the whites remained on the most friendly terms with
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Philip knew nothing of the Christian religion. Several attempts were
+made by the whites to convert the Indians to Christianity. In 1646, John
+Eliot translated the Bible into the Indian language, taught the Indians
+the English<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> habits of industry and agriculture, and established near
+Boston two towns composed entirely of converted Indians.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time, Thomas Mayhew preached to the Wampanoags on Martha's
+Vineyard, and there converted a great many. By the year 1675, four
+thousand Indians had been converted to Christianity.</p>
+
+<p>But the missionaries were not successful with Philip and the Wampanoags
+at Mount Hope. They utterly refused to listen to the preachers. They
+preferred their former mode of life, and there were several good reasons
+for this preference, as they thought.</p>
+
+<p>Philip noticed that many white men who called themselves Christians were
+in the habit of stealing from the red men, and cheating them whenever
+they could. He could not see that the Christian religion made them more
+happy, more honest, or better than he was.</p>
+
+<p>Again, he noticed that, as soon as the Indians were converted, they left
+their former life and companions and joined themselves to the English.
+This tended to lessen the control of the chiefs over their tribes, and
+so reduced their power. Thus he saw that a great deal might be lost by
+changing his religion, or by urging his followers to change theirs.</p>
+
+<p>Nevertheless, Massasoit and his sons remained strong friends to the
+Plymouth people until 1661, when Massasoit died, being about eighty
+years of age.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IX_PHILIP_BECOMES_GRAND_SACHEM" id="IX_PHILIP_BECOMES_GRAND_SACHEM"></a>IX. PHILIP BECOMES GRAND SACHEM</h2>
+
+
+<p>According to the custom of the Indians, Wamsutta, the eldest son of
+Massasoit, succeeded his father as grand sachem of the Wampanoags.</p>
+
+<p>Almost his first act was to go to Plymouth, where he made some requests
+of the settlers. These were granted. Then he asked for an English name,
+and was given the name of Alexander.</p>
+
+<p>He was so much pleased with this name that he asked for an English name
+for his younger brother, Metacomet. The English gave him the name of
+Philip, by which name we have been calling him in our account of his
+life.</p>
+
+<p>A few days later, ten armed men suddenly appeared at the place where
+Wamsutta and several of his followers were holding a feast, and arrested
+them all. Wamsutta was taken to Plymouth immediately, and charged with
+plotting with the Narragansetts against the English.</p>
+
+<p>Being seized by force on their own grounds, and compelled to go to
+Plymouth to answer charges based on rumor, was a new, experience for the
+Wampanoags. It was very different from the friendly manner in which they
+had been treated formerly.</p>
+
+<p>The English treated Wamsutta very well at Plymouth. They could prove
+nothing against him, and hence they soon let him go. On his way home he
+died.</p>
+
+<p>As Wamsutta left no children, he was succeeded by his brother Philip.
+There was no ceremony of crowning, no procession, no speeches. In fact,
+there was no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> crown at all; nor was there any ceremony of any kind. The
+other Indians merely obeyed Philip just as they had formerly obeyed his
+father and his brother.</p>
+
+<p>Philip and all the members of the Wampanoag tribe believed that
+Wamsutta's death was due to poison which had been given him by the
+whites when he was at Plymouth. According to the belief and custom of
+the Indians, it was Philip's duty to take vengeance on those who had
+caused his brother's death.</p>
+
+<p>Still, Philip made no attempt to injure the whites in any way. But the
+whites became suspicious, probably because they felt that they had done
+wrong; and very soon they summoned Philip to Plymouth to answer a charge
+of plotting against them.</p>
+
+<p>Philip acted very honorably in the matter. Instead of hiding in the
+forest, as he might easily have done, he went to Plymouth. There he had
+a long talk with the whites. He denied that he had plotted against them.
+He showed them that it was against his own interests to have any trouble
+with them, and as proof of his good intentions toward them, he offered
+to leave his next younger brother with them as a hostage.</p>
+
+<p>He agreed to continue the treaty that his father had made forty years
+before. He went further, and acknowledged himself to be a faithful
+subject of the King of England, and promised not to make war on any
+Indian tribe unless the English first gave their consent.</p>
+
+<p>For several years Philip was grand sachem of the Wampanoags and kept
+this treaty with great faithfulness.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> During this time his duties were
+similar to those which his father had had, and his life was uneventful.
+He was consulted by the other sachems of the tribe, and his advice was
+generally followed by them.</p>
+
+<p>Like his father, the good Massasoit, he was inclined to be conservative;
+that is, he did not like to change the established order of things. He
+was very much liked by the Indians, who felt that he tried to treat them
+all honestly and fairly.</p>
+
+<p>He went to Plymouth very frequently, to visit the whites and to trade
+with them. And, likewise, the whites frequently came to Mount Hope to
+see him.</p>
+
+<p>The relations between the whites and the Indians were such that it was
+perfectly safe for a white man to go anywhere among the Wampanoags
+unarmed. This is something that cannot be said of any other Indian tribe
+in the colonial days. The Indians, acting under orders from King Philip,
+treated the whites honestly and fairly. In fact, there was a feeling of
+great friendship between the whites and the Indians.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="X_PHILIPS_TROUBLES_WITH_THE_WHITES" id="X_PHILIPS_TROUBLES_WITH_THE_WHITES"></a>X. PHILIP'S TROUBLES WITH THE WHITES</h2>
+
+
+<p>Ten years passed by peacefully, except for one little trouble, which
+occurred in 1667, six years after Philip became sachem. An Indian told
+the people at Plymouth that Philip had said that he wished the Dutch
+would beat the English in the war which was then being carried on
+between Holland and England.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Plymouth people were very much surprised at this, and immediately
+called Philip to account. But he denied ever making any such statement,
+and offered to surrender all his arms to the English in order to show
+that he had no hostile designs against them. This satisfied the English.
+Everything went on quietly until 1671, when troubles between the two
+races finally began to arise.</p>
+
+<p>In that year Philip complained that the English were not living up to
+their agreement which they had made with him ten years before. At the
+request of the people of Plymouth, Philip went to Taunton, a village
+near his hunting-grounds, and talked matters over with them.</p>
+
+<p>He was accompanied by a band of warriors armed to the teeth and painted.
+The meeting was held in the little village church. Philip and his
+Indians sat on one side of the room and the English on the other.</p>
+
+<p>A man from Boston, who was thought to be friendly to both parties, was
+chosen to preside over the meeting. Then the Indians and the settlers
+made speeches, one after the other, just as is done in meetings to-day.</p>
+
+<p>Philip admitted that lately he had begun to prepare for war, and also
+that some of his Indians had not treated the whites justly. But he also
+showed that the English were arming themselves, and that many of them
+had cheated the Indians when dealing with them.</p>
+
+<p>Philip said that he preferred peace to war, and had only armed his
+warriors in self-defense. Finally, it was decided to make a new treaty.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Here is a copy of the new treaty as it was drawn up. Notice the quaint
+way of expressing the ideas, and also, that many words are not spelled
+as we spell them to-day. Notice, too, how one-sided the treaty is, and
+that it is signed only by Philip and the Indians.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><h4>COPY OF THE TREATY MADE AT TAUNTON, APRIL 10, 1671.</h4>
+
+<p>Whereas my Father, my Brother, and my self have formerly submitted
+our selves and our people unto the Kings Majesty of England, and
+this Colony of New-Plymouth, by solemn Covenant under our Hand, but
+I having of late through my indiscretion, and the naughtiness of my
+heart, violated and broken this my Covenant with my friends by
+taking up arms, with evill intent against them, and that
+groundlessly; I being now deeply sensible of my unfaithfulness and
+folly, do desire at this time solemnly to renew my Covenant with my
+ancient Friends and my Father's friends above mentioned; and doe
+desire this may testifie to the world against me, if ever I shall
+again fail in my faithfulness towards them (that I have now and at
+all times found so kind to me) or any other of the English
+colonyes; and as a reall Pledge of my true Intentions, for the
+future to be faithful and friendly, I doe freely ingage to resign
+up unto the Government of New-Plymouth, all my English Armes to be
+kept by them for their security, so long as they shall see reason.
+For true performance of the Premises I have hereunto set my hand
+together with the rest of my council.</p>
+
+
+<div class='centered'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="60%" cellspacing="0" summary="TREATY SIGNATORIES">
+<tr valign="top"><td align='left'>In the presence of</td><td align='left'>The Mark of</td><td align='left'>Philip,<br />Chief Sachem of Pokanoket</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>William Davis.</td><td align='left'>The Mark of</td><td align='left'>Tavoser.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>William Hudson.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;&mdash; &mdash;&mdash;</td><td align='left'>Capt. Wisposke.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Thomas Brattle.</td><td align='left'>&mdash;&mdash; &mdash;&mdash;</td><td align='left'>Woonkaponehunt.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>&nbsp;</td><td align='left'>&mdash;&mdash; &mdash;&mdash;</td><td align='left'>Nimrod.</td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+</div>
+
+<p>But Philip doubted the sincerity of the English. He hesitated to give up
+his arms. Then the settlers ordered him to come to Plymouth and explain
+why.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Instead of obeying, he went to Boston and complained there of the
+treatment he had received. He said that his father, his brother, and
+himself had made treaties of friendship with the English which the
+latter were trying to turn into treaties of subjection. He said he was a
+subject of the King of England, but not of the colony of Plymouth, and
+he saw no reason why the people of Plymouth should try to treat him as a
+subject.</p>
+
+<p>The people of Massachusetts again made peace between Philip and the
+settlers at Plymouth. But it could not long continue, for each side had
+now become thoroughly suspicious of the other.</p>
+
+<p>In 1674, an Indian reported to the settlers that Philip was trying to
+get the sachems of New England to wage war on the whites. A few days
+later, that Indian's dead body was found in a lake. The English arrested
+three Indians and tried them for the murder. They were found guilty and
+were executed, although the evidence against them was of such a
+character that it would not have been admitted in a court of justice
+against a white man.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XI_PHILIP_AND_THE_INDIAN_COUNCILS" id="XI_PHILIP_AND_THE_INDIAN_COUNCILS"></a>XI. PHILIP AND THE INDIAN COUNCILS</h2>
+
+
+<p>Philip thought the matter over. He felt that the English had done the
+Indians great injustice.</p>
+
+<p>In the first place, the land had originally belonged to the Indians. It
+was not of great value to them, for they used it mainly for hunting
+purposes. So they had very willingly parted with a few acres to the
+English in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> return for some trinkets of very little value&mdash;such as a
+jack-knife, or a few glass beads, or little bells, or a blanket.</p>
+
+<p>Then the English had forbidden the Indian to sell his land to any white
+man. He was allowed to sell only to the colonial government. This was
+done in order to protect him from white men who wanted to cheat him; but
+Philip only saw that it prevented his giving away something of little
+value to himself, and getting something he wanted in return.</p>
+
+<p>Before the English came, the woods were full of game and the streams
+were full of fish. Now Philip noticed that the game was going from the
+woods and the fish from the rivers. He felt that the Indians were
+becoming poorer and the English were getting richer.</p>
+
+<p>Only the poorer lands were owned by the Indians now. All the best were
+in the hands of the white men.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was also tired of the airs of superiority assumed by the whites.
+They looked upon the Indians as fit only for servants and slaves. He
+thought that his people were as good as the whites. He felt that the
+bonds of love and sympathy between the two races had been broken.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of his many complaints and requests, the English had failed to
+punish unprincipled white men who had done wrong to the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Finally, those Indians who had been converted to Christianity had left
+their old tribes and their former modes of life. This had weakened the
+power of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> Indians, and Philip began to think that the English were
+Christianizing the Indians simply for the purpose of getting control of
+their lands.</p>
+
+<p>Philip felt that the question was too deep a one for him to solve. He
+called the sachems of the Wampanoags together, and talked the matter
+over with them. Several meetings were held, and every member expressed
+himself on the subject very freely.</p>
+
+<p>The question then arose, what should they do? It very soon became
+evident that two opposite opinions were held.</p>
+
+<p>It was not the custom of the Indians to vote on any questions that were
+discussed at their meetings. They talked the matter over and then
+adopted the plan that most of them thought was best. But at this time
+they were unable to decide what to do in order to get back that which
+they had lost, and how to prevent losing any more. And so they kept on
+talking over plans.</p>
+
+<p>Fifty-five years of peace and friendship with the English had resulted
+in giving the white men all the land of any value, while the Wampanoags
+were decreasing in numbers and each year were finding it more and more
+difficult to live.</p>
+
+<p>The young warriors urged immediate action. They wanted war, and wanted
+it then, and desired to keep it up until the English should be driven
+out of the country.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was opposed to this. He knew how strong the English were, and
+that it would be impossible to drive them out. He saw that the time had
+gone by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> when the English could be expelled from the country. He threw
+his influence with the older warriors, and for a while succeeded in
+holding the younger men in check. He felt that the Indians could never
+be successful in a war with the English when the tribe owned only thirty
+guns and had no provisions laid aside to carry them through the war.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XII_KING_PHILIPS_WAR" id="XII_KING_PHILIPS_WAR"></a>XII. KING PHILIP'S WAR</h2>
+
+
+<p>Philip did his best to keep at peace with the English. For a while he
+succeeded. But his young warriors began to steal hogs and cattle
+belonging to the settlers, and on one pleasant Sunday in June, 1675,
+when the people were at church, eight young Indians burned a few houses
+in the village of Swansea, the nearest town to the Wampanoag
+headquarters at Mount Hope. The whites immediately raised a few troops,
+marched after the Indians, and had a little skirmish with them.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was not with his warriors at the time. The attack on the whites
+had been made against his express orders. When he heard that the Indians
+and settlers had really had a battle, he wept from sorrow, something
+which an Indian rarely does.</p>
+
+<p>Everything seemed to go wrong. He tried to make peace with the whites,
+but they would not listen to him. The young warriors no longer paid any
+attention to what he said. They went on destroying property and killing
+cattle.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>After leaving Swansea, they went to Taunton and Middleboro, where they
+burned several houses and killed a few persons. But troops soon arrived
+from Boston and Plymouth, and in a few days the Indians were driven back
+to their homes at Mount Hope.</p>
+
+<p>The English hurried on after them, and the war that followed is known in
+history as King Philip's War.</p>
+
+<p>Philip and the Indians swam across Narragansett Bay and went to some of
+their friends in the Connecticut Valley. There they obtained the help of
+the Nipmucks, who had never been very friendly towards the English.</p>
+
+<p>We do not know where Philip was during the war. He knew that he would be
+held responsible for it, although he had done everything in his power to
+prevent it. For a year the war was carried on, one hundred miles away
+from his home, and never once was he known to have been connected with
+any fighting, nor was he even seen by the English during that time. Some
+of them thought that he was directing the war, but really it was carried
+on by other tribes of Indians that had not been very friendly towards
+the whites. The Wampanoags seem to have had very little connection with
+the war.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians attacked the English towns in the Connecticut Valley, and
+the more exposed places on the frontier of the colony where the people
+were few and scattered.</p>
+
+<p>No battle was fought in the open field. The Indians did not fight in
+that way. They secretly surrounded a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> town, rushed in from all sides,
+killed as many people as possible, took what property they could carry
+away, and burned all that remained.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 350px;">
+<img src="images/i047.jpg" width="350" height="280" alt="HOUSE PROTECTED BY PALISADES" title="" />
+<span class="caption">HOUSE PROTECTED BY PALISADES</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>They knew all the paths in the forests, swamps, and thickets. They were
+fast runners, and went rapidly from town to town.</p>
+
+<p>Their favorite method of fighting was in an ambuscade. That was
+something peculiar to the Indians. The English had never heard of that
+way of fighting before they came to America. The Indians would lie down
+flat on the ground or stand behind trees or in a bush or thicket. When
+the enemy came along with no suspicion that any one was near, the
+Indians suddenly gave a yell and fired their arrows or guns at them.
+This would startle them and generally cause them to run away.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>The war was one of the most dreadful in the history of our country. A
+farmer left his home in the morning not knowing whether he would ever
+see his wife and children again. His gun was always in his hand.
+Laborers were cut off in the field. Reapers, millers, women at home, and
+people on their way to and from church were killed.</p>
+
+<p>Nearly every town in the Connecticut Valley was destroyed by the
+Indians, and the people suffered ter<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span>ribly. The Indians were very
+successful during the first year of the war. They lost but few warriors
+and did an immense amount of injury to the whites. This caused the young
+warriors to believe that Philip and the old warriors were wrong, and
+that it was really possible for them to drive the English from the
+country.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XIII_THE_LAST_DAYS_OF_PHILIP" id="XIII_THE_LAST_DAYS_OF_PHILIP"></a>XIII. THE LAST DAYS OF PHILIP</h2>
+
+
+<p>During the winter there was very little fighting. In the spring the
+Indians did not fight with any spirit. They had begun to get tired of
+the war. Many wished for peace. The Narragansetts who had been helping
+in the war had suffered a terrible defeat from the English.</p>
+
+<p>The English began to understand better the Indian method of fighting.
+They attacked the Indians wherever they could find them. They surprised
+several large forces of Indians in different places. Then it began to
+look as if Philip and the old warriors were right and the young warriors
+were wrong.</p>
+
+<p>Several sachems had been killed. The Indians had no stores of corn. The
+English tore up every field that the Indians planted. Finally, the
+Indians gave up hope. They were being starved out. During the summer of
+1676, large numbers of them surrendered to the whites.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was not seen from the time he swam across Narragansett Bay until
+in July, 1676, when he returned to his old home at Mount Hope. His wife
+and son had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> been captured earlier in the spring, and he knew that the
+cause of the Indians was lost.</p>
+
+<p>He wanted to see his old home once more, the place where he had lived
+for sixty years, but which he felt he was now going to lose forever. We
+can see him as he returned to his home, now desolated by war, his wigwam
+destroyed, his cornfield trodden down, his family taken from him, his
+friends taken captive in the war. He felt that the war was wrong, that
+his young warriors had been too hasty in starting it without making
+proper preparations for it. He looked into the future. It seemed very
+dark to him.</p>
+
+<p>The war indeed was nearly over. The Wampanoags were talking about
+surrendering. Philip knew that surrender meant death for him. He refused
+even to think of it. When one of his warriors suggested it to him he
+killed him on the spot.</p>
+
+<p>The English soon learned that Philip had returned to his old home. They
+surrounded him. On the twelfth day of August, 1676, he was shot in an
+ambuscade by the brother of the Indian he had killed for suggesting that
+he surrender.</p>
+
+<p>And now, see how barbarous the English settlers could be. They cut off
+his hands and quartered his body, leaving it to decay on four trees.
+They carried his head to Plymouth, and placed it on the end of a pole.
+Then they appointed a public day of thanksgiving.</p>
+
+<p>Philip's wife and children were taken to the Bermudas and sold as
+slaves, in common with the other Indians<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> captured in the war. Thus the
+Wampanoag tribe of Indians came to an end.</p>
+
+<p>Philip was unjustly blamed by the Plymouth people for starting the war.
+They thought that he was in league with several other tribes in New
+England and New York, and that he intended to drive out the English if
+he could. That was why they fought so desperately, and at the end of the
+war removed the remnants of the tribe from New England. It is true that
+the Indians would have been obliged to move in time. Philip undoubtedly
+saw that, but he believed that peace was best and he urged it on his
+followers. The English did not know this, and the result was that Philip
+was held responsible for a war which he had opposed from the outset.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><br /><br /><a name="THE_STORY_OF" id="THE_STORY_OF"></a>THE STORY OF PONTIAC</h2>
+
+
+<h4>BY</h4>
+
+<h3>FRANCES M. PERRY,<br /><br /></h3>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span><br /><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="I_THE_MEETING_OF_PONTIAC_AND_THE_ENGLISH" id="I_THE_MEETING_OF_PONTIAC_AND_THE_ENGLISH"></a>I. THE MEETING OF PONTIAC AND THE ENGLISH</h2>
+
+
+<p>Though the French were still fighting stubbornly at sea, the French war
+was over in America. Canada had been surrendered to the British, and
+England's banners waved over Quebec. Yet the tidings of defeat had not
+reached the French garrisons on the Great Lakes.</p>
+
+<p>In the fall of 1760 Major Robert Rogers, with two hundred British
+rangers, set out in fifteen whale boats, to carry to the interior the
+news of the surrender and to take possession of the French forts on the
+lakes.</p>
+
+<p>This was a somewhat dangerous task. For, although no resistance was to
+be feared from the French, the savages who were in league with them
+could not be counted on to understand or believe the changed state of
+affairs. Indeed, it was doubtful if they would even allow the British a
+hearing before attacking them.</p>
+
+<p>Rogers and his men, however, coasted along the shores of Lake Erie
+without adventure until early in November. Then the weather became so
+stormy and the lake so rough that the commander decided to go ashore and
+camp in the forest until the tempest had passed.</p>
+
+<p>The rangers were glad to feel the solid earth under their feet and to
+find shelter from the driving wind and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> rain. Nevertheless, they soon
+realized that the forest was not without its dangers.</p>
+
+<p>They had not been long ashore when a large band of Indians entered the
+camp. These Indians said that Pontiac, chief of the Ottawas, had sent
+them before him to demand of the Englishmen how they dared to come into
+his country without his permission.</p>
+
+<p>Before nightfall the famous warrior himself stood in the presence of the
+English commander and his officers and spoke in this fashion:
+"Englishmen, I am Pontiac, greatest councilor and warrior of the
+Ottawas. This land belongs to my people. You are the enemies of my
+people. You are the enemies of our brothers, the French. Why do you
+bring armed warriors into my country without asking my consent? You can
+not go farther until Pontiac leaves your path."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 405px;">
+<img src="images/i054.jpg" width="405" height="500" alt="PONTIAC AND ROGERS" title="" />
+<span class="caption">PONTIAC AND ROGERS</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To this haughty speech Rogers answered: "Brother, we come to tell you
+that the war is over. Our mighty English warriors have made your French
+brothers shake with fear. We have slain their war chiefs; we have taken
+their strong villages. They have begged us for mercy. They have promised
+to be the dutiful and obedient children of the English king if we will
+lay down the hatchet and fight against them no more. They have given us
+their guns, their forts, and all the land of Canada. I have come into
+your country to take Detroit. I shall not fight with your brothers, the
+French; I shall not shoot them. I shall show their commander a paper and
+he will pull down his flag and he and his men will come out of the fort
+and give me their guns. Then I shall go in with my men and put up my
+flag.</p>
+
+<p>"The English king is terrible in war. He could punish the Indians and
+make them cry for mercy, as he has the French. But he is kind and offers
+to his red children the chain of friendship. If you accept it he is
+ready to shut his eyes to the mischief the French have put you up to in
+the past, and to protect you with his strong arm."</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 51px;">
+<img src="images/i056.jpg" width="51" height="300" alt="WAMPUM" title="" />
+<span class="caption">WAMPUM</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Pontiac listened gravely to every word the white man spoke. But his dark
+face gave no token of what was passing in his mind. Now, Indians despise
+rashness, and it is their custom to deliberate over night before
+answering any important question. So, with the dignity of one who knows
+no fear and craves no favor, the greatest councilor of the Ottawas
+replied simply: "Englishmen, I shall stand in your path till morning. In
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> meantime if your warriors are cold or hungry the hands of my people
+are open to you." Then he and his chiefs withdrew, and slipped silently
+back through the dripping forest to their camp.</p>
+
+<p>The English rangers slept with their guns at hand that night. They knew
+the pride and might and treachery of Pontiac, and they feared him. They
+felt as if they were in a trap, with the raging sea before them and the
+forest alive with pitiless savages behind.</p>
+
+<p>But they need have had no fear, for the great chief thought not of
+massacre that night. He thought of the English who stood ready to avenge
+any harm done to their brothers; of his own race dependent on the white
+men for rum, for wampum, for guns and powder and bullets. Clearly the
+Indians must have friends among the palefaces. The French were their
+"brothers." They had given them presents, had married their maidens, had
+traded, hunted, and gone to battle with them. The English were their
+foes. But they were many and strong. They had beaten the French and
+taken their guns. The red men must let their hatred sleep for awhile.
+They would smoke the pipe of peace with the English, and the English
+would give them presents: tobacco and rum, guns and powder.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 196px;">
+<img src="images/i057.jpg" width="196" height="320" alt="CALUMET" title="" />
+<span class="caption">CALUMET</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Having reached this conclusion, Pontiac and his chiefs returned to
+Rogers's camp on the following morn<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span>ing. There they smoked the calumet
+with the English and exchanged presents and promises of kindness and
+friendship. The men who had met as enemies parted as friends.</p>
+
+<p>Years later, when British armies were marching against Indians whose
+tomahawks were red with English blood, Pontiac's faith in the friendship
+of Rogers remained unshaken. The latter sent to the chief a bottle of
+rum. When advised not to drink it lest it should contain poison, Pontiac
+replied: "I did not save from death on the shores of Lake Erie a man who
+would to-day poison me," and he drained the bottle without hesitation.</p>
+
+
+<p>Though a single Indian and a single Englishman could thus overcome their
+distrust for each other, the feelings of the two races could not be so
+easily altered. The Indians looked upon the English as cruel robbers,
+whose object was to drive them from their homes and possess their lands.
+They thought of them as enemies too powerful to be withstood by open
+force and therefore to be met only with cunning and deception. Many of
+the English looked upon the savages as ignorant, filthy, and treacherous
+beings, little better than wild beasts, and thought that the world would
+be better off without them. Yet for the present both were glad to be at
+peace.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Indians found that Major Rogers had spoken truly about Detroit. When
+they saw the large French garrison yield without resistance they were
+filled with wonder, and said to one another: "These English are a
+terrible people. It is well we have made friends with them."</p>
+
+<p>By "making friends" with the English, the Indians had no notion of
+accepting them as masters. The French had seemed pleasant neighbors and
+valuable friends. When they occupied the fort the Indians had always
+found a warm welcome there. Their chiefs had been treated with great
+pomp and ceremony. They had received rich presents and great promises.
+They expected the English to show them the same consideration. But they
+were disappointed. The new masters of the fort had little patience with
+the Indian idlers, who loafed about at the most inconvenient times in
+the most inconvenient places, always begging, and often sullen and
+insolent. They frequently ordered them in no mild terms to be off. The
+chiefs received cold looks and short answers where they had looked for
+flattery and presents.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians resented the conduct of the English bitterly, and when
+Pontiac learned that they claimed the lands of his tribe, he said within
+himself: "The hatred of the Ottawas has slept long enough. It is time
+for it to wake and destroy these British who treat the red man as if he
+had no right to the land where he was born."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="II_PONTIACS_CHILDHOOD" id="II_PONTIACS_CHILDHOOD"></a>II. PONTIAC'S CHILDHOOD</h2>
+
+
+<p>We love our country principally because of the political freedom its
+government allows us. As we study its history, the lives of its heroes,
+and the struggles they have made for the liberties we enjoy, our
+patriotism grows stronger.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac loved his country, too, but in a much simpler and more personal
+way, as you will understand when you have learned about the proud
+chieftain's boyhood and youth.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 249px;">
+<img src="images/i059.jpg" width="249" height="350" alt="SQUAW WITH PAPPOOSE" title="" />
+<span class="caption">SQUAW WITH PAPPOOSE</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The birds scarcely know the forest so well as he did. When he was a tiny
+baby,&mdash;a fat, brown, little pappoose,&mdash;his mother used to bundle him up
+in skins, strap him to a board, and carry him on her back when she went
+to gather the bark of the young basswood tree for twine. As the strong
+young squaw sped along the narrow path, soft and springing to her
+moccasined feet with its depth of dried pine needles, the baby on her
+back was well content. Even if he felt cross and fretful the regular
+motion pleased him; the cool dim green of the forest rested him; the
+sweet smell of the pines soothed him; and the gentle murmur of the wind
+in the tree tops soon lulled him to sleep.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the mother clambered over a large tree trunk that had fallen across
+the path and the little pappoose was jolted wide awake, he did not cry.
+His beady black eyes followed every stray sunbeam and every bounding
+rabbit, or chance bird with wonder and delight. When his mother went to
+work she placed his rude cradle beside a tree where he could look on,
+out of harm's way. He was very little trouble, and she always took him
+with her when she went to get cedar bark, to gather rushes for mats and
+herbs for dyes, to pick up fagots for the fire, or to get sap from the
+sugar tree. So it happened that when he grew up Pontiac could not
+remember a time when the dark forest did not seem like home to him.</p>
+
+
+<p>As soon as he was old enough to understand words, he heard his mother
+laughing with her neighbors about<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> the men in the village who stayed
+about their wigwams like women. Now, he thought that a wigwam or bark
+lodge was a very pleasant place. The small, dark, oven-shaped room,
+smoky and foul with the smell of fish and dirt, was home to him&mdash;the mud
+floor, worn smooth and hard with use, was strewn with mats and skins
+which served for chairs and beds. There was a fireplace in the center,
+and over it a rack on which smoked fish hung, well out of the reach of
+the wolf-like dogs that lay about gnawing at old bones. It was usually
+dry in wet weather, warm in cold weather, and cool when the sun was hot.
+It was where he went for food when he was hungry; it was where he slept
+on soft buffalo robes and bear skins when he was tired; it was where he
+heard good stories, and, best of all, it was where his mother spent most
+of her time.</p>
+
+<p>But before Pontiac was many years old he knew that the wigwam was the
+place for women and children, and that it was a shame for a man not to
+follow the deer through the forest, and go upon the warpath. He saw that
+if a man stayed at home and loved ease and comfort his squaw would scold
+him with a shrill tongue. But if he went off to hunt, it was different.
+Then, when he came home for a short time, he might lounge on a bear skin
+while his squaw worked hard to make him happy, cooking his meals,
+fetching clear water from the spring, and dressing the skins he had
+brought from the hunt.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i060.jpg" width="600" height="349" alt="INDIAN SQUAW AT WORK" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN SQUAW AT WORK</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Pontiac liked to watch his mother while she stood weaving the wet rushes
+into mats to cover the lodge in summer, or while she sat on the floor
+with her feet crossed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> under her, making baskets out of sweet grass or
+embroidering with brightly dyed porcupine quills. But if he showed his
+pleasure or offered to help her, she looked stern and shook her head,
+saying, "Go out into the field and run; then you will be swift when you
+are a man;" or "go into the forest and shoot rabbits with your little
+bow and arrow, so that you may one day be a great hunter like your
+father."</p>
+
+<p>All this made little Pontiac feel that the great fields and forests were
+his&mdash;his to find his pleasure in while he was a boy; his to find his
+work in when he should become a man.</p>
+
+<p>He learned, too, that his very life depended on the forests he loved. He
+could never forget the cruel winter days when he had asked his mother
+again and again for fish and meat, and she had told him to be still and
+wait till his father brought meat from the forest. And he had waited
+there long with his hollow-eyed mother, crouching before the feeble
+fire, starving with hunger. He had strained his ears toward the great
+white forest only to hear the wail of the winds and the howl of the
+wolves. But at last the yelp of the dogs was sure to be heard, and then
+the half-frozen hunters would appear, dragging the deer over the crusted
+snow.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="III_PONTIACS_EDUCATION" id="III_PONTIACS_EDUCATION"></a>III. PONTIAC'S EDUCATION</h2>
+
+
+<p>Pontiac's father was a war chief. But it did not follow that therefore
+Pontiac would be a war chief. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> would have to prove himself strong and
+brave, a good hunter and a good warrior, or his tribe would choose some
+more able leader.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac, like most small boys, took his father for his pattern. His
+ambition was to be like him. But he was told early, "Be a good Indian.
+Be a good Ottawan. Be true to your tribe. Be a strong man and help your
+people. But don't think about being chief. The greatest brave must be
+chief of the Ottawas."</p>
+
+<p>Yet, Indians love glory and perhaps in the bottom of their hearts
+Pontiac's father and mother hoped that he would one day be a chieftain.
+At any rate they did all they could to train him to be a worthy Indian.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 310px;">
+<img src="images/i063.jpg" width="310" height="500" alt="INDIAN WARRIOR" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN WARRIOR</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>They were sometimes very severe with him. If he was rude to strangers or
+to old people; if he lost his temper and threw ashes at his comrades; if
+he told a falsehood, he was beaten. He had broken the laws of the Great
+Spirit, and the Great Spirit had commanded that parents should beat
+their children with rods when they did wrong. The boy understood this
+and he tried to take his punishment bravely that he might regain the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span>
+good will of the Great Spirit. He stood quite still and endured heavy
+blows without whimpering or flinching.</p>
+
+<p>He learned, too, to endure hunger and great fatigue without complaint.
+He raced, and swam, and played ball, and wrestled with other boys till
+his body was strong and straight and supple. He played at hunting and
+war in the forest, until his eyes became so sharp that no sign of man or
+beast escaped them.</p>
+
+<p>But he did not depend altogether on his eyes for information. He could
+find his way through a forest in the dark, where the dense foliage hid
+the stars. Perhaps the wind told him the direction by the odors it
+brought. He could tell what kind of trees grew about him by the feel of
+their bark, by their odor, by the sound of the wind in the branches. He
+did not have to think much about his course when on a journey. His feet
+seemed to know the way home, or to the spring, or to the enemy's camp.
+And if he had traveled through a wilderness once he knew the way the
+next time as well as any boy knows his way to school.</p>
+
+<p>While Pontiac was training his body, his parents took care that he
+should not grow up in ignorance of the religion and the history of his
+people. He heard much about the Great Spirit who could see all he did
+and was angry when he said or did anything dishonest or cowardly.</p>
+
+<p>The laws of the Great Spirit were fixed in the boy's mind, for his
+mother was always repeating them to him. She would say as he left the
+wigwam: "Honor the gray-<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>headed person," or "Thou shalt not mimic the
+thunder;" "Thou shalt always feed the hungry and the stranger," or "Thou
+shalt immerse thyself in the river at least ten times in succession in
+the early part of the spring, so that thy body may be strong and thy
+feet swift to chase the game and to follow the warpath."<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> Translated from the Ottawa language by A. Blackbird.</p></div>
+
+<p>In the evenings the older members of the family and some visiting
+Indians sat around the fire and told stones about the Great Spirit and
+many other strange beings, some good and some evil. They told, too,
+wonderful tales about omens and charms. The same story was told over and
+over again, so that in time little Pontiac knew by heart the legends of
+the Ottawas. He remembered and firmly believed all his life stories that
+as a child he listened to with awe, in his father's wigwam.</p>
+
+<p>In the same way he heard about the great deeds of the warriors of his
+tribe; and he came to think there were no people in the world quite
+equal to the Ottawas. He heard of other tribes that were their foes and
+he was eager to go to war against them.</p>
+
+<p>As he grew older he heard a good deal about men, not only of another
+tribe but of another race, the palefaces, who were trying to get the
+lands of the Indians. Then he thought less about being an Ottawa and
+conquering other Indians; while every day he felt more and more that he
+was an Indian and must conquer the white man. He wished he could unite
+the tribes in friendship and lead them against these strangers who were
+so many and so<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> strong, and who had come to drive the Indians from their
+homes and hunting grounds.</p>
+
+<p>Such thoughts made Pontiac very serious. Obeying the commands of the
+Great Spirit, the young Indian often blackened his face with a mixture
+of charcoal and fish-oil, and went into the depths of the forest, where
+he remained for days without food, praying and thinking earnestly about
+the future.</p>
+
+<p>He formed his own plans, but he hid them in his heart. He practised
+keeping his feelings and thoughts to himself, and spoke only when he was
+very sure he was right. This habit soon gained him a reputation for
+gravity and wisdom.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IV_THE_CHIEF" id="IV_THE_CHIEF"></a>IV. THE CHIEF</h2>
+
+
+<p>When he was old enough to go to battle with the tried warriors, Pontiac
+took many scalps and distinguished himself for courage. He was,
+therefore, amid great feasting and rejoicing, made a war chief of the
+Ottawas.</p>
+
+<p>His influence increased rapidly. The young men of his tribe felt sure of
+success when they followed Pontiac to battle. His very name made his
+foes tremble.</p>
+
+<p>In the council, too, his power grew. His words seemed wise to the gray
+heads, and the young warriors were ready to take up the hatchet or lay
+it down at his bidding. Because of his eloquence and wisdom, Pontiac was
+made sachem, so that he not only led his people to battle, but also
+ruled them in time of peace. He was called<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> the greatest councilor and
+warrior of the Ottawas; yet he was not content.</p>
+
+<p>In Michigan, where the Ottawa Indians lived, there were other tribes of
+the Algonquin Indians. Chief among these were the Ojibwas and the
+Pottawottomies. These tribes, though related by marriage and on friendly
+terms, had separate chiefs. But gradually they came to recognize the
+great Pontiac as their principal ruler.</p>
+
+<p>Among the Indians of his own tribe Pontiac's word was law. Among kindred
+tribes his friendship was sought and his displeasure feared. Through all
+the Algonquin territory, from the Lakes to the Gulf, from the mountains
+to the river, the great chief's name was known and respected.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac was no doubt proud and ambitious. But if he was glad to gain
+glory for himself he considered the good of his people also. To unite
+them and overpower the palefaces was the end toward which he planned.</p>
+
+<p>By this time he had learned that all palefaces were not alike. There
+were two great nations of them, the French and the English, and the
+Indians had found a great difference between them. The English had
+treated them with contempt and helped themselves to their lands. The
+French had come among them as missionaries and traders, with kind words
+and gifts. To be sure, they had built forts in the land, but they told
+the Indians they did this for their sake that they might protect them
+from the English, who wished to take their lands. The French seemed to
+hate the English no less than the Indians did.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It is said that Pontiac planned to use the French to help him conquer
+the English, and then intended to turn upon them and drive them away. No
+doubt if the French had openly claimed the territory of the Indians, or
+in any way had shown that their professions of friendship were false,
+Pontiac would have been their enemy. But he evidently took them at their
+word and looked upon them as friends who wished to help his people.</p>
+
+<p>In all his dealings with the French, Pontiac was true and honorable. He
+joined them in their wars against the English. He and his Ottawas helped
+to defeat the British regulars under General Braddock at Fort Duquesne.
+He saved the French garrison at Detroit from an attack by hostile
+Indians. He trusted them when all appearances were against them. His
+acceptance of the peace offered by Major Rogers on the shore of Lake
+Erie was not a betrayal of the French. Pontiac did not forsake their
+cause until they had given it up themselves. He took a step which seemed
+for the best interests of his own people, and, at the same time, not
+hurtful to the French. We have seen that he was disappointed in the
+reward he expected.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 87px;">
+<img src="images/i069.jpg" width="87" height="230" alt="INDIAN WEAPON" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN WEAPON</span>
+</div>
+<div class="figright" style="width: 207px;">
+<img src="images/i069a.jpg" width="207" height="230" alt="INDIAN WEAPON" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN WEAPON</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The English, having subdued the French, felt able to manage the Indians
+without difficulty. They were, therefore, more careless than ever about
+pleasing them. They refused to give the supplies which the French had
+been accustomed to distribute among the Indians. The Indians were
+obliged to provide for themselves, as in the days of Pontiac's
+childhood. They had no powder or<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> bullets and the young men had lost
+their skill with the bow. There was suffering and death for want of
+food.</p>
+
+<p>Even Pontiac had been willing to profit by the generosity of the French.
+He had not only cheered himself with their firewater, but, like other
+Indians, he had been glad to give up his bow and arrow for a gun; he had
+been ready to accept corn and smoked meats in winter when game was
+scarce, and to protect himself from the cold with the Frenchmen's
+blankets.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>He realized now that in adopting the white men's customs, in using their
+food and blankets and arms, his people had become dependent upon them.
+He remembered the stories he had heard in his childhood about the might
+of the Ottawas in the days when they depended on the chase for their
+food, and fought their battles with bows and arrows and stone hatchets.
+He wished his people would return to the old customs. In that way only
+could they regain their native hardihood and independence.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>While Pontiac's hatred of the English grew more bitter daily, other
+Indians were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> not indifferent. Through all the Algonquin tribes spread
+this hatred for the English. The insolence of the garrisons at the forts
+provoked it; the cheating, the bad faith, and the brutality of the
+English trappers and traders increased it; the refusal of supplies, the
+secret influence of the French, the encroachments of English settlers,
+fanned it into fury. And when at last, in 1762, word came that the
+English claimed the land of the Algonquins their rage could no longer be
+restrained.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="V_THE_PLOT" id="V_THE_PLOT"></a>V. THE PLOT</h2>
+
+
+<p>The time was ripe for rebellion and Pontiac was ready. All over the land
+should council fires be lighted. All over the land should the hatchet be
+raised. By wile and treachery the forts should fall. By fire and
+bloodshed the settlements should be laid waste and the Englishmen driven
+into the sea. Thus spoke Pontiac, and thus spoke his messengers, who
+with war belts of black and red wampum and hatchets smeared with blood
+sought out the villages of the Algonquins. Far and wide this dark
+company went its way through forests, across prairies, in spite of storm
+or flooded stream, or mountain barrier. No camp was so secret, no
+village so remote, that the messengers of war did not find it out.
+Wherever they went the bloody plan found favor; the tokens of war were
+accepted and pledges of warlike purpose sent to Pontiac.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Not far from the summering place where clustered the lodges of Pontiac
+and his kinsmen rose the walls of Fort Detroit. There Pontiac had
+suffered humiliation at the hands of the English, and upon it he planned
+to visit his vengeance.</p>
+
+<p>The little French military station planted on the west bank of the
+Detroit River had reached half a century's growth. It had become a place
+of some importance. Both banks of the river were studded with farmhouses
+for miles above and below the "fort," as the walled village where the
+soldiers lived was called.</p>
+
+<p>The fort consisted of about one hundred small houses surrounded by a
+palisade, or wall of heavy stakes, twenty-five feet high. Since gates
+are easily broken down, over every gate a block house had been built,
+from which soldiers could fire upon the approaching enemy. At the four
+corners of the palisade were bastions, or fortified projections, from
+which the inmates could see the whole length of the wall and shoot any
+one attempting to climb it, set fire to it, or do it any harm.</p>
+
+<p>The small log houses within were crowded together with only narrow
+passage-ways between. They were roofed with bark or thatched with straw.
+To lessen the danger of fire a wide road was left between the wall and
+the houses. Besides dwelling houses, there were in the fort the barracks
+where the soldiers stayed, the church, shops, and the council house,
+where meetings with the Indians were held.</p>
+
+<p>At this time the garrison consisted of about one<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> hundred and twenty
+men. But counting the other inmates of the fort and the Canadians who
+lived along the river, there were about two thousand five hundred white
+people in the Detroit settlement. On the outskirts of the settlement
+hung the Indian villages, much as the Indian villages crowd around the
+white settlements of Alaska to-day.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of the wilderness this little band of English lived
+protected by their log walls. No friends were near. Their nearest
+neighbors were the conquered French, who regarded them with jealousy and
+dislike. Not far away were their Indian enemies. Yet they thought little
+of danger.</p>
+
+<p>Occasionally some story of Indian treachery, some rumor of Indian
+hostility, or some omen of evil filled the garrison with vague alarm. In
+October, 1762, dense clouds gathered over the fort, and soon rain black
+as ink fell from them. This strange occurrence stirred up the fears of
+the settlers. Some said that it was a sign that the end of the world was
+at hand; others, that it was a sign of war. But by the spring of the
+next year the settlers of Detroit had ceased to think of the black rain
+and war.</p>
+
+<p>If a few had suffered unrest because of the Indians, their fears were
+put to flight by a visit which Pontiac made to Detroit late in April.
+With forty of his chiefs he came to the fort asking to be allowed to
+perform the peace dance before the commander. The request was granted,
+and a good-natured crowd gathered near Major Gladwin's house to see the
+Indian dance.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>No one thought anything of the fact that ten of the party took no part
+in the dance, but strolled around the fort prying into everything. Those
+who noticed them at all, thought their conduct showed nothing more than
+childish curiosity.</p>
+
+<p>No one dreamed that these men were spies, and that the sole purpose of
+the visit was to discover the strength of the garrison. The Indians left
+with promises to come again to smoke the calumet with the English when
+all their chiefs should assemble after the winter's hunt.</p>
+
+<p>After visiting Detroit, Pontiac sent swift-footed runners to all the
+tribes in the neighboring country, calling the chiefs to a council to be
+held in the village of the Pottawottomies.</p>
+
+<p>When the day for the great council arrived, all the women were sent away
+from the village so that they could not overhear the plans of the
+chiefs. At the door of the great bark lodge where the chiefs met,
+sentinels were posted to prevent interruption.</p>
+
+<p>When all had taken their places in the council room Pontiac rose and
+laid before his trusted chiefs his crafty plans. On the seventh of May
+the young warriors should gather on the green near Detroit to play ball,
+while the older men lay on the ground looking on, or loitered in and
+about the fort. The squaws should go about the streets with guns and
+tomahawks hidden under their blankets, offering mats and baskets for
+sale, or begging. Later Pontiac, with the principal chiefs would arrive,
+and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> ask to hold a council with the commander and his officers. While
+speaking in the council he would suddenly turn the wampum belt that he
+held in his hand. At that signal the chiefs should throw off the
+blankets that hid their weapons and war paint, and butcher the English
+before they could offer resistance. When the Indians outside heard the
+clamor within the council house they should snatch the guns and knives
+that the squaws carried, fall upon the surprised and half-armed
+soldiers, kill them and plunder and burn the fort, sparing only the
+French.</p>
+
+<p>From the Indians' point of view this seemed a brave plot. No one
+objected to the treachery. All the guttural sounds that broke from the
+throng of listeners were made for approval and applause.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VI_THE_SEVENTH_OF_MAY" id="VI_THE_SEVENTH_OF_MAY"></a>VI. THE SEVENTH OF MAY</h2>
+
+
+<p>The Indians kept their secret well. A Canadian saw some Indians filing
+off their guns to make them short enough to hide under their blankets.
+But if his suspicions were aroused he held his peace and said no word of
+warning to the English. The appointed seventh of May was at hand and no
+alarm had been taken at the garrison.</p>
+
+<p>But on the evening of the sixth, Major Gladwin talked long in secret
+with his officers, then ordered half the garrison under arms. He doubled
+the guard and himself went from place to place to see that every man was
+at his post. The soldiers did not know the reason for this unusual
+watchfulness, but they understood that it meant danger.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It is said that in the afternoon an Indian girl who was deeply attached
+to the English Major had brought him a pair of moccasins she had been
+embroidering for him. She lingered at the fort and seemed unwilling to
+leave. At last she begged Gladwin to go away from the fort for a day or
+two. Her conduct and request excited suspicion. The Major questioned her
+closely and discovered Pontiac's plot.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 303px;">
+<img src="images/i075.jpg" width="303" height="500" alt="BETRAYAL OF PONTIAC&#39;S PLOT" title="" />
+<span class="caption">BETRAYAL OF PONTIAC&#39;S PLOT</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Be that as it may, on the night of the sixth Major Gladwin was on the
+alert.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing disturbed the peace of the mild May night. In the morning one
+watchman on the walls said to another, "See, yonder they come."</p>
+
+<p>The man addressed looked up the stream and saw many birch canoes rapidly
+approaching the fort. "A perfect fleet!" he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; plenty of boats, but not many Indians; only two or three in each
+canoe," replied the first.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That's true. But see how deep the canoes are in the water, and what
+heavy paddling those fellows are doing! A dozen beaver skins to one,
+every canoe's got a load of those red rascals stretched on their backs
+well out of sight."</p>
+
+<p>"You may be right," said the other, shaking his head. "It looks as if
+there might be some ugly work before us. They say the Major has ordered
+the whole garrison under arms. Even the shops are closed and the traders
+armed to the teeth."</p>
+
+<p>Most of the Indians who came in the boats went to a green near the fort
+and began a game of ball. Soon Pontiac himself was seen approaching
+along the river road at the head of sixty of his chiefs. They wore
+blankets and marched in single file without a word. When they reached
+the gate Pontiac, with his accustomed dignity, asked that he and his
+chiefs might meet their English brothers in council to discuss important
+questions.</p>
+
+<p>In answer to his request the gates swung open. Lines of armed soldiers
+appeared on either side. The Indians, trained to read signs, knew at
+once that their plot was discovered. Perhaps they felt that the
+treachery they had planned would be visited on their own heads. But if
+they feared, they gave no token; they said no word. They walked
+undaunted through the narrow streets, meeting armed soldiers at every
+turn.</p>
+
+<p>At the council house they found Major Gladwin, his assistant, Captain
+Campbell, and other officers already assembled and waiting for them. If
+any Indian had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> doubted the discovery of their plot, he was certain of
+it when he saw that the officers wore swords at their sides and pistols
+in their belts. It was with some reluctance that they seated themselves
+on the mats arranged for them.</p>
+
+<p>This was a trying moment for Pontiac. He stood there discovered,
+defeated. But he did not quail before the steady gaze of the English.
+His brow was only more haughty, his face more stern.</p>
+
+<p>"And why," he asked, in a severe, harsh voice, "do our brothers meet us
+to-day with guns in their hands?"</p>
+
+<p>"You come among us when we are taking our regular military exercise,"
+answered the commander calmly.</p>
+
+<p>With fears somewhat soothed, Pontiac began to speak: "For many moons the
+love of our brothers, the English, has seemed to sleep. It is now
+spring; the sun shines bright and hot; the bears, the oaks, the rivers
+awake from their sleep. Brothers, it is time for the friendship between
+us to awake. Our chiefs have come to do their part, to renew their
+pledges of peace and friendship."</p>
+
+<p>Here he made a movement with the belt he held in his hand, as if about
+to turn it over. Every Indian was ready to spring. Gladwin gave a
+signal. A clash of arms sounded through the open door. A drum began
+beating a charge. Within the council room there was a startled,
+breathless silence. Pontiac's hand was stayed. The belt fell back to its
+first position. The din of arms ceased. Pontiac repeated his promises of
+friendship and loyalty, and then sat down.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 353px;">
+<img src="images/i078.jpg" width="353" height="500" alt="PONTIAC&#39;S SPEECH" title="" />
+<span class="caption">PONTIAC&#39;S SPEECH</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Major Gladwin answered briefly: "Brothers, the English are not fickle.
+They do not withdraw their friendship without cause. As long as the red
+men are faithful to their promises they will find the English their
+steadfast friends. But if the Indians are false or do any injury to the
+English, the English will punish them without mercy."</p>
+
+<p>The one object of the Indians was now to turn aside the suspicion of the
+English. After Gladwin's speech presents were exchanged, and the meeting
+broke up with a general hand-shaking. Before leaving, Pontiac promised
+that he would return in a few days with his squaws and children that
+they might shake hands with their English brothers.</p>
+
+<p>"Scoundrels!" laughed one officer, when the last Indian had left. "They
+were afraid to sit down. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> thought they had been caught in their own
+trap. It's a pity to let them off so easily."</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied another, more seriously. "The Major is right. If there is
+an outbreak, the Indians must take the first step. They depend more on
+treachery than force for success; now that their plan is foiled, the
+whole trouble will probably blow over."</p>
+
+<p>The next day this opinion seemed verified by the appearance, of Pontiac
+with three of his chiefs. He brought a peace-pipe and approached the
+commander with smooth speeches: "Evil birds have whistled in your ears,
+but do not listen to them. We are your friends. We have come to prove
+it. We will smoke the calumet with you."</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac then offered his great peace-pipe. After it had been smoked in
+all solemnity, he presented it to Captain Campbell as a high mark of
+friendship.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VII_HOSTILITIES_BEGUN" id="VII_HOSTILITIES_BEGUN"></a>VII. HOSTILITIES BEGUN</h2>
+
+
+<p>Bright and early the next morning hordes of naked savages gathered on
+the pasture land near the fort. A long quadrangle was marked out on the
+grass with lines across it. At each end of this "gridiron" two tall
+posts were erected five or six feet apart. This, as you may have
+guessed, was to prepare for an Indian game of ball.</p>
+
+<p>When all was ready the young men of the Ottawa<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> tribes took their places
+on one side of the field. Opposite to them were the Pottawottomies. Each
+Indian had a long racket or bat with which he tried to drive the ball to
+the goal against the opposition of the players of the other nation. Such
+a yelling as they kept up, running and pushing and plunging and prancing
+the while! Small wonder that squaws, warriors, and chiefs should have
+come to watch so exciting a game!</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i080.jpg" width="600" height="375" alt="INDIANS PLAYING BALL" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIANS PLAYING BALL</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Still the men in the fort kept the gates closed and stayed behind their
+walls, as if they took no interest in the game. They were really
+watching with some uneasiness the vast crowd of Indians so close at
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>When the game was finished Pontiac went to the gate of the fort. His
+chiefs attended him and a motley<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> crowd of warriors, squaws, and
+children came trooping after. The great chief shouted in a loud voice,
+demanding admission. He received answer that he might come in if he
+wished, but the rest would have to keep out. With injured dignity he
+asked if his followers were not to be allowed to enjoy the smoke of the
+calumet.</p>
+
+<p>The English commander, tired of false speech, gave a short answer,
+refusing flatly to let the Indians in. Thereupon Pontiac's brow darkened
+and he strode off to the river in high dudgeon.</p>
+
+<p>The others withdrew a little and stood in groups, muttering and
+gesticulating. Then with wild whoops they bounded off to join their
+comrades who lay stretched on the earth around the ball grounds. After a
+brief parley, some started with blood-curdling yells toward a house
+across the fields where an English woman lived with her children; others
+leaped into their canoes and paddled off to an island where an English
+farmer lived alone.</p>
+
+<p>Before sunset the men at the fort heard the exultant scalp yell of the
+Indians, and knew that the first blood of the war had been shed.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Pontiac hastened with gloomy rage to his own village
+across the river. It was deserted by all but a few squaws and old men.
+These Pontiac ordered to pack the camp luggage and make all ready for
+removal, as soon as the men came with their canoes to carry the camp
+equipment to the Detroit side of the river.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>All labored to do their chief's will, while he went apart and blackened
+his face.</p>
+
+<p>At nightfall the braves came in with the scalps they had taken. A pole
+was driven into the ground in the open space where the tents had been.
+The warriors gathered about it, their bodies decked with paint and eagle
+feathers.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac sprang into their midst, brandishing his hatchet and striking
+violently at the pole. As he danced about, he recited the great deeds he
+and his fathers had done in war. His appalling cries, his terrible
+words, stirred the hearts of his Indians and fired their blood. All were
+in a frenzy of excitement. With wild cries they joined their chief in
+his war dance.</p>
+
+<p>Even the faint echo of the din these blood-thirsty demons made struck
+terror into the hearts of the watchers in Detroit. The soldiers kept
+close guard all night, expecting an attack at any moment.</p>
+
+<p>But not till early dawn did the war cry sound. Shrill and near it rose
+from hundreds of throats. Strong men turned pale at the clamor of yells
+and cracking rifles. It seemed that the Indians must be at the very
+walls of the fort.</p>
+
+<p>The guards on the ramparts, however, could see no enemy in the faint
+gray light. From behind every tree, every stone, every rise of ground,
+came the incessant flash of muskets. Bullets and blazing arrows rattled
+against the palisades. The Indians aimed at the loopholes and succeeded
+in wounding five of the English.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> The soldiers returned a cautious fire,
+unwilling to waste powder on an invisible foe.</p>
+
+<p>After an attack of six hours' duration the Indians, weary with their
+night's activity, gradually withdrew to their camps, having suffered no
+loss, but at the same time having inflicted little.</p>
+
+<p>Gladwin, whose spirit was manly and humane, wished if possible to avoid
+further bloodshed. The Canadians took no part in the war, and could,
+therefore, be safely used as messengers. As soon as the battle had
+subsided Major Gladwin sent a deputation of them to tell Pontiac that he
+was willing to listen to any real grievance of the Indians, and do his
+best to redress whatever wrongs they had suffered.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac knew that his chief charge of injustice against the English,
+their presence in and claim to his lands, would not be considered by the
+English a real grievance. He thought the hour for talking had passed;
+the time for action had come. Treachery was his readiest weapon and he
+used it. He replied that he could consent to no terms unless they were
+made with the English in person, and asked that Captain Campbell, second
+in command at the fort, come to a council in his camp.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Campbell had no fear, and urged Major Gladwin to permit him to
+go. He and another Englishman, accordingly, hastened to the Indian
+village. The women and the warriors were so enraged at the sight of
+their red coats, that they would have stoned them had not Pontiac
+interfered and led them to his lodge.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>After a long but fruitless talk around the council fire, the English
+rose to go. But Pontiac said: "Brothers, you will sleep to-night on the
+couches the red men have spread for you." He then gave orders that his
+prisoners should be taken to the house of a Canadian, where they should
+be treated with respect, but closely guarded.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VIII_THE_TWO_LEADERS" id="VIII_THE_TWO_LEADERS"></a>VIII. THE TWO LEADERS</h2>
+
+
+<p>When the officers at Detroit learned that their deputies were detained
+by the Indians, they realized that there was no hope of peace. Before
+the fort two armed schooners rode at anchor. Most of the officers wished
+to abandon the fort and seek safety by sailing away on these boats.</p>
+
+<p>"There is no use trying to hold the old fort against eight times our
+number," they said impatiently.</p>
+
+<p>But Major Gladwin had no thought of surrender. "We could not," he
+answered, "if the Indians should attempt to force the walls. But there
+is no danger of their venturing within gunshot in any numbers. They
+won't risk their red skins that way. They'll simply waste their powder
+and lead in such firing as they did this morning, and pretty soon
+they'll lose heart and drop off, leaving Pontiac to beg for peace."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't suppose they will unite in a charge," assented one of the
+officers. "But they will keep a sharp lookout day and night to do us
+injury. We have four<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> walls to guard and only one hundred and twenty men
+to do it. The garrison will be exhausted in no time."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, we have hard work before us," agreed the commander, "but we can do
+it. Our case is not so bad as you represent. The ship's guns protect two
+walls, so that virtually only two sides of the fort are exposed to the
+enemy. To me the most alarming feature of the siege is short rations."</p>
+
+<p>"The supplies are low and we cannot hope for more within three weeks.
+We'll starve to death, penned up here with no hunting and no provisions
+from the Canadian farmers," complained some, ready in their alarm to
+magnify every danger.</p>
+
+<p>"By taking care to prevent waste we can make the supplies last," the
+commander interrupted. "I shall buy up at once everything in the fort
+that can serve as food, put it into a common storehouse, and give to
+each person a daily allowance. If even with this care the food runs
+short, Canadians may be found who love gold better than Indians." In
+this way the courageous leader argued, until, at last, he overcame the
+fears of his aids and roused in them a spirit of resistance.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac had no lack of warriors, nevertheless he, as well as the British
+leader, had his fears and difficulties.</p>
+
+<p>His own followers were not easily managed. He had brought them together
+from near and far with promise of easy victory over the English. After a
+short struggle many of the tribes lost heart and were ready to go back
+to their villages.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Canadians were neutral and were supposed to sympathize with the
+Indians; but Pontiac knew that many of them favored the English, and
+were ready at the slightest offense to take the side of his enemies.</p>
+
+<p>His campaign against the English had begun with failure. Treachery had
+failed. He had put the English on their guard and must now use open
+force.</p>
+
+<p>To hold a horde of savages together, to keep the fickle Canadians
+friendly, to take without cannon all the fortifications on the frontier,
+were the tasks the Indian general had set himself.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 257px;">
+<img src="images/i086.jpg" width="257" height="400" alt="PONTIAC&#39;S ELOQUENCE" title="" />
+<span class="caption">PONTIAC&#39;S ELOQUENCE</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Pontiac's personal influence over the Indians was unparalleled. He had
+lost none of his power over them by the defeat of his plan to take
+Detroit. No Indian dared reproach him with failure. All quailed before
+his terrible rage and disappointment. They brought him the scalps of the
+English they had slain. They sought to please him with loud outcries
+against the English, and promises of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> bloody work they would do. He
+held all in awe of him. He commanded as if sure of being obeyed, and
+punished the slightest disobedience with extreme severity.</p>
+
+<p>But he did not govern by fear alone. He took care that his warriors
+should not want for food; he took care to give them grounds for hope and
+to keep them busy.</p>
+
+<p>No preparations had been made for a long siege. When provisions failed
+and the tribes were on the point of leaving, Pontiac had a conference
+with some Canadians and arranged that they should furnish his people
+with corn and meat. He had no money to pay for provisions, but he made
+out notes promising to pay for them at some future time. These notes
+were written on birch bark, and signed with the figure of an otter, the
+totem of the great chief. Many of the farmers feared they would never
+see the money promised them in these notes, but Pontiac paid them all
+faithfully.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac knew how wasteful his people were, feasting in the day of plenty
+without thought of the morrow. He therefore employed a Canadian as his
+provision officer. This man had charge of the storehouse, and doled out
+each morning the provisions for the day.</p>
+
+<p>This novel arrangement increased the Indians' confidence in their
+leader. Yet some grew restless and were on the point of giving up the
+struggle as a failure.</p>
+
+<p>On learning this, Pontiac sent out messengers to the Wyandot Indians,
+ordering them to join him in his war against the British or prepare to
+be wiped off the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> face of the earth. By this stroke Pontiac turned
+threatened loss into gain. The support of the warlike Wyandots renewed
+the courage of the faint-hearted, and for a time all thought of failure
+ceased.</p>
+
+<p>The chiefs conduct toward the Canadians was highly praiseworthy. They
+had encouraged him to make war against the British by promising that the
+French king would send him help. Week after week passed and no help
+came. Pontiac's expectation of the arrival of a French army grew fainter
+and fainter. Still he did not lose faith in the truth of the Canadians.
+He protected them and their property from injury and theft; for there
+were many lawless young warriors who were ready to do violence to the
+French as well as to the English.</p>
+
+<p>While pretending to sympathize with the Indians, many of the French
+farmers were secretly helping the English by selling them food and
+reporting the movements of the Indians. Pontiac heard many reports of
+their faithlessness.</p>
+
+<p>One stormy evening the chief entered the cabin of a Frenchman whom he
+had known for many years. With only a nod for his host he sat down
+before the dying fire. He sat there wrapt in his blanket for a long time
+without a word. At last he faced the Frenchman and said: "Old friend, I
+hear that the English have offered to give you a bushel of silver if you
+will take them my scalp."</p>
+
+<p>"It is false," cried the Frenchman in alarm. "I would not injure my
+friend for many bushels of silver."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Pontiac has no fear. Pontiac trusts his brother," the Indian replied,
+and stretching himself upon a bench he was soon sound asleep. The
+Frenchman could not be false to such faith and the chief slept unharmed.</p>
+
+<p>While successfully keeping together his warriors and strengthening the
+bond of friendship between the French and the Indians, Pontiac was
+carrying on the war against the English with vigor. His camp near
+Detroit was the center of action. From it Pontiac directed the war and
+kept constant watch over the garrison. He prevented the besieged from
+leaving their walls; he sent out parties to waylay the supplies the
+British were expecting from the East; he planned and managed expeditions
+against other forts held by the British.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IX_THE_SIEGE_OF_DETROIT" id="IX_THE_SIEGE_OF_DETROIT"></a>IX. THE SIEGE OF DETROIT</h2>
+
+
+<p>The English at Detroit soon became accustomed to the discomforts and
+alarms of the siege. The women no longer trembled when the Indian war
+whoop sounded. The men no longer ran to the walls at the popping of
+muskets. The smell of gunpowder, the whiz of bullets, had lost their
+power to quicken the pulse.</p>
+
+<p>The days dragged slowly on. A few wan-faced men worked, many lounged in
+the narrow streets, playing games of chance, betting on the outcome of
+the war, quarreling, complaining, boasting. Now they talked vauntingly,
+telling tales of the Englishman's prow<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span>ess and the Indian's cowardice.
+Again, they told dismal stories of Indian cruelty and massacre, and
+shook their heads over their own prospects.</p>
+
+<p>But every idler had his firelock close at hand, and all the time the
+sentinels on the bastions kept a sharp lookout. Every little while rapid
+firing broke the monotony of the long watch; the rolling drum called the
+garrison to the ramparts; wounded men groaned under the rough kindness
+of the fort surgeon; the dead received the soldiers' burial. But over
+all the old flag with its red cross, stained with rain and smoke,
+flapped defiantly.</p>
+
+<p>Major Gladwin went about with a cheerful face, but a heavy heart.
+Provisions were fast melting away. It seemed scarcely possible that the
+garrison would be able to hold out till the expected supplies arrived.
+He decided to send one of the schooners to meet the provision boats, to
+warn them of the hostility of the Indians and urge them to all speed.</p>
+
+<p>They could ill spare any of the garrison, but food must be had. So, on a
+bright spring morning one of the vessels weighed anchor and started for
+the East. Before she left the Detroit River the wind died and her sails
+hung limp.</p>
+
+<p>As the boat lay helplessly drifting with the current a hundred canoes
+darted out from the shore. In the foremost one the Indians had bound
+their prisoner, Captain Campbell. The British saw, and were afraid to
+fire lest they should shoot their countryman. Noticing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> their
+hesitation, the brave old man called out: "Don't think of me. Do your
+duty and fire." The man at the cannon still paused. A breeze stirred,
+swelled the canvas, and the schooner flew like a great gull over the
+blue waters far out of reach of the canoes.</p>
+
+<p>After the boat left, a gloom settled upon the little garrison at
+Detroit. With two boats in the harbor flight had seemed possible. Now
+that one of them had gone, all felt that the siege meant victory or
+death. The daily allowance of food grew smaller. The men became
+exhausted with ceaseless watching. All hope was fixed on the expected
+reinforcements.</p>
+
+<p>On the thirteenth of May the sentinel announced that the long looked for
+convoy was in sight. The good news spread rapidly. Soon the entire
+population of the village was hurrying to the gate that led to the
+river.</p>
+
+<p>The hungry, haggard-looking men that crowded the wharf sent up cheer
+after cheer as the boats approached with flags flying. Days of rest and
+plenty seemed theirs again. Here were comrades to share their vigils.
+Here was food to satisfy their hunger.</p>
+
+<p>As the boats drew nearer, the cheers died in throats hoarse with horror.
+No answering shout came from the boats. The English at the oars were not
+their own masters. The long expected supplies had fallen into the hands
+of the Indians. The men to whom the garrison had looked for help were
+the prisoners of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Two Englishmen escaped from their guards and succeeded in reaching the
+fort where they told their story:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span> Ninety men had started with large
+stores of food and ammunition, early in the spring to reinforce Detroit.
+Meeting the schooner from the fort and learning the danger and need of
+the garrison, they had pushed on with all possible speed until they
+reached the mouth of the Detroit River. That night, as the boats were
+drawn up on the shore and the men were getting supper, their camp was
+suddenly surprised by a horde of Wyandot Indians. The British made an
+attempt to defend themselves. But the Indians were upon them brandishing
+their tomahawks and yelling like demons. Panic fear seized the white
+men. They dropped their guns, fled to the boats, jumped in and pushed
+off. The exultant Indians pressed after them and succeeded in retaking
+all but two of their overloaded boats. The savages were now taking their
+prisoners, about sixty in number, to the camp of Pontiac, where they
+would be tortured and put to death.</p>
+
+<p>The success of this bold venture probably would have ended the siege of
+Detroit with victory for Pontiac, had the Canadians been as loyal to the
+Indians as they pretended. But while they were giving the chief
+assurances of good will and future help, some of them were secretly
+succoring the English. Under the cover of night they smuggled cattle and
+sheep and hogs to the famishing garrison.</p>
+
+<p>Even with this aid the prospects of the little garrison were dark
+enough. Every wind seemed to blow them ill news.</p>
+
+<p>One afternoon the guard at the fort heard a weird<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> chant and saw issuing
+from the distant forest a file of warriors whose naked bodies were
+smeared with black paint. Every one of them carried a pole over his
+shoulder, and the horrified watchers knew well enough that from the end
+of each pole fluttered the scalp of some Englishman. They learned from
+the Canadians that night that Fort Sandusky had been burned and its
+garrison murdered.</p>
+
+<p>A little later the Indians offered to exchange some prisoners with the
+English. The victims thus released by the Indians proved to be from Fort
+St. Joseph. They told how that fort had been treacherously taken and
+burned, and all the inmates but themselves slain.</p>
+
+<p>A traveling priest brought word that the plot which had failed at
+Detroit had succeeded only too well at Michillimackinac. Next came
+tidings of the massacres at Fort Ouatanon on the Wabash River and at
+Fort Miamis, on the Maumee.</p>
+
+<p>Nor was the tale of fire and blood yet ended. A fugitive from the camp
+of Pontiac reached Detroit one afternoon. It proved to be Ensign
+Christie, the commanding officer at Presqu' Isle, near the eastern end
+of Lake Erie. His story was a thrilling one. He told how his little
+garrison of twenty-seven men had fortified themselves in their block
+house and made a fierce struggle to keep back the Indians and save their
+stronghold from the flames; how at last the Indians had undermined their
+fort and threatened to apply the torch above and below at once. Then to
+escape death by fire the little<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> band had listened to the promises of
+the Indians and yielded themselves prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>If these reports terrified the English at Detroit, they also
+strengthened their determination not to surrender. In spite of fatigue,
+hunger, and discouragement they fought stoutly on, until, at length,
+there came a turn in the tide of ill fortune that had surged against
+them.</p>
+
+<p>On the nineteenth of June news reached them that the schooner which had
+been sent to meet the provisions had returned and was entering the
+Detroit River. This cheered all, for they knew that the boat had been to
+Niagara for more supplies and more men. Still, they remembered the fate
+of the provision boats, and were worried lest mischance should befall
+the schooner.</p>
+
+<p>Their anxiety increased when they saw the Indians going in large
+companies down the river and heard from the Canadians that they were
+planning to attack the schooner. The British at the fort fired two
+cannon shots to let their countrymen know that they still held Detroit.
+But several days passed before they heard anything of the boat. At last
+they saw her sailing safely toward them.</p>
+
+<p>There were waving caps, shouts of joy, and prayers of thanksgiving among
+the little company of half-starved men who thronged at the gate to
+welcome the newcomers.</p>
+
+<p>They had heard that eight hundred more Ojibwa Indians were on their way
+to increase the forces of Pontiac. But what were eight hundred Ojibwas
+to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> sixty hardy sons of England and a schooner loaded with supplies and
+cannon!</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="X_IMPORTANT_ENGAGEMENTS" id="X_IMPORTANT_ENGAGEMENTS"></a>X. IMPORTANT ENGAGEMENTS</h2>
+
+
+<p>Hope grew strong in Pontiac's heart as week after week his tribes and
+allies brought to his camp trophies of victory&mdash;guns, prisoners, scalps.
+But Detroit troubled him. The most violent attacks produced no effect.
+To starve the garrison seemed the only way to conquer it.</p>
+
+<p>When, therefore, Pontiac's messengers had brought word that the schooner
+was approaching he bent his whole energy to prevent her reaching
+Detroit. Along the river where dense underwoods grew, hundreds of
+Indians lay concealed with their canoes, waiting for the schooner.</p>
+
+<p>When, in the darkness of a moonless night, they saw the great boat
+sailing steadily up the narrow channel they paddled silently toward her,
+dark specks on the breast of the dark, shining river. Nearer and nearer
+they pressed. All was silent on the vessel. Surely no one had taken
+alarm. Not a shot and they had reached the boat; they were clambering
+like rats up its bulky sides&mdash;when lo! a sharp hammering on the mast
+head, a flash of muskets in the dark, a cry of defeat and rage above the
+din of battle! Cannon boomed; canoes flew high into the air; bullets did
+their work.</p>
+
+<p>For fourteen Indians the long struggle against the palefaces was over.
+The rest scurried to the shore<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> as best they could, some paddling, some
+swimming. Once there, they took shelter behind some temporary
+earthworks, and opened such a fierce fire on the schooner that it was
+forced to drop down stream to a broader part of the river. For several
+days they delayed the ship, but at length she sailed boldly past, and
+was but little injured by the fire.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac was sorely vexed that the ship had succeeded in reaching the
+garrison. He and his people looked upon the boats with almost
+superstitious horror. Their dislike was not lessened when one day the
+smaller schooner made her way against wind and current up to Pontiac's
+village, and there sent shot and shell roaring through the frail
+dwellings.</p>
+
+<p>Though no loss of life resulted, the Indians were greatly alarmed.
+Pontiac moved his camp to a safer place and then turned his attention to
+destroying the ships. Early in July he made his first attempt.</p>
+
+<p>Two large boats filled with birch bark and pitch pine were tied together
+and set on fire. They were then cut loose and left to float down stream.
+Keenly the Indians watched; keenly, the English. Would the fireboats go
+close enough? the first wondered with bated breath. Would they come too
+close? questioned the British. Woe on the one hand, joy on the other!
+the space between the ships and the flaming craft widens&mdash;the fireboats
+float harmlessly down the river. A second and a third attempt to burn
+the boats failed. Fortune seemed to favor the English.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Pontiac began to despair of taking Detroit unaided. He called a council
+of the French. He reminded them that the English were their enemies as
+well as his. He charged them with helping the English and told them that
+the time had come for them to choose sides and fight with him or against
+him. He then offered them the war belt. His hope was that they would
+take it up and join him against the English.</p>
+
+<p>Now, the Canadians had become by the terms of the treaty that closed the
+French war, British subjects, but they were ashamed or afraid to admit
+it, and still deceived the Indians. They told Pontiac that much as it
+would please them to fight with him against the English, they must obey
+the commands of their father, the King of France, who had bidden them to
+remain at peace until his coming. They added that he, with a great army,
+was already on the St. Lawrence and would soon arrive to punish the
+enemies of his children and reward their friends. They advised the
+chieftain not to make an enemy of his mighty friend.</p>
+
+<p>When the French speaker had finished, there was a short silence. Then an
+old trapper came forward, and, picking up the war belt, declared that he
+was ready to take sides with the Indians against the English. Several of
+his rough comrades followed his example.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac's hope of gaining aid from the French was thus not utterly
+defeated. Besides, he still believed their talk about the coming of the
+French king. So the French and Indians continued friends.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Some of the tribes growing restless, now made peace with the English and
+deserted Pontiac. But a greater blow than the desertion of a few tribes
+was in store for the chief.</p>
+
+<p>Late in July he learned that twenty-two barges bearing large supplies of
+food and ammunition and almost three hundred men had made their way up
+the Detroit River in safety, protected by a dense fog. The news came so
+late that it was impossible for the Indians to oppose the progress of
+the boats, and they reached the fort with little resistance.</p>
+
+<p>At about two o'clock in the morning of the second day after the arrival
+of this convoy, Pontiac's spies brought him word that the English were
+coming against his camp with a great force.</p>
+
+<p>Swiftly and silently the Ottawas broke their camp, and with some Ojibwas
+started to meet the British. On reaching the site of their former camp,
+about a mile and a half above the fort, near the bridge that crossed a
+little stream, called from that night Bloody Run, they formed an ambush
+and waited for the British.</p>
+
+<p>They had barely time to hide behind their old earthworks, natural ridges
+and piles of brush. Already they heard the barking of watchdogs at the
+farmhouses along the river road, and the tramp of many feet. They
+listened and discovered that the enemy outnumbered them. What of that!
+The night was dark. They knew their ground. Their scouts would soon
+bring other tribes to help them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Every Indian was out of sight; every gun was loaded. The tramp of feet
+drew nearer. A dark mass of marching men came in sight. The quick steps
+of the advanced guard rang on the wooden bridge. All else was still. The
+vanguard had crossed the bridge and the main body of the English had
+started over, when, in front, to right, to left, burst blood curdling
+yells, blazed a fatal volley of muskets.</p>
+
+<p>Back only, lay safety. Those who had not fallen in the first charge
+turned and fled, followed by a rain of bullets. Panic spread along the
+line. But the brave leader of the English, Captain Dalzel, sprang to the
+front and rallied his men. They made a bold charge, as they thought,
+into the midst of the enemy; but they found none to resist them. Every
+Indian had vanished. They pressed bravely on in search of their
+assailants; but the night was black and the way was rough and
+unfamiliar. Whenever they reached a place of difficulty the Indians
+unexpectedly renewed their attack.</p>
+
+<p>The savages, whose eyes were accustomed to the darkness, saw the enemy
+after a parley return to the bridge. There, half of the men mounted
+guard while the others took up the dead and wounded and carried them to
+two armed boats that had accompanied them down the river.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing that a return to the fort was intended, the Indians turned back
+in large numbers to form another ambuscade at a point where several
+houses and barns stood near the road and cut the English off from the
+fort.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They again allowed the vanguard to pass unmolested and surprised the
+center with a galling fire. The soldiers, confused by the weird and
+terrible cries of the savages and the blaze of musketry, blinded by
+smoke and flash, and stung by pelting bullets, huddled together like
+sheep.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Dalzel, though severely wounded, by commanding, imploring,
+fairly driving his men with his sword, at last succeeded in regaining
+order. He made a charge and as usual the Indians fled before the attack.
+As soon as the English attempted to continue their retreat the Indians
+were upon them again, firing from every fence and thicket.</p>
+
+<p>The gallant Dalzel was among those shot down by this fire. He died
+trying to save a wounded soldier from the scalping knife of the Indians.
+In the confusion he was scarcely missed. The officers next in command
+took charge of the retreat. In the gray dawn the remnant of Dalzel's
+army reached the fort. The Indians went off, well satisfied with their
+night's work, to count their scalps and celebrate.</p>
+
+<p>While the English lost about sixty men in this engagement, called the
+battle of Bloody Ridge, the number of Indians killed and wounded was not
+greater than fifteen or twenty. The Indians considered it a great
+victory and fresh warriors flocked to the camp of the Indian commander
+who seemed to be a match for the English.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XI_THE_END_OF_THE_SIEGE" id="XI_THE_END_OF_THE_SIEGE"></a>XI. THE END OF THE SIEGE</h2>
+
+
+<p>We have seen that after the battle of Bloody Ridge many tribes that had
+before been afraid to take up the hatchet against the English, presented
+themselves at the camp of Pontiac, eager for a share in the victory at
+Detroit, which they thought would follow.</p>
+
+<p>Yet that English stronghold, that log palisade, was a prize out of reach
+of the chief and his warriors. The Indians kept close watch. If a head
+appeared at a loophole, bang went an Indian's gun. If a point was left
+unguarded, there was the torch applied. Fire arrows whizzed over the
+rampart in the darkness, only to burn themselves out in the broad
+roadway between the wall and the buildings. Again and again hundreds of
+painted warriors danced about the fort yelling as if Detroit, like
+Jericho, might be taken with shouting. Their spent bullets pelted the
+old fort like harmless hail. They tried to rush upon the gate, but the
+fusilade from the block house and the fire-belching cannon of the
+British drove them back helter-skelter.</p>
+
+<p>Late in September an incident occurred which increased the Indians' awe
+of the British. A scout brought word to Pontiac that a dispatch boat
+with a large store of provisions was on her way to the fort. As there
+were only twelve men aboard, her capture seemed an easy matter.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians planned a midnight attack. Three hundred of them drifted
+down the river in their light birch<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> canoes. The night was so dark and
+they came so noiselessly that the watching English did not know of their
+approach until they were within gunshot of the boat.</p>
+
+<p>A cannon was fired, but its shot and shell went over the heads of the
+Indians and plowed up the black water beyond. The canoes were all about
+the ship and the savages, with knives in their teeth, were climbing up
+its sides. The crew fired once. One or two Indians fell back into the
+water; the rest came on. As they climbed nearer, the British charged
+them with bayonets, and hacked them with hatchets and knives. But where
+one man was driven back a dozen gained the deck.</p>
+
+<p>The little crew defended themselves desperately; they were surrounded by
+brandished tomahawks; their captain had fallen; more than half their
+number were cut down. The Indians were raising their shout of triumph.
+Then the order of Jacobs, the mate, rang out: "Blow up the ship!" he
+said. One Indian understood and gave the alarm to his fellows. With one
+accord they threw down hatchets and knives and leaped into the river.
+They made haste to reach the shore and left six bloodstained British
+sailors to take their boat in triumph to Detroit.</p>
+
+<p>As autumn advanced the Indians grew weary of the long siege. The
+prospect of winter with no food, the continued resistance of the
+British, and the report that a large force of armed men was coming to
+relieve Detroit, discouraged them.</p>
+
+<p>One tribe after another sent delegations to Major Gladwin to sue for
+peace. They told smooth stories.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> They had always loved the English, but
+Pontiac had compelled them to go to war. Now they were sorry they had
+obeyed him and longed to be at peace with their English brothers.</p>
+
+<p>Gladwin understood their deceit, but as he was in need of winter
+supplies, readily granted them a truce. The various tribes broke up
+their camps and separated for the long winter hunt.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac and his Ottawas still held their ground without flinching.
+"Surely," thought the proud-hearted chief, "our French father will send
+us help before long."</p>
+
+<p>One day, near the close of October, a messenger did come from the
+French. The letter he brought was from M. Neyon, the commandant of Fort
+Chartres, in the Illinois country. Pontiac had written to him asking for
+aid. What had he answered? He had told the truth. He had told Pontiac
+that the French in America were now the subjects of the English king,
+and so could not fight against his people.</p>
+
+<p>When the great chief heard this he did not put on his war paint and lead
+his warriors against the defenseless French who had so long dealt
+falsely with him. He sat alone for a long time, thinking. The next day
+he sent a letter to Major Gladwin saying that he was now ready to bury
+the hatchet, and begging the English to forget the past.</p>
+
+<p>Major Gladwin thought that the French were more to blame than the
+Indians in the war, and was willing to be at peace with his red
+neighbors. So he sent Pontiac a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> favorable reply. A few days later the
+stern-faced chief turned his back on Detroit, and began his march to the
+Maumee River, followed by his faithful braves.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XII_ALL_ALONG_THE_FRONTIER" id="XII_ALL_ALONG_THE_FRONTIER"></a>XII. ALL ALONG THE FRONTIER</h2>
+
+
+<p>The plan of Pontiac had been to take the forts all along the frontier by
+strategy and then destroy the defenceless English settlements.</p>
+
+<p>We have seen that while there were many French farmers living outside of
+the walls of Detroit there were very few English. And, in truth, in
+1763, there were not many English settlers east of the Alleghany
+Mountains. Most of the forts that had been taken from the French, except
+those on the Mississippi River, were garrisoned with English. Within
+reach of the protection of these forts, lived some British traders and
+trappers, and a few venturesome settlers. But the Mohawk Valley in New
+York, and the Susquehanna, in Pennsylvania, really formed the western
+limit of extensive English settlement.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac's war belts had stirred up the Indians all along the border. In
+the summer of 1763, while he and the Ottawas and Ojibwas were besieging
+Detroit, the Delawares and Shawnees were laying waste the Pennsylvania
+frontier.</p>
+
+<p>Backwoodsmen, trappers or travelers, venturing into the wilderness were
+shot down without warning. Men,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span> women, and children were miserably
+slain. Isolated farmhouses were attacked, their inmates scalped, the
+cabins burned. Churches and schools added to the blaze that swept the
+wilderness from the Great Lakes to the Ohio. One after another the
+smaller forts were taken by the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Panic seized the settlers. Women left the kettle on the hearth, men the
+plow in the furrow, and fled. Some crowded for refuge into the nearest
+fort. Others feared to stop until they had reached Lancaster or even
+Philadelphia.</p>
+
+<p>The terrible butcheries committed by the Indians so maddened the
+frontiersmen that they forgot their civilization and resorted to methods
+as inhuman as did the Indians. Peaceable, friendly Indians were
+massacred by bands of ruffian borderers, organized for vengeance as well
+as protection. Even men in high places forgot their usual humanity. The
+commander-in-chief of the army, Sir Jeffrey Amherst, and Colonel Henry
+Bouquet planned to send smallpox among the Indians by giving them
+infected blankets. They even talked of fighting them with bloodhounds
+instead of soldiers. The Governor of Pennsylvania issued a proclamation
+offering a reward for Indian prisoners and Indian scalps.</p>
+
+<p>Fort Pitt, one of the most important posts on the frontier, held out
+against the attacks of the Delawares and the Shawnees. When the
+commander-in-chief of the army learned of the distress of the fort he
+sent a strong force under Colonel Bouquet to relieve it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In August, when crossing the Alleghany Mountains, Bouquet's army was
+assailed by a horde of Indians that had been lying in wait for them at
+Bushy Run. The battle which followed was hot. The British were
+courageous, but they fell in large numbers under the fire of the
+Indians, who fled before every charge, only to return like infuriated
+wasps at the moment the English fancied they had repulsed them. Night
+brought relief from the galling fire. But the battle was not over.</p>
+
+<p>The English were held penned up on the road without water till dawn,
+when the charge was renewed with such zest that for a time it looked as
+if there were no escape for the forces of Bouquet. The unusual boldness
+of the Indians suggested to him a stratagem.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 350px;">
+<img src="images/i106.jpg" width="350" height="291" alt="REDOUBT AT FORT PITT" title="" />
+<span class="caption">REDOUBT AT FORT PITT</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>He feigned a retreat. Thus encouraged the Indians rushed upon the
+British with war whoop and scalp cry. The forces of Bouquet divided; the
+Indians filled the breach. Then at the word of command the troops closed
+on them, charging with bayonets. Many of the Indians entrapped in this
+way fell; the rest fled.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>After that the English made their way to Fort Pitt without serious
+interruption. In the battle of Bushy Run the loss on both sides was
+heavy for an Indian battle. The English lost eight officers and over one
+hundred soldiers; the Indians, several chiefs and about sixty warriors.
+Though the English loss was greater than that of the Indians, it could
+be more easily made up. For that reason, and because the English had
+succeeded in reaching Fort Pitt, the expedition was regarded as a
+splendid victory for the palefaces.</p>
+
+<p>As winter advanced the Indians were obliged to desist from war and go
+into the forest in small companies to hunt. During the winter that
+followed the rebellion, the Indians had no help from the white people,
+and the bitter hardships they suffered did much to put them into a
+pacific frame of mind.</p>
+
+<p>Sir William Johnson, the king's sole agent and superintendent of Indian
+affairs, understood the red men better than most of his countrymen did.
+He lived among them on a great estate in the Mohawk Valley. He spoke
+their language and often dressed in Indian suit of slashed deerskin.</p>
+
+<p>In his opinion it was wasteful and unwise to fight with the Indians. He
+said the English were largely to blame for the Indian war because of
+their injustice and their want of policy in dealing with the savages. He
+advocated following the example of the French, and winning the good will
+of the Indians by flattery and presents. He believed that under that
+policy the Indians<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> would become so dependent on the white man that they
+could be easily subdued.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the spring of 1764 he sent messages to the various tribes,
+warning them that two great armies of English soldiers were ready to
+start into the western forest to punish the enemies of the English, and
+inviting all who wished to make peace to meet him at Niagara.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, early in the spring, the fields around the fort at Niagara
+were dotted with Indian encampments. Among the savages were friendly
+Indians who had come to claim their reward; enemies who, through want or
+fear, were ready to make a temporary peace, and spies, who wanted to see
+what was going on.</p>
+
+<p>For many a long day Sir William Johnson sat in the council room at the
+fort making treaties with various tribes. All day the fumes of the
+peace-pipe filled the hall, and threats and promises were made, and
+sealed with long strings of wampum.</p>
+
+<p>It would have taken much less time to make one treaty with all the
+Indians, but Sir William Johnson sought to discourage the idea of a
+common cause, which Pontiac had done so much to arouse among the
+Indians. He treated each tribe as if its case were quite different from
+that of every other tribe.</p>
+
+<p>Some Indians were so bold that they would not even pretend to be
+friendly. The Delawares and the Shawnees replied to the Indian agent's
+message summoning them to Niagara, that they were not afraid of the
+English, but looked upon them as old women.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The armies to which Sir William Johnson had referred were under the
+command of Colonel Bouquet and Colonel Bradstreet. The latter went by
+way of the Lakes to relieve Detroit, offer peace to the northern
+Indians, and subdue those who refused to submit. Bouquet, with a
+thousand men, penetrated the forests further south to compel the fierce
+Delawares and Shawnees to submission. Both succeeded.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i109.jpg" width="600" height="379" alt="COUNCIL WITH COLONEL BOUQUET" title="" />
+<span class="caption">COUNCIL WITH COLONEL BOUQUET</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Bradstreet found the northern Indians ready to come to terms. He has
+been criticised for requiring the Indians to sign papers they did not
+understand and make promises that they did not fulfill. He did not see
+Pontiac, but sent a deputation to find him and confer with him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Colonel Bouquet, on the other hand, was stern and terrible. In council
+he addressed the Indians as chiefs and warriors, instead of "brothers."
+He refused to smooth over their wrong doing or listen to the excuses
+they offered for going to war. He charged them openly with the wrongs
+they had done, and required them to surrender all their white prisoners
+and give him hostages from their own race.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the captives had lived among the Indians so long that they had
+forgotten their white relatives and friends. They left the Indian life
+and Indian friends with tears, and would have remained in captivity
+gladly. But Colonel Bouquet would make no exceptions.</p>
+
+<p>His stern measures subdued the warlike tribes completely. In the fall of
+1764 Bouquet returned to the East to receive honors and rewards for his
+services.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XIII_THE_LAST_OF_PONTIAC" id="XIII_THE_LAST_OF_PONTIAC"></a>XIII. THE LAST OF PONTIAC</h2>
+
+
+<p>While other Indians were promising to bury the hatchet, Pontiac, the
+soul of the conspiracy, made no promises and smoked no peace-pipe.
+Surrounded by hundreds of warriors the chief camped on the Maumee River.
+His messengers brought him news of what was going on, and until the
+white men had taken their soldiers from the land he was content to wait
+and plan.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Morris, who had been sent to Pontiac's camp by Colonel
+Bradstreet, was coldly received by the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> great chief. Pontiac, indeed,
+granted him a hearing, but he bent upon his guest dark looks and refused
+to shake his hand. He made no flowery speeches, but declared that all
+the British were liars, and asked what new lies he had come to tell.
+After some talk Pontiac showed the captain a letter which he supposed to
+have been written by the King of France. It told the old story of the
+French army on its way to destroy the English. Captain Morris did his
+best to persuade him that the report was false. He was much impressed
+with the influence, knowledge, and sense of Pontiac&mdash;an Indian who
+commanded eighteen nations and was acquainted with the laws that
+regulated the conduct of civilized states.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac would make no official promises of peace, but he was so much
+discouraged by the communications Captain Morris brought, that he said
+to one of the followers of the latter: "I shall never more lead the
+nations to war. As for them, let them be at peace with the English if
+they will; for me, I shall be at war with them forever. I shall be a
+wanderer in the woods, and if they come to seek me I will fight them
+single-handed." With much bitterness of soul did Pontiac learn that the
+forts he had taken with so much effort and loss of Indian blood, had
+been retaken by the enemy; that the war spirit he had with so much labor
+aroused had been put to sleep.</p>
+
+<p>But his hopes were not easily dashed. There were the letters from the
+French. The English said they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span> were false, but the English were his
+enemies. The French were his friends. Enemies might deceive each other,
+but friends must trust each other.</p>
+
+<p>His confidence in the French was encouraged by the fact that several of
+the forts in the Illinois country were still occupied by French
+garrisons.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac resolved to make another effort to rouse his people. He set his
+squaws to work on a wampum war belt, broad and long, containing symbols
+of the forty-seven tribes which belonged to his confederacy. When the
+belt was done he sent a delegation of chiefs to the south with it. These
+messengers were instructed to show the war belt and offer the hatchet to
+all the tribes along the Mississippi River as far south as New Orleans.
+They were then to visit the French Governor at New Orleans and invite
+him to assist them in war against their common enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Pontiac, in the meantime, went about among his old French friends asking
+for their help, and among the Illinois Indians urging them with threats
+and promises to join him in making war against the English. He met with
+some success, but his dreams were rudely broken by the return of his
+chiefs with the news that the Governor of New Orleans had indeed yielded
+to the British, and by the arrival of a company of British from Fort
+Pitt, offering terms of peace to the Illinois Indians. Daily Pontiac's
+allies deserted him, and accepted the terms of the English.</p>
+
+<p>Again the day had come when it seemed to Pontiac<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> wise to let his hatred
+of the English sleep. He sent his great peace-pipe to Sir William
+Johnson and promised to go to Oswego in the spring to conclude a treaty
+with him.</p>
+
+<p>True to his promise, in the spring of 1766, Pontiac, greatest war chief
+and sachem of the Ottawas, presented himself in the council chamber of
+Sir William Johnson. There was nothing fawning in his attitude; he
+conducted himself with the dignity of a fallen monarch. "When you speak
+to me," he said, "it is as if you addressed all the nations of the
+west." In making peace he submitted not to the will of the British but
+to that of the Great Spirit, whose will it was that there should be
+peace. He made it clear that in allowing the English to take the forts
+of the French the Indians granted them no right to their lands. When he
+promised friendship for the future, he called his hearers to witness how
+true a friend he had been to the French, who had deceived him and given
+him reason to transfer his friendship.</p>
+
+<p>It would be hard to say how sincere Pontiac was, or how readily he would
+have let go the chain of friendship he had been forced to take up, had
+opportunity offered. He went back to his camp on the Maumee River, and
+there among his own people tried to live the life of his fathers. Little
+was heard of him for a year or two, but whenever an outbreak occurred
+among the Indians there were those who said Pontiac was at the bottom of
+it.</p>
+
+<p>In the spring of 1769, anxious to see his French<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> friends once more, he
+made a visit to St. Louis. He was cordially received and spent several
+days with his old acquaintances. Then he crossed the river with a few
+chiefs to visit an assembly of traders and Illinois Indians.</p>
+
+<p>After feasting and drinking with some of the Illinois, Pontiac sought
+the quiet of the forest. He wandered through its dim aisles, living over
+again the hopes and ambitions of the past, which his visit with the
+French and the Illinois had vividly recalled. He had forgotten the
+present and was again the mighty warrior who had made the hearts of the
+palefaces quake with fear. Little he dreamed that behind him stood an
+assassin with up-raised tomahawk.</p>
+
+<p>The murderer of the great chief was an Illinois Indian who had been
+bribed to do the deed by an English trader.</p>
+
+<p>During his life Pontiac had tried to overcome the tribal feeling of the
+Indians, and to unite them as one people. Over his grave the old tribal
+instinct awoke. The Illinois rallied about their kinsman to protect him;
+the Ottawas flew to arms to avenge their chief&mdash;such a sachem, such a
+chief, could not be forgotten. Wrong to him could not be forgiven. The
+fury of the Ottawas was not slaked until they had avenged the death of
+their chief, through the destruction of the powerful tribes of the
+Illinois.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><br /><br /><a name="THE_STORY_OF_TECUMSEH" id="THE_STORY_OF_TECUMSEH"></a>THE STORY OF TECUMSEH</h2>
+
+<h4>BY</h4>
+
+<h3>FRANCES M. PERRY<br /><br /></h3><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span><br /><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="I_EARLY_YEARS" id="I_EARLY_YEARS"></a>I. EARLY YEARS</h2>
+
+
+<p>The great Indian leader, Pontiac, died in 1769, disappointed in his
+attempt to unite the Indians in a confederacy strong enough to withstand
+the white race. But the struggle between the red man and the white was
+not ended.</p>
+
+<p>At about the time of the old chief's death a child was born among the
+Shawnee Indians who was to take up the cause of his people with equally
+great courage and intelligence. This child was called Tecumseh, which
+means shooting-star.</p>
+
+<p>The tribe to which Tecumseh belonged had not yielded to the temptations
+offered by the white man. Although many of the tribes north of the Ohio
+River, through the influence of alms and whisky, were fast losing their
+savage virtues and becoming spiritless beggars, idle, drunken,
+quarrelsome, the Shawnees were still strong and warlike.</p>
+
+<p>Several of the Shawnee tribes lived together in a large village on Mad
+River, not far from the place where Springfield, Ohio, now stands. There
+they had built for themselves rude huts made of sapling logs. Around
+these lodges, on the fertile land along the river were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> corn fields,
+where the Indian women worked while the men hunted or went to war.</p>
+
+<p>In this village, on a bluff near the river, stood Tecumseh's first home.
+His father was chief of a small tribe and was highly respected for his
+courage and good sense. His mother, the daughter of a chief, was a woman
+of strong character.</p>
+
+<p>As Tecumseh was the son of such worthy parents, and as he was one of
+three brothers born on the same day, he was regarded even in babyhood
+with uncommon interest. The superstitious Indians believed that the
+three little boys would become extraordinary men. Two of them, Tecumseh
+and his brother, Laulewasikaw, fulfilled the largest expectations of
+their friends.</p>
+
+<p>The child, Tecumseh, was a bright-eyed, handsome little fellow, at once
+winning and masterful in manner. His favorite pastime was playing war.
+The boys he played with always made him chief and were as devoted to him
+as ever Indians were to a real chief.</p>
+
+<p>It is no wonder that at this time the Shawnee children played war; for
+their elders were almost constantly fighting with the settlers.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh's childhood was far from a peaceful, happy one. He learned
+early the oppressive gloom and the wild excitement that accompany war.
+He was called upon, now to take part in the fierce rejoicing that
+followed an Indian victory; again, to join in the mournful wailing of
+the women when the dead warriors were brought from the battlefield.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But his experience of war was not limited to celebrating and mourning
+distant victories and defeats. The enemy did not spare the village in
+which he lived. He knew that when the braves were on the warpath the
+children must stay near their mother's lodge. For, several times runners
+had come in hot haste bidding the squaws flee with their pappooses to
+the forest and hide there till the palefaces had passed. It made little
+Tecumseh's heart beat hard to think of the excitement and terror of
+those days.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 313px;">
+<img src="images/i119.jpg" width="313" height="400" alt="INDIAN WARRIORS" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN WARRIORS</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Even in time of peace Tecumseh was accustomed to suffering and
+discontent. Food and clothing were so scarce that the Indians were often
+in want of enough to eat and wear. Children died from the effects of
+hunger and cold, and men and women grew gaunt and stern. Frequently the
+hunters came home empty-handed or bringing only small game.</p>
+
+<p>They attributed all their troubles to the "Long Knives," as they called
+the white men, who, they said, had stolen their hunting grounds. So when
+Tecumseh was but a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> child he hated the palefaces, and was glad when his
+tribe made war against them.</p>
+
+<p>In 1774 the Ohio Indians learned that the Virginians were coming into
+their country to destroy their villages. Accordingly, all able-bodied
+warriors took up their weapons and went with the proud chief, Cornstalk,
+to meet the enemy. Tecumseh's father and eldest brother, Cheeseekau,
+were among the number.</p>
+
+<p>After anxious waiting, those who had stayed behind were gladdened by the
+good news that for the present their homes were safe. But many of those
+homes had been made desolate by the battles waged in their defense.
+Cheeseekau came home from the war alone. His father had fallen in
+battle.</p>
+
+<p>The mother and her children ceased their wailing and for the time forgot
+their loss, as they sat by the fire with Cheeseekau and heard the young
+warrior talk of his first battle. He said that he wished to die on the
+battlefield, as his father had done, for an Indian could hope for no
+better end. He told what a good fight the Indians had made and how brave
+their leader had been.</p>
+
+<p>"All over the field," he said, "you could hear Cornstalk shout to his
+men 'Be strong! Be brave!' The warriors had more fear of Cornstalk's
+hatchet than of the Long Knives' guns. They did not dare to run. Some
+tried it. But Cornstalk buried his tomahawk in the head of the first,
+and the rest turned back to fight the palefaces. When the battle was
+over Cornstalk called a council and said: 'The palefaces are coming
+against us<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> in great numbers. We can not drive them back. What shall we
+do? Shall we fight a while longer, kill a few more of them, and then
+yield? Shall we put to death our women and children and fight till we
+die?' No one spoke. Then he said: 'I see you will not fight. I will go
+and make peace with the white men.' And he made us a good peace.
+Cornstalk is the greatest chief we have had since Pontiac."</p>
+
+<p>Then followed stories of the great Pontiac, who had tried to make the
+Indian tribes stop fighting with one another and unite their strength
+against the white man. Thus, before Tecumseh could talk plainly, he
+heard about the heroes of his race, and learned what was expected of a
+good Indian.</p>
+
+<p>From this time the youthful warrior Cheeseekau took his father's place
+as head of the family. He not only provided the family with food and
+clothing, but also looked after the education of his younger brothers.
+Tecumseh was his favorite, and he strove to teach him all that was
+needful to make him a brave warrior and a good man.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="II_YOUTH" id="II_YOUTH"></a>II. YOUTH</h2>
+
+
+<p>During Tecumseh's boyhood the Revolutionary war was being fought. The
+Indians took the part of the British. It was natural that they should
+feel a more bitter hatred for the colonists who had actually taken their
+lands and fought against them, than they had for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> the distant mysterious
+"king," whom they had been taught to call "father," and to regard as a
+superior being. Besides, they little doubted that the king who had
+already beaten the French could subdue his own rebellious subjects. And
+they looked forward to the reward he would give them for their aid when
+the war was over.</p>
+
+<p>The victories of the colonists were familiar topics of discussion among
+the Indians. They spoke with increasing uneasiness of the deeds of
+Washington, Putnam, and Greene. But the name to them more terrible than
+all the rest was that of George Rogers Clark. With sinking hearts they
+heard of his victories on the frontier.</p>
+
+<p>In the summer of 1780 scouts brought word to the Shawnees on Mad River
+that this dreaded soldier was approaching with his army. Though alarmed,
+the Indians determined to do what they could to save the cabins and fort
+which they had built with much toil, and the growing corn upon which
+they depended for their winter food.</p>
+
+<p>Three hundred warriors assembled in the village. They held a hurried
+council and decided to advance to meet Clark's army and surprise it with
+an attack at daybreak. But if there was a surprise where Gen. Clark
+was concerned, he was usually the man to give it. Accordingly, the
+Indians learned with dismay that their plan could not be carried out,
+for General Clark's army by forced marches had reached and was already
+surrounding their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> village. The Indians had built a fort, but now they
+were afraid to use it and took refuge in their log huts. They began to
+cut holes in the walls, so that they might fire on the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>When General Clark heard this, he said: "Hold on a minute, and I'll make
+holes enough for them." With that he ordered up his cannon and caused it
+to be fired into the village.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians were so terrified that all who could do so fled into the
+woods and swamps. The rest fell an easy prey to the soldiers, who killed
+many warriors, made prisoners of the women and children, burned the
+houses, and cut down the corn.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 244px;">
+<img src="images/i123.jpg" width="244" height="380" alt="GEORGE ROGERS CLARK" title="" />
+<span class="caption">GEORGE ROGERS CLARK</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Tecumseh and his brothers were among those who escaped the sword of
+Clark, but they could not forget<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> the distress of their kindred.
+Tecumseh was too young to take part in this battle. Although he spent
+much time in fighting sham battles, it was not until six years later
+that he had an opportunity to fight in a real one. In 1786 he and his
+elder brother went out with a band of warriors to check or drive back
+Captain Logan, who was advancing toward Mad River.</p>
+
+<p>In an encounter near Dayton the boy was forced for the first time to
+face a cavalry charge. He had never imagined anything so terrifying. He
+saw those great, rushing horses, the cruel flash of steel. He forgot his
+hatred of the white man, his dreams of glory. His only thought was to
+save his life. He threw down his gun and ran.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as he recovered from his fright he felt very much ashamed of his
+cowardly conduct. He was eager for another opportunity to test his
+courage. Fortunately for him he did not have to wait long.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh was with a party of Indians who attacked some flatboats on the
+Ohio River. The boats were taken and all the men in charge of them were
+killed except one, who was made prisoner.</p>
+
+<p>This was an important occasion in the life of Tecumseh. He acted with
+such daring and bravery that the old warriors of the party were
+astonished. From that night the Shawnees spoke of Tecumseh as a brave.
+Besides winning the good opinion of others, he regained his self-respect
+and conquered fear.</p>
+
+<p>The memory of this victory was not pleasant to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> Tecumseh. It was
+followed by the burning of the prisoner. Although the burning of
+prisoners was not rare among the Shawnee Indians this was the first time
+Tecumseh had seen a man put to death in that barbarous manner, and he
+grew sick and faint with horror at the sight. But this time he was
+terrified not for himself but for another, and he was not ashamed of his
+feelings.</p>
+
+<p>Boy though he was, he stood before the older Indians and told them
+plainly what he thought of their cruel act. He spoke with so much power
+that he made all who heard him feel as he did about it. And they all
+agreed never again to take part in so inhuman a practice.</p>
+
+<p>On this night Tecumseh gave glimpses of the man he was to be. He proved
+his valor; he showed mercy; he influenced warriors by his words.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="III_ADVENTURES_OF_THE_YOUNG_BRAVE" id="III_ADVENTURES_OF_THE_YOUNG_BRAVE"></a>III. ADVENTURES OF THE YOUNG BRAVE</h2>
+
+
+<p>A short time after Tecumseh had proved himself worthy to be considered
+an Indian brave, he started with his brother Cheeseekau on a journey
+across the woods and prairies of Indiana and Illinois. The brothers were
+accompanied by a band of Kickapoo Indians. Such a journey was an
+important part of the training of young warriors.</p>
+
+<p>The party tramped through the country, courting hardships and adventure,
+getting acquainted with the wilderness, hunting buffaloes, visiting
+friendly tribes,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> learning many languages, breaking bread with
+strangers, and visiting vengeance on enemies. To fall upon the
+defenseless cabin of some sleeping frontiersman and murder him and his
+family was in their eyes a feat to boast of.</p>
+
+<p>But their warlike exploits were not confined to attacks on the white
+settlers. If they found friendly tribes at war with other tribes they
+joined them. In one of these battles Cheeseekau met his death, singing
+and rejoicing that it was his lot to fall like a warrior on the field of
+battle. This young man is said to have had a vision that he should die.
+Before going into battle he made a formal speech, telling his friends
+that he would be shot in the forehead in the thick of the fight, and his
+prophecy was fulfilled.</p>
+
+<p>After Cheeseekau's death Tecumseh took his place as leader of the
+company and continued his wanderings to the South. There he made many
+friends and had numerous stirring adventures. One evening just as he and
+his eight followers were about to go to bed their camp was attacked by
+thirty white men. Tecumseh ordered his frightened comrades to follow him
+and rushed upon the enemy with such spirit and force that his little
+company killed two of the assailants and frightened the rest away.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh returned to Ohio after an absence of three years. He discovered
+that it is not always necessary to go away from home to find adventures.
+His friends and neighbors were greatly excited about a victory which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span>
+they had just gained over the United States troops under General Harmer.</p>
+
+<p>The next year, 1791, the new republic sent General St. Clair with a
+large army into the Indian country. Tecumseh's recent expedition had
+fitted him to be a good scout, and he was therefore sent out to watch
+the movements of St. Clair's troops. While he was employed scouting, the
+main body of Indians fell suddenly upon St. Clair's troops and
+completely routed them. During the next few years there was no lack of
+opportunity for the Shawnees to indulge their love of battle; for
+General Wayne, "Mad Anthony Wayne," as he was called, proved a more
+formidable foe than had General St. Clair. Tecumseh's reputation as a
+warrior was soon firmly established.</p>
+
+<p>He was equally noted as a hunter. Though he had long been pointed out as
+one of the best Shawnee hunters, many young men had claimed as great
+success as he. At length some one suggested a way to decide who was the
+ablest hunter.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us," said he, "each go alone into the forest, for three days, to
+hunt the deer, and the one who brings home the largest number of deer
+skins shall be considered the greatest hunter."</p>
+
+<p>All agreed to this test, and several noted hunters started out. After
+three days each returned bearing the evidence of his skill as a hunter.
+Some proudly displayed ten skins, some twelve. Last of all came Tecumseh
+with thirty-five deer skins. Then the other Indians<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> stopped boasting,
+and declared Tecumseh the greatest hunter of the Shawnee nation.
+Tecumseh was a generous hunter as well as a skillful one. He made it his
+business to provide many who were old or sick with meat and skins.</p>
+
+<p>Among the Indians the hero was the man who could do most to help his
+tribe. He could do that by hunting, to supply its members with food and
+clothing, by speaking wisely in council, to lead them to act for their
+highest welfare, and by fighting to defend their rights or avenge their
+wrongs. A brave who could do all this was worthy of being a chief, even
+if he was not the eldest son of a chief.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh had shown that he could hunt, that he could speak in council,
+that he could fight. He had therefore all the requirements for a chief.
+Moreover, he had great influence with the young men of the neighboring
+tribes.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IV_TECUMSEH_DISSATISFIED" id="IV_TECUMSEH_DISSATISFIED"></a>IV. TECUMSEH DISSATISFIED</h2>
+
+
+<p>The suffering among the Indians was so great because of the ceaseless
+war they had carried on against the white people, that in 1795 many of
+the tribes were ready to accept the terms of peace offered by the United
+States government.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, in June a treaty was made at Greenville, Ohio. The Indians
+promised to give up all claim to many thousand acres of land in the
+Northwest Terri<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span>tory, to live at peace with the white settlers occupying
+the land, to notify them of the hostile plans of other tribes, to
+surrender whatever prisoners they had, to give up evil doers for trial,
+to protect travelers and traders, and to recognize no "father" but the
+President of the United States.</p>
+
+<p>In return for all this the national government pledged itself to give
+the Indians a yearly "present" of food, blankets, powder, and other
+necessities, to respect the boundary lines and prevent settlers from
+hunting or intruding on Indian lands, and to punish white men who were
+found guilty of robbing or murdering Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh would not attend the council at which the treaty was made. Much
+as he felt the need of peace he was unwilling to pay for it a price
+which he thought the white man had no right to ask. He was unwilling to
+give up the lands which the Great Spirit had allotted to the Indians,
+and which were necessary to their very existence.</p>
+
+<p>He foresaw that in the years of peace to which the Indians had pledged
+themselves, white men without number would come to make their homes in
+the fertile lands secured by the treaty. He foresaw that while the
+settlements flourished the tribes would become more and more dependent
+and submissive to the will of their civilized neighbors.</p>
+
+<p>The injurious effect of civilization upon the Indian tribes was only too
+evident to all. The Superintendent of Indian Affairs later wrote to
+President Jefferson: "I can<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> tell at once upon looking at an Indian whom
+I may chance to meet whether he belongs to a neighboring or to a more
+distant tribe. The latter is generally well-clothed, healthy, and
+vigorous; the former, half-naked, filthy, and enfeebled by intoxication,
+and many of them are without arms excepting a knife, which they carry
+for the most villainous purposes."</p>
+
+<p>What wonder that the patriotic Tecumseh refused to sanction a treaty
+which he considered a step toward the downfall of his race! He
+remembered the dead hero Pontiac, and wished that the red men had such a
+chieftain to unite them and rouse their manhood. He determined
+henceforth to take Pontiac for his model and to do what he could to
+unite his people and prepare them to resist the next attempt of the
+palefaces to take the land of the redskins. With this idea in view he
+used his influence to collect from various tribes a band of followers,
+who made him their chief.</p>
+
+<p>The new chief was not an unworthy successor of the great Pontiac. Though
+living at a time when the Indians were beginning to lose much of their
+native vigor and virtue, Tecumseh had grown to be one of the most
+princely red men we know anything about.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 289px;">
+<img src="images/i131.jpg" width="289" height="500" alt="TECUMSEH" title="" />
+<span class="caption">TECUMSEH</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>His appearance was dignified and pleasing. Colonel W. S. Hatch gave the
+following picturesque description of him: "His height was about five
+feet nine inches; his face, oval rather than angular; his mouth,
+beautifully formed, like that of Napoleon I., as represented in his
+portraits; his eyes, clear, transparent hazel, with a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span> mild, pleasant
+expression when in repose, or in conversation; but when excited in his
+orations or by the enthusiasm of conflict, or when in anger, they
+appeared like balls of fire; his teeth, beautifully white, and his
+complexion more of a light brown or tan than red; his whole tribe, as
+well as their kindred, the Ottawas, had light complexions; his arms and
+hands were finely formed; his limbs straight; he always stood very
+erect, and walked with a brisk, elastic, vigorous step. He invariably
+dressed in Indian tanned buckskin; a perfectly well-fitting hunting
+frock descending to the knee was over his underclothes of the same
+material; the usual cape with finish of leather fringe about the neck,
+cape, edges of the front opening, and bottom of the frock; a belt of the
+same material, in which were his sidearms (an elegant silver-mounted
+tomahawk and a knife in a strong leather case); short pantaloons,
+connected with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> neatly fitting leggings and moccasins, with a mantle of
+the same material thrown over his left shoulder, used as a blanket in
+camp, and as a protection in storms."</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh's character was not that of the typical Indian, because it was
+broader. The virtues that most Indians exercise only in the family, or,
+at best, in the tribe, he practised toward his entire race, and, to some
+extent, toward all mankind. He once said: "My tribe is nothing to me; my
+race, everything." His hatred of the white man was general, not
+personal. Able, brave men, whether red or white, he respected and
+admired. While most Indians thought it necessary to be truthful to
+friends only, Tecumseh was honest in his dealings with his enemies. He
+often set white men an example of mercy.</p>
+
+<p>An amusing story is told of him, which shows how kindly tolerant he was
+where he could feel nothing but contempt for a man: One evening on
+entering the house of a white man with whom he was acquainted, Tecumseh
+found a gigantic stranger there, who was so badly frightened at sight of
+him that he took refuge behind the other men in the room, begging them
+to save him. Tecumseh stood a moment sternly watching the great fellow.
+Then he went up and patted the cowering creature on the shoulder, saying
+good naturedly, "Big baby; big baby!"</p>
+
+<p>In 1804 and 1805, before the new chief was ready for decided action,
+Governor Harrison, of Indiana Territory, made additional treaties with a
+few weak and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span> submissive tribes, by which he laid claim to more land.
+This measure aroused such general indignation among the more hardy and
+warlike Indians that Tecumseh felt the time had come when he might win
+them to support his cherished plan of united opposition to the whites.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="V_TECUMSEHS_BROTHER_THE_PROPHET" id="V_TECUMSEHS_BROTHER_THE_PROPHET"></a>V. TECUMSEH'S BROTHER, THE PROPHET</h2>
+
+
+<p>Tecumseh had not been alone in his anxiety for the future of his race.
+After the death of his elder brother he had made his twin brother,
+Laulewasikaw, his trusted comrade. Together they had talked over the
+decay in power and manliness that was swiftly overtaking the tribes, and
+the wrongs the red men suffered at the hands of the white. They had not
+spent their strength in useless murmurings, but had analyzed the causes
+of trouble and decided how they might be removed.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 304px;">
+<img src="images/i133.jpg" width="304" height="350" alt="THE PROPHET" title="" />
+<span class="caption">THE PROPHET</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>One day after brooding deeply over these matters Laulewasikaw fell upon
+the earth in a swoon. For a long time he lay quite stiff and rigid, and
+those who saw him thought he was dead. But by and by he gave a deep moan
+and opened his eyes. For a moment he looked about as if he did not know<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span>
+where he was. On coming to his senses he explained to his friends that
+he had had a vision in which he had seen the Great Spirit, who had told
+him what to do to save the Indian people from destruction.</p>
+
+<p>From that time he styled himself "Prophet" and claimed to act under the
+direction of the Great Spirit. He changed his name to Tenskwatawa to
+signify that he was the "Open Door," through which all might learn the
+will of the Great Spirit.</p>
+
+<p>Though professing to have supernatural power himself, Tenskwatawa
+realized the degrading effect of petty superstition and the terror and
+injury the medicine men were able to bring upon the simple-minded
+Indians who believed in their charms and spells. He denounced the
+practice of sorcery and witchcraft as against the will of the Great
+Spirit.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the Prophet's teachings were such as we should all approve of.
+Wishing to purify the individual and family life of the Indians, he
+forbade men to marry more than one wife, and commanded them to take care
+of their families and to provide for those who were old and sick. He
+required them to work, to till the ground and raise corn, and to hunt.</p>
+
+<p>Some of his teachings were intended to make the Indians as a people
+independent of the white race. The Great Spirit, said Tenskwatawa, had
+made the Indians to be a single people, quite distinct from the white
+men and for different purposes. The tribes must therefore stop fighting
+with one another and must unite and live peace<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span>ably together as one
+tribe. They must not fight with the white men, either Americans or
+British. Neither must they intermarry with them or adopt their customs.
+The Great Spirit wished his red children to throw aside the garments of
+cotton and wool they had borrowed from the whites and clothe themselves
+in the skins of wild animals; he wished them to stop feeding on pork and
+beef, and bread made from wheat, and instead to eat the flesh of the
+wild deer and the bison, which he had provided for them, and bread made
+from Indian corn. Above all, they must let alone whisky which might do
+well enough for white men, but was never intended for Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Furthermore, Tenskwatawa taught the Indians that a tribe had no right to
+sell the land it lived on. The Great Spirit had given the red people the
+land that they might enjoy it in common, just as they did the light and
+the air. He did not wish them to measure it off and build fences around
+it. Since no one chief or tribe owned the land, no single chief or tribe
+could sell it. No Indian territory therefore could be sold to the white
+men without the consent of all tribes and all Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The words of the Prophet were eagerly listened to. Indians came from far
+and near to hear him. Some were so excited by what he said against
+witchcraft that they put to death those who persisted in using charms
+and pronouncing incantations.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 313px;">
+<img src="images/i136.jpg" width="313" height="400" alt="ECLIPSE OF THE SUN" title="" />
+<span class="caption">ECLIPSE OF THE SUN</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The sayings and doings of the Shawnee Prophet soon attracted the
+attention of the Governor of Indiana Territory. Pity for the victims of
+the Prophet's misguided<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span> zeal, and alarm because of the influence
+Tenskwatawa seemed to be gaining, led Governor William Henry Harrison to
+take measures to check the popularity of a man who seemed to be a fraud
+and a mischief-maker. He sent to the Delaware Indians the following
+"speech":</p>
+
+<p>"My Children: My heart is filled with grief, and my eyes are dissolved
+in tears at the news which has reached me. * * * Who is this pretended
+prophet who dares to speak in the name of the Great Creator? Examine
+him. Is he more wise and virtuous than you are yourselves, that he
+should be selected to convey to you the orders of your God? Demand of
+him some proofs at least of his being the messenger of the Deity. If God
+has really employed him, He has doubtless authorized<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> him to perform
+miracles, that he may be known and received as a prophet. If he is
+really a prophet, ask him to cause the sun to stand still, the moon to
+alter its course, the rivers to cease to flow, or the dead to rise from
+their graves. If he does these things you may believe that he has been
+sent from God. He tells you that the Great Spirit commands you to punish
+with death those who deal in magic, and that he is authorized to point
+them out. Wretched delusion! Is, then, the Master of Life obliged to
+employ mortal man to punish those who offend Him? * * * Clear your eyes,
+I beseech you, from the mist which surrounds them. No longer be imposed
+on by the arts of the impostor. Drive him from your town and let peace
+and harmony prevail amongst you."</p>
+
+<p>This letter increased rather than diminished the influence of the
+Prophet. He met the Governor's doubt of his power with fine scorn and
+named a day on which he would "put the sun under his feet." Strange to
+say, on the day named an eclipse of the sun occurred, and the affrighted
+savages quaked with fear and thought it was all the work of Tenskwatawa.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VI_GREENVILLE" id="VI_GREENVILLE"></a>VI. GREENVILLE</h2>
+
+
+<p>Tenskwatawa met with strong opposition from some of the Indians. The
+small chiefs especially were displeased with the idea that the tribes
+should unite to form one people, as that would take away their own
+power.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> They, therefore, heard the Prophet with anger, and carried away
+an evil report of him.</p>
+
+<p>Still, many believed all that he said, and wished to gain the good will
+of the Great Spirit by doing his bidding. They were willing to leave
+their tribes to follow the Prophet. So it happened that in 1806
+Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh with their followers established a town at
+Greenville, Ohio. There all lived in accordance with the Prophet's
+teachings. They strengthened their bodies by running and swimming and
+wrestling. They lived at peace without drunkenness. They minded their
+own affairs. Now, all this was just what President Jefferson, the
+Indians' friend, had often advised the red men to do.</p>
+
+<p>Yet the white neighbors were greatly disturbed and wished to break up
+the Prophet's town. In the first place the town was on land that had
+been ceded to the United States, or the Seventeen Fires (as the Indians
+picturesquely named the new nation), by the treaty of Greenville. Then,
+the visiting Indians who came from all parts of the country to hear the
+words of the Prophet were a constant source of alarm to the border
+settlers. And, although he professed to preach peace, the Prophet was
+believed by many to be preparing secretly for war.</p>
+
+<p>Besides, innocent as most of his teachings appeared, those regarding
+property rights were hostile to the white race and decidedly annoying to
+the men who coveted the hunting grounds of the savages. The United
+States government in acquiring land from the Indians had usually
+proceeded as if it were the property of the tribe<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> that camped or hunted
+upon it. The Indian Commissioners had had little difficulty in gaining
+rich tracts of land from weak tribes, at comparatively little expense,
+by this method. When it came to a question of land, even Jefferson had
+little sympathy for the Indians. He had not scrupled to advise his agent
+to encourage chiefs to get into debt at the trading posts, so that when
+hard pressed for money they might be persuaded to part with the lands of
+their tribes.</p>
+
+<p>Now Tecumseh had seen that the whole struggle between the red men and
+the white was a question of land. If the white men were kind to the
+Indians and came among them with fair promises and goodly presents,
+their object was to get land. If they came with threats and the sword,
+their object was, still, to get land. They needed the land. They could
+not grow and prosper without it. But if the white men needed land in
+order to live how much more did the Indians need it! Where a few acres
+of farm land would give a white family comfortable support, many acres
+were needed to support an Indian family by the chase. Tecumseh argued in
+this way: The Seventeen Fires unite to get our lands from us. Let us
+follow their example. Let us unite to hold our lands. Let us keep at
+peace with them and do them no harm. Let us give them no reason to fight
+with us and take our land in battle. When they offer to buy we will
+refuse to sell. If they try to force us to part with our lands we will
+stand together and resist them like men.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He heartily agreed with his brother's teachings concerning property
+rights, and possibly suggested many ideas that Tenskwatawa fancied he
+received from the Great Spirit. Certain it is that Tecumseh had long
+held similar views and had done his best to spread them. Although
+Tenskwatawa was more conspicuous than Tecumseh, the latter had the
+stronger character. For a time he kept in the background and let his
+brother do the talking, but his personal influence had much to do with
+giving weight to the Prophet's words.</p>
+
+<p>The brothers had not been at Greenville long before they were summoned
+to Fort Wayne by the commandant there to hear a letter from their
+"father," the President of the Seventeen Fires. Tecumseh refused to go.
+He demanded that the letter be brought to him. This put the officer in a
+trying position, but there was nothing left for him to do but send the
+letter to Greenville. It proved to be a request that the Prophet move
+his town beyond the boundaries of the territory owned by the United
+States. The letter was courteous, and offered the Indians assistance to
+move and build new homes.</p>
+
+<p>To the President's request Tecumseh sent a decided refusal. He said:
+"These lands are ours; we were the first owners; no one has the right to
+move us. The Great Spirit appointed this place for us to light our fires
+and here we will stay."</p>
+
+<p>The settlement continued to be a source of annoyance to the government.
+Indians kept coming from distant regions to visit the Prophet. Rumor
+said that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> brothers were working under the direction of British
+agents, who were trying to rouse the Indians to make war on the United
+States.</p>
+
+<p>To counteract the British influence the Governor of Ohio sent a message
+to Greenville. At a council called to consider the Governor's letter,
+the chief, Blue Jacket, and the Prophet made speeches in which they
+declared their wish to remain at peace with the British and the Long
+Knives, as they called the settlers.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh accompanied the commissioners on their return and held a
+conference with the Governor of Ohio. He spoke plainly, saying the
+Indians had little cause for friendliness to either the British or the
+people of the United States, both of whom had robbed them of their lands
+by making unjust treaties. But he assured the governor that for their
+own sake the Indians wished to remain at peace with both nations.</p>
+
+<p>The Governor, like all who heard Tecumseh speak, was impressed with his
+sense and honesty, and believed that the Indians were not planning war.</p>
+
+<p>A little later Tecumseh was again called to Springfield to attend a
+large council of Indians and white men. The council was held to
+determine who was responsible for the murder of a white man, who had
+been found dead not far from Springfield. On this occasion Tecumseh
+attracted much attention. In the first place he refused to give up his
+arms, and entered the council with the dignity of manner and the arms of
+a warrior.</p>
+
+<p>He made a speech of such passion and eloquence<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> that the interpreter was
+unable to keep up with him or translate his ideas. The white men were
+left to guess his meaning by watching his wrathful face and the
+excitement of his hearers. The Indians, however, understood him
+perfectly, and when the council was over and they went to their homes
+all repeated what they could remember of the wonderful speech.</p>
+
+<p>The influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh increased. The excitement
+among the Indians became more general. Governor Harrison again wrote to
+the Shawnee tribes. He began by reminding them of the treaties between
+the Indians and the people of the United States:</p>
+
+<p>"My children, listen to me. I speak in the name of your father, the
+great chief of the Seventeen Fires.</p>
+
+<p>"My children, it is now twelve years since the tomahawk, which you had
+raised by the advice of your father, the King of Great Britain, was
+buried at Greenville, in the presence of that great warrior, General
+Wayne.</p>
+
+<p>"My children, you then promised, and the Great Spirit heard it, that you
+would in future live in peace and friendship with your brothers, the
+Americans. You made a treaty with your father, and one that contained a
+number of good things, equally beneficial to all the tribes of red
+people who were parties to it.</p>
+
+<p>"My children, you promised in that treaty to acknowledge no other father
+than the chief of the Seventeen Fires, and never to listen to the
+proposition of any foreign nation. You promised never to lift up the
+tomahawk against any of your father's children, and to give notice<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> of
+any other tribe that intended it. Your father also promised to do
+something for you, particularly to deliver to you every year a certain
+quantity of goods, to prevent any white man from settling on your lands
+without your consent, or from doing you any personal injury. He promised
+to run a line between your land and his, so that you might know your
+own; and you were to be permitted to live and hunt upon your father's
+land as long as you behaved yourselves well. My children, which of these
+articles has your father broken? You know that he has observed them all
+with the utmost good faith. But, my children, have you done so? Have you
+not always had your ears open to receive bad advice from the white
+people beyond the lakes?"</p>
+
+<p>Although Governor Harrison writes in this letter as if he thought the
+white men had kept their part of the treaty, he had written quite
+differently to President Jefferson, telling him how the settlers were
+continually violating the treaty by hunting on Indian territory and
+reporting that it was impossible for the Indians to get justice when
+their kinsmen were murdered by white men; for even if a murderer was
+brought to trial no jury of white men would pronounce the murderer of an
+Indian guilty. "All these injuries the Indians have hitherto borne with
+astonishing patience." Thus Mr. Harrison had written to the President,
+but it was evidently his policy to try to make the Indians think they
+had no cause for complaint. In his letter to the Shawnees he went on to
+say:</p>
+
+<p>"My children, I have heard bad news. The sacred<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> spot where the great
+council fire was kindled, around which the Seventeen Fires and ten
+tribes of their children smoked the pipe of peace&mdash;that very spot where
+the Great Spirit saw his red and white children encircle themselves with
+the chain of friendship&mdash;that place has been selected for dark and
+bloody councils.</p>
+
+<p>"My children, this business must be stopped. You have called in a number
+of men from the most distant tribes to listen to a fool, who speaks not
+the words of the Great Spirit, but those of the devil and of the British
+agents. My children, your conduct has much alarmed the white settlers
+near you. They desire that you will send away those people, and if they
+wish to have the impostor with them they can carry him. Let him go to
+the lakes; he can hear the British more distinctly."</p>
+
+<p>To this letter the Prophet sent a dignified answer, denying the charges
+the Governor had made. He spoke with regret rather than anger, and said
+that "his father (the Governor) had been listening to evil birds."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VII_THE_PROPHETS_TOWN" id="VII_THE_PROPHETS_TOWN"></a>VII. THE PROPHET'S TOWN</h2>
+
+
+<p>In 1808 Tecumseh and the Prophet moved with their followers to the
+Wabash Valley, and established on the Tippecanoe River a village known
+as the Prophet's Town.</p>
+
+<p>Several advantages were to be gained by moving from Greenville to
+Tippecanoe, all of which probably had their weight in influencing the
+brothers to make this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span> change. In the first place, there seems to be
+little doubt that Tecumseh wanted peace, at least until he had built up
+a confederacy strong enough to fight the Americans with some hope of
+success. At Greenville the Indians were so near the settlers that there
+was constant danger of trouble between them. And Tecumseh realized that
+any wrong done by his people might be made an excuse for the government
+to take more lands from the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Then, too, this redskinned statesman realized in his way that the best
+way to prevent war was to be ready for it. He wished his people to be
+independent of the whites for their livelihood. The Wabash Valley
+offered the richest hunting grounds between the Lakes and the Ohio. Here
+they need not starve should they be denied aid by the United States
+government.</p>
+
+<p>The location of the new village had further political value. It was in
+the center of a district where many tribes camped, over which the
+brothers wished to extend their influence. From the new town
+communication with the British could be more easily carried on. This was
+important in view of the troubled relations existing between the United
+States and Great Britain. Tecumseh was shrewd enough to see that though
+under ordinary circumstances the Indians were not sufficiently strong to
+be very formidable to the United States government, their friendship or
+enmity would be an important consideration in the war that threatened.
+And he hoped that the Long Knives' anxiety lest they should join the
+British<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span> would prevent their doing anything to gain the ill will of the
+Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The brothers wished Governor Harrison to understand that their desire
+was for peace, and that they did not intend to make war unless driven to
+do so. Accordingly, in August, Tenskwatawa, with a band of followers,
+made the Governor a visit. The Indians stayed at Vincennes for about two
+weeks. Harrison was surprised to find the Prophet an intelligent and
+gifted man. He tested the sincerity of the Prophet's followers by
+questions as to their belief and by putting in their way opportunities
+to drink whisky. He was again surprised to find them very earnest in
+their faith and able to resist the fire water. In Tenskwatawa's farewell
+speech to Harrison, he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Father: It is three years since I first began that system of religion
+which I now practice. The white people and some of the Indians were
+against me, but I had no other intention but to introduce among the
+Indians those good principles of religion which the white people
+profess. I was spoken badly of by the white people, who reproached me
+with misleading the Indians, but I defy them to say that I did anything
+amiss. * * *</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit told me to tell the Indians that he had made them, and
+made the world&mdash;that he had placed them on it to do good and not evil.</p>
+
+<p>"I told all the redskins that the way they were in was not good and they
+ought to abandon it; that we ought to consider ourselves as one man, but
+we ought to live<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> according to our customs, the red people after their
+fashion and the white people after theirs; particularly that they should
+not drink whisky; that it was not made for them, but for the white
+people who knew how to use it, and that it is the cause of all the
+mischiefs which the Indians suffer, and that we must follow the
+directions of the Great Spirit, and listen to Him, as it was He who made
+us; determine to listen to nothing that is bad; do not take up the
+tomahawk should it be offered by the British or by the Long Knives; do
+not meddle with anything that does not belong to you, but mind your own
+business and cultivate the ground, that your women and children may have
+enough to live on.</p>
+
+<p>"I now inform you that it is our intention to live in peace with our
+father and his people forever.</p>
+
+<p>"My father, I have informed you what we mean to do, and I call the Great
+Spirit to witness the truth of my declaration. The religion which I have
+established for the last three years has been attended by all the
+different tribes of Indians in this part of the world. Those Indians
+were once different people; they are now but one; they are determined to
+practise what I have communicated to them, that has come directly from
+the Great Spirit through me."</p>
+
+<p>The Prophet made a favorable impression on the Governor, and after his
+visit affairs went smoothly for a time. The Prophet preached and his
+followers worked. Tecumseh traveled about north and south, east and
+west, talking with the Indians and trying to unite the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> tribes and to
+persuade them to follow his brother's teachings.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime, settlers came steadily from the south and the east, and
+the governor felt the need of more land. Since he saw no prospect of
+immediate trouble with the British and was convinced that the Prophet
+had not been preparing the Indians for war, he determined to attempt to
+extend the United States territory.</p>
+
+<p>On the thirtieth of September, 1809, Governor Harrison called all the
+tribes that claimed certain lands between the White and Wabash rivers to
+a council. Only a few of the weak and degenerate tribes answered the
+summons. Nevertheless, he went through the ceremony of making a treaty
+by which the United States government claimed three million acres of
+Indian land.</p>
+
+<p>This act of Harrison's lighted a hundred council fires. Everywhere the
+Indians denounced this treaty. Soon word reached Vincennes that tribes
+that had before stood apart cherishing their independence had declared
+their willingness to join the brothers at Tippecanoe. At the Prophet's
+town the voice of the warrior, Tecumseh, sounded above that of the
+preacher, Tenskwatawa; and running and wrestling were said to have given
+place to the practice of shooting and wielding the tomahawk.</p>
+
+<p>When the annual supply of salt was sent to Tippecanoe, the Prophet
+refused to accept it, and sent word to the Governor that the Americans
+had dealt unfairly with the Indians, and that friendly relations could
+be renewed only by the nullification of the treaty of 1809.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Indians were evidently ready for war, and repeated rumors of plots
+to attack the settlements caused great anxiety among the frontiersmen.
+The Indians now recognized Tecumseh as their leader, and looked to him
+for the word of command. Realizing how much loss of life and land a
+defeat would bring to the Indians, he worked tirelessly to make his
+people ready for war, but resolved not to hazard a battle unless driven
+to do so.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VIII_THE_COUNCIL_BETWEEN_HARRISON_AND_TECUMSEH" id="VIII_THE_COUNCIL_BETWEEN_HARRISON_AND_TECUMSEH"></a>VIII. THE COUNCIL BETWEEN HARRISON AND TECUMSEH</h2>
+
+
+<p>Governor Harrison sent agents to Tippecanoe, who brought back word that
+the Indians were preparing for war; that Tecumseh had gathered about him
+five thousand warriors, and that the British were encouraging them to go
+to war, and promising them aid. He therefore sent a letter to the
+Prophet telling him of the reports he had received, and warning him not
+to make an enemy of the Seventeen Fires. He wrote:</p>
+
+<p>"Don't deceive yourselves; do not believe that all the nations of
+Indians united are able to resist the force of the Seventeen Fires. I
+know your warriors are brave; but ours are not less so. But what can a
+few brave warriors do against the innumerable warriors of the Seventeen
+Fires? Our blue-coats are more numerous than you can count; our hunters
+are like the leaves of the forest, or the grains of sand on the Wabash.
+Do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> not think that the red-coats can protect you; they are not able to
+protect themselves. They do not think of going to war with us. If they
+did, you would in a few moons see our flag wave over all the forts of
+Canada. What reason have you to complain of the Seventeen Fires? Have
+they taken anything from you? Have they ever violated the treaties made
+with the red men? You say they have purchased lands from those who had
+no right to sell them. Show that this is true and the land will be
+instantly restored. Show us the rightful owners. I have full power to
+arrange this business; but if you would rather carry your complaints
+before your great father, the President, you shall be indulged. I will
+immediately<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> take means to send you, with those chiefs that you may
+choose, to the city where your father lives. Everything necessary shall
+be prepared for your journey, and means taken for your safe return."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i150.jpg" width="600" height="459" alt="HARRISON&#39;S COUNCIL WITH TECUMSEH AT VINCENNES" title="" />
+<span class="caption">HARRISON&#39;S COUNCIL WITH TECUMSEH AT VINCENNES</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Instead of answering this letter, Tenskwatawa said he would send his
+brother, Tecumseh, to Vincennes to confer with the Governor. Early in
+August a fleet of eighty canoes started down the Wabash for the capital.
+Tecumseh, with four hundred warriors at his back, all armed and painted
+as if for battle, was on his way to meet in council for the first time
+the man who was responsible for the treaty of 1809.</p>
+
+<p>The party encamped just outside of Vincennes, and on the morning
+appointed for the council Tecumseh appeared attended by forty warriors.
+He refused to meet the Governor and his officers in council on the porch
+of the Governor's house, saying he preferred to hold the conference
+under a clump of trees not far off. The Governor consented and ordered
+benches and chairs to be taken to the grove. When Tecumseh was asked to
+take a chair he replied pompously: "The sun is my father; the earth is
+my mother; on her bosom I will repose," and seated himself on the
+ground. His warriors followed his example. In his speech Tecumseh stated
+plainly the grievances of the Indians. He said:</p>
+
+<p>"Brother, since the peace was made, you have killed some Shawnees,
+Winnebagoes, Delawares, and Miamis, and you have taken our land from us,
+and I do not see how we can remain at peace if you continue to do so.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span>
+You try to force the red people to do some injury. It is you that are
+pushing them on to do mischief. You endeavor to make distinctions. You
+wish to prevent the Indians doing as we wish them&mdash;to unite, and let
+them consider their lands as the common property of the whole; you take
+tribes aside and advise them not to come into this measure; and until
+our plan is accomplished we do not wish to accept your invitation to go
+to see the President. You want by your distinctions of Indian tribes in
+allotting to each a particular tract of land, to make them to war with
+each other. You never see an Indian come and endeavor to make the white
+people do so. You are continually driving the red people; when, at last,
+you will drive them into the Great Lake, where they can neither stand
+nor walk.</p>
+
+<p>"Brother, you ought to know what you are doing with the Indians. Perhaps
+it is by direction of the President to make these distinctions. It is a
+very bad thing and we do not like it. Since my residence at Tippecanoe
+we have endeavored to level all distinctions&mdash;to destroy village chiefs,
+by whom all mischief is done. It is they who sell our lands to the
+Americans. Our object is to let our affairs be transacted by warriors.</p>
+
+<p>"Brother, only a few had part in the selling of this land and the goods
+that were given for it. The treaty was afterwards brought here, and the
+Weas were induced to give their consent because of their small numbers.
+The treaty at Fort Wayne was made through the threats of Winnemac; but
+in future we are prepared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> to punish those chiefs who may come forward
+to propose to sell the land. If you continue to purchase of them it will
+produce war among the different tribes, and, at last, I do not know what
+will be the consequence to the white people.</p>
+
+<p>"Brother, I was glad to hear your speech. You said that if we could show
+that the land was sold by people that had no right to sell, you would
+restore it. Those that did sell it did not own it. It was me. Those
+tribes set up a claim, but the tribes with me will not agree to their
+claim. If the land is not restored to us you will see when we return to
+our homes how it will be settled. We shall have a great council, at
+which all the tribes will be present, when we shall show to those who
+sold that they had no right to the claim they set up; and we will see
+what will be done to those chiefs that did sell the land to you. I am
+not alone in this determination; it is the determination of all the
+warriors and red people that listen to me. I now wish you to listen to
+me. If you do not, it will appear as if you wished me to kill all the
+chiefs that sold you the land. I tell you so because I am authorized by
+all the tribes to do so. I am the head of them all; I am a warrior, and
+all the warriors will meet together in two or three moons from this;
+then I will call for those chiefs that sold you the land and shall know
+what to do with them. If you do not restore the land, you will have a
+hand in killing them."</p>
+
+<p>Governor Harrison began his reply by saying that the Indian tribes were
+and always had been independent of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> one another, and had a right to sell
+their own lands, without interference from others.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh might have answered that the Seventeen Fires had already
+recognized that the land was the common property of the tribes by
+treating with ten of them in making the Greenville purchase. But instead
+he and his followers lost their temper and jumped to their feet in a
+rage, as if to attack the Governor. And the council ended in an
+undignified row.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh regretted this very much. He sent an apology to Governor
+Harrison and requested another meeting. Another council was called and
+this time the Indians controlled their anger; but Tecumseh maintained
+till the last that the Indians would never allow the white people to
+take possession of the land they claimed by the treaty of 1809.</p>
+
+<p>The next day Governor Harrison, accompanied only by an interpreter,
+courageously visited Tecumseh's encampment and had a long talk with him.
+Tecumseh said the Indians had no wish for war, and would gladly be at
+peace with the Long Knives if the Governor could persuade the President
+to give back the disputed land. He said he had no wish to join the
+British, who were not the true friends of the Indians, but were always
+urging them to fight against the Americans for their own advantage.</p>
+
+<p>Governor Harrison said he would report to the President all that
+Tecumseh had said, but that he knew the President would not give up the
+land he had purchased.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Tecumseh, bluntly, "as the great chief is to determine the
+matter, I hope the Great Spirit will put sense enough into his head to
+induce him to direct you to give up this land. It is true, he is so far
+off he will not be hurt by the war; he may sit in his town and drink his
+wine, while you and I will have to fight it out."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IX_PREPARATIONS_FOR_WAR" id="IX_PREPARATIONS_FOR_WAR"></a>IX. PREPARATIONS FOR WAR</h2>
+
+
+<p>A year of unrest and anxiety followed the council at Vincennes. The
+United States government made an attempt to survey the new purchase, but
+the surveyors were driven off by the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Occasional outrages were committed on both sides. Horses were stolen.
+Several white men were murdered by Indians, and several Indians were
+murdered by white men.</p>
+
+<p>In the spring of 1811, when the usual supply of salt was sent up the
+Wabash to be distributed among the tribes, the Indians at the Prophet's
+town, instead of again rejecting it, seized it all. This was done in the
+absence of Tecumseh, who seemed in every way to seek to avoid bringing
+about war.</p>
+
+<p>Governor Harrison knew the treacherous nature of Indians and feared that
+Tecumseh's desire for peace might be feigned in order to throw him off
+his guard. He reasoned that it was scarcely to be expected and little to
+be wished that the United States should relin<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span>quish the territory for
+which the Indians were contending. The Indians would hardly give up the
+land without war. Delay only gave Tecumseh time to strengthen his band.
+Harrison thought it wise to force the brothers to open war or to give
+assurance of peace. Accordingly, he wrote them a letter or speech, in
+which he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Brothers, this is the third year that all the white people in this
+country have been alarmed at your proceedings; you threaten us with war;
+you invite all the tribes to the north and west of you to join against
+us.</p>
+
+<p>"Brothers, your warriors who have lately been here deny this, but I have
+received information from every direction; the tribes on the Mississippi
+have sent me word that you intended to murder me, and then to commence a
+war upon our people. I have also received the speech you sent to the
+Pottawottomies and others to join you for that purpose; but if I had no
+other evidence of your hostility to us your seizing the salt I lately
+sent up the Wabash is sufficient. Brothers, our citizens are alarmed,
+and my warriors are preparing themselves, not to strike you but to
+defend themselves, and their women and children. You shall not surprise
+us as you expect to do; you are about to undertake a very rash act. As a
+friend, I advise you to consider well of it; a little reflection may
+save us a great deal of trouble and prevent much mischief; it is not yet
+too late.</p>
+
+<p>"Brothers, if you wish to satisfy us that your intentions are good,
+follow the advice I have given you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> before: that is, that one or both of
+you should visit the President of the United States and lay your
+grievances before him. He will treat you well, will listen to what you
+say, and if you can show him that you have been injured, you will
+receive justice. If you will follow my advice in this respect it will
+convince the citizens of this country and myself that you have no design
+to attack them. Brothers, with respect to the lands that were purchased
+last fall, I can enter into no negotiations with you on that subject;
+the affair is in the hands of the President. If you wish to go and see
+him, I will supply you with the means."</p>
+
+<p>If either of the brothers should act upon the Governor's advice and go
+to Washington he would be virtually a hostage in the hands of the
+government, and the Indians would not dare to do the settlers any harm
+lest their leader should come to grief because of their misdoing.</p>
+
+<p>Tecumseh sent the Governor a brief, friendly reply, in which he promised
+to go to Vincennes himself in a short time. Governor Harrison did not
+know just what to expect from the proposed visit, but he remembered
+Pontiac's attempt to capture Detroit by surprise and he prepared to give
+his guest a warlike reception if need be.</p>
+
+<p>Late in July the chief arrived, attended by about three hundred Indians.
+A council was held which the Governor opened by recounting the injuries
+the white men had suffered at the hands of the Indians, and by again<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span>
+making the charge that the Indians were preparing for war. Tecumseh
+replied with a counter enumeration of injuries, and said again that the
+Indians would never give up the land in dispute, but that it was his
+wish and hope that the matter could be settled peaceably. He said that
+he was trying to build up a strong nation of red men, after the model of
+the Seventeen Fires, and that he was on his way to visit the southern
+tribes to invite them to join his league. He assured Governor Harrison
+that he had given the strictest orders that the northern Indians should
+remain at peace during his absence, and that as soon as he returned he
+would go to Washington to settle the land question.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 298px;">
+<img src="images/i158.jpg" width="298" height="400" alt="TECUMSEH INCITING THE CREEKS" title="" />
+<span class="caption">TECUMSEH INCITING THE CREEKS</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Tecumseh then hastened to the South, where he worked to good effect
+among the Creeks and Seminoles, persuading them to join his confederacy.
+It is said that where he could not persuade he threatened. One story
+illustrating his manner of dealing with those that resisted him is as
+follows: Visiting a tribe which listened coldly<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> to his words and seemed
+unwilling to take part in his plans he suddenly lost all patience. With
+fierce gestures and a terrible look he shouted: "You do not think what I
+say is true. You do not believe this is the wish of the Great Spirit. I
+will show you. When I reach Detroit I will stamp my foot on the earth
+and the earth will tremble and shake your houses down about your ears."
+The tale goes on to say that after due time had elapsed for Tecumseh to
+reach Detroit an earthquake shook down all the dwellings of the village
+he had left in anger. Whether this is true or not, Tecumseh certainly
+had wonderful influence over all tribes. Governor Harrison wrote to the
+Secretary of War about him: "If it were not for the vicinity of the
+United States, he would perhaps be the founder of an empire that would
+rival in glory Mexico or Peru. No difficulties deter him. For four years
+he has been in constant motion. You see him to-day on the Wabash, and in
+a short time hear of him on the shores of Lake Erie or Michigan, or on
+the banks of the Mississippi; and wherever he goes he makes an
+impression favorable to his purpose. He is now upon the last round to
+put a finishing stroke to his work. I hope, however, before his return
+that that part of the work which he considered complete will be
+demolished, and even its foundation rooted up."</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Tecumseh trusted Governor Harrison with child-like
+simplicity. It seems not to have occurred to him that the Governor would
+not remain inactive until he had completed his arrangements and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> opened
+the war. Indeed, there were those at Washington who also thought this
+was what Harrison would and ought to do; that is, keep on the defensive
+until the Indians made some outbreak.</p>
+
+<p>This was not the feeling on the frontier, however. The frontiersmen were
+in no humor to sit still and wait for the Indians to scalp them at their
+plows or burn them in their beds. Their cry was, "On to Tippecanoe!"</p>
+
+<p>This spirit was in accord with the Governor's inclination. A man of
+action, and bred to military life, Harrison favored prompt, vigorous
+measures. He believed this a favorable time for an attack on the
+Prophet's town. Tecumseh was well out of the way, and had left orders
+for the tribes to remain at peace during his absence. As many would
+hesitate to disobey his command, there would be no united resistance.
+Besides, the Prophet had been left in charge, and a victory over him
+would destroy the Indians' faith in his supernatural power. This faith
+Harrison had come to regard as the backbone of the Indian alliance.
+Moreover, the British were not in a position to give the Indians open
+assistance and they would learn from a few battles fought without their
+aid how little trust was to be put in British promises.</p>
+
+<p>For these reasons, Harrison wrote to the War Department urging immediate
+action and asking for troops and authority to march against Tippecanoe.
+The troops were granted, but with the instruction that President<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span>
+Madison wished peace with the Indians preserved if possible.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="X_THE_BATTLE_OF_TIPPECANOE" id="X_THE_BATTLE_OF_TIPPECANOE"></a>X. THE BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE</h2>
+
+
+<p>In August, in the year 1811, Governor Harrison sent stern "speeches" to
+the Indian tribes, threatening them with punishment if they did not
+cease their preparations for war and comply with his demands.</p>
+
+<p>On September the twenty-fifth the Prophet's reply arrived at Vincennes.
+He gave repeated assurances that the Indians had no intention of making
+war on the settlers, and he promised to comply with whatever demands the
+Governor might make. To this message Harrison sent no answer.</p>
+
+<p>The Governor was now ready for action. He had a force of about a
+thousand fighting men. The militia were reinforced by three hundred
+regulars, and one hundred and thirty mounted men, under a brave
+Kentuckian, J. H. Daveiss, who wanted a share in the glory of an
+encounter with the Indians. Later two companies of mounted riflemen were
+added to this force. Harrison sent a detachment of men up the river to
+build a fort on the new land. By this act he took formal possession of
+it.</p>
+
+<p>He felt his hands tied by the President's instructions to avoid war with
+the Indians if possible, and awaited developments with impatience. He
+expected the Indians to oppose in some way the building of the
+fort<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span>&mdash;and his expectations were at length realized. One of the
+sentinels who kept guard while the soldiers worked on the fort was shot
+and severely wounded. Harrison thought this might be regarded as the
+opening of hostilities, and determined to march upon the Prophet's town.
+A letter from the War Department received at about this time left him
+free to carry out his plans.</p>
+
+<p>It was late in October before the new fort, named Fort Harrison in honor
+of the Governor, was finished, and the force ready to leave. Then
+Harrison sent messengers to the Prophet demanding that the Indians
+should return stolen horses to their owners, and surrender Indians who
+had murdered white men. He also demanded that the Winnebagoes,
+Pottawottomies and Kickapoos who were at Tippecanoe should return to
+their tribes. Without waiting for a reply or appointing a time or place
+where the Prophet's answer might find him, Harrison began his march on
+Tippecanoe. Through the disputed land the armed forces marched; on, on,
+into the undisputed territory of the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Still they met with no opposition. Not an Indian was seen until November
+the sixth, when the troops were within eleven miles of Tippecanoe. And
+although many of them were seen from that time on, they could not be
+tempted to any greater indiscretion than the making of threatening signs
+in response to the provoking remarks of the interpreters. When within
+two miles of Tippecanoe, Harrison found himself and his army in a
+dangerous pass that offered the Indians a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> most inviting chance for an
+ambush. But he was not molested.</p>
+
+<p>When the troops were safe in the open country once more, Harrison held a
+conference with his officers. All were eager to advance at once and
+attack the town. They held that if there was any question about the
+right or the necessity of an attack it should have been decided before
+they started; now that they had arrived at the stronghold of the Indians
+there was only one safe course, and that was immediate attack.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps the circumstances of the march had persuaded Harrison of the
+sincerity of the Indians' plan for peace, and he felt that after all the
+affair might be settled without bloodshed. At any rate, he was most
+reluctant to comply with the wishes of his aids. But at last yielding to
+their urgency he gave the order to advance and storm the town. Scarcely
+had he done so, however, before he was turned from his purpose by the
+arrival of messengers from the Prophet begging that the difficulties be
+settled without a battle. Harrison sent back word that he had no
+intention of making an attack unless the Prophet refused to concede to
+his demands. He consented to suspend hostilities for the night and give
+Tenskwatawa a hearing in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>Greatly against the will of his officers, who had no faith in the
+Indians' professions of friendliness and saw that every hour of delay
+might be put to good use by the Prophet, Harrison encamped for the
+night. He seems to have had little fear of an attack, as he did not
+even<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span> fortify his camp with intrenchments. But his men slept on their
+arms that night, and, although no sound from the Indian village
+disturbed the stillness, there was a general feeling of restlessness.</p>
+
+<p>Between four and five in the morning, in the dark that comes before the
+dawn, a sentinel's shot followed by the Indian yell brought every man to
+his feet. As the soldiers stood in the light of the camp fires, peering
+into the blackness with cocked muskets, they were shot down by savages,
+who rushed upon them with such force that they broke the line of guards
+and made an entrance into the camp. Had the number of assailants been
+greater, or had Harrison been less alert, they would doubtless have
+created a panic. But Harrison was already up and on the point of rousing
+his soldiers when the alarm sounded. With perfect self-possession he
+rode about where bullets were flying thickest, giving orders and
+encouraging his men.</p>
+
+<p>The brave Daveiss, having gained Harrison's consent, recklessly plunged
+with only a few followers into a thicket to dislodge some Indians who
+were firing upon the troops at close range. He was soon surrounded and
+shot down.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians fought with great persistence and kept up the attack for two
+hours, during which the troops held their ground with admirable
+firmness. As day dawned the Indians gradually withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>Harrison's situation was perilous. Counting killed and wounded he had
+already lost one hundred and fifty<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> fighting men. The Indians might
+return at any moment in larger numbers to attack his exhausted force.
+Provisions were low and it was cold and raining. The men stood at their
+posts through the day without food or fire. All day and all night the
+soldiers kept watch. The second day, the horsemen cautiously advanced to
+the town. To their relief they found it empty. The Indians had evidently
+fled in haste, leaving behind large stores of provisions. Harrison's
+troops helped themselves to what they wanted, burned the deserted town,
+and returned to Vincennes with rapid marches.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i165.jpg" width="600" height="359" alt="BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE" title="" />
+<span class="caption">BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>As a result of the battle of Tippecanoe, Harrison was the hero of the
+hour. News of the destruction of the Prophet's town carried cheer into
+every white man's cabin on the frontier.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XI_REORGANIZATION_OF_THE_INDIANS" id="XI_REORGANIZATION_OF_THE_INDIANS"></a>XI. REORGANIZATION OF THE INDIANS</h2>
+
+
+<p>Of the six hundred Indians that Harrison estimated had taken part in the
+battle of Tippecanoe, thirty-eight were found dead on the field. Though
+that was not a large number from a white man's point of view, the
+Indians regarded the loss of thirty-eight of their warriors as no light
+matter.</p>
+
+<p>But that was not the heaviest blow to the confederation that Tecumseh
+and the Prophet had worked so hard to establish. Tippecanoe had been
+regarded with superstitious veneration as the Prophet's town, a sort of
+holy city, under the special protection of the Great Spirit. The
+destruction of the town, therefore, seriously affected the reputation of
+the Prophet.</p>
+
+<p>It is hard to tell what part the Prophet played in the attack on
+Governor Harrison's forces. In their anxiety to escape punishment from
+the United States government many Indians who were known to have taken
+part in the battle excused their conduct by saying they had acted in
+obedience to the Prophet's directions. They told strange stories of his
+urging them to battle with promises that the Great Spirit would protect
+them from the bullets of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand, the Prophet said the young men who would not listen
+to his commands were to blame for the trouble.</p>
+
+<p>The fact that the Indians did not follow up their advantage over
+Harrison, and instead of renewing the at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span>tack with their full force,
+fled from him, would indicate that there certainly was a large party in
+favor of peace. It seems probable that that party was made up of the
+Prophet and his most faithful followers, rather than of those Indians
+who, while pretending to be the friends of the United States and
+accusing the Prophet, admitted that they had done the fighting.
+Tenskwatawa had had advice from the British, and strict orders from
+Tecumseh to remain at peace, and he had shown in many ways his anxiety
+to appease Harrison and keep the Indians from doing violence. For some
+time the influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh had been more to restrain
+and direct than to excite the anger of the Indians which had been
+kindled by the treaty of 1809, and was ready to break out at any
+instant. It is hard, too, to believe that young warriors who had never
+been trained to act on the defensive could be constrained to wait until
+they were attacked, and so lose the advantage to be gained by surprising
+the enemy, or that they could be made to withdraw without striking a
+blow.</p>
+
+<p>But however blameless the Prophet may have been, he suffered for a time,
+as Harrison had supposed he would. He was the scapegoat on whom all
+placed the responsibility for the battle of Tippecanoe. Even Tecumseh is
+said to have rebuked him bitterly for not holding the young men in
+check.</p>
+
+<p>That Tecumseh disapproved of the affair is evident from the answer he
+sent the British, who advised him to avoid further encounters with the
+Americans:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You tell us to retreat or turn to one side should the Big Knives come
+against us. Had I been at home in the late unfortunate affair I should
+have done so; but those I left at home were&mdash;I cannot call them men&mdash;a
+poor set of people, and their scuffle with the Big Knives I compared to
+a struggle between little children who only scratch each other's faces."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i168.jpg" width="600" height="387" alt="INDIANS THREATENING &quot;THE PROPHET&quot;" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIANS THREATENING &quot;THE PROPHET&quot;</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the spring, Tecumseh presented himself at Vincennes saying that he
+was now ready to go to Washington to visit the President. The Governor,
+however, gave him a cold welcome, telling him that if he went he must go
+alone. Tecumseh's pride was hurt and he refused to go unless he could
+travel in a style suited to the dignity of a great chief, the leader of
+the red men.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Harrison soon learned that the brothers were again at Tippecanoe, with
+their loyal followers, rebuilding the village and strengthening their
+forces.</p>
+
+<p>In April, 1812, a succession of horrible murders on the frontier alarmed
+the settlers. A general uprising of the Indians was expected daily. The
+militiamen refused to leave their families unprotected. The Governor was
+unable to secure the protection of the United States troops. Panic
+spread along the border; whole districts were unpeopled. Men, women, and
+children hastened to the forts or even to Kentucky for safety. There was
+fear that Vincennes would be overpowered.</p>
+
+<p>Had the Indians chosen this time to strike, they could have done
+terrible mischief. But Tecumseh's voice was still for peace. At a
+council held in May, he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Governor Harrison made war on my people in my absence; it was the will
+of God that he should do so. We hope it will please the Great Spirit
+that the white people may let us live in peace. We will not disturb
+them, neither have we done it, except when they come to our village with
+the intention of destroying us. We are happy to state to our brothers
+present that the unfortunate transaction that took place between the
+white people and a few of our young men at our village, has been settled
+between us and Governor Harrison; and I will further state that had I
+been at home there would have been no bloodshed at that time.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span></p><hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>"It is true, we have endeavored to give all our brothers good advice,
+and if they have not listened to it we are sorry for it. We defy a
+living creature to say we ever advised any one, directly or indirectly,
+to make war on our white brothers. It has constantly been our misfortune
+to have our view misrepresented to our white brothers. This has been
+done by the Pottawottomies and others who sell to the white people land
+that does not belong to them."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XII_TECUMSEH_AND_THE_BRITISH" id="XII_TECUMSEH_AND_THE_BRITISH"></a>XII. TECUMSEH AND THE BRITISH</h2>
+
+
+<p>Greatly as Tecumseh wished the Indians to remain at peace with the
+citizens of the United States, he saw that it was impossible for them to
+do so unless they were willing to give up their lands. The British,
+meanwhile, promised to regain for the Indians all the land north of the
+Ohio River and east of the Alleghany Mountains. They roused in the heart
+of Tecumseh the hope that the old boundaries between the territory of
+the Indians and the territory of the white man would be re&euml;stablished.
+When war broke out in 1812, between Great Britain and the United States,
+Tecumseh joined the British at Malden. In making this alliance he was
+not influenced by any kindly feeling toward the British. He simply did
+what seemed to him for the best interests of the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>At the outset, fortune favored the British flag. Fort Mackinac, in
+northern Michigan, fell into the hands of a force of British and
+Indians. Detroit was surrendered<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span> to General Brock without resistance.
+Fort Dearborn, at Chicago, was burned and its garrison was massacred by
+the Indians. The English seemed in a fair way to fulfill their promise
+of driving the American settlers from the Northwest. Fort Harrison and
+Fort Wayne were the only strongholds of importance left to guard the
+frontier. These forts Tecumseh planned to take by stratagem.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i171.jpg" width="600" height="464" alt="FORT DETROIT IN 1812" title="" />
+<span class="caption">FORT DETROIT IN 1812</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The victories of the British won to their side the tribes that had
+hesitated, and hundreds of warriors flocked to the standard of Tecumseh.
+He became an important and conspicuous figure in the war. His brav<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span>ery,
+his knowledge of the country, and his large following made it possible
+for him to give his allies invaluable aid. Without Tecumseh and his
+Indians the British war in the West would have been a slight affair.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 251px;">
+<img src="images/i173.jpg" width="251" height="400" alt="ONE OF THE &quot;LONG KNIVES&quot;" title="" />
+<span class="caption">ONE OF THE &quot;LONG KNIVES&quot;</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Americans fitted out a large military force to retake Detroit, and
+overthrow the Indians who threatened the settlements. General Harrison
+was put in command of the expedition. He set out with his army in grand
+array, but was unable to reach Detroit because of the swampy condition
+of the land over which he must march. He was forced to camp on the
+Maumee River. His advance into the territory of the Indians thwarted the
+enterprise that Tecumseh had set on foot against Fort Wayne.</p>
+
+<p>While Harrison was encamped at Fort Meigs there were several encounters
+between the hostile forces. A division of Harrison's army, under General
+Winchester, having allowed itself to become separated from the main
+army, was attacked on the River Raisin by a party of British and
+Indians. After a fierce struggle the remnant of General Winchester's
+force surrendered to the British. In the absence of Tecumseh many of the
+prisoners were cruelly massacred by the Indian victors.</p>
+
+<p>Major Richardson's description of General Winchester's men gives us a
+good idea of the hardihood of the frontier soldiers, and shows us how
+they came to be called "Long Knives" by the Indians:</p>
+
+<p>"It was the depth of winter; but scarcely an individual was in
+possession of a great coat or cloak, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> few of them wore garments of
+wool of any description. They still retained their summer dress,
+consisting of cotton stuff of various colors shaped into frocks, and
+descending to the knee. Their trousers were of the same material. They
+were covered with slouched hats, worn bare by constant use, beneath
+which their long hair fell matted and uncombed over their cheeks; and
+these, together with the dirty blankets wrapped round their loins to
+protect them against the inclemency of the season, and fastened by broad
+leathern belts, into which were thrust axes and knives of an enormous
+length, gave them an air of wildness and savageness."</p>
+
+
+<p>Later, General Proctor, who had succeeded General Brock in command of
+the British forces at Detroit, laid siege to Fort Meigs. Tecumseh, who
+took part in the siege, was anxious to meet the enemy in open country.
+He sent the following unceremonious challenge to his old acquaintance:</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span></p><div class="blockquot"><p>"General Harrison: I have with me eight hundred braves. You have
+an equal number in your hiding place. Come out with them and give
+me battle. You talked like a brave when we met at Vincennes, and I
+respected you; but now you hide behind logs and in the earth, like
+a ground-hog. Give me answer.</p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap" style="margin-left: 6em;">Tecumseh</span>." </p></div>
+
+<p>When Harrison did venture to send out a detachment it was beaten by the
+Indians, and many of the Americans were made prisoners. For all the
+effort General Proctor made to prevent it, a terrible massacre might
+have followed this victory. Just as the Indians had begun to murder the
+prisoners, Tecumseh rode upon the scene of slaughter. When he saw what
+was going on he exclaimed in a passion of regret and indignation, "Oh,
+what will become of my Indians!" He rushed into the midst of the
+savages, rescued the man they were beginning to torture, and, with
+uplifted tomahawk, dared the whole horde to touch another prisoner. They
+cowered before him, deeply ashamed of their conduct.</p>
+
+<p>On discovering that General Proctor was present, Tecumseh demanded
+impatiently why he had not interfered to prevent the massacre. General
+Proctor answered that Tecumseh's Indians could not be controlled. To
+this Tecumseh responded with scorn: "Say, rather, you are unable to
+command. Go put on petticoats."</p>
+
+<p>In September, 1813, Commodore Perry's splendid victories on Lake Erie
+gave to the Americans control of the Lakes, and this made it impossible
+for the British to hold Detroit and Malden. Harrison was advancing with
+a land force to take these towns and General Proctor was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> eager to get
+out of his way. He began to prepare for retreat, but tried to conceal
+his purpose from Tecumseh. The latter's suspicions were aroused,
+however, and he demanded a council, in which he made his last formal
+speech. He spoke boldly and bitterly against General Proctor's course.
+He said:</p>
+
+<p>"You always told us you would never draw your foot off British ground;
+but now, father, we see that you are drawing back, and we are sorry to
+see our father doing so without seeing the enemy. We must compare our
+father's conduct to a fat dog that carries its tail on its back, but
+when affrighted it drops it between its legs and runs off. Father,
+listen! The Americans have not yet defeated us by land; neither are we
+sure they have done so by water; we therefore wish to remain here and
+fight our enemy, should they make their appearance. If they defeat us we
+will retreat with our father. * * * We now see our British father
+preparing to march out of his stronghold. Father, you have the arms and
+ammunition which our great father sent to his red children. If you have
+an idea of going away, give them to us and you may go and welcome. For
+us, our lives are in the hands of the Great Spirit. We are determined to
+defend our lands, and if it be His will, we wish to leave our bones upon
+them."</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the wish of Tecumseh, General Proctor kept his purpose
+to retreat. He promised, however, that if they were pursued by the
+Americans he would turn at the first favorable site and give them
+bat<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span>tle. Accordingly, Tecumseh accompanied the retreating General. He
+repeatedly urged Proctor to keep his promise and face the enemy. On the
+fifth of October, Proctor learned that the American forces were at his
+heels. Valor, therefore, seemed the better part of discretion, and,
+choosing a ridge between the Thames River and a swamp, he arranged his
+forces for battle.</p>
+
+<p>Colonel Richard M. Johnson managed the charge of the Americans. One
+division of his regiment, under command of his brother, attacked and
+quickly routed the British regulars under General Proctor. The other
+division he himself led against Tecumseh's Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians waited under protection of the thick brush until the
+horsemen were within close range; then in response to Tecumseh's war cry
+all fired. Johnson's advance guard was nearly cut down. The horses could
+not advance. Johnson ordered his men to dismount and a terrible struggle
+followed. Soon Tecumseh was shot, and, the Indians missing him, gave up
+the battle and fled. One of them afterwards described the defeat in a
+few words: "Tecumseh fell and we all ran."</p>
+
+<p>The war was now ended in the Northwest. The Americans had regained the
+posts taken by the British; they had subdued the Indians, and gained
+possession of the lands in the Wabash Valley. The power of the Prophet
+was destroyed. Tecumseh was dead. The Long Knives had crushed forever
+the Confederacy of Tecumseh, but it had taken upward of five million
+dollars and an army of twenty thousand men to do it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><br /><br /><a name="THE_STORY_OF_OSCEOLA" id="THE_STORY_OF_OSCEOLA"></a>THE STORY OF OSCEOLA</h2>
+
+<h3>BY FRANCES M. PERRY<br /><br /></h3><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span><br /><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="I_THE_EXODUS_OF_THE_RED_STICKS" id="I_THE_EXODUS_OF_THE_RED_STICKS"></a>I. THE EXODUS OF THE RED STICKS</h2>
+
+
+<p>The sun was low in the west and sent long shafts of light across the
+tops of the trees that bordered a quiet, shining lake in northern
+Florida. It shone upon a company of Indians who were straggling along
+the shore, and made their bright turbans and many colored calicoes look
+gay in spite of dirt and tatters.</p>
+
+<p>The company was a large one. In it were not only braves, but also squaws
+and pappooses, and a few negroes. They trooped along with the unhurried
+swiftness and easy disarray of men and women who have journeyed for many
+days and have many days of travel still before them.</p>
+
+<p>Here and there a strapping brave bestrode a horse, while his squaw
+trudged beside him, sharing with a black slave the burden of household
+goods. But for the most part ceremony had given way to necessity and the
+warriors went afoot, leaving the horses and mules to carry the old men,
+aged squaws, and young children, who were too feeble to walk.</p>
+
+<p>This was a band of Red Stick Indians who had left forever the camping
+grounds of their fathers on the Chattahoochee River, to escape the
+oppression of their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> powerful kinsmen, the Creek Indians. They had
+rebelled against the rule of the Creeks, because the Creeks refused them
+their share of plunder in battle, and laid claim to their lands and
+their slaves. The Red Sticks hated the Creeks so bitterly that they
+could no longer live near them. They were resolved to leave altogether
+the territory that the United States government recognized as belonging
+to the Creeks, and seek homes with the Seminoles or runaways in Florida.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 650px;">
+             <img src="images/i180top.jpg" style="margin-bottom: 1.5em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="264" width="650"/>
+
+    </div>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 264px;">
+             <img src="images/i180bottom.jpg" style="margin-top: -3.8em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="208" width="261"/>
+<br /><span class="caption">CREEK INDIANS</span>
+    </div>
+
+
+<p style="margin-top: 21.5em;">The Red Sticks had left the Creek country far behind them, and had
+arrived, as we have seen, in northern Florida. The land into which they
+had come was uncultivated, wild, and sweet. The lakes and rivers were
+full of fish; the forests were full of game; fruits and berries grew in
+abundance. Everything seemed to invite the wanderers to tarry there and
+build themselves homes. Still they marched on over rich brown fields,
+past dancing lakes and streams, over fertile hillsides<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span> shaded with live
+oak and magnolia. No spot, however beautiful, could induce them to pause
+for more than a few days' rest. Their object was not to find a pleasant
+camping ground but to escape the hated Creeks. They were bound for a
+distant swamp. On the borders of the Okefinokee marsh they planned to
+make their homes. There they would be reasonably safe from the enemy,
+and even if the Creeks should follow them there, the swamp would afford
+them a secure retreat.</p>
+
+<p>But this goal was still many miles away, and the fugitives were now
+pressing toward a little hill, where they expected to make a short halt.</p>
+
+<p>The young men were silent but alert. Now and again one raised his bow
+and brought down a goose or a wild turkey, and some youngster plunged
+into the thicket to find it and fetch it to his mother. Here and there
+were groups of women burdened with kettles and pans and bundles of old
+clothes, or carrying small children and raising a great clamor of
+chatter and laughter.</p>
+
+<p>A little apart from the main company a tall and handsome Indian woman
+plodded silently along by herself. The splendor of her kerchief had been
+faded by sun and rain; her skirts were torn by briers, but the necklace
+of silver beads wound many times about her throat retained its glory. On
+one hip rested a huge basket, packed and corded. Astride the other rode
+a sturdy-limbed boy of about four years of age. Nearly all day the child
+had run by her side without complaint. But toward evening he had begun
+to lag behind, until at last, when, after a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> good run, he caught up with
+his mother, he clutched her skirts to help himself along. Then she had
+stooped and picked him up with a sort of fierce tenderness and in a
+moment he had fallen asleep.</p>
+
+<p>Soon the Indians reached the hilltop where they were to camp for a few
+days. Their preparations for the night's rest consisted chiefly in
+building camp fires; for, though the days were warm, the nights were
+chilly. Besides, fires were needed to cook food and to keep the wild
+beasts away during the darkness. A small fire of light brush was made
+first. Then several large logs were placed about it, each with one end
+in the flame, so that they looked like the spokes of a great wheel
+radiating from a center of fire. As the ends of the logs burned away,
+the fiery ring at the center grew wider and dimmer. When a hotter fire
+was wanted, the logs were pushed toward the center till the glowing ends
+came together once more and burned briskly.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning after the Red Sticks went into camp on the hill, while
+others lounged and talked together, the woman wearing the necklace of
+silver beads still kept apart. She sat on the unburned end of a fire log
+and for a time paid no heed to the question her small son had repeated
+many times. At last she looked up and said: "Do not ask again about the
+baby with the blue eyes. Do not think of her. She does not cry for you.
+She plays with little Creek pappooses. She is not your sister any more.
+Go, play at shooting turkeys with black Jim. He loves you like a
+brother."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The woman was the daughter of a chief. She had married a man of her own
+tribe, but after he fell in battle she married a Scotch trader, named
+Powell, who lived among the Creeks. When the time came for the flight of
+the Red Sticks her heart turned to her people. She enjoyed too much the
+glory of being a trader's wife to give up her position and her home
+without much bitterness. But she was too true an Indian to desert her
+tribe. As her husband had no notion of leaving his trading station among
+the Creeks, she had left him and her blue-eyed baby and had come with
+her kindred, bringing with her her little son, a true Indian, the child
+of her first husband.</p>
+
+<p>The boy played at shooting wild turkeys with black Jim that day, and
+many times afterward. As time passed he thought less and less of the
+blue-eyed sister and more and more of his comrade with a black skin.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="II_THE_FLORIDA_HOME" id="II_THE_FLORIDA_HOME"></a>II. THE FLORIDA HOME</h2>
+
+
+<p>These Red Sticks were not the first wanderers who had sought homes and
+safety in Florida. For some fifty years bands of Indians enticed by the
+rich hunting grounds, or driven by the persecutions of the Creeks, had
+left their kindred in Georgia and Alabama to try their fortunes in
+Florida.</p>
+
+<p>They had found other tribes in possession of the peninsula, but the
+newcomers were more warlike and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> soon made themselves and their claim to
+the land respected by the natives. Indeed, the immigrants soon came to
+be looked upon as the ruling people. They were called Seminoles, which
+means runaways.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<p>The Seminoles would not attend Creek councils. They refused to be bound
+by treaties made by the Creeks. In all ways they wished to be considered
+a separate and distinct people.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 278px;">
+             <img src="images/i184top.jpg" style="margin-bottom: 1.5em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="226" width="278"/>
+
+    </div>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 550px;">
+             <img src="images/i184bottom.jpg" style="margin-top: -3.8em; margin-bottom: -1em; margin-left: 0em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="425" width="550"/>
+<br /><br /><span class="caption">SEMINOLE INDIANS</span>
+    </div>
+
+
+
+<p style="margin-top: 2em;">Among the Florida Indians there lived a people of another race, the
+Maroons or free negroes. In those days Florida was owned by Spain.
+Therefore, American slaves once safely within its borders were free men.
+They became Spanish subjects and their former masters had no power to
+reclaim them. Florida formed a convenient refuge, and slaves were sure
+of welcome there, especially if they were willing to exchange a white
+master for a red one. Most negroes were glad to do this, for the slaves
+of the Indians were happy, independent slaves. Their chief duty to their
+masters was to raise for them a few bushels of corn each year. Though
+the Indians in general regarded themselves as superior to the negroes,
+the two races of exiles felt strong sympathy and affection for each
+other. They lived in the same manner, observing common customs. They
+fought together against a common enemy. They even intermarried.</p>
+
+<p>But the country was extensive and only thinly settled; and so,
+notwithstanding the frequent increase of their force by Indians and
+negroes, warriors were still more valuable than land in the eyes of the
+Seminoles. The tribe of Red Sticks that went to Florida in 1808 was
+received with great friendliness.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: 3em;">The Indian woman with the silver beads soon married another brave, and
+went to live on a "hammock" near Fort King, not far from the place where
+Ocala now stands. She took with her her son. He was called Powell by
+some who remembered his stepfather, the trader. But his mother called
+him Osceola, which means<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> the rising sun. Osceola grew up loving Florida
+as his home. And, indeed, it was a home that any Indian might have
+loved.</p>
+
+<p>The climate was healthful for the Indians, and so warm and pleasant that
+clothing was a matter of small concern. The soil was rich, and corn and
+koontee were to be had in abundance. The forests were full of deer and
+small game.</p>
+
+<p>A few skins thrown over some poles afforded sufficient protection for
+ordinary weather. But if rains made a more substantial dwelling
+necessary the palmetto furnished material for posts, elevated floor, and
+thatched roof.</p>
+
+<p>Not least among the advantages of the Florida home were its wonderful
+waterways leading off through dense mysterious forests, where strange
+birds called and strange plants grew&mdash;a labyrinth full of danger for the
+intruder, but a safe and joyous retreat for the Seminole floating on the
+dark water in his dugout.</p>
+
+<p>Though the Indians could have lived comfortably in this country without
+much effort, the Seminoles did not choose to live in idleness. They saw
+the flourishing farms of the Spanish settlers and wished to have farms
+of their own.</p>
+
+<p>So it happened that when Osceola was a boy he saw the Indians around him
+make the beginnings of what they believed would be permanent homes. He
+saw them cultivate the soil and tend their herds of cattle and horses
+and hogs. He watched them build their dwellings and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span>
+storehouses&mdash;palmetto lodges without walls for themselves, substantial
+log cribs for their corn and potatoes.</p>
+
+<p>When a child, he imitated not only the warriors and hunters, but made
+cornfields of sand with tall grass spears for cornstalks, and built
+"camps" and corncribs out of little sticks.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i187.jpg" width="600" height="391" alt="FISHING WITH A SPEAR" title="" />
+<span class="caption">FISHING WITH A SPEAR</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>As he grew older he often hoed the corn and ground the koontee and drove
+the cattle. He did cheerfully the work of a farmer, though he liked best
+to hunt and fish and explore. He had a strong boat made by burning out
+the heart of a large cypress log. In this he often glided swiftly and
+noiselessly down some stream where the salmon trout lived. He held in
+his right hand a tough<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> spear, made of a charred reed with a barbed end.
+When he saw a fish almost as large as himself close at hand he hurled
+his harpoon at it with all his force. And the fish darted off, leaving a
+trail of crimson in the clear water and dragging the boat behind it; for
+the boy clung to the end of the spear and soused the wounded fish in the
+water until its strength was exhausted. Then with the help of a friend
+he dragged it into the boat, and began to watch for another fish.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was so energetic that he enjoyed work for its own sake. He had
+unusual endurance, and could keep at work or play long after others were
+tired. He was a famous ball player, and distinguished himself at the
+green corn dances. There he drank without flinching such large draughts
+of the bitter "black drink" that he was nick-named by some "Asseola,"
+which means "black drink."</p>
+
+<p>Once when acting as a guide for a party of Spanish horsemen he asked
+them why they rode so slowly. They told him that as he was unmounted
+they traveled easily to accommodate him. He laughed and replied that
+they might go as fast as they liked, they would hear no complaint from
+him. At this they spurred their horses to a livelier pace. Then seeing
+that Osceola still seemed to be making little effort they rode faster
+and faster to test his swiftness and strength. They were soon convinced
+that the young Indian had made no idle boast, and rode the entire day as
+if all the members of the party had had horses. When they reached the
+end of their journey Osceola seemed less tired than the horsemen.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Osceola was not only active and enduring. He was also generous and
+helpful. His bright face, his frank manner, and true kindness made him a
+great favorite with all who knew him, Indians, negroes, or white men.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="III_THE_FIRST_SEMINOLE_WAR" id="III_THE_FIRST_SEMINOLE_WAR"></a>III. THE FIRST SEMINOLE WAR</h2>
+
+
+<p>When Osceola was a light-hearted boy of twelve, with kind impulses
+toward every one, something happened to rouse in him a bitter hatred, a
+thirst for blood.</p>
+
+<p>During the War of 1812 large numbers of negroes in the South took
+advantage of the general excitement to make good their escape from
+bondage. The Indians welcomed them and shielded them from bands of slave
+hunters that made sallies into the Spanish territory for the purpose of
+recapturing them. In this the Indians were aided by the British, who saw
+an opportunity to make trouble for the republic on its southern border,
+while the United States troops were occupied on the Canadian frontier. A
+British agent built a strong fort on Spanish soil on the Appalachicola
+River. After the close of the war the British withdrew and left the
+fort, well filled with ammunition, in the hands of the Indians and
+negroes.</p>
+
+<p>The Seminoles and their negro friends rejoiced over this. They could not
+foresee the doom that this fort was to bring upon them.</p>
+
+<p>For many years the Southern people had complained<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> bitterly against the
+Seminole Indians for "stealing," as they said, their slaves. The
+"stealing" consisted in receiving and protecting runaways. The feeling
+against the Indians was so strong that expeditions into Spanish
+territory had been made by people on the frontier to capture slaves and
+punish the Seminoles. But this fort would now be a hindrance to such
+forays, and the slaveholders demanded that it should be destroyed.
+They were so persistent in their demands that General Andrew Jackson
+gave General Gaines directions to invade Spanish territory with United
+States troops to blow up the fort and return the "stolen negroes" to
+their rightful owners.</p>
+
+<p>For miles up and down the Appalachicola River the land along the banks
+was cultivated and divided into small farms, where Indians and negroes
+lived. When these farmers learned of the approach of the enemy they fled
+with their wives and children to the fort for protection. Over three
+hundred men, women, and children crowded into the fort, feeling sure of
+safety. But when the troops attacked them by land and water, and the
+cannon roared about the walls of the fort, they were panic-stricken. The
+women and children shrieked and wrung their hands. The men did not know
+what to do; they rent the air with fearful yells, but made little
+attempt at resistance. What would they not have given to exchange the
+fort walls for an open boat and the endless waterways of the forest?</p>
+
+<p>They were not left long to fear and regret. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> enemy promptly
+accomplished its purpose. A redhot ball reached the powder magazine of
+the fort. A terrible explosion followed, destroying the fort and
+bringing instant death to two hundred and seventy of its inmates.</p>
+
+<p>The story of the horrible death, of the mutilated bodies of the injured
+men carried off on the boats of the white men, spread all over Florida.
+At every camp fire the tale was told, and all the old savage thirst for
+vengeance was stirred in the hearts of men who had begun to care for
+crops and herds and to dream of days of peace.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians knew that peace with the white man was best for them. But
+Indian blood had been shed and peace was impossible. Preparations began
+at once for what was afterward known in history as the First Seminole
+War. The Indians bought arms and powder from Spanish and British
+traders. They practised shooting. They explored the country for safe
+retreats and excellent ambushes. They raised their crops and harvested
+them. A year passed before the first stroke of vengeance fell.</p>
+
+<p>A boat carrying supplies to Fort Scott was surprised by Indians, and its
+crew, passengers, and military escort were overpowered and killed. The
+War Department had been expecting some hostile act on the part of the
+Seminoles, and was ready for war. The massacre in the vicinity of Fort
+Scott is usually regarded as the cause of the war of 1818, though it was
+not without its cause, as has been shown.</p>
+
+<p>General Jackson promptly invaded Florida with a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span> strong force of United
+States troops and Creek Indians, to punish the Seminoles. He was met by
+a motley crowd of Indians and negroes. Even children joined their
+fathers to resist the approach of the whites and Creeks. Though they did
+not present an imposing appearance, the Florida Indians and their allies
+proved to be desperate fighters.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 272px;">
+<img src="images/i192.jpg" width="272" height="350" alt="ANDREW JACKSON" title="" />
+<span class="caption">ANDREW JACKSON</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>General Jackson first moved against the settlements on the
+Appalachicola. The Indians and negroes made a stand and fought a battle,
+but were obliged to retreat. Jackson then secured the provisions the
+Indians had stored there, burned the villages and pushed on to St. Marks
+and then to the valley of the Suwanee.</p>
+
+<p>On this march he was much troubled by Indians who hung along his path,
+making frequent swift attacks and then vanishing in the wilderness. At
+Old Town a battle was fought in which the Maroons gave the Indians brave
+assistance. Here again the forces of Jackson were victorious. After
+suffering heavy losses, the Indians and their allies retreated. They
+were pursued by a detachment of Jackson's men and driven far to the
+south.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Indians had taken the precaution to move the negro women and
+children out of reach of the American army, fearing that they would be
+captured and carried back into slavery, but they had been less careful
+to conceal their own squaws and pappooses, and Jackson made hundreds of
+them captives.</p>
+
+<p>The battle of Old Town closed the war. Jackson, feeling that the Indians
+had been thoroughly beaten, withdrew from Florida, leaving fire and
+desolation in his track.</p>
+
+<p>The boy Osceola, strong and straight, and with the spirit of an eagle,
+had played a man's part in the war. He combined with the reckless
+courage of youth a determination that made him capable of good service
+in Indian warfare. He was a good scout and an unexcelled messenger.
+Swift and light, and sure as the arrow he shot from his bow, he had
+carried signals from chief to chief, he had crept as a spy past the
+pickets of the enemy, he had acted as runner and guide, taking women and
+children from exposed villages to the secret recesses of the forest. Nor
+had his youth exempted him from doing the more deadly work of war.</p>
+
+<p>The Seminoles had lost heavily in the war, but as a nation they had
+gained some things of great value. The hardships they had suffered
+together gave the various tribes a stronger feeling of fellowship than
+they had had before. Black men had fought shoulder to shoulder with red,
+and would henceforth be less their inferiors and more their friends.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IV_GRIEVANCES" id="IV_GRIEVANCES"></a>IV. GRIEVANCES</h2>
+
+
+<p>Not many days passed after General Jackson withdrew his army from
+Florida before the Seminoles were again established on the fertile lands
+from which they had been driven. They brought with them their flocks and
+herds. Before long their simple dwellings were re-built and the Seminole
+villages seemed as prosperous as ever.</p>
+
+<p>The slaveholders of the South felt that Florida was still a dangerous
+neighbor. They saw that to mend matters it was necessary that Florida
+should be made a part of the United States in order that the government
+should have authority over the Seminoles. So, in the year 1821, through
+the influence of Southern statesmen the territory of Florida was
+purchased from Spain for five million dollars.</p>
+
+<p>Now that the people of the United States owned Florida they wished to
+occupy the land, but the Seminoles claimed it. Many were unwilling to
+recognize the justice of this claim, however; for it was held that as
+the Indians were not native tribes but were Creeks they should be
+compelled to go back to Georgia and live with their kindred.</p>
+
+<p>This proposal gave the Indians great alarm. They expected momentarily
+that an attempt would be made to expel them from their homes. By
+spreading a report that Jackson was coming to seize their property and
+drive them back to live with the Creeks, bands of lawless<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> men created
+such a panic among the Indians that they fled into the forests and
+swamps, leaving their provisions and property for the plunderers to
+carry off.</p>
+
+<p>Border troubles increased until action could not be postponed longer. A
+council was called at Camp Moultrie in 1823, where a treaty was made
+between the United States government and the Seminole Indians.</p>
+
+<p>By the terms of this treaty the Indians were to give up all their land
+north of the Withlacoochee River, except a few tracts reserved for
+chiefs. They were bound to stay within the limits of the lands assigned
+them, and if found in the northern part of the territory without
+passports were to suffer thirty-nine stripes on the bare back, and give
+up their firearms. They were also pledged to assist in recapturing
+fugitive slaves, who in the future should seek refuge among them.</p>
+
+<p>In return for what they had given up the Seminoles were to receive from
+the United States at once, provisions for one year and six thousand
+dollars worth of cattle and hogs; and for twenty years thereafter, an
+annuity of five thousand dollars was to be paid to them. They were also
+assured that their rights would be protected. The United States promised
+"to take the Florida Indians under their care and patronage, and afford
+them protection against all persons whatsoever," and to "restrain and
+prevent all white persons from hunting, settling, or otherwise
+intruding, upon said lands."</p>
+
+<p>The effects of this treaty were neither beneficial nor lasting. The
+Indians were moved from their homes<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> to the southern part of the
+peninsula, where the land was poor. While they had once been happy and
+prosperous, they now became miserable and destitute, and dependent on
+the annual allowance from the government. The lands they relinquished
+were soon occupied by white settlers, and the red men and the white were
+again neighbors. Of course, the border troubles were renewed. The white
+men would never be satisfied until the Indians were expelled from the
+peninsula altogether.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians were aware that the white settlers were eager to have them
+sent away. They tried to keep peace and avoid trouble. If any of their
+number violated the treaty, the Indians punished him themselves, even
+inflicting the ignominious thirty-nine stripes. The white men, however,
+were bent on making mischief. Indeed, one of the lawmakers of the
+Territory said frankly: "The only course, therefore, which remains for
+us to rid ourselves of them, is to adopt such a mode of treatment
+towards them as will induce them to acts that will justify their
+expulsion by force."</p>
+
+<p>The Indians had yielded many points for the sake of peace, but they were
+determined not to leave Florida. They believed that if they could abide
+by the terms of the treaty of Camp Moultrie for its full period of
+twenty years the United States government would admit their right to
+stay in Florida permanently.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was most active in trying to preserve peace. He had now grown to
+manhood. He had married Morning-Dew, the daughter of a chief, and they
+were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span> living together happily near Fort King. Osceola was not a chief,
+but he was well known and liked among the Indians. He used his influence
+to keep the rash young men from violating the treaty. He wished to see
+the Seminoles do their full duty to the white people, not because he was
+fond of the white race, but because he thought it well for the Indians
+that the peace should not be broken.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 298px;">
+<img src="images/i197.jpg" width="298" height="350" alt="OSCEOLA" title="" />
+<span class="caption">OSCEOLA</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>His eagerness to keep the Indians in order made him greatly liked at
+Fort King. His services were often demanded there as guide or informer.
+But while he made every effort to keep the Indians from doing wrong, he
+did not think the white men blameless and said so frankly. He accused
+them of failure to punish men who were guilty of committing crimes
+against the Indians, of unfairness in seizing negroes, of theft of
+property, and of withholding annuities. Osceola's was a good kind of
+patriotism&mdash;he did not consider his enemies<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> right, but he wanted his
+own people to be right, and did his best to make them so.</p>
+
+<p>But Indians, who are by nature revengeful, could not be expected to
+endure wrongs without some retaliation. Their complaints of injustice
+were met by the proposition that they move beyond the Mississippi, out
+of the white man's reach.</p>
+
+<p>The nature of their grievances is clearly shown in a "talk" which Chief
+John Hicks sent to the President in January, 1829. He said:</p>
+
+<p>" * * * We are all Seminoles here together. We want no long talk; we wish
+to have it short and good. We are Indians and the whites think we have
+no sense; but what our minds are, we wish to have our big father know.</p>
+
+<p>"When I returned from Washington, all my warriors were scattered&mdash;in
+attempting to gather my people I had to spill blood midway in my path. I
+had supposed that the Micanopy people had done all the mischief, and I
+went with my warriors to meet the Governor with two. When I met the
+Governor at Suwanee he seemed to be afraid; I shook hands with him. I
+gathered all my people and found that none was missing, and that the
+mischief had been done by others. The Governor had them put in prison. I
+was told that if one man kills another we must not kill any other man in
+his place, but find the person who committed the murder and kill him.
+One of my people was killed and his murderer's bones are now white at
+Tallahassee. Another one that had done<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> us mischief was killed at
+Alpaha. A black man living among the whites has killed one of my people
+and I wish to know who is to give me redress. Will my big father answer?
+When our law is allowed to operate, we are quick; but they say the black
+man is subject to the laws of the white people; now I want to see if the
+white people do as they say. We wish our big father to say whether he
+will have the black man tried for the murder of one of our people. If he
+will give him up to us, the sun shall not move before he has justice
+done to him. We work for justice, as well as the white people do. I wish
+my friend and father to answer. In answer we may receive a story, for
+men going backwards and forwards have not carried straight talks.</p>
+
+<p>"I agreed to send away all the black people who had no masters, and I
+have done it; but still they are sending to me for negroes. When an
+Indian has bought a black man they come and take him away again, so that
+we have no money and no negroes, too. A white man sells us a negro and
+then turns around and claims him again, and our father orders us to give
+him up. There is a negro girl in Charleston that belongs to my
+daughter&mdash;her name is Patience. I want her restored to me. She has a
+husband here; she has a child about a year old. I want my big father to
+cause them to be sent to me, to do as he compels me to do, when I have
+just claims. If my father is a true friend, he will send me my property
+by our agent, who has gone to Washington. I have been told by the
+Governor that all runaway negroes must<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> be given up, but that all those
+taken in war, were good property to us; but they have taken away those
+taken in war, and those we have raised from children. * * *</p>
+
+<p>"Will my father listen now to the voice of his children? He told me we
+were to receive two thousand dollars' worth of corn&mdash;where is it? We
+have received scarcely any, not even half, according to our judgment, of
+what was intended for us. If the Governor and the white people have done
+justly in this we wish our big father to let us know. We were promised
+presents for twenty-one years; we have received nothing but a few
+promises. It seems that they have disappeared before they reached us, or
+that our big father did not intend to give them to us. We were promised
+money, but we have not received a cent for this year. What has become of
+it? We wish our big father to ask the Governor. The white people say
+that we owe them, which is not true. We did take some goods of an Indian
+trader, Mr. Marsh, to whom the Governor had promised part of our money.
+We took the goods because we were afraid we should never get what was
+ours in any other way; they amounted to fifteen hundred dollars. We
+understand that Mr. Bellamy has received from the Governor sixteen
+hundred dollars; what is it for? The Indians do not owe him
+anything,&mdash;he has lost no property by us,&mdash;we have taken none of his
+cattle. If a tiger has killed one, it is charged to the Indians. If they
+stray away and are lost for a time, it is charged to the Indians. He has
+lost nothing by us; but my people have suffered loss<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span> from him. He has
+taken all the Indians' hogs that he could lay his hands on. * * * He has
+taken hogs&mdash;one hundred head&mdash;from one man. We can not think of giving
+away sixteen hundred dollars for nothing. According to the white man's
+laws, if a man takes that which does not belong to him, he has to return
+it and pay for the damages. Will our great father see that this man
+restores to us what he has unjustly taken from us, for we look to our
+big father to fulfill his promises and give us the presents and money
+that are due to us. We understand that Colonel Piles has received some
+of the money that is due to us; he is a good man; when we were perishing
+with hunger he gave us to eat and drink. He is entitled to what he has
+received. It appears that the Seminoles who have done no mischief, have
+to suffer, as well as the few that have been guilty&mdash;this does not
+appear to be right to us. By stopping our money, the Governor has
+prevented our paying just debts, the debts we owe to the licensed Indian
+traders, who have trusted us under the expectation that we would pay
+them when we received our money. Our father has put two agents to look
+over us; our agent, Colonel Humphries, has not seen any of the money or
+presents that belong to us. * * *</p>
+
+<p>"I am getting to be very old, and I wish my bones to be here. I do not
+wish to remove to any other land, according to what I told my father.
+When great men say anything to each other, they should have good
+memories. Why does Colonel White plague me so much<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span> about going over the
+Mississippi? We hurt nothing on this land. I have told him so before."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="V_THE_TREATY_OF_PAYNES_LANDING" id="V_THE_TREATY_OF_PAYNES_LANDING"></a>V. THE TREATY OF PAYNE'S LANDING</h2>
+
+
+<p>One day when Osceola was at Fort King he was told that a great council
+was to be held at Payne's Landing, about twenty miles from the fort. The
+Indians' "white father" had sent special messengers to talk with the
+Seminoles, and all the leading men of the nation were summoned to come
+to hear his words.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola knew that the message was about the Seminoles' leaving Florida.
+He was bitterly opposed to that project. He knew that some of the old
+chiefs were very easily influenced, and that the white men had a way of
+getting them to make promises in council which they afterwards
+regretted. He therefore wished that none of the Indians would attend the
+council. Then no action could be taken.</p>
+
+<p>He went around advising men not to go to Payne's Landing. But the white
+men sent their messengers near and far, calling in the chiefs and head
+men. Early in May the streams were full of canoes and the forest paths
+were traveled by bands of Indians on their way to Payne's Landing.
+Seeing this, Osceola decided to go to the council himself, and do what
+he could there to prevent the chiefs from making any rash agreements.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was not a chief, but he was a recognized leader<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> of the young
+men, and as he sat in the council house, stern and alert, many a glance
+was cast in his direction to see how he was impressed by the white man's
+talk.</p>
+
+<p>He listened to the interpreter eagerly and learned that the President
+wished the Seminoles to give up the land that had been reserved for them
+by the treaty of Camp Moultrie. In exchange they were to occupy a tract
+of land of the same extent west of the Mississippi River in Arkansas
+among the Creek Indians. A delegation of chiefs was to visit the country
+and if "they" were satisfied with the country, the Seminoles were to be
+transported to it in three divisions, one in 1833, one in 1834, and the
+last in 1835. Something was said about the payment of annuities, about
+the distribution of blankets and homespun frocks, and compensation for
+cattle and slaves stolen by the whites. But the point that concerned
+Osceola most of all was that the Seminoles were expected to leave
+Florida and live among the Creeks west of the Mississippi! Still there
+was no reason to be distressed about it, he thought, for it was to be
+done only if the Florida Indians were willing to make the change, and he
+knew that the Seminoles would never consent to leave Florida. With arms
+folded across his breast and a calm eye he watched one chief after
+another take the pen and make at the end of the treaty his mark or
+signature.</p>
+
+<p>A short time afterwards seven chiefs and the faithful negro interpreter,
+Abraham, left for Arkansas to examine the new country. The delegation
+returned in April, 1833.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Then the Indians asked, "When will the white men meet the red to hear
+what they think about going towards the setting sun?"</p>
+
+<p>"There will be no council," said the agent. "You promised to go if the
+delegates liked the land. They like the land. Now you must go without
+any more talk."</p>
+
+<p>"No, no! We promised to go if we were suited with the land when they
+told us about it!" exclaimed the Indians.</p>
+
+<p>The agent repeated, "You gave your word to your white father that you
+would go if the country pleased your chiefs. The chiefs were well
+pleased." Then he added, "They met your white father's messengers on the
+new land and pledged their faith that you would go. They promised for
+you. They signed another treaty. You agreed to do as your chiefs wished.
+Your chiefs have promised your white father. There is no help for it.
+You must go."</p>
+
+<p>When Osceola heard this he was in a rage. The white men had got the
+chiefs away from their own people and induced them to make promises they
+had no right to make. What right had Charley A. Mathla to promise for
+him or to promise for Micanopy, the head chief of the nation?</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was not the only indignant one. All the Indians were in a fury
+with the government agents. They felt that they had been tricked, caught
+by a phrase they did not understand. They believed that undue influence
+had been brought to bear upon their chiefs. Had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span> the delegates been
+allowed to return to Florida to give their report, some Indians would
+have heard it with favor, but all were angered because the chiefs had
+been influenced to make an additional treaty at Fort Gibson without
+consulting their people. But the Indians were usually as severe in their
+judgment of their own race as in their condemnation of another and they
+did not spare the chiefs who had signed the additional treaty. Men and
+women alike held them in supreme contempt. They scolded, they ridiculed
+till the men in self defense declared that they had not signed the
+treaty, and gave so many reasons why the Seminoles should not go west
+that the spirit against emigration was more positive than ever.</p>
+
+<p>The faith of even those Indians who had striven to keep peace with the
+United States was destroyed by the "Additional Treaty" and a general
+feeling of ill will prevailed. The Indians refused to surrender negroes
+claimed as slaves by the white people, and were so hostile that in 1834
+General Jackson, then president of the United States, determined to
+force them to leave if necessary. He had the treaties ratified by the
+Senate, appointed a new Indian agent, and ordered that preparations for
+the removal of the Indians should be pushed with all speed.</p>
+
+<p>In October the new Indian agent called a council. This time Osceola went
+about urging the Indians to attend and advising the chiefs about their
+talks. In the council the slender, energetic, young warrior sat next to
+the fat, inactive old chief, Micanopy. Osceola had no right to speak in
+council, but there was no man there who<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span> had more influence. If Micanopy
+wavered under the stern eye of the white man, he heard the voice of
+Osceola in his ear and did the young man's bidding.</p>
+
+<p>Micanopy denied signing the treaty of Payne's Landing. When shown his
+mark he declared that he had not touched the pen, though he had been on
+the point of doing so, "for," he said, "the treaty was to examine the
+country and I believed that when the delegation returned, the report
+would be unfavorable. It is a white man's treaty, and the white man did
+not make the Indian understand it as he meant it." He finished by saying
+that he had agreed to the treaty of Camp Moultrie and that by the terms
+of that treaty southern Florida belonged to the Seminoles for twenty
+years, scarcely half of which had passed.</p>
+
+<p>Other chiefs spoke and said bitter things. The agent became angry and
+threatened to withhold the annuity unless the Indians signed a paper
+agreeing to leave without further trouble.</p>
+
+<p>At this Osceola's eyes flashed fire; he sprang up like a tiger and
+declared that he did not care if the Indians never received another
+dollar of the white man's money; he and his warriors would never sign
+away their liberty and land for gold. Then, drawing his knife from his
+belt, he raised it high in the air and plunged it through document and
+table, exclaiming, "The only treaty I will sign is with this!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VI_HOSTILITIES" id="VI_HOSTILITIES"></a>VI. HOSTILITIES</h2>
+
+
+<p>The new Indian agent, General Thompson, had marked Osceola as a man of
+power. He thought it wise to make friends with him. So when Osceola went
+to Fort King he was cordially received by the agent. Once on returning
+from New York the latter brought Osceola a beautiful new rifle, which
+was worth one hundred dollars. Osceola was pleased with the rifle and
+pleased with this evidence of General Thompson's regard for him. But he
+was not to be bought by gifts to forsake the cause of the Seminoles.</p>
+
+<p>He saw that the white men were actually getting ready to move the
+Indians; they were preparing transports at Tampa and making ready for
+the sale of the Indians' cattle. Another council was called at Fort
+King.</p>
+
+<p>On the night before this council, Osceola spoke to a gathering of chiefs
+who had met secretly in Micanopy's village. He told them that, whatever
+happened in council, they must be prepared to resist force with force
+should the white men attempt to compel the Indians to emigrate. They
+must take advantage of every opportunity to buy powder and lead, to
+increase their store of food and ammunition. He advised them to declare
+in council their wish for peace, but to maintain firmly that they were
+determined never to leave Florida.</p>
+
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 638px;">
+             <img src="images/i208top.jpg" style="margin-bottom: -2em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="510" width="638"/>
+
+    </div>
+<div class="figright" style="width: 221px;">
+             <img src="images/i208bottom.jpg" style="margin-top: -2em; margin-bottom: -1em; margin-left: 0em;" alt="CREEK INDIANS" height="135" width="221"/>
+<br /><br /><span class="caption">ARREST OF OSCEOLA</span>
+    </div>
+
+
+<p>At the council the next day, Jumper acting as spokesman for the Indians
+expressed these views. When he had finished, the agent arose and rebuked
+the Indians<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span> for breaking their word. His charge of dishonor excited the
+Indians and many lost their tempers. In the confusion that followed,
+General Clinch threatened to order in the soldiers if the Indians did
+not sign the compact to leave Florida, without further parley. This
+threat proved to be effectual. Several chiefs signed, but three of the
+leading chiefs refused to do so. For punishment General Thompson ordered
+that their names should be stricken from the list of chiefs. This
+enraged the Indians and the agent realized that he had lost more than he
+had gained by the council. He sent<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span> word to Washington that the Indians
+were in no mood to leave Florida and that there would be bloodshed if an
+attempt was made to enforce the treaty of Payne's Landing. Accordingly,
+the date for embarking was changed to a more distant date.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola made good use of the delay in adding to his war supplies; but
+one day he was refused powder. This indignity surprised and offended
+him. A refusal to give an Indian firearms or powder was evidence of
+distrust, and Osceola was used to respectful usage. "Am I a negro, a
+slave?" he exclaimed. "My skin is dark, but not black. I am a red man, a
+Seminole. The white man shall not treat me as if I were black. I will
+make the white man red with blood and then let him grow black in the sun
+and rain." His language became so violent that General Thompson ordered
+him put in irons and cast into prison.</p>
+
+<p>Alone in the dark, Osceola ceased to rave. Thoughts of a terrible
+vengeance soothed him. He planned it all carefully. After several days
+had passed he seemed repentant. He asked to see General Thompson and
+said he had spoken in anger. He expressed his friendship for the agent
+and his willingness to assist in persuading the Indians to live up to
+their treaty.</p>
+
+<p>After he was liberated Osceola seemed as good as his word. His manner at
+the Fort changed. He even brought in two or three sub-chiefs to sign the
+treaty. The agent was completely deceived and believed he had gained a
+powerful ally.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the Indians learned that Osceola had been put in irons they felt
+his wrong as their own and wished to visit the agent with swift
+punishment. But Osceola looked at the place on his wrist where the
+fetters had been and said: "That is my affair. Leave General Thompson to
+me. Your part is to see that no Indian leaves Florida."</p>
+
+<p>Almost daily something happened to show both Indians and white men that
+they could no longer live together in peace. One evening while a little
+company of Indians was camping in a hammock cooking supper, a party of
+white men came upon them, seized their rifles, examined their camping
+equipment and then fell to beating them. While they were occupied in
+this way some friends of the campers came up and seeing the plight of
+their comrades opened fire on the white men. The latter returned the
+fire and killed an Indian.</p>
+
+<p>While the Indians blamed the white men for this affair the white men
+held the Indians responsible for it. They ordered out the militia to
+protect the citizens and punish the Indians. Both parties believed that
+the time had come for definite action. By definite action the white men
+meant the transportation of the Seminoles, the Indians meant war. The
+former pushed forward preparations at Tampa, and issued a summons to all
+Indians to come in, sell their cattle and pledge themselves to assemble
+on the first of January 1836 for their journey. The latter held a
+council and decided that while the Indians promised to assemble at the
+beginning of the year it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span> should be for war rather than emigration. They
+further agreed that the first Indian to sell his cattle and prepare in
+good faith to go should be punished with death.</p>
+
+<p>As might be inferred from this decision, there were some Seminoles whose
+loyalty to their race could not be counted on. A chief, Charley A.
+Mathla, who had been one of the delegates to visit Arkansas, was one of
+these. As he was known to be on good terms with the white people,
+Osceola ordered that he should be closely watched. He soon learned that
+there was only too much ground for his suspicion. Charley was getting
+ready to leave; he had driven his cattle to Tampa and sold them to the
+white people. If he were allowed to go unpunished other wavering ones
+would soon follow his example. Osceola wished his warriors to know from
+the start that punishment for disobedience to him would be more swift
+and terrible than anything they need fear for disobeying the white man.</p>
+
+<p>With a few faithful followers he hastened through the wilderness towards
+the village of Charley A. Mathla. There scouts brought him word that
+Chief Charley was on his way home from Tampa. The war party hid among
+the trees where the trail to the village passed through a hammock. They
+had not waited long before the chief came swiftly along the path.
+Osceola rose and fired. His comrades followed his example. Charley A.
+Mathla fell forward on the path without a word, dead.</p>
+
+<p>One of the party seized a handkerchief that the dead chief grasped in
+his hand and showed Osceola<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span> that it was full of money. Osceola took the
+offered treasure and cast the glittering coins far from him. The Indians
+watched them disappear among the green leaves with surprise and regret.
+But their leader said, "Do not touch his gold; it was bought with the
+red man's blood."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VII_THE_WAR_OPENED" id="VII_THE_WAR_OPENED"></a>VII. THE WAR OPENED</h2>
+
+
+<p>In a short time news of the murder of Charley A. Mathla reached Fort
+King. With it came a rumor that the Indians were holding councils of war
+in the villages of the Big Swamp. But it was impossible for the agent to
+get definite information, as the woods were full of hostile Indian
+scouts. The runners who were on friendly terms with the men at the fort
+feared to venture beyond the protection of its guns lest they should
+suffer the fate of Charley A. Mathla.</p>
+
+<p>After the shooting, Osceola and his followers repaired to the fastnesses
+of Wahoo Swamp, where for some time Indians had been assembling from
+exposed villages. Here were collected vast stores of ammunition and food
+supplies, herds of cattle, women and children and old men, both red and
+black, and many warriors of the two races.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was now recognized as a war chief. In council no one was
+listened to more eagerly than he. While addressing the assembled
+warriors he said: "Remember, it is not upon women and children that we
+make war and draw the scalping knife. It is upon men. Let<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span> us act like
+men. Do not touch the money of the white man or his clothes. We do not
+fight for these things. The Seminole is fighting for his hunting
+grounds."</p>
+
+<p>Definite plans were made for opening the war at once. Negroes living in
+the neighborhood of Fort Brooke near Tampa had brought word that Major
+E. L. Dade was to conduct re&euml;nforcements from Fort Brooke to Fort King.
+The detachment would pass on its march within a short distance of Wahoo
+Swamp and might easily be surprised and overpowered. Plans were formed
+for such an attack. Several days would probably pass, however, before
+Major Dade's force, encumbered with cannon and marching through marshes,
+would reach the point best suited for the Indians' attack.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Osceola must make a visit to Fort King. There was a
+white man there whose scalp he had sworn should be the first one taken
+in the war. With a small band of warriors he started on his errand of
+vengeance.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola knew General Thompson's habits. He was accustomed to take a walk
+after dinner while he smoked a cigar. Frequently he walked some distance
+from the fort, going out towards the sutler's house, where he sometimes
+had business. Osceola determined to wait for him in that vicinity.</p>
+
+<p>He and his comrades lay closely concealed, and watched without ceasing.
+But for several days the weather was unpleasant and the agent did not go
+beyond the fort. Still the Indians waited. At last a fine day<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span> dawned,
+and shortly after noon Osceola saw from his hiding place two men
+approaching the sutler's house. From afar he knew that one was General
+Thompson. He crept closer to the path; his friends followed; all were
+silent as serpents. The unsuspecting men came nearer, laughing and
+talking in easy security. Rising on one knee, Osceola took steady aim
+and fired. Instantly other shots rang through the still air and the two
+men lay dead on the earth.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i214.jpg" width="600" height="449" alt="INDIAN DEPREDATIONS" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN DEPREDATIONS</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Indians quickly scalped their victims. Then they hurried to the
+sutler's house, where they found several men at dinner; they surrounded
+the house and shot and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span> scalped its inmates. When this was done they set
+fire to the house and took their leave with an exultant war whoop. No
+one pursued them; those who heard the shots and the war whoop, and saw
+the flaming house supposed a large war party had come to attack the
+place, and were afraid to investigate.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians meanwhile left the neighborhood with all speed. They had
+stayed longer than they had intended and they were anxious to reach the
+swamp in time to share in the attack on Major Dade and his men. They set
+off through the forest, a grim and terrible company, smeared with war
+paint and stained with human blood. Their knives and tomahawks were red;
+fresh scalps dangled from their belts or swung from poles carried over
+their shoulders. At the head of the company strode Osceola. On his head
+he wore a red and blue kerchief twisted to form a turban, from whose
+center waved three splendid ostrich plumes.</p>
+
+<p>Darkness fell before the company reached the swamp, but as they drew
+near to its outskirts they saw the luminous smoke of camp fires over the
+trees and heard faint yells. This told them they had come too late for
+the struggle, but in time to celebrate the victory. They were greeted by
+the revelers with wild shouts of delight. All joined in a hideous dance
+about a pole on which were fastened the scalps that had been taken that
+day.</p>
+
+<p>From the old chief, Micanopy, and his sub-chiefs, Jumper and Alligator,
+Osceola learned the details of that day's action. About two hundred
+warriors had taken<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> their station in the outskirts of the swamp to await
+the coming of Major Dade and his one hundred and ten soldiers. They sent
+out scouts who brought them exact information concerning Dade's route
+and all his movements. They knew the information to be reliable, for
+they obtained it from Dade's guide, Louis, a slave, who was in sympathy
+with the Indians and Maroons. On the third day of their march the troops
+reached the point the Indians had decided upon as best adapted to their
+purpose. But neither Micanopy nor Osceola was present and many were
+unwilling to act without them. Some young warriors set out for
+Micanopy's camp and forced him to come with them to the scene of action.
+Even then he advised delay and it took all Jumper's eloquence to induce
+the old man to give the command for attack on the following morning.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile Dade's men spent a good night in their camp, little dreaming
+how near to them was the enemy. On the morning of the twenty-eighth of
+December they resumed their march in good spirits.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians had left the swamp and hidden themselves in a pine barren,
+near which the roadway wound. On one side was a deep swamp; on the
+other, a thin pine forest with a swamp beyond it. They found hiding
+places behind trees or on the ground sheltered by the saw palmetto and
+brush.</p>
+
+<p>From their hiding places the Indians saw the advance guard come into
+sight, reach, and pass them. Still Micanopy did not fire the signal
+shot. Now the main<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> division was coming with Major Dade on horseback at
+the head. On marched the soldiers with unwavering tramp, tramp. The
+warriors crouched with muskets ready. Micanopy fired and Jumper raised
+the yell. Instantly the green waste was awake with the flash and bang of
+muskets, with death cries and savage yells. A white smoke hid the scene
+for a moment. When it cleared away, the road was strewn with the dead
+and dying. The Indians having reloaded their guns, rushed from their
+hiding places to finish their work.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i217.jpg" width="600" height="482" alt="FLORIDA SWAMP" title="" />
+<span class="caption">FLORIDA SWAMP</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Some of Dade's men sprang to the thicket to seek refuge behind trees.
+They were followed and shot down. Others caught their feet in the heavy
+stems of the palmetto and, stumbling, fell an easy prey to their
+pursuers. The officers who had escaped the first fire did their best to
+rally the men. The cannon was brought into action and added its roar to
+the din of battle. But its balls went over the heads of the Indians and
+they succeeded in shooting the gunners before they could do any harm.</p>
+
+<p>The contest seemed over. The warriors were scattered in pursuit of
+fugitives or busy scalping the dead, when a negro brought word to Jumper
+that a number of the soldiers had collected and were building a fort of
+logs with the cannon to protect them. Jumper raised the yell and called
+together his Indians for a charge on the little company of brave men who
+were making their last stand behind tree trunks placed on the ground in
+the form of a triangle. The soldiers had exhausted their powder and were
+able to offer only a feeble resistance to the savages, who shot them
+down without mercy.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians carried off their own dead and wounded&mdash;three dead and five
+wounded. But they left the bodies of Dade's men to tell their own story
+to those who should find them. So well were the commands of Osceola
+heeded that months later when white troops found the dead, their money,
+watches and clothes were untouched.</p>
+
+<p>The battle over, the Indians returned to the swamp to await Osceola,
+count scalps, and celebrate their victory. Of one hundred and ten
+soldiers only four escaped.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="VIII_OSCEOLA_A_WAR_CHIEF" id="VIII_OSCEOLA_A_WAR_CHIEF"></a>VIII. OSCEOLA A WAR CHIEF</h2>
+
+
+<p>As a fire that has smoldered long flames up in many places at once, so
+the war broke out with several actions in quick succession. The tidings
+of the slaughter at Fort King had not become generally known and the
+Indians had not slept after Dade's massacre, before preparations were
+afoot for another assault.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 475px;">
+<img src="images/i219.jpg" width="475" height="600" alt="INDIAN RUNNER" title="" />
+<span class="caption">INDIAN RUNNER</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Scarcely had the victors wearied of shouting and dancing when an Indian,
+exhausted, not with revelry, but with swift running through forest and
+swamp, came into the camp, bringing important news. A council of chiefs
+was called. The bowl of honey water was passed around and when all had
+drunk from the deep ladle, the messenger rose to give his message. He
+told the chiefs that General Clinch had left Fort Drane with two hundred
+regulars and four hundred Florida volunteers, and was already far
+advanced into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span> Indian country. Indeed he was even now approaching
+the Withlacoochee River.</p>
+
+<p>Micanopy, with his usual caution, advised the Indians to keep out of the
+way of such a large force. But his hearers were in no mood to listen to
+his faint-hearted advice; they had been emboldened by their recent
+victories and responded to the fearless daring of Osceola. One hundred
+and fifty Indians and fifty negroes volunteered to go with Osceola and
+Alligator to intercept General Clinch and his six hundred soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>With one accord the warriors bounded off towards the ford of the
+Withlacoochee. There the water was only two feet deep, and as it was the
+only place where the river could be crossed without boats, there could
+be little doubt that the white general would lead his forces to this
+point before attempting to cross the river.</p>
+
+<p>For a day and a night the Indians waited to give their enemy a deadly
+welcome. In the neighborhood of the ford there was no sound to interrupt
+the music of the river, no sight to disturb the peace of the dense
+forest. But on the morning of the following day, scouts came skulking
+through the trees, and in a few minutes the apparently unpeopled place
+was alive with red men.</p>
+
+<p>The scouts brought word that General Clinch and two hundred of his men
+had already crossed the river. They had made the passage slowly and
+laboriously in an old canoe that carried only eight at a time. But they
+were now advancing on this side of the river. Many a warrior's heart
+failed him when he heard this. But Osceola's<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span> dauntless spirit rose to
+the emergency. He cheered his men with words of such good courage that
+they were soon following him with new enthusiasm to a hill, where he
+posted them in a hammock to await the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the last day of the year, General Clinch advanced
+towards the hammock. He was aware of the presence of hostile Indians,
+but not knowing of the outrages they had already committed, he felt
+reluctant to attack them. He sent messages to Osceola telling him that
+it was useless for the Indians to struggle against the white man and
+advising him not to enter upon a war that could end only with the
+destruction of his race.</p>
+
+<p>To this humane counsel Osceola replied with haughty independence: "You
+have guns, and so have we; you have powder and lead, and so have we; you
+have men, and so have we; your men will fight, and so will ours until
+the last drop of the Seminoles' blood has moistened the dust of his
+hunting grounds." He added, what then seemed to the whites an idle
+boast, that after a few weeks' further preparation the Seminoles would
+be ready to enter upon a five years' struggle for the hunting grounds of
+Florida.</p>
+
+<p>At about noon General Clinch charged up the hill. He was greeted with a
+lively fire, but his men were tried fighters and were not checked. On
+they came calmly returning the fire of the enemy. The Indians and
+negroes offered a determined resistance. If they wavered, the shrill and
+terrible "Yo-ho-e-hee" of their leader gave them new courage. Everywhere
+his white plumes waved<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span> in the thick of the fight. The fire of his
+warriors broke upon the enemy always at the most unexpected point, and
+had it not been for the bravery of General Clinch, the Indians would
+have driven the soldiers back to the river, on the other side of which
+four hundred volunteers were watching the battle. But they held their
+ground, and at last Osceola was so seriously wounded that he ordered a
+retreat.</p>
+
+<p>For an hour and twenty minutes the battle had raged. The loss of the
+Indians was slight. When at Osceola's signal the wild yells ceased and
+the Indians disappeared in the forest, they bore with them only three
+dead and five wounded. General Clinch had suffered much heavier loss.
+Eight of his men had been killed and forty wounded.</p>
+
+<p>The Seminoles were highly elated by the success of the first engagements
+of the war. They regarded the battle on the Withlacoochee as a great
+victory, and Osceola's praises were on every lip. The old and timid
+Micanopy, head chief of the Seminoles by birth, kept that title of
+honor. But Osceola who, before the war opened, was not so much as a
+sub-chief and had but two constant followers, had been the real power in
+planning the hostile acts that opened the second Seminole war. All knew
+this and they now made him head war chief of the nation. He was only
+thirty-two years old, but he had the respect of all. With his own hand
+he had taken vengeance on the great white man who had wronged him; with
+his own hand he had punished the traitor chief,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span> Charley A. Mathla. He
+had planned the massacre of Dade's troops. With a small band of Indians
+and negroes he had engaged the forces of General Clinch for more than an
+hour, inflicting heavy loss. His words had kindled the spirit of war
+throughout Florida.</p>
+
+<p>On the border, lawless young men were spreading terror and desolation;
+in the month of January sixteen well stocked plantations were laid waste
+by the Indians. In the distant swamp, Indian women were moulding bullets
+for the warriors. Through all the forest paths war parties were hurrying
+towards the camp of Osceola. The leader of each carried a bundle of
+sticks, each stick representing a warrior under his command. These were
+given to Osceola&mdash;but how many sticks there were only the Seminoles
+knew.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="IX_THE_SEMINOLES_HOLD_THEIR_OWN" id="IX_THE_SEMINOLES_HOLD_THEIR_OWN"></a>IX. THE SEMINOLES HOLD THEIR OWN</h2>
+
+
+<p>The hostile actions of the Seminoles at the close of the year 1835
+convinced the War Department of the United States that the Seminole
+Indians would not submit to be driven from one section of the country to
+another like sheep. Though the combined force of Indian and negro
+warriors was not supposed to be greater than twelve hundred, their
+treacherous nature and the wildness of the country, made the task of
+subduing them so difficult as to require many times that number of
+soldiers. General Clinch was already in the field quar<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span>tered at Fort
+Drane, not far from the village of Micanopy. There were several forts in
+the Indian country, but they were meagerly garrisoned. General Scott was
+made commanding general of the army in Florida, with authority to call
+on the governors of South Carolina, Georgia, and Alabama for assistance.
+He went to work at once to raise a force for an Indian war.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile Major General Gaines, who was commander of the Western
+Military Department, started to Florida with a force of more than a
+thousand men. He ventured into the Seminoles' country with the hope of
+meeting them and fighting a decisive battle. He passed the scene of the
+Dade massacre and saw the work the savages had done, and after burying
+the dead he continued his march to Fort King. But in the whole of his
+march he saw not a single Indian. He had expected to find supplies for
+his army at Fort King, but being disappointed in this, he was obliged to
+return to Tampa with all speed.</p>
+
+<p>While looking for the ford across the Withlacoochee River he ran into an
+Indian ambush and was so harassed by the savages that he had to give up
+his plan of crossing the river and go into camp. He had ordered General
+Clinch to meet him in this neighborhood, and he sent out expresses to
+see what prospect there was of his arrival. The Indians were gathering
+in large numbers, and he believed that if General Clinch arrived in time
+their combined forces could surround them and crush them. But his supply
+of food was so reduced<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span> that he was obliged to have his horses killed to
+provide the men with meat. All the while the Indians were lying in wait
+and assailing all who ventured beyond the fortifications of the camp.</p>
+
+<p>On the fifth of February a negro who spoke good English came to the camp
+and asked to see General Gaines. The latter supposed he was a messenger
+from General Clinch, and ordered that the negro be sent at once to his
+tent. To the general's surprise the negro announced that he was C&aelig;sar,
+the slave of the Seminole chief Micanopy, and that he had been sent by
+the Indians to say that they were tired of fighting and wished to make a
+treaty of peace. General Gaines told C&aelig;sar that he had no power to make
+treaties, but that if the chiefs would pay him a visit the next day, he
+would grant them a truce and notify the President of the United States
+that his red children wanted to be at peace.</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 400px;">
+<img src="images/i225.jpg" width="400" height="347" alt="C&AElig;SAR AND GENERAL GAINES" title="" />
+<span class="caption">C&AElig;SAR AND GENERAL GAINES</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>C&aelig;sar had acted without consulting any one; he had been a favorite and
+had his own way with Micanopy until he thought himself greater than his
+master. He had grown tired of the hardships of war and decided to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> put a
+stop to it. When he returned and gave a report of his visit, the Indians
+were so angry that they were ready to kill him. The negroes, however,
+defended him, and Osceola, fearing trouble between the allies, used his
+influence to save him. Osceola's interference in C&aelig;sar's behalf
+displeased some of the chiefs so much that they deserted without
+ceremony.</p>
+
+<p>As Osceola was ready enough to visit the camp of General Gaines to see
+his force, he went with other chiefs on the following day, as C&aelig;sar had
+promised, to hold an interview with General Gaines. Scarcely had the
+interview begun when General Clinch arrived and seeing a crowd of
+Indians at the entrance of the camp fired on them. This action broke up
+all parley; the Indians thought they had been dealt with treacherously
+and fled.</p>
+
+<p>Since the Indian forces had been weakened and the strength of the enemy
+greatly increased, Osceola decided that it would be best for his
+warriors to withdraw and gave directions for them to disperse. The next
+day the two generals found their enemy gone. Their supplies were too low
+to justify an attempt to pursue them, and General Gaines returned to
+Tampa and General Clinch to Fort Drane without accomplishing anything.</p>
+
+<p>Though General Clinch had not attempted to follow the Indians, Osceola
+and his warriors lost no time in finding his stronghold. They succeeded
+in making his fine plantation at Fort Drane so uncomfortable that in
+July when his crops were at their best he was obliged to leave it.
+Osceola immediately took possession of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span> place, and occupied it with
+grim pleasure until he was driven out a month later by Major Pearce.</p>
+
+<p>During the spring and summer several skirmishes between the Indians and
+United States soldiers occurred, in which the Indians and their black
+allies fought with remarkable pluck, perseverance, and success.</p>
+
+<p>The want of troops trained for Indian fighting, the unwholesome climate,
+ignorance of the country, the absence of roads and bridges, and the
+difficulty of getting supplies had made it almost impossible to invade
+Florida without large sacrifice of life and treasure. The people of the
+United States, not appreciating the difficulties, complained so much of
+the delay that General Scott was removed from the command and General
+Jesup was promoted to the command in Florida.</p>
+
+<p>In November, before General Jesup assumed control, an engagement took
+place which for a time threatened to close the war. On the eighteenth of
+November a force of five hundred soldiers attacked a company of Indians.
+After a fierce battle the Indians fled, leaving twenty-five dead on the
+field. This was counted by them their first defeat, for so long as they
+carried away their dead they did not admit themselves to be defeated.
+Three days later they rallied to meet General Call, who was advancing
+upon Wahoo swamp with over a thousand men. This was the stronghold of
+the Indians. Here their provisions, their cattle, their wives and
+children were hidden. The Indians had much at stake and made a strong
+defense. At last, however, they were compelled<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span> to retreat across the
+river. But they took their stand on the opposite bank behind a sand
+ridge, prepared to fight to the death.</p>
+
+<p>The commander knew that if he could penetrate the Wahoo swamp
+successfully he would bring the Seminole War to an end; but before him
+rolled the swift dark waters of the Withlacoochee, and beyond waited the
+Indians like tigers at bay. He decided not to make the attempt.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="X_OSCEOLA_AND_GENERAL_JESUP" id="X_OSCEOLA_AND_GENERAL_JESUP"></a>X. OSCEOLA AND GENERAL JESUP</h2>
+
+
+<p>On the eighth of December 1836, under most favorable circumstances,
+General Jesup took command of the Florida War and entered upon an
+energetic campaign. He had under his command about eight thousand men.
+Among these were several hundred Creek Indians hired to fight the
+Seminoles with the promise of "the pay and emoluments, and equipments of
+soldiers in the army of the United States and such plunder as they may
+take from the Seminoles."</p>
+
+<p>It will be remembered that Osceola had told the Indians that the war was
+not against women and children. General Jesup took a different view of
+the matter. His first step was to make a series of sudden raids upon the
+villages on the Withlacoochee in which he seized unprotected women and
+children. By his frequent sorties he drove the Indians south or divided
+them. On the twelfth of January he reported that he had sent mounted men
+in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span> pursuit of Osceola, who was hiding with only three followers and his
+family.</p>
+
+<p>The capture of women and children broke the spirit of the Indians. They
+felt that if their wives and children must be sent to Arkansas perhaps
+they would be happier there with them than in Florida without them.
+Accordingly many listened with favor to General Jesup's invitation to
+come to Fort Dade and hold a council to decide on terms of capitulation.</p>
+
+<p>On the sixth of March, 1837, five chiefs and a large number of
+sub-chiefs met General Jesup at Fort Dade. They agreed to emigrate
+according to the terms of the treaty of Payne's Landing, but insisted
+that their negroes should be allowed to accompany them. This point was
+at last conceded them, and the fifth article of the terms of
+capitulation contained these words: "The Seminoles and their allies who
+come in and emigrate to the west shall be secure in their lives and
+property; their negroes, their <i>bona fide</i> property, shall accompany
+them west."</p>
+
+<p>Large numbers of Indians expressed their willingness to sign these terms
+and assembled at a point near Fort Brooke on Tampa Bay, where
+twenty-eight vessels waited in the harbor to transport them. Even
+Osceola is said to have sent word that he and his family would emigrate
+with the rest. The camp at Fort Brooke grew larger every day.</p>
+
+<p>General Jesup was well satisfied. He reported that the Florida war was
+ended. And indeed it might have been had the terms of the agreement been
+adhered to.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span> But slave claims were pushed; unprincipled men went into
+the Indians' territory and seized negroes; there was bitter complaint
+against the fifth article of the compact. At last General Jesup was
+induced to change that article so that it should contain a promise by
+the Indians to deliver up all negroes, belonging to white men who had
+been taken during the war.</p>
+
+<p>This change was made with the knowledge and consent of only one chief,
+Alligator. When the Indians in general became aware that the terms of
+capitulation had been tampered with they were highly indignant.</p>
+
+<p>General Jesup appointed a day on which all negroes taken during the war
+were to be brought in, but no attention was paid to his order. He then
+sent Osceola the following message: "I intend to send exploring parties
+into every part of the country during the summer, and I shall send out
+all the negroes who belong to the white people, and you must not allow
+the Indians or their negroes to mix with them. I am sending for
+bloodhounds to trail them, and I intend to hang every one of them who
+does not come in."</p>
+
+<p>When Osceola received this message and learned that ninety negroes had
+already been seized by General Jesup as belonging to the whites he
+declared that the agreement had been violated and that the signers were
+therefore no longer bound by it. He instructed those encamped at Tampa
+to disperse. The old chief, Micanopy, refused to do so or to give the
+command to his people. One night early in June, Osceola entered the camp
+and visited<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span> the tent of the sleeping Micanopy. As he had always done
+before, the old man yielded to the wonderful personal influence of
+Osceola and did his bidding like a child.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the fifth of June, General Jesup was awakened by an
+officer who came hurrying to tell him that the Indians had gone. Surely
+enough the great camp had vanished in the night. The captives had fled.
+Already they were safe in their marshy fastnesses. Families were
+reunited; all had had rest and food and clothes. The coming sickly
+season would make it impossible to pursue them till their growing crops
+were harvested. The Seminole war with all its difficulties was reopened.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola, who a few months before had been a hunted fugitive with only
+three followers, without hope for himself or his people, was again a
+powerful war chief. With a brighter outlook his natural cheerfulness of
+disposition returned, and he hoped and planned great things for the
+coming autumn.</p>
+
+<p>Early in September he learned that his good friend "King Philip" had
+been captured with eleven followers by General Joseph Hernandez. King
+Philip's son, Wild Cat, came to him, saying he had been to St. Augustine
+to see his father, that the palefaces had treated him well and had
+allowed him to carry his father's messages to his friends. The old chief
+wanted Osceola to come to St. Augustine to arrange for his liberation.</p>
+
+<p>Osceola, always generous and ready to serve a friend,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span> sent back to
+General Hernandez a finely wrought bead pipe and a white plume to
+indicate that the path between them was now white and safe and to
+inquire whether it would be safe for his return.</p>
+
+<p>Wild Cat soon returned to Osceola with presents and friendly messages
+from the general. With the hope of gaining the release of King Philip,
+Osceola started for St. Augustine with a large attendance of warriors.
+Wild Cat went in advance to announce his coming. With a great show of
+regard General Hernandez went out to meet Osceola with a store of
+supplies. He met his advance guard, and learning that Osceola would not
+arrive till evening, left word that Osceola should choose a camping
+ground near Fort Peyton, and went back to communicate with General
+Jesup.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning General Hernandez rode out dressed in full uniform and
+escorted by his own staff and many of the officers of General Jesup's
+staff. He found Osceola and Chief Alligator with seventy-one picked
+warriors assembled under the white flag for council. The warriors had
+brought with them the women of King Philip's family, and about one
+hundred negroes to be given up in exchange for the prisoner.</p>
+
+<p>After the usual greetings and ceremonies General Hernandez took out a
+paper and said that General Jesup wanted to know the Indians' answer to
+these questions: "What is your object in coming? What do you expect? Are
+you prepared to deliver up at once the slaves taken from the citizens?
+Why have you not sur<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span>rendered them already as promised by Alligator at
+Fort King? Have the chiefs of the nation held a council in relation to
+the subjects of the talk at Fort King? What chiefs attended that council
+and what was their determination? Have the chiefs sent a messenger with
+the decision of the council? Have the principal chiefs, Micanopy,
+Jumper, Cloud, and Alligator, sent a messenger, and if so, what is their
+message? Why have not those chiefs come in themselves?"</p>
+
+<p>When Osceola heard these questions he struggled to answer. He began a
+sentence but could not finish it. Turning to Alligator he said in a low
+husky voice: "I feel choked. You must speak for me." Perhaps his
+suspicions were aroused by the questions; perhaps he saw afar the lines
+of soldiers closing round his camp&mdash;at any rate he was deeply troubled.</p>
+
+<p>Finding the answers given by Alligator unsatisfactory, General
+Hernandez, following the orders of General Jesup, gave the signal and
+the troops surrounding the camp closed in upon the dismayed Indians and
+marched them off to the fort.</p>
+
+<p>In this way was the man that the generals in Florida pronounced the war
+spirit of the Seminoles conquered.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XI_THE_IMPRISONMENT_OF_OSCEOLA" id="XI_THE_IMPRISONMENT_OF_OSCEOLA"></a>XI. THE IMPRISONMENT OF OSCEOLA</h2>
+
+
+<p>Osceola and his warriors were taken by their captors to St. Augustine
+where they were imprisoned within the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span> strong walls of the old Spanish
+castle of San Marco. It was very hard for these Indians who loved
+liberty better than life to be shut up in narrow dark cells, to be
+obliged to give up the warpath, to sit for hours, and days, and weeks,
+and months in inaction, not knowing what need their friends had of them
+but imagining the heaviest possible misfortunes for those they held
+dear.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 335px;">
+<img src="images/i234.jpg" width="335" height="400" alt="FORT SAN MARCO" title="" />
+<span class="caption">FORT SAN MARCO</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Osceola could have stood the torture of wrenched limbs and of fire with
+haughty spirit unbent. What was that to this torture of the white man's,
+the dim light, the quiet, the narrow walls, the waiting, the not
+knowing, the fearing of evil?</p>
+
+<p>The warrior still held his head high, but gradually the fierce gleam in
+his eye changed to a look of gentleness, of unspeakable sadness, and his
+winning smile came to have so much sorrow in it that men said to each
+other after they left him, "His heart is breaking." He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span> allowed to
+see and talk with other prisoners. When Micanopy and other chiefs were
+brought to the fort he was told of their arrival. When Wild Cat, after
+fasting many days, escaped through the small window in his wall with the
+help of a rope made from his blanket, Osceola was aware of it. But none
+of these things seemed to move him.</p>
+
+<p>General Jesup told the chiefs that he would urge the United States
+authorities to let them and their people stay in southern Florida if
+they would agree to keep their tribes at peace, guard the frontier, and
+themselves accompany him to Washington. Micanopy showed a little
+distrust when he heard the proposition, but Osceola took off his proud
+head dress and removing one of the beautiful plumes from it handed it to
+the man who had betrayed him, saying simply: "Give this to my white
+father to show him that Osceola will do as you have said."</p>
+
+<p>The suggestion made by General Jesup was not considered favorably by the
+government, but he was instructed to carry out the Jackson policy of
+transportation. He had collected so many captives at St. Augustine that
+he feared trouble and decided to separate them. He sent all the negroes
+to Tampa and the Indians to Charleston, S. C. Late in December the
+Indians were shipped on the steamer Poinsett. Among them were Osceola,
+Micanopy, Alligator and Cloud. Besides the chiefs one hundred and
+sixteen warriors and eighty-two women and children were sent to Fort
+Moultrie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span> Osceola's two wives and little daughters were in the company.
+They arrived at Charleston on the first day of January, 1838, after a
+quiet voyage.</p>
+
+<p>At Fort Moultrie, Osceola was treated with much consideration; he was
+allowed to walk about the enclosure and to receive visitors in his room.
+Still he ate little and every day grew more wan and thin. All the chiefs
+were so low-spirited that great efforts were made to cheer them. A very
+popular actress was then playing at the Charleston theater, and knowing
+the Indian's love of whatever is gay and spectacular, the authorities at
+the fort decided to take the chiefs to the theater on the sixth of
+January.</p>
+
+<p>Public sympathy had been excited by reports of the capture,
+imprisonment, and failing health of the once terrible Osceola. The
+theater was crowded with Charleston people more anxious to see the chief
+than the beautiful actress. The Indians were led into the brilliantly
+lighted hall filled with staring men and women. They looked neither to
+the right nor to the left, but took their places in quiet and watched
+with steady eyes and unsmiling faces the entertainment provided for
+them. Osceola had made no objection to coming, but he sat amidst the
+mirth and glamor, so sad and stern that those who had brought him there
+and those who had come to see him felt rebuked. His trouble was too real
+to be easily comforted, too deep to be an amusing spectacle. The papers
+of the day recorded the strange scene of the captive Osceola at the play
+in poetry and prose.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Later an incident happened in which Osceola took some interest. George
+Catlin, who had traveled for several years among the Indians and was
+regarded by them as a friend, came to the fort to paint the portraits of
+the chiefs for the United States government. When Mr. Catlin asked
+Osceola if he might paint his portrait the latter seemed greatly
+pleased. He arrayed himself in his gayest calico hunting shirt, his
+splendid plumed turban, and all his ornaments, and stood patiently while
+the artist worked. Mr. Catlin enjoyed painting the fine head, with its
+high forehead and clear eye. He made two portraits of Osceola, both of
+which are now in the collection of Indian portraits at the Smithsonian
+Institution, in Washington.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Catlin came to be well acquainted with the chiefs whose portraits he
+painted, and used to have them come to his room in the evenings, where
+they all talked with great freedom. He felt deep sympathy for Osceola,
+who told him all the details of his capture. When Osceola learned that
+Mr. Catlin had been west of the Mississippi he asked him many questions
+about the country and the Indians living there.</p>
+
+<p>But every day Osceola's health grew more feeble and, on the day when the
+second portrait was finished, he became so ill that he was thought to be
+dying. He rallied, however, and when Mr. Catlin left a few days later,
+it was with the hope that Osceola would regain his health and strength.
+He requested the fort doctor to keep him informed about the chief's
+condition.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="XII_THE_END" id="XII_THE_END"></a>XII. THE END</h2>
+
+
+<p>The day after George Catlin left Fort Moultrie, Osceola had a severe
+attack of throat trouble. He refused to take the doctor's medicine. A
+Seminole medicine man came and gave the sick man Indian remedies.
+Osceola's wives nursed him tenderly, but in spite of all they could do
+he grew rapidly worse and died on the thirtieth of January, 1838, after
+three months of captivity.</p>
+
+<p>Dr. Wheedon sent the following interesting account of his death to Mr.
+Catlin:</p>
+
+<div class="figright" style="width: 189px;">
+<img src="images/i238.jpg" width="189" height="350" alt="&quot;MEDICINE MAN&quot;" title="" />
+<span class="caption">&quot;MEDICINE MAN&quot;</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"About half an hour before he died, he seemed to be sensible that he was
+dying; and, although he could not speak, he signified by signs that he
+wished me to send for the chiefs and for the officers of the post, whom
+I called in. He made signs to his wives by his side, to go and bring his
+full dress which he wore in time of war; which having been brought in,
+he rose up in his bed, which was on the floor, and put on his shirt, his
+leggings and his moccasins, girded on his war belt, bullet-pouch and
+powder-horn, and laid his knife by the side of him on the floor.</p>
+
+<p>"He then called for his red paint and looking-glass, which latter was
+held before him. Then he deliberately painted one half of his face, his
+neck, and his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span> throat with vermilion, a custom practised when the
+irrevocable oath of war and destruction is taken. His knife he then
+placed in its sheath under his belt, and he carefully arranged his
+turban on his head and his three ostrich plumes that he was in the habit
+of wearing in it.</p>
+
+<p>"Being thus prepared in full dress, he lay down a few moments to recover
+strength sufficient, when he rose up as before, and with most benignant
+and pleasing smiles, extended his hand to me and to all of the officers
+and chiefs that were around him, and shook hands with us all in dead
+silence, and with his wives and little children.</p>
+
+<p>"He made a signal for them to lower him down upon his bed, which was
+done, and he then slowly drew from his war-belt his scalping-knife,
+which he firmly grasped in his right hand, laying it across the other on
+his breast, and in a moment smiled away his last breath without a
+struggle or a groan."</p>
+
+<p>Osceola was buried with some ceremony near the fort. Officers attended
+his funeral and a military salute was fired over his grave. This show of
+respect comforted a little the grief-stricken friends of the chief.</p>
+
+<p>It is said that Osceola was not allowed to rest in peace, even in death.
+A few nights after his burial men of the race that despised him as a
+barbarian came by night, opened his grave and cut his head from his
+body. But openly only respect was shown to the remains of the greatest
+chief of the Seminoles. His grave was in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span>closed with an iron railing and
+marked with a stone bearing the following inscription:</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+Osceola,<br />
+Patriot and Warrior,<br />
+Died at Fort Moultrie,<br />
+January 30, 1838.
+</p>
+
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 582px;">
+             <img src="images/i240top.jpg" style="margin-bottom: 1.4em;" alt="REMOVAL OF SOUTHERN INDIANS" height="505" width="582"/>
+
+    </div>
+<div class="figleft" style="width: 284px;">
+             <img src="images/i240bottom.jpg" style="margin-top: -3.8em; margin-bottom: -1em; margin-left: 0em;" alt="REMOVAL OF SOUTHERN INDIANS" height="142" width="284"/>
+<br /><br /><span class="caption">REMOVAL OF SOUTHERN INDIANS</span>
+    </div>
+
+
+<p style="margin-top: 37em;">The war did not close with the death of Osceola. Wild Cat took command
+and the trouble continued till 1842. During the war the Seminoles lost
+many brave warriors; several thousand Indians and five hundred of their
+allies were driven from their homes in Florida to a strange land which
+they were obliged to share with their old enemies, the Creeks.</p>
+
+<p>The white men gained the lands of the Indians, a vast and rich new
+territory for settlement, removed a refuge for runaway slaves, and
+established peace on the Southern frontier. For these gains, however,
+they had paid a heavy price in treasure, in human lives, and in honor.</p>
+
+<h4>END</h4>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by 
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25538-h.htm or 25538-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/5/3/25538/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i001.jpg b/25538-h/images/i001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..368ac14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i001.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i009.jpg b/25538-h/images/i009.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b63c3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i009.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i010.jpg b/25538-h/images/i010.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9f01f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i010.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i013.jpg b/25538-h/images/i013.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f98b149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i013.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i014.jpg b/25538-h/images/i014.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10c1f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i014.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i015.jpg b/25538-h/images/i015.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..933e44e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i015.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i017.jpg b/25538-h/images/i017.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d72b29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i017.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i020.jpg b/25538-h/images/i020.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aeca743
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i020.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i022.jpg b/25538-h/images/i022.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08928bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i022.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i023.jpg b/25538-h/images/i023.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06ff4e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i023.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i028.jpg b/25538-h/images/i028.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f85c60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i028.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i033.jpg b/25538-h/images/i033.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b624acd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i033.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i047.jpg b/25538-h/images/i047.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64fd1e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i047.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i054.jpg b/25538-h/images/i054.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90b360a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i054.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i056.jpg b/25538-h/images/i056.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..927bbe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i056.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i057.jpg b/25538-h/images/i057.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ab6379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i057.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i059.jpg b/25538-h/images/i059.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..efaa035
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i059.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i060.jpg b/25538-h/images/i060.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54e3ee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i060.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i063.jpg b/25538-h/images/i063.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cf025b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i063.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i069.jpg b/25538-h/images/i069.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bf1b46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i069.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i069a.jpg b/25538-h/images/i069a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b9fdcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i069a.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i075.jpg b/25538-h/images/i075.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b087c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i075.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i078.jpg b/25538-h/images/i078.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf3e1ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i078.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i080.jpg b/25538-h/images/i080.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30c073c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i080.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i086.jpg b/25538-h/images/i086.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e5310a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i086.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i106.jpg b/25538-h/images/i106.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d06474
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i106.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i109.jpg b/25538-h/images/i109.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..013f76b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i109.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i119.jpg b/25538-h/images/i119.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea8659c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i119.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i123.jpg b/25538-h/images/i123.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca2751f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i123.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i131.jpg b/25538-h/images/i131.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78c12f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i131.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i133.jpg b/25538-h/images/i133.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46f9db3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i133.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i136.jpg b/25538-h/images/i136.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32dfd99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i136.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i150.jpg b/25538-h/images/i150.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8497af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i150.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i158.jpg b/25538-h/images/i158.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90429d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i158.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i165.jpg b/25538-h/images/i165.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb4b8cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i165.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i168.jpg b/25538-h/images/i168.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..376fda8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i168.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i171.jpg b/25538-h/images/i171.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83c3fd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i171.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i173.jpg b/25538-h/images/i173.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f06ad7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i173.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i180bottom.jpg b/25538-h/images/i180bottom.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0bf539
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i180bottom.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i180top.jpg b/25538-h/images/i180top.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e07603
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i180top.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i184bottom.jpg b/25538-h/images/i184bottom.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..198a657
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i184bottom.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i184top.jpg b/25538-h/images/i184top.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28083cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i184top.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i187.jpg b/25538-h/images/i187.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4099ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i187.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i192.jpg b/25538-h/images/i192.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fd478a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i192.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i197.jpg b/25538-h/images/i197.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e391cbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i197.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i208bottom.jpg b/25538-h/images/i208bottom.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..276aea3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i208bottom.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i208top.jpg b/25538-h/images/i208top.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c49b51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i208top.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i214.jpg b/25538-h/images/i214.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19ee7c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i214.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i217.jpg b/25538-h/images/i217.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b71986b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i217.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i219.jpg b/25538-h/images/i219.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67eadb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i219.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i225.jpg b/25538-h/images/i225.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d02766f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i225.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i234.jpg b/25538-h/images/i234.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..277e8ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i234.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i238.jpg b/25538-h/images/i238.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5eeff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i238.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i240bottom.jpg b/25538-h/images/i240bottom.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..392bb12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i240bottom.jpg
diff --git a/25538-h/images/i240top.jpg b/25538-h/images/i240top.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9dfc690
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-h/images/i240top.jpg
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f001.png b/25538-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d1d409
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f002.png b/25538-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2bf5f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f003.png b/25538-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4400e40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f004.png b/25538-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1319cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f005.png b/25538-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..578afc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f006.png b/25538-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ab7d4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f007.png b/25538-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..170e729
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/f008.png b/25538-page-images/f008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02e2ca9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/f008.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p009.png b/25538-page-images/p009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee51fe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p009.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p010.png b/25538-page-images/p010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87d4a05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p010.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p011.png b/25538-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1df4ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p012.png b/25538-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5242b92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p013.png b/25538-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d0c4e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p014.png b/25538-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..414891f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p015.png b/25538-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f95626
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p016.png b/25538-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d351ab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p017.png b/25538-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09ee8da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p018.png b/25538-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d1b267
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p019.png b/25538-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94fe207
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p020.png b/25538-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62f0997
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p021.png b/25538-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71362ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p022.png b/25538-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9553cbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p023.png b/25538-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e126f9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p024.png b/25538-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50ef836
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p025.png b/25538-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4639967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p026.png b/25538-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26aa460
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p027.png b/25538-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9401542
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p028.png b/25538-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cff0ae0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p029.png b/25538-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0138ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p030.png b/25538-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7faca54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p031.png b/25538-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11de667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p032.png b/25538-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50e45a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p033.png b/25538-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b169a58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p034.png b/25538-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c0a8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p035.png b/25538-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..220737f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p036.png b/25538-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f6190e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p037.png b/25538-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0179e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p038.png b/25538-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6241f9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p039.png b/25538-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf82af7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p040.png b/25538-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..389c456
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p041.png b/25538-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8053e1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p042.png b/25538-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8532d2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p043.png b/25538-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8f7dfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p044.png b/25538-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98e3c90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p045.png b/25538-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe05c04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p046.png b/25538-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87f07b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p047.png b/25538-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..becd4c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p048.png b/25538-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0422f00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p049.png b/25538-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ceb44d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p050.png b/25538-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3417302
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p051.png b/25538-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5461e91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p052.png b/25538-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed2512b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p053.png b/25538-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d25bc4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p054.png b/25538-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8df784
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p055.png b/25538-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92e79a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p056.png b/25538-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d59fa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p057.png b/25538-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fdd435
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p058.png b/25538-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0746678
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p059.png b/25538-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d838045
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p060.png b/25538-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94c3598
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p061.png b/25538-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b82e9cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p062.png b/25538-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0160341
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p063.png b/25538-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f561ddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p064.png b/25538-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2439b83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p065.png b/25538-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd99a91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p066.png b/25538-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..482dacc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p067.png b/25538-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4356854
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p068.png b/25538-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63ead55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p069.png b/25538-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e014da2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p070.png b/25538-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2b4fe8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p071.png b/25538-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9db9ddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p072.png b/25538-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b2d4a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p073.png b/25538-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fffcbf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p074.png b/25538-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cceaf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p075.png b/25538-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8b4c40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p076.png b/25538-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3be38aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p077.png b/25538-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bdbd34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p078.png b/25538-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47a9857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p079.png b/25538-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b67425
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p080.png b/25538-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e969437
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p081.png b/25538-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10b6dba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p082.png b/25538-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bcccfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p083.png b/25538-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8a8206
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p084.png b/25538-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a6e4042
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p085.png b/25538-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3fe6f76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p086.png b/25538-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7d9984
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p087.png b/25538-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ebdc10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p088.png b/25538-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5bda3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p089.png b/25538-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30f6332
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p090.png b/25538-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df2f6c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p091.png b/25538-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f26f1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p092.png b/25538-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b1ccab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p093.png b/25538-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eebf32c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p094.png b/25538-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4750970
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p095.png b/25538-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c50efa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p096.png b/25538-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..423ee58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p097.png b/25538-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..488e587
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p098.png b/25538-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b3c4e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p099.png b/25538-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3adee6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p100.png b/25538-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92f8b7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p101.png b/25538-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd7098f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p102.png b/25538-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc0d315
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p103.png b/25538-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4ab197
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p104.png b/25538-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f238dff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p105.png b/25538-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e17070b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p106.png b/25538-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..abf6c97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p107.png b/25538-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0492d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p108.png b/25538-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..660f126
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p109.png b/25538-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e9d2d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p110.png b/25538-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61133d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p111.png b/25538-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..789503c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p112.png b/25538-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c2837c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p113.png b/25538-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..132584c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p114.png b/25538-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ab1496
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p115.png b/25538-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..089643b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p116.png b/25538-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f239b04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p117.png b/25538-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47cb255
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p118.png b/25538-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc01f01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p119.png b/25538-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..835e8c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p120.png b/25538-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2589aa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p121.png b/25538-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb4bdc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p122.png b/25538-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90593b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p123.png b/25538-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb341a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p124.png b/25538-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f70f1cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p125.png b/25538-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7277af4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p126.png b/25538-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d625065
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p127.png b/25538-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b407a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p128.png b/25538-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1b2e6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p129.png b/25538-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7fa3ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p130.png b/25538-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bf16dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p131.png b/25538-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..068d32a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p132.png b/25538-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..504dc85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p133.png b/25538-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1af4f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p134.png b/25538-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0bb3153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p135.png b/25538-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bd4e60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p136.png b/25538-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc1b7b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p137.png b/25538-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..915576d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p138.png b/25538-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..917a602
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p139.png b/25538-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..533e87e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p140.png b/25538-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc43bc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p141.png b/25538-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13247f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p142.png b/25538-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..796a7a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p143.png b/25538-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8148b2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p144.png b/25538-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56a866a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p145.png b/25538-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f81529c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p146.png b/25538-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cf3372
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p147.png b/25538-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3a3e43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p148.png b/25538-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6a0d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p149.png b/25538-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef585b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p150.png b/25538-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4130e15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p151.png b/25538-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1952fdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p152.png b/25538-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2166592
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p153.png b/25538-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2170fdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p154.png b/25538-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f61dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p155.png b/25538-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3e71f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p156.png b/25538-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c081a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p157.png b/25538-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e95fd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p158.png b/25538-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1d17d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p159.png b/25538-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ec4f74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p160.png b/25538-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04bbc61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p161.png b/25538-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a791e01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p162.png b/25538-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54727c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p163.png b/25538-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..399ef3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p164.png b/25538-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..109cd5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p165.png b/25538-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04eaf80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p166.png b/25538-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..503b6c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p167.png b/25538-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..959e361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p168.png b/25538-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..667b553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p169.png b/25538-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71d7774
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p170.png b/25538-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..606c1b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p171.png b/25538-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddafd3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p172.png b/25538-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9955db7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p173.png b/25538-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aec9923
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p174.png b/25538-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ea2a0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p175.png b/25538-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e0cacd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p176.png b/25538-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6858d89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p177.png b/25538-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2abfd0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p178.png b/25538-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3a6698
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p179.png b/25538-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f563886
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p180.png b/25538-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0490057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p181.png b/25538-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b2b6eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p182.png b/25538-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0742bc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p183.png b/25538-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..179a222
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p184.png b/25538-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd273df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p185.png b/25538-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11cec5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p186.png b/25538-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..87d0c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p187.png b/25538-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d80d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p188.png b/25538-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f337432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p189.png b/25538-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79431d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p190.png b/25538-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e069d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p191.png b/25538-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79c2d81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p192.png b/25538-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed914f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p193.png b/25538-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db03f4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p194.png b/25538-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a06e040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p195.png b/25538-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83192b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p196.png b/25538-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f146a17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p197.png b/25538-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e03ce9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p198.png b/25538-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3ef1d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p199.png b/25538-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f606ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p200.png b/25538-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0273203
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p201.png b/25538-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0702a80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p202.png b/25538-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a9614c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p203.png b/25538-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fcc11d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p204.png b/25538-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..810b59c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p205.png b/25538-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ed0b01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p206.png b/25538-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de2bb76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p207.png b/25538-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc4348d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p208.png b/25538-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd029db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p209.png b/25538-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82160ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p210.png b/25538-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c23b36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p211.png b/25538-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b0a6c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p212.png b/25538-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9fe1e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p213.png b/25538-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aab2bf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p214.png b/25538-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14fee78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p215.png b/25538-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddbc2bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p216.png b/25538-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae86105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p217.png b/25538-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cec09e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p218.png b/25538-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a852cc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p219.png b/25538-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00076a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p220.png b/25538-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8fdb73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p221.png b/25538-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9dff0be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p222.png b/25538-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..540ef5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p223.png b/25538-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c82811
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p224.png b/25538-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e776e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p225.png b/25538-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..080e7b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p226.png b/25538-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8425eec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p227.png b/25538-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90fae30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p228.png b/25538-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7089772
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p229.png b/25538-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d62a89b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p230.png b/25538-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5de02b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p231.png b/25538-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f201ced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p232.png b/25538-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa26b58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p233.png b/25538-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32885b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p234.png b/25538-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cca24b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p235.png b/25538-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc22167
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p236.png b/25538-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d252f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p237.png b/25538-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2660c8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p238.png b/25538-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2504a3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p239.png b/25538-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fadde7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/25538-page-images/p240.png b/25538-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9f01fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/25538.txt b/25538.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ea3529
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6367 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Four American Indians
+       King Philip, Pontiac, Tecumseh, Osceola
+
+Author: Edson L. Whitney
+        Frances M. Perry
+
+Release Date: May 20, 2008 [EBook #25538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+   FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS
+
+   KING PHILIP
+   TECUMSEH
+   PONTIAC
+   OSCEOLA
+
+   A BOOK FOR YOUNG AMERICANS
+
+   BY
+
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY and FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+   NEW YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO
+
+   AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
+
+
+   Copyright, 1904, by
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY and FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+   Four Am. Ind.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+THE STORY OF KING PHILIP
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. PHILIP'S PEOPLE                                               9
+
+     II. PHILIP'S CHILDHOOD HOME                                      12
+
+    III. MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS                                   15
+
+     IV. PHILIP HEARS OF THE ENGLISH                                  19
+
+      V. PHILIP MEETS THE ENGLISH                                     23
+
+     VI. PHILIP'S EDUCATION                                           26
+
+    VII. PHILIP'S DAILY LIFE                                          30
+
+   VIII. PHILIP'S RELATIONS WITH THE ENGLISH                          34
+
+     IX. PHILIP BECOMES GRAND SACHEM                                  37
+
+      X. PHILIP'S TROUBLES WITH THE WHITES                            39
+
+     XI. PHILIP AND THE INDIAN COUNCILS                               42
+
+    XII. KING PHILIP'S WAR                                            45
+
+   XIII. THE LAST DAYS OF PHILIP                                      48
+
+
+THE STORY OF PONTIAC
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. THE MEETING OF PONTIAC AND THE ENGLISH                       53
+
+     II. PONTIAC'S CHILDHOOD                                          59
+
+    III. PONTIAC'S EDUCATION                                          62
+
+     IV. THE CHIEF                                                    66
+
+      V. THE PLOT                                                     70
+
+     VI. THE SEVENTH OF MAY                                           74
+
+    VII. HOSTILITIES BEGUN                                            79
+
+   VIII. THE TWO LEADERS                                              84
+
+     IX. THE SIEGE OF DETROIT                                         89
+
+      X. IMPORTANT ENGAGEMENTS                                        95
+
+     XI. THE END OF THE SIEGE                                        101
+
+    XII. ALL ALONG THE FRONTIER                                      104
+
+   XIII. THE LAST OF PONTIAC                                         110
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. EARLY YEARS                                                 117
+
+     II. YOUTH                                                       121
+
+    III. ADVENTURES OF THE YOUNG BRAVE                               125
+
+     IV. TECUMSEH DISSATISFIED                                       128
+
+      V. TECUMSEH'S BROTHER, THE PROPHET                             133
+
+     VI. GREENVILLE                                                  137
+
+    VII. THE PROPHET'S TOWN                                          144
+
+   VIII. THE COUNCIL BETWEEN HARRISON AND TECUMSEH                   149
+
+     IX. PREPARATIONS FOR WAR                                        155
+
+      X. THE BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE                                    161
+
+     XI. REORGANIZATION OF THE INDIANS                               166
+
+    XII. TECUMSEH AND THE BRITISH                                    170
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+   CHAPTER                                                          PAGE
+
+      I. THE EXODUS OF THE RED STICKS                                179
+
+     II. THE FLORIDA HOME                                            183
+
+    III. THE FIRST SEMINOLE WAR                                      189
+
+     IV. GRIEVANCES                                                  194
+
+      V. THE TREATY OF PAYNE'S LANDING                               202
+
+     VI. HOSTILITIES                                                 207
+
+    VII. THE WAR OPENED                                              212
+
+   VIII. OSCEOLA A WAR CHIEF                                         219
+
+     IX. THE SEMINOLES HOLD THEIR OWN                                223
+
+      X. OSCEOLA AND GENERAL JESUP                                   228
+
+     XI. THE IMPRISONMENT OSCEOLA                                    233
+
+    XII. THE END                                                     238
+
+
+
+
+   THE STORY OF
+   KING PHILIP
+
+   BY
+   EDSON L. WHITNEY
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF KING PHILIP
+
+I. PHILIP'S PEOPLE
+
+
+Philip, ruler of the Wampanoags, was the only Indian in our country to
+whom the English colonists gave the title of king. Why no other Indian
+ever received this title I cannot tell, neither is it known how it
+happened to be given to Philip.
+
+The Wampanoags were a tribe of Indians whose homes were in what is now
+southeastern Massachusetts and in Rhode Island east of Narragansett Bay.
+A few of them, also, lived on the large islands farther south, Nantucket
+and Martha's Vineyard.
+
+[Illustration: A GRAND SACHEM]
+
+Three centuries ago Massasoit, Philip's father, was the grand sachem, or
+ruler, of the Wampanoags. His people did not form one united tribe. They
+had no states, cities, and villages, with governors, mayors, and
+aldermen, as we have. Nor did they live in close relations with one
+another and vote for common officers.
+
+On the other hand, they lived in very small villages. A few families
+pitched their wigwams together and lived in much the same way as people
+do now when they camp out in the summer.
+
+Generally, among the Wampanoags, only one family lived in a wigwam. The
+fathers, or heads of the families in the different wigwams, came
+together occasionally and consulted about such matters as seemed
+important to them.
+
+[Illustration: WIGWAMS]
+
+Every one present at the meeting had a right to express his opinion on
+the question under consideration, and as often as he wished. All spoke
+calmly, without eloquence, and without set speeches. They talked upon
+any subject they pleased, as long as they pleased, and when they
+pleased.
+
+The most prominent person in a village was called the sagamore. His
+advice and opinion were generally followed, and he governed the people
+in a very slight manner.
+
+The Indians of several villages were sometimes united together in a
+petty tribe and were ruled by a sachem, or chief.
+
+The chief did not rule over a very large tract of country. Generally
+none of his subjects lived more than eight or ten miles away from him.
+
+He ruled as he pleased, and was not subject to any constitution or court
+of any kind. In fact, he was a leader rather than a ruler. Nevertheless,
+a wise chief never did anything of great importance without first
+consulting the different sagamores of his tribe.
+
+The chief held a little higher position in the tribe than the sagamore
+did in his village. He settled disputes. He held a very rude form of
+court, where justice was given in each case according to its merits. He
+sent and received messengers to and from other tribes.
+
+As several villages were united in a single petty tribe, so also several
+petty tribes were loosely joined together and ruled over by a grand
+sachem.
+
+The different Wampanoag tribes which owed allegiance to Philip and his
+father, Massasoit, were five in number besides the small bands on the
+islands of Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard. The village where the grand
+sachem lived was called by them Pokanoket.
+
+
+
+
+II. PHILIP'S CHILDHOOD HOME
+
+
+Massasoit had several children. The eldest son was named Wamsutta, and
+the second Metacomet. In later years, the English gave them the names of
+Alexander and Philip, which are much easier names for us to pronounce.
+
+We do not know the exact date of Philip's birth, for the Indians kept no
+account of time as we do, nor did they trouble to ask any one his age.
+It is probable, however, that Philip was born before 1620, the year in
+which the Pilgrims settled near the Wampanoags.
+
+Philip spent his boyhood days playing with his brothers and sisters, and
+with the neighbors' children; for although he was the son of a grand
+sachem, he had no special privileges above those of the other children
+around him.
+
+We are apt to think of a prince as a man that does very little work. We
+expect him to attend banquets, to be dressed in military uniform, with a
+beautiful sword at his side and many medals on his breast, to be
+surrounded by servants, and to have everybody bow down to him and stand
+ready to do his bidding.
+
+It was very different with Philip. He lived in no better way than did
+the other members of his tribe. His home was neither better nor worse
+than theirs. His food was of the same quality. His daily life was the
+same. He wore no uniform. He never heard of medals or badges. He had no
+servants. His father differed from the other Indians only in being
+their leader in time of war and in being looked up to whenever the
+chiefs of the tribe held a meeting, or council.
+
+Philip's home was not such as American boys and girls are brought up in.
+There were no toys, no baby carriages, no candy. There were no romps
+with the parents, for the Indians were a quiet, sober people, and rarely
+showed any affection for their children.
+
+Philip's father never played any games with him. In fact, in his younger
+days the boy never received very much attention from his father. He was
+taken care of by his mother. He was never rocked in a cradle, but was
+strapped in a kind of bag made of broad pieces of bark and covered with
+soft fur. Sometimes he was carried in this on his mother's back, as she
+went about her work. Sometimes he was hung up on the branch of a tree.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN BABY]
+
+The little house in which he lived was called a wigwam. It was circular,
+or oval, in shape, and made of barks or mats laid over a framework of
+small poles. These poles were fixed at one end in the ground, and were
+fastened together at the top, forming a framework shaped somewhat like a
+tent.
+
+Two low openings on opposite sides of the wigwam served as doors. These
+were closed with mats when necessary, thus making the place tight and
+warm.
+
+The wigwam had but one room. In the middle of it were a few stones
+which served as a fireplace. There was no chimney, but the smoke passed
+out through an opening at the top of the wigwam.
+
+On one side of the fireplace was a large couch made of rough boards
+raised perhaps a foot above the ground and covered with mats or skins.
+The couch was very wide, so that Philip and the rest of the children
+could lie on it side by side at night.
+
+There was no other furniture in the room. A few baskets were hung on the
+walls ready for use. A few mats were placed here and there as ornaments.
+The dishes that held Philip's food were rude vessels made of baked clay,
+of pieces of bark, of bits of hollowed stone, or of wood.
+
+[Illustration: MOUNT HOPE]
+
+There was very little desire to keep the wigwam neat and tidy. It was
+used for only a few months, and then given up for a new one that was
+built near by. In the summer it was customary to pitch the wigwam in an
+open place. In the winter it was pitched in the thick woods for
+protection from the winds and storms.
+
+Such was the home in which Philip was brought up. It differed but little
+from those of his playmates, for there was no aristocracy among the
+Indians. The place where Massasoit and his family generally lived was
+near the present site of Bristol, on a narrow neck of land projecting
+into Narragansett Bay. It is now called Mount Hope, and is twelve or
+fifteen miles southeast of Providence, Rhode Island.
+
+
+
+
+III. MASSASOIT AND HIS TWO SONS
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+In the early evening, during his boyhood days, Philip delighted to sit
+near the camp fire where the members of his tribe were wont to gather.
+There he eagerly listened to the stories of adventure told by his
+elders, and wished that he was old enough to enter into the sports that
+they so interestingly described.
+
+Although children were not expected to talk in the presence of their
+elders, Philip frequently showed his interest in their stories by
+asking many questions in regard to the places visited by the older
+Indians.
+
+In those days news traveled slowly from one little village to another,
+for there were neither telegraphs nor telephones; no, not even
+railroads. In fact, there were no roads, and even the paths through the
+woods were so little used that it was difficult to find one's way from
+one place to another. The Indians kept no animals of any kind, and
+always traveled from place to place on foot.
+
+One pleasant evening in June, in the year 1620, little Philip noticed
+that there was less general story-telling than usual, and that the
+Indians seemed greatly interested in a long story which one of their
+number was telling. He could not understand the story, but he frequently
+caught the words, "Squanto" and "English." These were new words to him.
+
+The next evening, as Philip and his brother were sitting by the fire,
+they asked their father what had caused the Indians to be so serious in
+their talk, and what the long story was about.
+
+"Squanto has come home," his father replied.
+
+"And who is Squanto?" asked Philip.
+
+Then his father told him a story, which was too long to be repeated
+here. But in brief it was as follows:
+
+Several years before--long, in fact, before Philip was born--a ship had
+come from across the sea. It was larger than any other vessel the
+Indians had ever seen.
+
+The only boats that Philip knew anything about were quite small, and
+were called canoes. They were made either of birch bark fastened over a
+light wooden frame, or of logs that had been hollowed by burning and
+charring.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN IN CANOE]
+
+But the boat from across the sea was many times larger than any of
+theirs--so Massasoit explained to the boys--and had accommodations for a
+great many men. Instead of being pushed along by paddles, it was driven
+by the wind by means of large pieces of cloth stretched across long,
+strong sticks of wood.
+
+The Indians did not go down to the shore, but watched this boat from
+the highlands some distance inland. Finally the vessel stopped and some
+of the men came ashore. The Indians looked at the strangers in
+astonishment. Their skin was of a pale, whitish color, very different
+from that of the Indians, which was of a copper or reddish clay color.
+
+The white men, or the pale-faced men, as Massasoit called them, made
+signs of friendship to the Indians, and after a few minutes persuaded
+them to go down to the shore. There the two peoples traded with each
+other. The Indians gave furs and skins, and received in return beads and
+trinkets of various kinds.
+
+When the vessel sailed away it carried off five Indians who had been
+lured on board and had not been allowed to return to shore. These
+Indians had not been heard from since, and that was fifteen years
+before.
+
+Little Philip's eyes increased in size, and instinctively he clenched
+his fists at the thought of the wrong that had been done his people by
+the palefaces.
+
+His father went on with the story, and told him how the Indians then
+vowed vengeance on the white man; for it was a custom of the Indians to
+punish any person who committed a wrong act towards one of their number.
+
+From time to time, other vessels visited their shores, but no Indian
+could ever be induced to go on board any of them.
+
+Nine years later, another outrage was committed. The palefaces while
+trading with the Indians suddenly seized upon twenty-seven of the
+latter, took them to their vessel, and sailed away with them before
+they could be rescued. Is it any wonder that Philip felt that the whites
+were his natural enemies?
+
+After that time, Massasoit said, the Indians had refused to have any
+dealings with the whites. Whenever a white man's vessel came in sight,
+the Indians prepared to shoot any one that came ashore. And now another
+white man's vessel had arrived on the coast, and several of its crew had
+landed in spite of all that could be done to prevent them.
+
+To the great surprise of Massasoit's men, there was an Indian with these
+palefaces. And that Indian proved to be Squanto, one of the five who had
+been taken away fifteen years before.
+
+This is but a bare outline of what Massasoit told his sons. It seemed to
+the lads like a fairy tale, and for days they talked of nothing but this
+strange story.
+
+
+
+
+IV. PHILIP HEARS OF THE ENGLISH
+
+
+During the following summer young Philip heard many an interesting story
+about the English. Squanto himself came to see Massasoit several times,
+and from him Philip heard the story of his adventures across the sea.
+
+Late in the fall, long before Philip had lost his interest in the
+stories of Squanto, another English vessel arrived on the coast of the
+Indian country.
+
+On the eleventh day of November, 1620, the vessel anchored near Cape
+Cod. Sixteen palefaces came ashore. They did not act like the others who
+had preceded them. They made no effort to become acquainted with the
+Indians, but spent their time in looking around and in examining the
+country.
+
+They found four or five bushels of corn, which had been stored for the
+winter by an Indian, and carried it away to their vessel.
+
+This angered the Indians, and we can well imagine the thoughts that
+passed through the mind of the boy Philip when he heard that the English
+had stolen the corn that belonged to a poor Indian, one of his father's
+friends.
+
+[Illustration: WATCHING THE PALEFACES]
+
+The Indians talked the matter over by their camp fire, and little Philip
+listened to the story as eagerly as he had listened to the story of
+Squanto six months before.
+
+A week or so later, more news came to Mount Hope. The palefaces had
+visited the shore a second time, and on this occasion had stolen a bag
+of beans and some more corn.
+
+How Philip's anger increased as he heard his father talk the matter over
+with the other Indians!
+
+A few days afterwards Philip heard still other news of the English. They
+had come ashore a third time. The Indians had watched them from a
+distance. Finally, when a good opportunity offered itself, thirty or
+forty Indians quietly surrounded the palefaces, and at a given signal
+every one of them yelled at the top of his voice and began to shoot
+arrows at the hated visitors.
+
+For a time it looked as if the palefaces would be driven into the water.
+But soon they fired their guns, and the Indians ran away frightened at
+the noise.
+
+Philip was greatly interested in the description that was given of a
+gun. He had never so much as heard of one before, and he thought it very
+strange that any one should be afraid of little pieces of lead. He could
+not see why it was not as easy to dodge bullets as it was to dodge
+arrows.
+
+A week or two later still further news was brought to Massasoit's
+village. The palefaces had left Cape Cod and had sailed across the bay
+to Patuxet (to which the English gave the name of Plymouth). There they
+had gone ashore and had built some log cabins, evidently with the
+intention of staying for some time.
+
+This was something that the Indians could not understand. Every day some
+of them went to the top of the hill which overlooked the little
+settlement to see what the English were doing. Then they returned to
+Mount Hope with something new to tell about the palefaces, and Philip
+eagerly listened to every story that was related.
+
+Several meetings of the Indians were held during the winter, at which
+Philip was always present, and finally one of their number, whose name
+was Samoset, was sent to Plymouth to ask the English why they had
+settled in this land which belonged, of right, to the red men.
+
+Samoset returned a few days later. He told his story to the Indians
+around the camp fire, little Philip, as usual, paying great attention to
+what was said.
+
+Samoset said that the palefaces had been very kind to him, and had told
+him that they had come to this country to settle, that they wanted to
+live on the most friendly terms with the red men, and that they desired
+to pay not only for the corn and beans which they had taken, but also
+for the land on which they had built their village.
+
+At the close of his story the Indians expressed themselves as satisfied
+with the palefaces, and Philip felt that perhaps the English were not so
+bad as he had thought them to be.
+
+Samoset was then sent to the settlers to tell them that Massasoit and
+some of his friends would like to meet them for a friendly talk about
+many things that might otherwise become a cause of disagreement between
+them. He brought back word that the English eagerly welcomed the
+opportunity to meet the Indians, and had offered to see them on the
+following day.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+V. PHILIP MEETS THE ENGLISH
+
+
+The next day Massasoit and sixty of his warriors visited the English.
+They did not go into the English village, but stopped on the top of the
+hill near by.
+
+Philip was not with them, for at this time he was too young to go so far
+away from home. We can imagine his feelings, however, when he saw his
+father and the warriors start out on their journey.
+
+They were dressed in costumes that would look very strange if seen on
+our streets to-day. Their clothing was made of the raw skin of wild
+animals. Their feet were protected by moccasins made of thin deerskin.
+Each one was tall, erect, and active, with long, coarse, black hair
+falling down his back.
+
+[Illustration: A WARRIOR]
+
+None of them had any physical deformities, for it was the custom of the
+tribe to kill any child that was born deaf, dumb, blind, or lame.
+
+Each one was decked with his personal ornaments. These did not consist
+of gold, silver, diamonds, or any other precious stones so familiar to
+us. The Indians knew nothing about these. Their ornaments consisted of
+ear-rings, nose-rings, bracelets, and necklaces made out of shells or
+fish-bones or shining stones, which were very common in that
+neighborhood.
+
+Their faces were smeared with heavy daubs of paint. Each one had a
+cloak thrown over his shoulders, and he also wore a head-dress made of
+feathers or quills. To Philip it seemed as if he had never seen anything
+so imposing.
+
+We can imagine how eagerly Philip listened to the story that his father
+told when he came back home: how the settlers came out to meet him on
+the hill, and made him a present of three knives, a copper chain, and an
+ear-ring, besides several good things to eat, very different from
+anything he had ever tasted before.
+
+Then Massasoit described the treaty that he had made with the palefaces
+in which the settlers and the Wampanoags had agreed to remain friends
+and to help each other in every way they could. To make the treaty as
+strong as possible, the palefaces had written it down on paper and had
+signed their names to it. The Indians did not know how to read or write.
+That was something that they had never heard of before. But they drew
+rude pictures at the end of the writing and called these pictures their
+names.
+
+Philip never tired listening to the stories about the palefaces. He was
+still too young to be taken to their settlement, but he longed for a
+chance to see them.
+
+Suddenly, one day in the middle of the summer of 1621, about four months
+after the Indians had made their treaty with the whites, six warriors
+came into the little Indian village at Mount Hope with two men, who
+Philip saw were palefaces. They were not so tall as the Indians. They
+were thicker set, and their faces were covered with beards.
+
+Massasoit recognized them immediately, for they were some of the party
+that he had met at Plymouth. They had come on a friendly visit to him,
+and had brought him a red cotton coat and a copper chain. Philip was
+greatly pleased to see the palefaces, of whom he had heard so much. He
+listened to their stories, answered their inquiries in regard to Indian
+life, and learned what he could about their homes and customs.
+
+After this, the settlers called on the Indians many times, and Philip
+soon became very well acquainted with them.
+
+During the next few months several white men came from England and
+settled at Weymouth, a few miles north of Plymouth. These new settlers
+were not so honest as those that had settled at Plymouth. They stole
+from the Indians and otherwise injured them, and caused them to plot
+against all the whites in the country. But before their plans were
+carried out Massasoit was taken sick. The medicine man was called in.
+
+The medicine man was the physician. He had learned the medicinal virtues
+of a few simple herbs. He knew how to bind up wounds in bark with
+certain preparations of leaves, and he could also cure a few fevers. He
+went through many magical ceremonies with howls, roars, and antics of
+various kinds. If the sick man became well, the medicine man took all
+the credit; if the patient died, then the medicine man said that the bad
+spirit had too strong a hold on him.
+
+But the medicine man did not help Massasoit. Philip watched by his
+father's side and saw him grow worse day by day. He remembered how, only
+a few years before, the smallpox had carried away large numbers of the
+Indians, and now he began to think that the days of his father, too,
+were numbered.
+
+But one day a paleface, one of the leaders of the colony at Plymouth,
+came into the Indian village. He sent the medicine man away and tenderly
+nursed Massasoit himself. He gave him medicine, nourished him with
+several little delicacies, and brought him slowly back to health.
+
+Massasoit was so grateful for the kindness shown him that he told the
+palefaces of the Indian plot against them.
+
+The whites at Weymouth were driven away and the palefaces at Plymouth
+continued to live on most excellent terms of friendship with the
+Wampanoags.
+
+In the years that followed, Philip became better acquainted with the
+whites, and while he never loved them, he had great respect for their
+wisdom.
+
+
+
+
+VI. PHILIP'S EDUCATION
+
+
+During the next twenty years many more white men came and settled on or
+near the lands of the Wampanoags.
+
+In the mean time, Philip grew to manhood and received the same education
+that was given to the other young men of his tribe. It was very
+different from the education received by us to-day. The Indians had no
+schools. Philip did not learn his A B C's or the multiplication table.
+He never learned how to read or write. He knew nothing about science,
+and could not even count, or keep track of time.
+
+His education was of a different character, and was intended to make him
+brave, daring, hardy, and able to bear pain; for these things were
+thought by the Indians to be of the greatest importance.
+
+He was taught to undergo the most horrible tortures without a word of
+complaint or a sign of anguish. He would beat his shins and legs with
+sticks, and run prickly briars and brambles into them in order to become
+used to pain. He would run eighty to one hundred miles in one day and
+back in the next two.
+
+When he neared manhood he was blindfolded and taken into the woods far
+from home to a place where he had never been before.
+
+There he was left with nothing but a hatchet, a knife, and a bow and
+arrows. The winter was before him, and he was expected to support
+himself through it. If he was unable to do so, it was better for him to
+die then.
+
+Philip passed the lonely winter far away from home. Many times did he
+wish that he was back in his father's wigwam where he could talk with
+his parents and his brothers and his friends, and know what the
+palefaces were doing.
+
+But he knew that if he should return to his little village before the
+winter was over he would be branded as a coward, and never be
+considered worthy to succeed his father as sachem.
+
+[Illustration: THE YOUNG HUNTER]
+
+What, he, Philip, a prince, afraid? No, no, no! Of course he was not
+afraid. What was there to be afraid of? Had he not always lived in the
+woods? Still, he was a little lonely, and once in a while he wanted some
+one to talk with.
+
+So Philip went to work with a will. With his hatchet he cut down some
+small trees, made them into poles, and placed one end of them in the
+ground. With his knife he cut some bark from the trees and laid it over
+the poles so that he had a fairly comfortable shelter from the storms
+and winds which he knew would soon surely come. Then he spent several
+days in hunting birds and wild game in the forest. With his bow and
+arrows he shot enough to support himself through the winter.
+
+Many an adventure did he have. Many a time did he lie down at night
+without having tasted food during the whole livelong day. Many a savage
+beast did he see, and on several occasions he climbed trees, or crawled
+into caves, or ran as fast as he could, to get out of their way.
+
+But he had a strong will. He knew that the son of the grand sachem of
+the Wampanoags could do anything that any other Indian had done. And so
+he passed the long, cold winter, bravely and without complaining.
+
+In the spring, when his father and friends came after him, they found
+him well and strong. His winter's work had made him healthy and rugged.
+He was taken home, and a feast was prepared in honor of Massasoit's son
+who had returned to his home stronger than when he had gone away the
+fall before.
+
+During the next two moons--for the Indians counted by moons and not by
+months as we do--Philip led an idle life. He did no work of any kind. He
+was taking his vacation after the hard winter life he had led alone in
+the woods.
+
+But his education was not yet finished. His body had been made strong.
+It was next necessary to strengthen his constitution against the evil
+effects of poison. He again went into the forest, and daily found
+poisonous and bitter herbs and roots. These he bruised and put the
+juices into water, which he drank.
+
+Then he drank other juices which acted as antidotes and prevented his
+sickness or death. He did this day after day until his constitution
+became used to the poisons, and he was able to drink them freely without
+any harm coming to him.
+
+Then he went home. The people sang and danced and gave him another great
+feast. He was now considered a man and ready to marry and have a wigwam
+of his own.
+
+The wedding ceremony was extremely simple. There were no presents, no
+flowers, no guests, no ceremony, no banquet. Philip simply asked a
+certain woman to come and live with him. She came and was thereafter his
+wife, or squaw, as the Indians called her.
+
+We have no record of the date of his marriage, for the Indians kept no
+such records. We only know that it took place soon after his return from
+his battle with poisons in the woods.
+
+
+
+
+VII. PHILIP'S DAILY LIFE
+
+
+We should consider the daily life of Philip very monotonous. It was the
+same, day by day, year in and year out, with very little change. The
+little village where he lived contained fewer than one hundred
+inhabitants. Everybody was thoroughly acquainted with everybody else.
+
+There was no society such as we have to-day. Philip's squaw did not
+dress herself up in the afternoon, and make calls on the other squaws.
+If she wished to talk with them she went where they were, whether it was
+morning, afternoon, or evening.
+
+There were no parties, no receptions, no theaters, no art museums, no
+libraries, no books, no music, no fireworks, no holidays, no Sabbath.
+The Indians believed in a good and a bad spirit, but they had no
+churches or temples or service or worship or priests.
+
+So we cannot think of Philip sitting in the best pew in church, and
+listening to a grand sermon, preached by the most famous minister in the
+country. Philip knew nothing of sermons.
+
+He played no games that instructed his mind. He cared for only such
+games as would strengthen his body, increase his power of endurance, or
+develop his muscle or his craftiness. With the other Indians he played
+football, tossed quoits, wrestled, ran, and jumped.
+
+Occasionally he engaged with them in the war dance. This was performed
+in a very solemn manner. It represented a war campaign, or a sham
+battle, as we say. First, the Indians came together from different
+directions. Then they marched forward stealthily and quietly, lay in
+ambush, awaited the coming of the enemy, suddenly jumped out and rushed
+upon them, slaughtered them, retreated, and finally went home. The dance
+ended with the reception at home, and the torturing and killing of the
+prisoners.
+
+These were his amusements. His occupations were two in number: hunting
+and fishing.
+
+In the fall of the year, and again in the spring, he spent about three
+months in hunting. In company with his brother or some close friend, he
+went in search of a supply of meat for the use of the family, and of
+skins to sell to the white men or to use for clothing.
+
+After reaching the hunting-grounds, they built a big wigwam where they
+stayed at night. There also they stored the skins of the animals they
+had captured.
+
+Many stories might be told of the exciting adventures they had with
+bears and wolves. The woods of New England contained many moose and
+other wild animals, and generally Philip returned to his little village
+with meat enough to last all winter. Frequently he brought home as many
+as one hundred beaver skins.
+
+But Philip, like others, had bad luck sometimes. Now and then he lost
+his way in the woods, and on one or two occasions the raft on which he
+was taking his skins across the river upset and the results of his
+winter's labor were lost.
+
+He captured his game by shooting or snaring, or by catching it in
+pitfalls. When the hunting season was over he spent his time in fishing.
+Generally he caught his fish in nets, although occasionally he used a
+hook and line.
+
+When not engaged in hunting or fishing, or attending a meeting of Indian
+princes, he was generally to be found near his wigwam, asleep or
+watching his squaw at work.
+
+All the work around the wigwam was done by his wife or squaw. According
+to the Indian view she was his slave. She covered and lined the wigwam,
+plaited the mats and baskets, planted, tended, and harvested the corn
+and vegetables, cooked the food, ate the leavings, and slept on the
+coldest side of the wigwam.
+
+[Illustration: SQUAWS AT WORK]
+
+Many Indians did not care very much for their squaws, and made their
+lives miserable by treating them badly, and showing them no sympathy nor
+love in any way whatever. But we are told that Philip was better than
+the other Indians in this respect. He loved his wife and treated her as
+a companion instead of as a slave.
+
+Philip had no pots and kettles like ours. His wife roasted his meat by
+placing it on the point of a stake. She broiled it by laying it on hot
+coals or hot stones. She boiled it in rude vessels made of stone, earth,
+or wood, and heated the water by throwing hot stones into it.
+
+Philip's only garden tool was a hoe, made of clam shells or of a moose's
+shoulder-blade fastened to a wooden handle. He also had a rude axe or
+hatchet made of a piece of stone, sharpened by being scraped on another
+stone, and tied to a wooden handle. His arrows and spears were tipped
+with bone or with triangular pieces of flint. These were all home-made,
+for Philip, like other Indians, was obliged to make his own hatchets and
+arrows.
+
+Finally, Philip never went to the store to buy things to be used at
+home, for the Indians kept no stores. His wife raised the corn,
+squashes, and pumpkins, and he caught his own fish and game. These, with
+nuts, roots, and berries, gave him all the food he needed.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. PHILIP'S RELATIONS WITH THE ENGLISH
+
+
+Such was the daily life of Philip year after year, with but little
+change. Occasionally he met the palefaces in the woods or at his
+father's village. Now and then he went to Plymouth and traded with them.
+Several of them he considered to be his strong personal friends.
+
+We have already seen how greatly interested he was in his boyhood days
+at the coming of the white men and how friendly he felt toward them at
+that time. He, his father, and the other Wampanoags continued to remain
+on friendly terms with the English, although several other Indian tribes
+did not.
+
+Between the years 1628 and 1640 many white people settled forty or fifty
+miles north of Plymouth, in what is now Boston and Salem, and other
+cities and towns near Massachusetts Bay.
+
+Others settled inland on the Connecticut River, near the present
+boundary line between Massachusetts and Connecticut, about seventy-five
+miles west from Mount Hope, the home of Philip. Others settled at
+Providence, and still others on the island of Rhode Island, fifteen to
+twenty miles south of Mount Hope.
+
+The settlers on the Connecticut had trouble with the Pequots, a tribe of
+Indians living to the west of the Wampanoags, and in the war that
+followed, all the Pequots were killed. The whites also had trouble with
+the Narragansetts, who lived near Providence, outbreaks occurring every
+year or two for several years.
+
+During these years Philip and his father did nothing to injure the
+settlers in any way. They refused to aid the other Indians in their wars
+with the English, preferring to remain faithful to their early treaty
+with the whites; and the whites remained on the most friendly terms with
+them.
+
+Philip knew nothing of the Christian religion. Several attempts were
+made by the whites to convert the Indians to Christianity. In 1646, John
+Eliot translated the Bible into the Indian language, taught the Indians
+the English habits of industry and agriculture, and established near
+Boston two towns composed entirely of converted Indians.
+
+At the same time, Thomas Mayhew preached to the Wampanoags on Martha's
+Vineyard, and there converted a great many. By the year 1675, four
+thousand Indians had been converted to Christianity.
+
+But the missionaries were not successful with Philip and the Wampanoags
+at Mount Hope. They utterly refused to listen to the preachers. They
+preferred their former mode of life, and there were several good reasons
+for this preference, as they thought.
+
+Philip noticed that many white men who called themselves Christians were
+in the habit of stealing from the red men, and cheating them whenever
+they could. He could not see that the Christian religion made them more
+happy, more honest, or better than he was.
+
+Again, he noticed that, as soon as the Indians were converted, they left
+their former life and companions and joined themselves to the English.
+This tended to lessen the control of the chiefs over their tribes, and
+so reduced their power. Thus he saw that a great deal might be lost by
+changing his religion, or by urging his followers to change theirs.
+
+Nevertheless, Massasoit and his sons remained strong friends to the
+Plymouth people until 1661, when Massasoit died, being about eighty
+years of age.
+
+
+
+
+IX. PHILIP BECOMES GRAND SACHEM
+
+
+According to the custom of the Indians, Wamsutta, the eldest son of
+Massasoit, succeeded his father as grand sachem of the Wampanoags.
+
+Almost his first act was to go to Plymouth, where he made some requests
+of the settlers. These were granted. Then he asked for an English name,
+and was given the name of Alexander.
+
+He was so much pleased with this name that he asked for an English name
+for his younger brother, Metacomet. The English gave him the name of
+Philip, by which name we have been calling him in our account of his
+life.
+
+A few days later, ten armed men suddenly appeared at the place where
+Wamsutta and several of his followers were holding a feast, and arrested
+them all. Wamsutta was taken to Plymouth immediately, and charged with
+plotting with the Narragansetts against the English.
+
+Being seized by force on their own grounds, and compelled to go to
+Plymouth to answer charges based on rumor, was a new, experience for the
+Wampanoags. It was very different from the friendly manner in which they
+had been treated formerly.
+
+The English treated Wamsutta very well at Plymouth. They could prove
+nothing against him, and hence they soon let him go. On his way home he
+died.
+
+As Wamsutta left no children, he was succeeded by his brother Philip.
+There was no ceremony of crowning, no procession, no speeches. In fact,
+there was no crown at all; nor was there any ceremony of any kind. The
+other Indians merely obeyed Philip just as they had formerly obeyed his
+father and his brother.
+
+Philip and all the members of the Wampanoag tribe believed that
+Wamsutta's death was due to poison which had been given him by the
+whites when he was at Plymouth. According to the belief and custom of
+the Indians, it was Philip's duty to take vengeance on those who had
+caused his brother's death.
+
+Still, Philip made no attempt to injure the whites in any way. But the
+whites became suspicious, probably because they felt that they had done
+wrong; and very soon they summoned Philip to Plymouth to answer a charge
+of plotting against them.
+
+Philip acted very honorably in the matter. Instead of hiding in the
+forest, as he might easily have done, he went to Plymouth. There he had
+a long talk with the whites. He denied that he had plotted against them.
+He showed them that it was against his own interests to have any trouble
+with them, and as proof of his good intentions toward them, he offered
+to leave his next younger brother with them as a hostage.
+
+He agreed to continue the treaty that his father had made forty years
+before. He went further, and acknowledged himself to be a faithful
+subject of the King of England, and promised not to make war on any
+Indian tribe unless the English first gave their consent.
+
+For several years Philip was grand sachem of the Wampanoags and kept
+this treaty with great faithfulness. During this time his duties were
+similar to those which his father had had, and his life was uneventful.
+He was consulted by the other sachems of the tribe, and his advice was
+generally followed by them.
+
+Like his father, the good Massasoit, he was inclined to be conservative;
+that is, he did not like to change the established order of things. He
+was very much liked by the Indians, who felt that he tried to treat them
+all honestly and fairly.
+
+He went to Plymouth very frequently, to visit the whites and to trade
+with them. And, likewise, the whites frequently came to Mount Hope to
+see him.
+
+The relations between the whites and the Indians were such that it was
+perfectly safe for a white man to go anywhere among the Wampanoags
+unarmed. This is something that cannot be said of any other Indian tribe
+in the colonial days. The Indians, acting under orders from King Philip,
+treated the whites honestly and fairly. In fact, there was a feeling of
+great friendship between the whites and the Indians.
+
+
+
+
+X. PHILIP'S TROUBLES WITH THE WHITES
+
+
+Ten years passed by peacefully, except for one little trouble, which
+occurred in 1667, six years after Philip became sachem. An Indian told
+the people at Plymouth that Philip had said that he wished the Dutch
+would beat the English in the war which was then being carried on
+between Holland and England.
+
+The Plymouth people were very much surprised at this, and immediately
+called Philip to account. But he denied ever making any such statement,
+and offered to surrender all his arms to the English in order to show
+that he had no hostile designs against them. This satisfied the English.
+Everything went on quietly until 1671, when troubles between the two
+races finally began to arise.
+
+In that year Philip complained that the English were not living up to
+their agreement which they had made with him ten years before. At the
+request of the people of Plymouth, Philip went to Taunton, a village
+near his hunting-grounds, and talked matters over with them.
+
+He was accompanied by a band of warriors armed to the teeth and painted.
+The meeting was held in the little village church. Philip and his
+Indians sat on one side of the room and the English on the other.
+
+A man from Boston, who was thought to be friendly to both parties, was
+chosen to preside over the meeting. Then the Indians and the settlers
+made speeches, one after the other, just as is done in meetings to-day.
+
+Philip admitted that lately he had begun to prepare for war, and also
+that some of his Indians had not treated the whites justly. But he also
+showed that the English were arming themselves, and that many of them
+had cheated the Indians when dealing with them.
+
+Philip said that he preferred peace to war, and had only armed his
+warriors in self-defense. Finally, it was decided to make a new treaty.
+
+Here is a copy of the new treaty as it was drawn up. Notice the quaint
+way of expressing the ideas, and also, that many words are not spelled
+as we spell them to-day. Notice, too, how one-sided the treaty is, and
+that it is signed only by Philip and the Indians.
+
+            COPY OF THE TREATY MADE AT TAUNTON, APRIL 10, 1671.
+
+     Whereas my Father, my Brother, and my self have formerly submitted
+     our selves and our people unto the Kings Majesty of England, and
+     this Colony of New-Plymouth, by solemn Covenant under our Hand, but
+     I having of late through my indiscretion, and the naughtiness of my
+     heart, violated and broken this my Covenant with my friends by
+     taking up arms, with evill intent against them, and that
+     groundlessly; I being now deeply sensible of my unfaithfulness and
+     folly, do desire at this time solemnly to renew my Covenant with my
+     ancient Friends and my Father's friends above mentioned; and doe
+     desire this may testifie to the world against me, if ever I shall
+     again fail in my faithfulness towards them (that I have now and at
+     all times found so kind to me) or any other of the English
+     colonyes; and as a reall Pledge of my true Intentions, for the
+     future to be faithful and friendly, I doe freely ingage to resign
+     up unto the Government of New-Plymouth, all my English Armes to be
+     kept by them for their security, so long as they shall see reason.
+     For true performance of the Premises I have hereunto set my hand
+     together with the rest of my council.
+
+   In the presence of   The Mark of Philip,
+                              Chief Sachem of Pokanoket
+
+   William Davis.       The Mark of Tavoser.
+
+   William Hudson.     ---- ---- Capt. Wisposke.
+
+   Thomas Brattle.     ---- ---- Woonkaponehunt.
+
+                       ---- ---- Nimrod.
+
+
+
+But Philip doubted the sincerity of the English. He hesitated to give up
+his arms. Then the settlers ordered him to come to Plymouth and explain
+why.
+
+Instead of obeying, he went to Boston and complained there of the
+treatment he had received. He said that his father, his brother, and
+himself had made treaties of friendship with the English which the
+latter were trying to turn into treaties of subjection. He said he was a
+subject of the King of England, but not of the colony of Plymouth, and
+he saw no reason why the people of Plymouth should try to treat him as a
+subject.
+
+The people of Massachusetts again made peace between Philip and the
+settlers at Plymouth. But it could not long continue, for each side had
+now become thoroughly suspicious of the other.
+
+In 1674, an Indian reported to the settlers that Philip was trying to
+get the sachems of New England to wage war on the whites. A few days
+later, that Indian's dead body was found in a lake. The English arrested
+three Indians and tried them for the murder. They were found guilty and
+were executed, although the evidence against them was of such a
+character that it would not have been admitted in a court of justice
+against a white man.
+
+
+
+
+XI. PHILIP AND THE INDIAN COUNCILS
+
+
+Philip thought the matter over. He felt that the English had done the
+Indians great injustice.
+
+In the first place, the land had originally belonged to the Indians. It
+was not of great value to them, for they used it mainly for hunting
+purposes. So they had very willingly parted with a few acres to the
+English in return for some trinkets of very little value--such as a
+jack-knife, or a few glass beads, or little bells, or a blanket.
+
+Then the English had forbidden the Indian to sell his land to any white
+man. He was allowed to sell only to the colonial government. This was
+done in order to protect him from white men who wanted to cheat him; but
+Philip only saw that it prevented his giving away something of little
+value to himself, and getting something he wanted in return.
+
+Before the English came, the woods were full of game and the streams
+were full of fish. Now Philip noticed that the game was going from the
+woods and the fish from the rivers. He felt that the Indians were
+becoming poorer and the English were getting richer.
+
+Only the poorer lands were owned by the Indians now. All the best were
+in the hands of the white men.
+
+Philip was also tired of the airs of superiority assumed by the whites.
+They looked upon the Indians as fit only for servants and slaves. He
+thought that his people were as good as the whites. He felt that the
+bonds of love and sympathy between the two races had been broken.
+
+In spite of his many complaints and requests, the English had failed to
+punish unprincipled white men who had done wrong to the Indians.
+
+Finally, those Indians who had been converted to Christianity had left
+their old tribes and their former modes of life. This had weakened the
+power of the Indians, and Philip began to think that the English were
+Christianizing the Indians simply for the purpose of getting control of
+their lands.
+
+Philip felt that the question was too deep a one for him to solve. He
+called the sachems of the Wampanoags together, and talked the matter
+over with them. Several meetings were held, and every member expressed
+himself on the subject very freely.
+
+The question then arose, what should they do? It very soon became
+evident that two opposite opinions were held.
+
+It was not the custom of the Indians to vote on any questions that were
+discussed at their meetings. They talked the matter over and then
+adopted the plan that most of them thought was best. But at this time
+they were unable to decide what to do in order to get back that which
+they had lost, and how to prevent losing any more. And so they kept on
+talking over plans.
+
+Fifty-five years of peace and friendship with the English had resulted
+in giving the white men all the land of any value, while the Wampanoags
+were decreasing in numbers and each year were finding it more and more
+difficult to live.
+
+The young warriors urged immediate action. They wanted war, and wanted
+it then, and desired to keep it up until the English should be driven
+out of the country.
+
+Philip was opposed to this. He knew how strong the English were, and
+that it would be impossible to drive them out. He saw that the time had
+gone by when the English could be expelled from the country. He threw
+his influence with the older warriors, and for a while succeeded in
+holding the younger men in check. He felt that the Indians could never
+be successful in a war with the English when the tribe owned only thirty
+guns and had no provisions laid aside to carry them through the war.
+
+
+
+
+XII. KING PHILIP'S WAR
+
+
+Philip did his best to keep at peace with the English. For a while he
+succeeded. But his young warriors began to steal hogs and cattle
+belonging to the settlers, and on one pleasant Sunday in June, 1675,
+when the people were at church, eight young Indians burned a few houses
+in the village of Swansea, the nearest town to the Wampanoag
+headquarters at Mount Hope. The whites immediately raised a few troops,
+marched after the Indians, and had a little skirmish with them.
+
+Philip was not with his warriors at the time. The attack on the whites
+had been made against his express orders. When he heard that the Indians
+and settlers had really had a battle, he wept from sorrow, something
+which an Indian rarely does.
+
+Everything seemed to go wrong. He tried to make peace with the whites,
+but they would not listen to him. The young warriors no longer paid any
+attention to what he said. They went on destroying property and killing
+cattle.
+
+After leaving Swansea, they went to Taunton and Middleboro, where they
+burned several houses and killed a few persons. But troops soon arrived
+from Boston and Plymouth, and in a few days the Indians were driven back
+to their homes at Mount Hope.
+
+The English hurried on after them, and the war that followed is known in
+history as King Philip's War.
+
+Philip and the Indians swam across Narragansett Bay and went to some of
+their friends in the Connecticut Valley. There they obtained the help of
+the Nipmucks, who had never been very friendly towards the English.
+
+We do not know where Philip was during the war. He knew that he would be
+held responsible for it, although he had done everything in his power to
+prevent it. For a year the war was carried on, one hundred miles away
+from his home, and never once was he known to have been connected with
+any fighting, nor was he even seen by the English during that time. Some
+of them thought that he was directing the war, but really it was carried
+on by other tribes of Indians that had not been very friendly towards
+the whites. The Wampanoags seem to have had very little connection with
+the war.
+
+The Indians attacked the English towns in the Connecticut Valley, and
+the more exposed places on the frontier of the colony where the people
+were few and scattered.
+
+No battle was fought in the open field. The Indians did not fight in
+that way. They secretly surrounded a town, rushed in from all sides,
+killed as many people as possible, took what property they could carry
+away, and burned all that remained.
+
+They knew all the paths in the forests, swamps, and thickets. They were
+fast runners, and went rapidly from town to town.
+
+Their favorite method of fighting was in an ambuscade. That was
+something peculiar to the Indians. The English had never heard of that
+way of fighting before they came to America. The Indians would lie down
+flat on the ground or stand behind trees or in a bush or thicket. When
+the enemy came along with no suspicion that any one was near, the
+Indians suddenly gave a yell and fired their arrows or guns at them.
+This would startle them and generally cause them to run away.
+
+[Illustration: HOUSE PROTECTED BY PALISADES]
+
+The war was one of the most dreadful in the history of our country. A
+farmer left his home in the morning not knowing whether he would ever
+see his wife and children again. His gun was always in his hand.
+Laborers were cut off in the field. Reapers, millers, women at home, and
+people on their way to and from church were killed.
+
+Nearly every town in the Connecticut Valley was destroyed by the
+Indians, and the people suffered terribly. The Indians were very
+successful during the first year of the war. They lost but few warriors
+and did an immense amount of injury to the whites. This caused the young
+warriors to believe that Philip and the old warriors were wrong, and
+that it was really possible for them to drive the English from the
+country.
+
+
+
+
+XIII. THE LAST DAYS OF PHILIP
+
+
+During the winter there was very little fighting. In the spring the
+Indians did not fight with any spirit. They had begun to get tired of
+the war. Many wished for peace. The Narragansetts who had been helping
+in the war had suffered a terrible defeat from the English.
+
+The English began to understand better the Indian method of fighting.
+They attacked the Indians wherever they could find them. They surprised
+several large forces of Indians in different places. Then it began to
+look as if Philip and the old warriors were right and the young warriors
+were wrong.
+
+Several sachems had been killed. The Indians had no stores of corn. The
+English tore up every field that the Indians planted. Finally, the
+Indians gave up hope. They were being starved out. During the summer of
+1676, large numbers of them surrendered to the whites.
+
+Philip was not seen from the time he swam across Narragansett Bay until
+in July, 1676, when he returned to his old home at Mount Hope. His wife
+and son had been captured earlier in the spring, and he knew that the
+cause of the Indians was lost.
+
+He wanted to see his old home once more, the place where he had lived
+for sixty years, but which he felt he was now going to lose forever. We
+can see him as he returned to his home, now desolated by war, his wigwam
+destroyed, his cornfield trodden down, his family taken from him, his
+friends taken captive in the war. He felt that the war was wrong, that
+his young warriors had been too hasty in starting it without making
+proper preparations for it. He looked into the future. It seemed very
+dark to him.
+
+The war indeed was nearly over. The Wampanoags were talking about
+surrendering. Philip knew that surrender meant death for him. He refused
+even to think of it. When one of his warriors suggested it to him he
+killed him on the spot.
+
+The English soon learned that Philip had returned to his old home. They
+surrounded him. On the twelfth day of August, 1676, he was shot in an
+ambuscade by the brother of the Indian he had killed for suggesting that
+he surrender.
+
+And now, see how barbarous the English settlers could be. They cut off
+his hands and quartered his body, leaving it to decay on four trees.
+They carried his head to Plymouth, and placed it on the end of a pole.
+Then they appointed a public day of thanksgiving.
+
+Philip's wife and children were taken to the Bermudas and sold as
+slaves, in common with the other Indians captured in the war. Thus the
+Wampanoag tribe of Indians came to an end.
+
+Philip was unjustly blamed by the Plymouth people for starting the war.
+They thought that he was in league with several other tribes in New
+England and New York, and that he intended to drive out the English if
+he could. That was why they fought so desperately, and at the end of the
+war removed the remnants of the tribe from New England. It is true that
+the Indians would have been obliged to move in time. Philip undoubtedly
+saw that, but he believed that peace was best and he urged it on his
+followers. The English did not know this, and the result was that Philip
+was held responsible for a war which he had opposed from the outset.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF
+
+PONTIAC
+
+BY
+
+FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF PONTIAC
+
+
+
+
+I. THE MEETING OF PONTIAC AND THE ENGLISH
+
+
+Though the French were still fighting stubbornly at sea, the French war
+was over in America. Canada had been surrendered to the British, and
+England's banners waved over Quebec. Yet the tidings of defeat had not
+reached the French garrisons on the Great Lakes.
+
+In the fall of 1760 Major Robert Rogers, with two hundred British
+rangers, set out in fifteen whale boats, to carry to the interior the
+news of the surrender and to take possession of the French forts on the
+lakes.
+
+This was a somewhat dangerous task. For, although no resistance was to
+be feared from the French, the savages who were in league with them
+could not be counted on to understand or believe the changed state of
+affairs. Indeed, it was doubtful if they would even allow the British a
+hearing before attacking them.
+
+Rogers and his men, however, coasted along the shores of Lake Erie
+without adventure until early in November. Then the weather became so
+stormy and the lake so rough that the commander decided to go ashore and
+camp in the forest until the tempest had passed.
+
+The rangers were glad to feel the solid earth under their feet and to
+find shelter from the driving wind and rain. Nevertheless, they soon
+realized that the forest was not without its dangers.
+
+They had not been long ashore when a large band of Indians entered the
+camp. These Indians said that Pontiac, chief of the Ottawas, had sent
+them before him to demand of the Englishmen how they dared to come into
+his country without his permission.
+
+Before nightfall the famous warrior himself stood in the presence of the
+English commander and his officers and spoke in this fashion:
+"Englishmen, I am Pontiac, greatest councilor and warrior of the
+Ottawas. This land belongs to my people. You are the enemies of my
+people. You are the enemies of our brothers, the French. Why do you
+bring armed warriors into my country without asking my consent? You can
+not go farther until Pontiac leaves your path."
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC AND ROGERS]
+
+To this haughty speech Rogers answered: "Brother, we come to tell you
+that the war is over. Our mighty English warriors have made your French
+brothers shake with fear. We have slain their war chiefs; we have taken
+their strong villages. They have begged us for mercy. They have promised
+to be the dutiful and obedient children of the English king if we will
+lay down the hatchet and fight against them no more. They have given us
+their guns, their forts, and all the land of Canada. I have come into
+your country to take Detroit. I shall not fight with your brothers, the
+French; I shall not shoot them. I shall show their commander a paper and
+he will pull down his flag and he and his men will come out of the fort
+and give me their guns. Then I shall go in with my men and put up my
+flag.
+
+"The English king is terrible in war. He could punish the Indians and
+make them cry for mercy, as he has the French. But he is kind and offers
+to his red children the chain of friendship. If you accept it he is
+ready to shut his eyes to the mischief the French have put you up to in
+the past, and to protect you with his strong arm."
+
+Pontiac listened gravely to every word the white man spoke. But his dark
+face gave no token of what was passing in his mind. Now, Indians despise
+rashness, and it is their custom to deliberate over night before
+answering any important question. So, with the dignity of one who knows
+no fear and craves no favor, the greatest councilor of the Ottawas
+replied simply: "Englishmen, I shall stand in your path till morning. In
+the meantime if your warriors are cold or hungry the hands of my people
+are open to you." Then he and his chiefs withdrew, and slipped silently
+back through the dripping forest to their camp.
+
+The English rangers slept with their guns at hand that night. They knew
+the pride and might and treachery of Pontiac, and they feared him. They
+felt as if they were in a trap, with the raging sea before them and the
+forest alive with pitiless savages behind.
+
+But they need have had no fear, for the great chief thought not of
+massacre that night. He thought of the English who stood ready to avenge
+any harm done to their brothers; of his own race dependent on the white
+men for rum, for wampum, for guns and powder and bullets. Clearly the
+Indians must have friends among the palefaces. The French were their
+"brothers." They had given them presents, had married their maidens, had
+traded, hunted, and gone to battle with them. The English were their
+foes. But they were many and strong. They had beaten the French and
+taken their guns. The red men must let their hatred sleep for awhile.
+They would smoke the pipe of peace with the English, and the English
+would give them presents: tobacco and rum, guns and powder.
+
+[Illustration: WAMPUM]
+
+Having reached this conclusion, Pontiac and his chiefs returned to
+Rogers's camp on the following morning. There they smoked the calumet
+with the English and exchanged presents and promises of kindness and
+friendship. The men who had met as enemies parted as friends.
+
+Years later, when British armies were marching against Indians whose
+tomahawks were red with English blood, Pontiac's faith in the friendship
+of Rogers remained unshaken. The latter sent to the chief a bottle of
+rum. When advised not to drink it lest it should contain poison, Pontiac
+replied: "I did not save from death on the shores of Lake Erie a man who
+would to-day poison me," and he drained the bottle without hesitation.
+
+[Illustration: CALUMET]
+
+Though a single Indian and a single Englishman could thus overcome their
+distrust for each other, the feelings of the two races could not be so
+easily altered. The Indians looked upon the English as cruel robbers,
+whose object was to drive them from their homes and possess their lands.
+They thought of them as enemies too powerful to be withstood by open
+force and therefore to be met only with cunning and deception. Many of
+the English looked upon the savages as ignorant, filthy, and treacherous
+beings, little better than wild beasts, and thought that the world would
+be better off without them. Yet for the present both were glad to be at
+peace.
+
+The Indians found that Major Rogers had spoken truly about Detroit. When
+they saw the large French garrison yield without resistance they were
+filled with wonder, and said to one another: "These English are a
+terrible people. It is well we have made friends with them."
+
+By "making friends" with the English, the Indians had no notion of
+accepting them as masters. The French had seemed pleasant neighbors and
+valuable friends. When they occupied the fort the Indians had always
+found a warm welcome there. Their chiefs had been treated with great
+pomp and ceremony. They had received rich presents and great promises.
+They expected the English to show them the same consideration. But they
+were disappointed. The new masters of the fort had little patience with
+the Indian idlers, who loafed about at the most inconvenient times in
+the most inconvenient places, always begging, and often sullen and
+insolent. They frequently ordered them in no mild terms to be off. The
+chiefs received cold looks and short answers where they had looked for
+flattery and presents.
+
+The Indians resented the conduct of the English bitterly, and when
+Pontiac learned that they claimed the lands of his tribe, he said within
+himself: "The hatred of the Ottawas has slept long enough. It is time
+for it to wake and destroy these British who treat the red man as if he
+had no right to the land where he was born."
+
+
+
+
+II. PONTIAC'S CHILDHOOD
+
+
+We love our country principally because of the political freedom its
+government allows us. As we study its history, the lives of its heroes,
+and the struggles they have made for the liberties we enjoy, our
+patriotism grows stronger.
+
+Pontiac loved his country, too, but in a much simpler and more personal
+way, as you will understand when you have learned about the proud
+chieftain's boyhood and youth.
+
+[Illustration: SQUAW WITH PAPPOOSE]
+
+The birds scarcely know the forest so well as he did. When he was a tiny
+baby,--a fat, brown, little pappoose,--his mother used to bundle him up
+in skins, strap him to a board, and carry him on her back when she went
+to gather the bark of the young basswood tree for twine. As the strong
+young squaw sped along the narrow path, soft and springing to her
+moccasined feet with its depth of dried pine needles, the baby on her
+back was well content. Even if he felt cross and fretful the regular
+motion pleased him; the cool dim green of the forest rested him; the
+sweet smell of the pines soothed him; and the gentle murmur of the wind
+in the tree tops soon lulled him to sleep.
+
+When the mother clambered over a large tree trunk that had fallen across
+the path and the little pappoose was jolted wide awake, he did not cry.
+His beady black eyes followed every stray sunbeam and every bounding
+rabbit, or chance bird with wonder and delight. When his mother went to
+work she placed his rude cradle beside a tree where he could look on,
+out of harm's way. He was very little trouble, and she always took him
+with her when she went to get cedar bark, to gather rushes for mats and
+herbs for dyes, to pick up fagots for the fire, or to get sap from the
+sugar tree. So it happened that when he grew up Pontiac could not
+remember a time when the dark forest did not seem like home to him.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN SQUAW AT WORK]
+
+As soon as he was old enough to understand words, he heard his mother
+laughing with her neighbors about the men in the village who stayed
+about their wigwams like women. Now, he thought that a wigwam or bark
+lodge was a very pleasant place. The small, dark, oven-shaped room,
+smoky and foul with the smell of fish and dirt, was home to him--the mud
+floor, worn smooth and hard with use, was strewn with mats and skins
+which served for chairs and beds. There was a fireplace in the center,
+and over it a rack on which smoked fish hung, well out of the reach of
+the wolf-like dogs that lay about gnawing at old bones. It was usually
+dry in wet weather, warm in cold weather, and cool when the sun was hot.
+It was where he went for food when he was hungry; it was where he slept
+on soft buffalo robes and bear skins when he was tired; it was where he
+heard good stories, and, best of all, it was where his mother spent most
+of her time.
+
+But before Pontiac was many years old he knew that the wigwam was the
+place for women and children, and that it was a shame for a man not to
+follow the deer through the forest, and go upon the warpath. He saw that
+if a man stayed at home and loved ease and comfort his squaw would scold
+him with a shrill tongue. But if he went off to hunt, it was different.
+Then, when he came home for a short time, he might lounge on a bear skin
+while his squaw worked hard to make him happy, cooking his meals,
+fetching clear water from the spring, and dressing the skins he had
+brought from the hunt.
+
+Pontiac liked to watch his mother while she stood weaving the wet rushes
+into mats to cover the lodge in summer, or while she sat on the floor
+with her feet crossed under her, making baskets out of sweet grass or
+embroidering with brightly dyed porcupine quills. But if he showed his
+pleasure or offered to help her, she looked stern and shook her head,
+saying, "Go out into the field and run; then you will be swift when you
+are a man;" or "go into the forest and shoot rabbits with your little
+bow and arrow, so that you may one day be a great hunter like your
+father."
+
+All this made little Pontiac feel that the great fields and forests were
+his--his to find his pleasure in while he was a boy; his to find his
+work in when he should become a man.
+
+He learned, too, that his very life depended on the forests he loved. He
+could never forget the cruel winter days when he had asked his mother
+again and again for fish and meat, and she had told him to be still and
+wait till his father brought meat from the forest. And he had waited
+there long with his hollow-eyed mother, crouching before the feeble
+fire, starving with hunger. He had strained his ears toward the great
+white forest only to hear the wail of the winds and the howl of the
+wolves. But at last the yelp of the dogs was sure to be heard, and then
+the half-frozen hunters would appear, dragging the deer over the crusted
+snow.
+
+
+
+
+III. PONTIAC'S EDUCATION
+
+
+Pontiac's father was a war chief. But it did not follow that therefore
+Pontiac would be a war chief. He would have to prove himself strong and
+brave, a good hunter and a good warrior, or his tribe would choose some
+more able leader.
+
+Pontiac, like most small boys, took his father for his pattern. His
+ambition was to be like him. But he was told early, "Be a good Indian.
+Be a good Ottawan. Be true to your tribe. Be a strong man and help your
+people. But don't think about being chief. The greatest brave must be
+chief of the Ottawas."
+
+Yet, Indians love glory and perhaps in the bottom of their hearts
+Pontiac's father and mother hoped that he would one day be a chieftain.
+At any rate they did all they could to train him to be a worthy Indian.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WARRIOR]
+
+They were sometimes very severe with him. If he was rude to strangers or
+to old people; if he lost his temper and threw ashes at his comrades; if
+he told a falsehood, he was beaten. He had broken the laws of the Great
+Spirit, and the Great Spirit had commanded that parents should beat
+their children with rods when they did wrong. The boy understood this
+and he tried to take his punishment bravely that he might regain the
+good will of the Great Spirit. He stood quite still and endured heavy
+blows without whimpering or flinching.
+
+He learned, too, to endure hunger and great fatigue without complaint.
+He raced, and swam, and played ball, and wrestled with other boys till
+his body was strong and straight and supple. He played at hunting and
+war in the forest, until his eyes became so sharp that no sign of man or
+beast escaped them.
+
+But he did not depend altogether on his eyes for information. He could
+find his way through a forest in the dark, where the dense foliage hid
+the stars. Perhaps the wind told him the direction by the odors it
+brought. He could tell what kind of trees grew about him by the feel of
+their bark, by their odor, by the sound of the wind in the branches. He
+did not have to think much about his course when on a journey. His feet
+seemed to know the way home, or to the spring, or to the enemy's camp.
+And if he had traveled through a wilderness once he knew the way the
+next time as well as any boy knows his way to school.
+
+While Pontiac was training his body, his parents took care that he
+should not grow up in ignorance of the religion and the history of his
+people. He heard much about the Great Spirit who could see all he did
+and was angry when he said or did anything dishonest or cowardly.
+
+The laws of the Great Spirit were fixed in the boy's mind, for his
+mother was always repeating them to him. She would say as he left the
+wigwam: "Honor the gray-headed person," or "Thou shalt not mimic the
+thunder;" "Thou shalt always feed the hungry and the stranger," or "Thou
+shalt immerse thyself in the river at least ten times in succession in
+the early part of the spring, so that thy body may be strong and thy
+feet swift to chase the game and to follow the warpath."[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: Translated from the Ottawa language by A. Blackbird.]
+
+In the evenings the older members of the family and some visiting
+Indians sat around the fire and told stones about the Great Spirit and
+many other strange beings, some good and some evil. They told, too,
+wonderful tales about omens and charms. The same story was told over and
+over again, so that in time little Pontiac knew by heart the legends of
+the Ottawas. He remembered and firmly believed all his life stories that
+as a child he listened to with awe, in his father's wigwam.
+
+In the same way he heard about the great deeds of the warriors of his
+tribe; and he came to think there were no people in the world quite
+equal to the Ottawas. He heard of other tribes that were their foes and
+he was eager to go to war against them.
+
+As he grew older he heard a good deal about men, not only of another
+tribe but of another race, the palefaces, who were trying to get the
+lands of the Indians. Then he thought less about being an Ottawa and
+conquering other Indians; while every day he felt more and more that he
+was an Indian and must conquer the white man. He wished he could unite
+the tribes in friendship and lead them against these strangers who were
+so many and so strong, and who had come to drive the Indians from their
+homes and hunting grounds.
+
+Such thoughts made Pontiac very serious. Obeying the commands of the
+Great Spirit, the young Indian often blackened his face with a mixture
+of charcoal and fish-oil, and went into the depths of the forest, where
+he remained for days without food, praying and thinking earnestly about
+the future.
+
+He formed his own plans, but he hid them in his heart. He practised
+keeping his feelings and thoughts to himself, and spoke only when he was
+very sure he was right. This habit soon gained him a reputation for
+gravity and wisdom.
+
+
+
+
+IV. THE CHIEF
+
+
+When he was old enough to go to battle with the tried warriors, Pontiac
+took many scalps and distinguished himself for courage. He was,
+therefore, amid great feasting and rejoicing, made a war chief of the
+Ottawas.
+
+His influence increased rapidly. The young men of his tribe felt sure of
+success when they followed Pontiac to battle. His very name made his
+foes tremble.
+
+In the council, too, his power grew. His words seemed wise to the gray
+heads, and the young warriors were ready to take up the hatchet or lay
+it down at his bidding. Because of his eloquence and wisdom, Pontiac was
+made sachem, so that he not only led his people to battle, but also
+ruled them in time of peace. He was called the greatest councilor and
+warrior of the Ottawas; yet he was not content.
+
+In Michigan, where the Ottawa Indians lived, there were other tribes of
+the Algonquin Indians. Chief among these were the Ojibwas and the
+Pottawottomies. These tribes, though related by marriage and on friendly
+terms, had separate chiefs. But gradually they came to recognize the
+great Pontiac as their principal ruler.
+
+Among the Indians of his own tribe Pontiac's word was law. Among kindred
+tribes his friendship was sought and his displeasure feared. Through all
+the Algonquin territory, from the Lakes to the Gulf, from the mountains
+to the river, the great chief's name was known and respected.
+
+Pontiac was no doubt proud and ambitious. But if he was glad to gain
+glory for himself he considered the good of his people also. To unite
+them and overpower the palefaces was the end toward which he planned.
+
+By this time he had learned that all palefaces were not alike. There
+were two great nations of them, the French and the English, and the
+Indians had found a great difference between them. The English had
+treated them with contempt and helped themselves to their lands. The
+French had come among them as missionaries and traders, with kind words
+and gifts. To be sure, they had built forts in the land, but they told
+the Indians they did this for their sake that they might protect them
+from the English, who wished to take their lands. The French seemed to
+hate the English no less than the Indians did.
+
+It is said that Pontiac planned to use the French to help him conquer
+the English, and then intended to turn upon them and drive them away. No
+doubt if the French had openly claimed the territory of the Indians, or
+in any way had shown that their professions of friendship were false,
+Pontiac would have been their enemy. But he evidently took them at their
+word and looked upon them as friends who wished to help his people.
+
+In all his dealings with the French, Pontiac was true and honorable. He
+joined them in their wars against the English. He and his Ottawas helped
+to defeat the British regulars under General Braddock at Fort Duquesne.
+He saved the French garrison at Detroit from an attack by hostile
+Indians. He trusted them when all appearances were against them. His
+acceptance of the peace offered by Major Rogers on the shore of Lake
+Erie was not a betrayal of the French. Pontiac did not forsake their
+cause until they had given it up themselves. He took a step which seemed
+for the best interests of his own people, and, at the same time, not
+hurtful to the French. We have seen that he was disappointed in the
+reward he expected.
+
+The English, having subdued the French, felt able to manage the Indians
+without difficulty. They were, therefore, more careless than ever about
+pleasing them. They refused to give the supplies which the French had
+been accustomed to distribute among the Indians. The Indians were
+obliged to provide for themselves, as in the days of Pontiac's
+childhood. They had no powder or bullets and the young men had lost
+their skill with the bow. There was suffering and death for want of
+food.
+
+Even Pontiac had been willing to profit by the generosity of the French.
+He had not only cheered himself with their firewater, but, like other
+Indians, he had been glad to give up his bow and arrow for a gun; he had
+been ready to accept corn and smoked meats in winter when game was
+scarce, and to protect himself from the cold with the Frenchmen's
+blankets.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WEAPON]
+
+He realized now that in adopting the white men's customs, in using their
+food and blankets and arms, his people had become dependent upon them.
+He remembered the stories he had heard in his childhood about the might
+of the Ottawas in the days when they depended on the chase for their
+food, and fought their battles with bows and arrows and stone hatchets.
+He wished his people would return to the old customs. In that way only
+could they regain their native hardihood and independence.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WEAPON]
+
+While Pontiac's hatred of the English grew more bitter daily, other
+Indians were not indifferent. Through all the Algonquin tribes spread
+this hatred for the English. The insolence of the garrisons at the forts
+provoked it; the cheating, the bad faith, and the brutality of the
+English trappers and traders increased it; the refusal of supplies, the
+secret influence of the French, the encroachments of English settlers,
+fanned it into fury. And when at last, in 1762, word came that the
+English claimed the land of the Algonquins their rage could no longer be
+restrained.
+
+
+
+
+V. THE PLOT
+
+
+The time was ripe for rebellion and Pontiac was ready. All over the land
+should council fires be lighted. All over the land should the hatchet be
+raised. By wile and treachery the forts should fall. By fire and
+bloodshed the settlements should be laid waste and the Englishmen driven
+into the sea. Thus spoke Pontiac, and thus spoke his messengers, who
+with war belts of black and red wampum and hatchets smeared with blood
+sought out the villages of the Algonquins. Far and wide this dark
+company went its way through forests, across prairies, in spite of storm
+or flooded stream, or mountain barrier. No camp was so secret, no
+village so remote, that the messengers of war did not find it out.
+Wherever they went the bloody plan found favor; the tokens of war were
+accepted and pledges of warlike purpose sent to Pontiac.
+
+Not far from the summering place where clustered the lodges of Pontiac
+and his kinsmen rose the walls of Fort Detroit. There Pontiac had
+suffered humiliation at the hands of the English, and upon it he planned
+to visit his vengeance.
+
+The little French military station planted on the west bank of the
+Detroit River had reached half a century's growth. It had become a place
+of some importance. Both banks of the river were studded with farmhouses
+for miles above and below the "fort," as the walled village where the
+soldiers lived was called.
+
+The fort consisted of about one hundred small houses surrounded by a
+palisade, or wall of heavy stakes, twenty-five feet high. Since gates
+are easily broken down, over every gate a block house had been built,
+from which soldiers could fire upon the approaching enemy. At the four
+corners of the palisade were bastions, or fortified projections, from
+which the inmates could see the whole length of the wall and shoot any
+one attempting to climb it, set fire to it, or do it any harm.
+
+The small log houses within were crowded together with only narrow
+passage-ways between. They were roofed with bark or thatched with straw.
+To lessen the danger of fire a wide road was left between the wall and
+the houses. Besides dwelling houses, there were in the fort the barracks
+where the soldiers stayed, the church, shops, and the council house,
+where meetings with the Indians were held.
+
+At this time the garrison consisted of about one hundred and twenty
+men. But counting the other inmates of the fort and the Canadians who
+lived along the river, there were about two thousand five hundred white
+people in the Detroit settlement. On the outskirts of the settlement
+hung the Indian villages, much as the Indian villages crowd around the
+white settlements of Alaska to-day.
+
+In the midst of the wilderness this little band of English lived
+protected by their log walls. No friends were near. Their nearest
+neighbors were the conquered French, who regarded them with jealousy and
+dislike. Not far away were their Indian enemies. Yet they thought little
+of danger.
+
+Occasionally some story of Indian treachery, some rumor of Indian
+hostility, or some omen of evil filled the garrison with vague alarm. In
+October, 1762, dense clouds gathered over the fort, and soon rain black
+as ink fell from them. This strange occurrence stirred up the fears of
+the settlers. Some said that it was a sign that the end of the world was
+at hand; others, that it was a sign of war. But by the spring of the
+next year the settlers of Detroit had ceased to think of the black rain
+and war.
+
+If a few had suffered unrest because of the Indians, their fears were
+put to flight by a visit which Pontiac made to Detroit late in April.
+With forty of his chiefs he came to the fort asking to be allowed to
+perform the peace dance before the commander. The request was granted,
+and a good-natured crowd gathered near Major Gladwin's house to see the
+Indian dance.
+
+No one thought anything of the fact that ten of the party took no part
+in the dance, but strolled around the fort prying into everything. Those
+who noticed them at all, thought their conduct showed nothing more than
+childish curiosity.
+
+No one dreamed that these men were spies, and that the sole purpose of
+the visit was to discover the strength of the garrison. The Indians left
+with promises to come again to smoke the calumet with the English when
+all their chiefs should assemble after the winter's hunt.
+
+After visiting Detroit, Pontiac sent swift-footed runners to all the
+tribes in the neighboring country, calling the chiefs to a council to be
+held in the village of the Pottawottomies.
+
+When the day for the great council arrived, all the women were sent away
+from the village so that they could not overhear the plans of the
+chiefs. At the door of the great bark lodge where the chiefs met,
+sentinels were posted to prevent interruption.
+
+When all had taken their places in the council room Pontiac rose and
+laid before his trusted chiefs his crafty plans. On the seventh of May
+the young warriors should gather on the green near Detroit to play ball,
+while the older men lay on the ground looking on, or loitered in and
+about the fort. The squaws should go about the streets with guns and
+tomahawks hidden under their blankets, offering mats and baskets for
+sale, or begging. Later Pontiac, with the principal chiefs would arrive,
+and ask to hold a council with the commander and his officers. While
+speaking in the council he would suddenly turn the wampum belt that he
+held in his hand. At that signal the chiefs should throw off the
+blankets that hid their weapons and war paint, and butcher the English
+before they could offer resistance. When the Indians outside heard the
+clamor within the council house they should snatch the guns and knives
+that the squaws carried, fall upon the surprised and half-armed
+soldiers, kill them and plunder and burn the fort, sparing only the
+French.
+
+From the Indians' point of view this seemed a brave plot. No one
+objected to the treachery. All the guttural sounds that broke from the
+throng of listeners were made for approval and applause.
+
+
+
+
+VI. THE SEVENTH OF MAY
+
+
+The Indians kept their secret well. A Canadian saw some Indians filing
+off their guns to make them short enough to hide under their blankets.
+But if his suspicions were aroused he held his peace and said no word of
+warning to the English. The appointed seventh of May was at hand and no
+alarm had been taken at the garrison.
+
+But on the evening of the sixth, Major Gladwin talked long in secret
+with his officers, then ordered half the garrison under arms. He doubled
+the guard and himself went from place to place to see that every man was
+at his post. The soldiers did not know the reason for this unusual
+watchfulness, but they understood that it meant danger.
+
+It is said that in the afternoon an Indian girl who was deeply attached
+to the English Major had brought him a pair of moccasins she had been
+embroidering for him. She lingered at the fort and seemed unwilling to
+leave. At last she begged Gladwin to go away from the fort for a day or
+two. Her conduct and request excited suspicion. The Major questioned her
+closely and discovered Pontiac's plot.
+
+[Illustration: BETRAYAL OF PONTIAC'S PLOT]
+
+Be that as it may, on the night of the sixth Major Gladwin was on the
+alert.
+
+Nothing disturbed the peace of the mild May night. In the morning one
+watchman on the walls said to another, "See, yonder they come."
+
+The man addressed looked up the stream and saw many birch canoes rapidly
+approaching the fort. "A perfect fleet!" he exclaimed.
+
+"Yes; plenty of boats, but not many Indians; only two or three in each
+canoe," replied the first.
+
+"That's true. But see how deep the canoes are in the water, and what
+heavy paddling those fellows are doing! A dozen beaver skins to one,
+every canoe's got a load of those red rascals stretched on their backs
+well out of sight."
+
+"You may be right," said the other, shaking his head. "It looks as if
+there might be some ugly work before us. They say the Major has ordered
+the whole garrison under arms. Even the shops are closed and the traders
+armed to the teeth."
+
+Most of the Indians who came in the boats went to a green near the fort
+and began a game of ball. Soon Pontiac himself was seen approaching
+along the river road at the head of sixty of his chiefs. They wore
+blankets and marched in single file without a word. When they reached
+the gate Pontiac, with his accustomed dignity, asked that he and his
+chiefs might meet their English brothers in council to discuss important
+questions.
+
+In answer to his request the gates swung open. Lines of armed soldiers
+appeared on either side. The Indians, trained to read signs, knew at
+once that their plot was discovered. Perhaps they felt that the
+treachery they had planned would be visited on their own heads. But if
+they feared, they gave no token; they said no word. They walked
+undaunted through the narrow streets, meeting armed soldiers at every
+turn.
+
+At the council house they found Major Gladwin, his assistant, Captain
+Campbell, and other officers already assembled and waiting for them. If
+any Indian had doubted the discovery of their plot, he was certain of
+it when he saw that the officers wore swords at their sides and pistols
+in their belts. It was with some reluctance that they seated themselves
+on the mats arranged for them.
+
+This was a trying moment for Pontiac. He stood there discovered,
+defeated. But he did not quail before the steady gaze of the English.
+His brow was only more haughty, his face more stern.
+
+"And why," he asked, in a severe, harsh voice, "do our brothers meet us
+to-day with guns in their hands?"
+
+"You come among us when we are taking our regular military exercise,"
+answered the commander calmly.
+
+With fears somewhat soothed, Pontiac began to speak: "For many moons the
+love of our brothers, the English, has seemed to sleep. It is now
+spring; the sun shines bright and hot; the bears, the oaks, the rivers
+awake from their sleep. Brothers, it is time for the friendship between
+us to awake. Our chiefs have come to do their part, to renew their
+pledges of peace and friendship."
+
+Here he made a movement with the belt he held in his hand, as if about
+to turn it over. Every Indian was ready to spring. Gladwin gave a
+signal. A clash of arms sounded through the open door. A drum began
+beating a charge. Within the council room there was a startled,
+breathless silence. Pontiac's hand was stayed. The belt fell back to its
+first position. The din of arms ceased. Pontiac repeated his promises of
+friendship and loyalty, and then sat down.
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC'S SPEECH]
+
+Major Gladwin answered briefly: "Brothers, the English are not fickle.
+They do not withdraw their friendship without cause. As long as the red
+men are faithful to their promises they will find the English their
+steadfast friends. But if the Indians are false or do any injury to the
+English, the English will punish them without mercy."
+
+The one object of the Indians was now to turn aside the suspicion of the
+English. After Gladwin's speech presents were exchanged, and the meeting
+broke up with a general hand-shaking. Before leaving, Pontiac promised
+that he would return in a few days with his squaws and children that
+they might shake hands with their English brothers.
+
+"Scoundrels!" laughed one officer, when the last Indian had left. "They
+were afraid to sit down. They thought they had been caught in their own
+trap. It's a pity to let them off so easily."
+
+"No," replied another, more seriously. "The Major is right. If there is
+an outbreak, the Indians must take the first step. They depend more on
+treachery than force for success; now that their plan is foiled, the
+whole trouble will probably blow over."
+
+The next day this opinion seemed verified by the appearance, of Pontiac
+with three of his chiefs. He brought a peace-pipe and approached the
+commander with smooth speeches: "Evil birds have whistled in your ears,
+but do not listen to them. We are your friends. We have come to prove
+it. We will smoke the calumet with you."
+
+Pontiac then offered his great peace-pipe. After it had been smoked in
+all solemnity, he presented it to Captain Campbell as a high mark of
+friendship.
+
+
+
+
+VII. HOSTILITIES BEGUN
+
+
+Bright and early the next morning hordes of naked savages gathered on
+the pasture land near the fort. A long quadrangle was marked out on the
+grass with lines across it. At each end of this "gridiron" two tall
+posts were erected five or six feet apart. This, as you may have
+guessed, was to prepare for an Indian game of ball.
+
+When all was ready the young men of the Ottawa tribes took their places
+on one side of the field. Opposite to them were the Pottawottomies. Each
+Indian had a long racket or bat with which he tried to drive the ball to
+the goal against the opposition of the players of the other nation. Such
+a yelling as they kept up, running and pushing and plunging and prancing
+the while! Small wonder that squaws, warriors, and chiefs should have
+come to watch so exciting a game!
+
+[Illustration: INDIANS PLAYING BALL]
+
+Still the men in the fort kept the gates closed and stayed behind their
+walls, as if they took no interest in the game. They were really
+watching with some uneasiness the vast crowd of Indians so close at
+hand.
+
+When the game was finished Pontiac went to the gate of the fort. His
+chiefs attended him and a motley crowd of warriors, squaws, and
+children came trooping after. The great chief shouted in a loud voice,
+demanding admission. He received answer that he might come in if he
+wished, but the rest would have to keep out. With injured dignity he
+asked if his followers were not to be allowed to enjoy the smoke of the
+calumet.
+
+The English commander, tired of false speech, gave a short answer,
+refusing flatly to let the Indians in. Thereupon Pontiac's brow darkened
+and he strode off to the river in high dudgeon.
+
+The others withdrew a little and stood in groups, muttering and
+gesticulating. Then with wild whoops they bounded off to join their
+comrades who lay stretched on the earth around the ball grounds. After a
+brief parley, some started with blood-curdling yells toward a house
+across the fields where an English woman lived with her children; others
+leaped into their canoes and paddled off to an island where an English
+farmer lived alone.
+
+Before sunset the men at the fort heard the exultant scalp yell of the
+Indians, and knew that the first blood of the war had been shed.
+
+In the meantime Pontiac hastened with gloomy rage to his own village
+across the river. It was deserted by all but a few squaws and old men.
+These Pontiac ordered to pack the camp luggage and make all ready for
+removal, as soon as the men came with their canoes to carry the camp
+equipment to the Detroit side of the river.
+
+All labored to do their chief's will, while he went apart and blackened
+his face.
+
+At nightfall the braves came in with the scalps they had taken. A pole
+was driven into the ground in the open space where the tents had been.
+The warriors gathered about it, their bodies decked with paint and eagle
+feathers.
+
+Pontiac sprang into their midst, brandishing his hatchet and striking
+violently at the pole. As he danced about, he recited the great deeds he
+and his fathers had done in war. His appalling cries, his terrible
+words, stirred the hearts of his Indians and fired their blood. All were
+in a frenzy of excitement. With wild cries they joined their chief in
+his war dance.
+
+Even the faint echo of the din these blood-thirsty demons made struck
+terror into the hearts of the watchers in Detroit. The soldiers kept
+close guard all night, expecting an attack at any moment.
+
+But not till early dawn did the war cry sound. Shrill and near it rose
+from hundreds of throats. Strong men turned pale at the clamor of yells
+and cracking rifles. It seemed that the Indians must be at the very
+walls of the fort.
+
+The guards on the ramparts, however, could see no enemy in the faint
+gray light. From behind every tree, every stone, every rise of ground,
+came the incessant flash of muskets. Bullets and blazing arrows rattled
+against the palisades. The Indians aimed at the loopholes and succeeded
+in wounding five of the English. The soldiers returned a cautious fire,
+unwilling to waste powder on an invisible foe.
+
+After an attack of six hours' duration the Indians, weary with their
+night's activity, gradually withdrew to their camps, having suffered no
+loss, but at the same time having inflicted little.
+
+Gladwin, whose spirit was manly and humane, wished if possible to avoid
+further bloodshed. The Canadians took no part in the war, and could,
+therefore, be safely used as messengers. As soon as the battle had
+subsided Major Gladwin sent a deputation of them to tell Pontiac that he
+was willing to listen to any real grievance of the Indians, and do his
+best to redress whatever wrongs they had suffered.
+
+Pontiac knew that his chief charge of injustice against the English,
+their presence in and claim to his lands, would not be considered by the
+English a real grievance. He thought the hour for talking had passed;
+the time for action had come. Treachery was his readiest weapon and he
+used it. He replied that he could consent to no terms unless they were
+made with the English in person, and asked that Captain Campbell, second
+in command at the fort, come to a council in his camp.
+
+Captain Campbell had no fear, and urged Major Gladwin to permit him to
+go. He and another Englishman, accordingly, hastened to the Indian
+village. The women and the warriors were so enraged at the sight of
+their red coats, that they would have stoned them had not Pontiac
+interfered and led them to his lodge.
+
+After a long but fruitless talk around the council fire, the English
+rose to go. But Pontiac said: "Brothers, you will sleep to-night on the
+couches the red men have spread for you." He then gave orders that his
+prisoners should be taken to the house of a Canadian, where they should
+be treated with respect, but closely guarded.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. THE TWO LEADERS
+
+
+When the officers at Detroit learned that their deputies were detained
+by the Indians, they realized that there was no hope of peace. Before
+the fort two armed schooners rode at anchor. Most of the officers wished
+to abandon the fort and seek safety by sailing away on these boats.
+
+"There is no use trying to hold the old fort against eight times our
+number," they said impatiently.
+
+But Major Gladwin had no thought of surrender. "We could not," he
+answered, "if the Indians should attempt to force the walls. But there
+is no danger of their venturing within gunshot in any numbers. They
+won't risk their red skins that way. They'll simply waste their powder
+and lead in such firing as they did this morning, and pretty soon
+they'll lose heart and drop off, leaving Pontiac to beg for peace."
+
+"I don't suppose they will unite in a charge," assented one of the
+officers. "But they will keep a sharp lookout day and night to do us
+injury. We have four walls to guard and only one hundred and twenty men
+to do it. The garrison will be exhausted in no time."
+
+"Yes, we have hard work before us," agreed the commander, "but we can do
+it. Our case is not so bad as you represent. The ship's guns protect two
+walls, so that virtually only two sides of the fort are exposed to the
+enemy. To me the most alarming feature of the siege is short rations."
+
+"The supplies are low and we cannot hope for more within three weeks.
+We'll starve to death, penned up here with no hunting and no provisions
+from the Canadian farmers," complained some, ready in their alarm to
+magnify every danger.
+
+"By taking care to prevent waste we can make the supplies last," the
+commander interrupted. "I shall buy up at once everything in the fort
+that can serve as food, put it into a common storehouse, and give to
+each person a daily allowance. If even with this care the food runs
+short, Canadians may be found who love gold better than Indians." In
+this way the courageous leader argued, until, at last, he overcame the
+fears of his aids and roused in them a spirit of resistance.
+
+Pontiac had no lack of warriors, nevertheless he, as well as the British
+leader, had his fears and difficulties.
+
+His own followers were not easily managed. He had brought them together
+from near and far with promise of easy victory over the English. After a
+short struggle many of the tribes lost heart and were ready to go back
+to their villages.
+
+The Canadians were neutral and were supposed to sympathize with the
+Indians; but Pontiac knew that many of them favored the English, and
+were ready at the slightest offense to take the side of his enemies.
+
+His campaign against the English had begun with failure. Treachery had
+failed. He had put the English on their guard and must now use open
+force.
+
+To hold a horde of savages together, to keep the fickle Canadians
+friendly, to take without cannon all the fortifications on the frontier,
+were the tasks the Indian general had set himself.
+
+[Illustration: PONTIAC'S ELOQUENCE]
+
+Pontiac's personal influence over the Indians was unparalleled. He had
+lost none of his power over them by the defeat of his plan to take
+Detroit. No Indian dared reproach him with failure. All quailed before
+his terrible rage and disappointment. They brought him the scalps of the
+English they had slain. They sought to please him with loud outcries
+against the English, and promises of the bloody work they would do. He
+held all in awe of him. He commanded as if sure of being obeyed, and
+punished the slightest disobedience with extreme severity.
+
+But he did not govern by fear alone. He took care that his warriors
+should not want for food; he took care to give them grounds for hope and
+to keep them busy.
+
+No preparations had been made for a long siege. When provisions failed
+and the tribes were on the point of leaving, Pontiac had a conference
+with some Canadians and arranged that they should furnish his people
+with corn and meat. He had no money to pay for provisions, but he made
+out notes promising to pay for them at some future time. These notes
+were written on birch bark, and signed with the figure of an otter, the
+totem of the great chief. Many of the farmers feared they would never
+see the money promised them in these notes, but Pontiac paid them all
+faithfully.
+
+Pontiac knew how wasteful his people were, feasting in the day of plenty
+without thought of the morrow. He therefore employed a Canadian as his
+provision officer. This man had charge of the storehouse, and doled out
+each morning the provisions for the day.
+
+This novel arrangement increased the Indians' confidence in their
+leader. Yet some grew restless and were on the point of giving up the
+struggle as a failure.
+
+On learning this, Pontiac sent out messengers to the Wyandot Indians,
+ordering them to join him in his war against the British or prepare to
+be wiped off the face of the earth. By this stroke Pontiac turned
+threatened loss into gain. The support of the warlike Wyandots renewed
+the courage of the faint-hearted, and for a time all thought of failure
+ceased.
+
+The chiefs conduct toward the Canadians was highly praiseworthy. They
+had encouraged him to make war against the British by promising that the
+French king would send him help. Week after week passed and no help
+came. Pontiac's expectation of the arrival of a French army grew fainter
+and fainter. Still he did not lose faith in the truth of the Canadians.
+He protected them and their property from injury and theft; for there
+were many lawless young warriors who were ready to do violence to the
+French as well as to the English.
+
+While pretending to sympathize with the Indians, many of the French
+farmers were secretly helping the English by selling them food and
+reporting the movements of the Indians. Pontiac heard many reports of
+their faithlessness.
+
+One stormy evening the chief entered the cabin of a Frenchman whom he
+had known for many years. With only a nod for his host he sat down
+before the dying fire. He sat there wrapt in his blanket for a long time
+without a word. At last he faced the Frenchman and said: "Old friend, I
+hear that the English have offered to give you a bushel of silver if you
+will take them my scalp."
+
+"It is false," cried the Frenchman in alarm. "I would not injure my
+friend for many bushels of silver."
+
+"Pontiac has no fear. Pontiac trusts his brother," the Indian replied,
+and stretching himself upon a bench he was soon sound asleep. The
+Frenchman could not be false to such faith and the chief slept unharmed.
+
+While successfully keeping together his warriors and strengthening the
+bond of friendship between the French and the Indians, Pontiac was
+carrying on the war against the English with vigor. His camp near
+Detroit was the center of action. From it Pontiac directed the war and
+kept constant watch over the garrison. He prevented the besieged from
+leaving their walls; he sent out parties to waylay the supplies the
+British were expecting from the East; he planned and managed expeditions
+against other forts held by the British.
+
+
+
+
+IX. THE SIEGE OF DETROIT
+
+
+The English at Detroit soon became accustomed to the discomforts and
+alarms of the siege. The women no longer trembled when the Indian war
+whoop sounded. The men no longer ran to the walls at the popping of
+muskets. The smell of gunpowder, the whiz of bullets, had lost their
+power to quicken the pulse.
+
+The days dragged slowly on. A few wan-faced men worked, many lounged in
+the narrow streets, playing games of chance, betting on the outcome of
+the war, quarreling, complaining, boasting. Now they talked vauntingly,
+telling tales of the Englishman's prowess and the Indian's cowardice.
+Again, they told dismal stories of Indian cruelty and massacre, and
+shook their heads over their own prospects.
+
+But every idler had his firelock close at hand, and all the time the
+sentinels on the bastions kept a sharp lookout. Every little while rapid
+firing broke the monotony of the long watch; the rolling drum called the
+garrison to the ramparts; wounded men groaned under the rough kindness
+of the fort surgeon; the dead received the soldiers' burial. But over
+all the old flag with its red cross, stained with rain and smoke,
+flapped defiantly.
+
+Major Gladwin went about with a cheerful face, but a heavy heart.
+Provisions were fast melting away. It seemed scarcely possible that the
+garrison would be able to hold out till the expected supplies arrived.
+He decided to send one of the schooners to meet the provision boats, to
+warn them of the hostility of the Indians and urge them to all speed.
+
+They could ill spare any of the garrison, but food must be had. So, on a
+bright spring morning one of the vessels weighed anchor and started for
+the East. Before she left the Detroit River the wind died and her sails
+hung limp.
+
+As the boat lay helplessly drifting with the current a hundred canoes
+darted out from the shore. In the foremost one the Indians had bound
+their prisoner, Captain Campbell. The British saw, and were afraid to
+fire lest they should shoot their countryman. Noticing their
+hesitation, the brave old man called out: "Don't think of me. Do your
+duty and fire." The man at the cannon still paused. A breeze stirred,
+swelled the canvas, and the schooner flew like a great gull over the
+blue waters far out of reach of the canoes.
+
+After the boat left, a gloom settled upon the little garrison at
+Detroit. With two boats in the harbor flight had seemed possible. Now
+that one of them had gone, all felt that the siege meant victory or
+death. The daily allowance of food grew smaller. The men became
+exhausted with ceaseless watching. All hope was fixed on the expected
+reinforcements.
+
+On the thirteenth of May the sentinel announced that the long looked for
+convoy was in sight. The good news spread rapidly. Soon the entire
+population of the village was hurrying to the gate that led to the
+river.
+
+The hungry, haggard-looking men that crowded the wharf sent up cheer
+after cheer as the boats approached with flags flying. Days of rest and
+plenty seemed theirs again. Here were comrades to share their vigils.
+Here was food to satisfy their hunger.
+
+As the boats drew nearer, the cheers died in throats hoarse with horror.
+No answering shout came from the boats. The English at the oars were not
+their own masters. The long expected supplies had fallen into the hands
+of the Indians. The men to whom the garrison had looked for help were
+the prisoners of the enemy.
+
+Two Englishmen escaped from their guards and succeeded in reaching the
+fort where they told their story: Ninety men had started with large
+stores of food and ammunition, early in the spring to reinforce Detroit.
+Meeting the schooner from the fort and learning the danger and need of
+the garrison, they had pushed on with all possible speed until they
+reached the mouth of the Detroit River. That night, as the boats were
+drawn up on the shore and the men were getting supper, their camp was
+suddenly surprised by a horde of Wyandot Indians. The British made an
+attempt to defend themselves. But the Indians were upon them brandishing
+their tomahawks and yelling like demons. Panic fear seized the white
+men. They dropped their guns, fled to the boats, jumped in and pushed
+off. The exultant Indians pressed after them and succeeded in retaking
+all but two of their overloaded boats. The savages were now taking their
+prisoners, about sixty in number, to the camp of Pontiac, where they
+would be tortured and put to death.
+
+The success of this bold venture probably would have ended the siege of
+Detroit with victory for Pontiac, had the Canadians been as loyal to the
+Indians as they pretended. But while they were giving the chief
+assurances of good will and future help, some of them were secretly
+succoring the English. Under the cover of night they smuggled cattle and
+sheep and hogs to the famishing garrison.
+
+Even with this aid the prospects of the little garrison were dark
+enough. Every wind seemed to blow them ill news.
+
+One afternoon the guard at the fort heard a weird chant and saw issuing
+from the distant forest a file of warriors whose naked bodies were
+smeared with black paint. Every one of them carried a pole over his
+shoulder, and the horrified watchers knew well enough that from the end
+of each pole fluttered the scalp of some Englishman. They learned from
+the Canadians that night that Fort Sandusky had been burned and its
+garrison murdered.
+
+A little later the Indians offered to exchange some prisoners with the
+English. The victims thus released by the Indians proved to be from Fort
+St. Joseph. They told how that fort had been treacherously taken and
+burned, and all the inmates but themselves slain.
+
+A traveling priest brought word that the plot which had failed at
+Detroit had succeeded only too well at Michillimackinac. Next came
+tidings of the massacres at Fort Ouatanon on the Wabash River and at
+Fort Miamis, on the Maumee.
+
+Nor was the tale of fire and blood yet ended. A fugitive from the camp
+of Pontiac reached Detroit one afternoon. It proved to be Ensign
+Christie, the commanding officer at Presqu' Isle, near the eastern end
+of Lake Erie. His story was a thrilling one. He told how his little
+garrison of twenty-seven men had fortified themselves in their block
+house and made a fierce struggle to keep back the Indians and save their
+stronghold from the flames; how at last the Indians had undermined their
+fort and threatened to apply the torch above and below at once. Then to
+escape death by fire the little band had listened to the promises of
+the Indians and yielded themselves prisoners.
+
+If these reports terrified the English at Detroit, they also
+strengthened their determination not to surrender. In spite of fatigue,
+hunger, and discouragement they fought stoutly on, until, at length,
+there came a turn in the tide of ill fortune that had surged against
+them.
+
+On the nineteenth of June news reached them that the schooner which had
+been sent to meet the provisions had returned and was entering the
+Detroit River. This cheered all, for they knew that the boat had been to
+Niagara for more supplies and more men. Still, they remembered the fate
+of the provision boats, and were worried lest mischance should befall
+the schooner.
+
+Their anxiety increased when they saw the Indians going in large
+companies down the river and heard from the Canadians that they were
+planning to attack the schooner. The British at the fort fired two
+cannon shots to let their countrymen know that they still held Detroit.
+But several days passed before they heard anything of the boat. At last
+they saw her sailing safely toward them.
+
+There were waving caps, shouts of joy, and prayers of thanksgiving among
+the little company of half-starved men who thronged at the gate to
+welcome the newcomers.
+
+They had heard that eight hundred more Ojibwa Indians were on their way
+to increase the forces of Pontiac. But what were eight hundred Ojibwas
+to sixty hardy sons of England and a schooner loaded with supplies and
+cannon!
+
+
+
+
+X. IMPORTANT ENGAGEMENTS
+
+
+Hope grew strong in Pontiac's heart as week after week his tribes and
+allies brought to his camp trophies of victory--guns, prisoners, scalps.
+But Detroit troubled him. The most violent attacks produced no effect.
+To starve the garrison seemed the only way to conquer it.
+
+When, therefore, Pontiac's messengers had brought word that the schooner
+was approaching he bent his whole energy to prevent her reaching
+Detroit. Along the river where dense underwoods grew, hundreds of
+Indians lay concealed with their canoes, waiting for the schooner.
+
+When, in the darkness of a moonless night, they saw the great boat
+sailing steadily up the narrow channel they paddled silently toward her,
+dark specks on the breast of the dark, shining river. Nearer and nearer
+they pressed. All was silent on the vessel. Surely no one had taken
+alarm. Not a shot and they had reached the boat; they were clambering
+like rats up its bulky sides--when lo! a sharp hammering on the mast
+head, a flash of muskets in the dark, a cry of defeat and rage above the
+din of battle! Cannon boomed; canoes flew high into the air; bullets did
+their work.
+
+For fourteen Indians the long struggle against the palefaces was over.
+The rest scurried to the shore as best they could, some paddling, some
+swimming. Once there, they took shelter behind some temporary
+earthworks, and opened such a fierce fire on the schooner that it was
+forced to drop down stream to a broader part of the river. For several
+days they delayed the ship, but at length she sailed boldly past, and
+was but little injured by the fire.
+
+Pontiac was sorely vexed that the ship had succeeded in reaching the
+garrison. He and his people looked upon the boats with almost
+superstitious horror. Their dislike was not lessened when one day the
+smaller schooner made her way against wind and current up to Pontiac's
+village, and there sent shot and shell roaring through the frail
+dwellings.
+
+Though no loss of life resulted, the Indians were greatly alarmed.
+Pontiac moved his camp to a safer place and then turned his attention to
+destroying the ships. Early in July he made his first attempt.
+
+Two large boats filled with birch bark and pitch pine were tied together
+and set on fire. They were then cut loose and left to float down stream.
+Keenly the Indians watched; keenly, the English. Would the fireboats go
+close enough? the first wondered with bated breath. Would they come too
+close? questioned the British. Woe on the one hand, joy on the other!
+the space between the ships and the flaming craft widens--the fireboats
+float harmlessly down the river. A second and a third attempt to burn
+the boats failed. Fortune seemed to favor the English.
+
+Pontiac began to despair of taking Detroit unaided. He called a council
+of the French. He reminded them that the English were their enemies as
+well as his. He charged them with helping the English and told them that
+the time had come for them to choose sides and fight with him or against
+him. He then offered them the war belt. His hope was that they would
+take it up and join him against the English.
+
+Now, the Canadians had become by the terms of the treaty that closed the
+French war, British subjects, but they were ashamed or afraid to admit
+it, and still deceived the Indians. They told Pontiac that much as it
+would please them to fight with him against the English, they must obey
+the commands of their father, the King of France, who had bidden them to
+remain at peace until his coming. They added that he, with a great army,
+was already on the St. Lawrence and would soon arrive to punish the
+enemies of his children and reward their friends. They advised the
+chieftain not to make an enemy of his mighty friend.
+
+When the French speaker had finished, there was a short silence. Then an
+old trapper came forward, and, picking up the war belt, declared that he
+was ready to take sides with the Indians against the English. Several of
+his rough comrades followed his example.
+
+Pontiac's hope of gaining aid from the French was thus not utterly
+defeated. Besides, he still believed their talk about the coming of the
+French king. So the French and Indians continued friends.
+
+Some of the tribes growing restless, now made peace with the English and
+deserted Pontiac. But a greater blow than the desertion of a few tribes
+was in store for the chief.
+
+Late in July he learned that twenty-two barges bearing large supplies of
+food and ammunition and almost three hundred men had made their way up
+the Detroit River in safety, protected by a dense fog. The news came so
+late that it was impossible for the Indians to oppose the progress of
+the boats, and they reached the fort with little resistance.
+
+At about two o'clock in the morning of the second day after the arrival
+of this convoy, Pontiac's spies brought him word that the English were
+coming against his camp with a great force.
+
+Swiftly and silently the Ottawas broke their camp, and with some Ojibwas
+started to meet the British. On reaching the site of their former camp,
+about a mile and a half above the fort, near the bridge that crossed a
+little stream, called from that night Bloody Run, they formed an ambush
+and waited for the British.
+
+They had barely time to hide behind their old earthworks, natural ridges
+and piles of brush. Already they heard the barking of watchdogs at the
+farmhouses along the river road, and the tramp of many feet. They
+listened and discovered that the enemy outnumbered them. What of that!
+The night was dark. They knew their ground. Their scouts would soon
+bring other tribes to help them.
+
+Every Indian was out of sight; every gun was loaded. The tramp of feet
+drew nearer. A dark mass of marching men came in sight. The quick steps
+of the advanced guard rang on the wooden bridge. All else was still. The
+vanguard had crossed the bridge and the main body of the English had
+started over, when, in front, to right, to left, burst blood curdling
+yells, blazed a fatal volley of muskets.
+
+Back only, lay safety. Those who had not fallen in the first charge
+turned and fled, followed by a rain of bullets. Panic spread along the
+line. But the brave leader of the English, Captain Dalzel, sprang to the
+front and rallied his men. They made a bold charge, as they thought,
+into the midst of the enemy; but they found none to resist them. Every
+Indian had vanished. They pressed bravely on in search of their
+assailants; but the night was black and the way was rough and
+unfamiliar. Whenever they reached a place of difficulty the Indians
+unexpectedly renewed their attack.
+
+The savages, whose eyes were accustomed to the darkness, saw the enemy
+after a parley return to the bridge. There, half of the men mounted
+guard while the others took up the dead and wounded and carried them to
+two armed boats that had accompanied them down the river.
+
+Seeing that a return to the fort was intended, the Indians turned back
+in large numbers to form another ambuscade at a point where several
+houses and barns stood near the road and cut the English off from the
+fort.
+
+They again allowed the vanguard to pass unmolested and surprised the
+center with a galling fire. The soldiers, confused by the weird and
+terrible cries of the savages and the blaze of musketry, blinded by
+smoke and flash, and stung by pelting bullets, huddled together like
+sheep.
+
+Captain Dalzel, though severely wounded, by commanding, imploring,
+fairly driving his men with his sword, at last succeeded in regaining
+order. He made a charge and as usual the Indians fled before the attack.
+As soon as the English attempted to continue their retreat the Indians
+were upon them again, firing from every fence and thicket.
+
+The gallant Dalzel was among those shot down by this fire. He died
+trying to save a wounded soldier from the scalping knife of the Indians.
+In the confusion he was scarcely missed. The officers next in command
+took charge of the retreat. In the gray dawn the remnant of Dalzel's
+army reached the fort. The Indians went off, well satisfied with their
+night's work, to count their scalps and celebrate.
+
+While the English lost about sixty men in this engagement, called the
+battle of Bloody Ridge, the number of Indians killed and wounded was not
+greater than fifteen or twenty. The Indians considered it a great
+victory and fresh warriors flocked to the camp of the Indian commander
+who seemed to be a match for the English.
+
+
+
+
+XI. THE END OF THE SIEGE
+
+
+We have seen that after the battle of Bloody Ridge many tribes that had
+before been afraid to take up the hatchet against the English, presented
+themselves at the camp of Pontiac, eager for a share in the victory at
+Detroit, which they thought would follow.
+
+Yet that English stronghold, that log palisade, was a prize out of reach
+of the chief and his warriors. The Indians kept close watch. If a head
+appeared at a loophole, bang went an Indian's gun. If a point was left
+unguarded, there was the torch applied. Fire arrows whizzed over the
+rampart in the darkness, only to burn themselves out in the broad
+roadway between the wall and the buildings. Again and again hundreds of
+painted warriors danced about the fort yelling as if Detroit, like
+Jericho, might be taken with shouting. Their spent bullets pelted the
+old fort like harmless hail. They tried to rush upon the gate, but the
+fusilade from the block house and the fire-belching cannon of the
+British drove them back helter-skelter.
+
+Late in September an incident occurred which increased the Indians' awe
+of the British. A scout brought word to Pontiac that a dispatch boat
+with a large store of provisions was on her way to the fort. As there
+were only twelve men aboard, her capture seemed an easy matter.
+
+The Indians planned a midnight attack. Three hundred of them drifted
+down the river in their light birch canoes. The night was so dark and
+they came so noiselessly that the watching English did not know of their
+approach until they were within gunshot of the boat.
+
+A cannon was fired, but its shot and shell went over the heads of the
+Indians and plowed up the black water beyond. The canoes were all about
+the ship and the savages, with knives in their teeth, were climbing up
+its sides. The crew fired once. One or two Indians fell back into the
+water; the rest came on. As they climbed nearer, the British charged
+them with bayonets, and hacked them with hatchets and knives. But where
+one man was driven back a dozen gained the deck.
+
+The little crew defended themselves desperately; they were surrounded by
+brandished tomahawks; their captain had fallen; more than half their
+number were cut down. The Indians were raising their shout of triumph.
+Then the order of Jacobs, the mate, rang out: "Blow up the ship!" he
+said. One Indian understood and gave the alarm to his fellows. With one
+accord they threw down hatchets and knives and leaped into the river.
+They made haste to reach the shore and left six bloodstained British
+sailors to take their boat in triumph to Detroit.
+
+As autumn advanced the Indians grew weary of the long siege. The
+prospect of winter with no food, the continued resistance of the
+British, and the report that a large force of armed men was coming to
+relieve Detroit, discouraged them.
+
+One tribe after another sent delegations to Major Gladwin to sue for
+peace. They told smooth stories. They had always loved the English, but
+Pontiac had compelled them to go to war. Now they were sorry they had
+obeyed him and longed to be at peace with their English brothers.
+
+Gladwin understood their deceit, but as he was in need of winter
+supplies, readily granted them a truce. The various tribes broke up
+their camps and separated for the long winter hunt.
+
+Pontiac and his Ottawas still held their ground without flinching.
+"Surely," thought the proud-hearted chief, "our French father will send
+us help before long."
+
+One day, near the close of October, a messenger did come from the
+French. The letter he brought was from M. Neyon, the commandant of Fort
+Chartres, in the Illinois country. Pontiac had written to him asking for
+aid. What had he answered? He had told the truth. He had told Pontiac
+that the French in America were now the subjects of the English king,
+and so could not fight against his people.
+
+When the great chief heard this he did not put on his war paint and lead
+his warriors against the defenseless French who had so long dealt
+falsely with him. He sat alone for a long time, thinking. The next day
+he sent a letter to Major Gladwin saying that he was now ready to bury
+the hatchet, and begging the English to forget the past.
+
+Major Gladwin thought that the French were more to blame than the
+Indians in the war, and was willing to be at peace with his red
+neighbors. So he sent Pontiac a favorable reply. A few days later the
+stern-faced chief turned his back on Detroit, and began his march to the
+Maumee River, followed by his faithful braves.
+
+
+
+
+XII. ALL ALONG THE FRONTIER
+
+
+The plan of Pontiac had been to take the forts all along the frontier by
+strategy and then destroy the defenceless English settlements.
+
+We have seen that while there were many French farmers living outside of
+the walls of Detroit there were very few English. And, in truth, in
+1763, there were not many English settlers east of the Alleghany
+Mountains. Most of the forts that had been taken from the French, except
+those on the Mississippi River, were garrisoned with English. Within
+reach of the protection of these forts, lived some British traders and
+trappers, and a few venturesome settlers. But the Mohawk Valley in New
+York, and the Susquehanna, in Pennsylvania, really formed the western
+limit of extensive English settlement.
+
+Pontiac's war belts had stirred up the Indians all along the border. In
+the summer of 1763, while he and the Ottawas and Ojibwas were besieging
+Detroit, the Delawares and Shawnees were laying waste the Pennsylvania
+frontier.
+
+Backwoodsmen, trappers or travelers, venturing into the wilderness were
+shot down without warning. Men, women, and children were miserably
+slain. Isolated farmhouses were attacked, their inmates scalped, the
+cabins burned. Churches and schools added to the blaze that swept the
+wilderness from the Great Lakes to the Ohio. One after another the
+smaller forts were taken by the Indians.
+
+Panic seized the settlers. Women left the kettle on the hearth, men the
+plow in the furrow, and fled. Some crowded for refuge into the nearest
+fort. Others feared to stop until they had reached Lancaster or even
+Philadelphia.
+
+The terrible butcheries committed by the Indians so maddened the
+frontiersmen that they forgot their civilization and resorted to methods
+as inhuman as did the Indians. Peaceable, friendly Indians were
+massacred by bands of ruffian borderers, organized for vengeance as well
+as protection. Even men in high places forgot their usual humanity. The
+commander-in-chief of the army, Sir Jeffrey Amherst, and Colonel Henry
+Bouquet planned to send smallpox among the Indians by giving them
+infected blankets. They even talked of fighting them with bloodhounds
+instead of soldiers. The Governor of Pennsylvania issued a proclamation
+offering a reward for Indian prisoners and Indian scalps.
+
+Fort Pitt, one of the most important posts on the frontier, held out
+against the attacks of the Delawares and the Shawnees. When the
+commander-in-chief of the army learned of the distress of the fort he
+sent a strong force under Colonel Bouquet to relieve it.
+
+In August, when crossing the Alleghany Mountains, Bouquet's army was
+assailed by a horde of Indians that had been lying in wait for them at
+Bushy Run. The battle which followed was hot. The British were
+courageous, but they fell in large numbers under the fire of the
+Indians, who fled before every charge, only to return like infuriated
+wasps at the moment the English fancied they had repulsed them. Night
+brought relief from the galling fire. But the battle was not over.
+
+The English were held penned up on the road without water till dawn,
+when the charge was renewed with such zest that for a time it looked as
+if there were no escape for the forces of Bouquet. The unusual boldness
+of the Indians suggested to him a stratagem.
+
+[Illustration: REDOUBT AT FORT PITT]
+
+He feigned a retreat. Thus encouraged the Indians rushed upon the
+British with war whoop and scalp cry. The forces of Bouquet divided; the
+Indians filled the breach. Then at the word of command the troops closed
+on them, charging with bayonets. Many of the Indians entrapped in this
+way fell; the rest fled.
+
+After that the English made their way to Fort Pitt without serious
+interruption. In the battle of Bushy Run the loss on both sides was
+heavy for an Indian battle. The English lost eight officers and over one
+hundred soldiers; the Indians, several chiefs and about sixty warriors.
+Though the English loss was greater than that of the Indians, it could
+be more easily made up. For that reason, and because the English had
+succeeded in reaching Fort Pitt, the expedition was regarded as a
+splendid victory for the palefaces.
+
+As winter advanced the Indians were obliged to desist from war and go
+into the forest in small companies to hunt. During the winter that
+followed the rebellion, the Indians had no help from the white people,
+and the bitter hardships they suffered did much to put them into a
+pacific frame of mind.
+
+Sir William Johnson, the king's sole agent and superintendent of Indian
+affairs, understood the red men better than most of his countrymen did.
+He lived among them on a great estate in the Mohawk Valley. He spoke
+their language and often dressed in Indian suit of slashed deerskin.
+
+In his opinion it was wasteful and unwise to fight with the Indians. He
+said the English were largely to blame for the Indian war because of
+their injustice and their want of policy in dealing with the savages. He
+advocated following the example of the French, and winning the good will
+of the Indians by flattery and presents. He believed that under that
+policy the Indians would become so dependent on the white man that they
+could be easily subdued.
+
+Early in the spring of 1764 he sent messages to the various tribes,
+warning them that two great armies of English soldiers were ready to
+start into the western forest to punish the enemies of the English, and
+inviting all who wished to make peace to meet him at Niagara.
+
+Accordingly, early in the spring, the fields around the fort at Niagara
+were dotted with Indian encampments. Among the savages were friendly
+Indians who had come to claim their reward; enemies who, through want or
+fear, were ready to make a temporary peace, and spies, who wanted to see
+what was going on.
+
+For many a long day Sir William Johnson sat in the council room at the
+fort making treaties with various tribes. All day the fumes of the
+peace-pipe filled the hall, and threats and promises were made, and
+sealed with long strings of wampum.
+
+It would have taken much less time to make one treaty with all the
+Indians, but Sir William Johnson sought to discourage the idea of a
+common cause, which Pontiac had done so much to arouse among the
+Indians. He treated each tribe as if its case were quite different from
+that of every other tribe.
+
+Some Indians were so bold that they would not even pretend to be
+friendly. The Delawares and the Shawnees replied to the Indian agent's
+message summoning them to Niagara, that they were not afraid of the
+English, but looked upon them as old women.
+
+The armies to which Sir William Johnson had referred were under the
+command of Colonel Bouquet and Colonel Bradstreet. The latter went by
+way of the Lakes to relieve Detroit, offer peace to the northern
+Indians, and subdue those who refused to submit. Bouquet, with a
+thousand men, penetrated the forests further south to compel the fierce
+Delawares and Shawnees to submission. Both succeeded.
+
+[Illustration: COUNCIL WITH COLONEL BOUQUET]
+
+Bradstreet found the northern Indians ready to come to terms. He has
+been criticised for requiring the Indians to sign papers they did not
+understand and make promises that they did not fulfill. He did not see
+Pontiac, but sent a deputation to find him and confer with him.
+
+Colonel Bouquet, on the other hand, was stern and terrible. In council
+he addressed the Indians as chiefs and warriors, instead of "brothers."
+He refused to smooth over their wrong doing or listen to the excuses
+they offered for going to war. He charged them openly with the wrongs
+they had done, and required them to surrender all their white prisoners
+and give him hostages from their own race.
+
+Many of the captives had lived among the Indians so long that they had
+forgotten their white relatives and friends. They left the Indian life
+and Indian friends with tears, and would have remained in captivity
+gladly. But Colonel Bouquet would make no exceptions.
+
+His stern measures subdued the warlike tribes completely. In the fall of
+1764 Bouquet returned to the East to receive honors and rewards for his
+services.
+
+
+
+
+XIII. THE LAST OF PONTIAC
+
+
+While other Indians were promising to bury the hatchet, Pontiac, the
+soul of the conspiracy, made no promises and smoked no peace-pipe.
+Surrounded by hundreds of warriors the chief camped on the Maumee River.
+His messengers brought him news of what was going on, and until the
+white men had taken their soldiers from the land he was content to wait
+and plan.
+
+Captain Morris, who had been sent to Pontiac's camp by Colonel
+Bradstreet, was coldly received by the great chief. Pontiac, indeed,
+granted him a hearing, but he bent upon his guest dark looks and refused
+to shake his hand. He made no flowery speeches, but declared that all
+the British were liars, and asked what new lies he had come to tell.
+After some talk Pontiac showed the captain a letter which he supposed to
+have been written by the King of France. It told the old story of the
+French army on its way to destroy the English. Captain Morris did his
+best to persuade him that the report was false. He was much impressed
+with the influence, knowledge, and sense of Pontiac--an Indian who
+commanded eighteen nations and was acquainted with the laws that
+regulated the conduct of civilized states.
+
+Pontiac would make no official promises of peace, but he was so much
+discouraged by the communications Captain Morris brought, that he said
+to one of the followers of the latter: "I shall never more lead the
+nations to war. As for them, let them be at peace with the English if
+they will; for me, I shall be at war with them forever. I shall be a
+wanderer in the woods, and if they come to seek me I will fight them
+single-handed." With much bitterness of soul did Pontiac learn that the
+forts he had taken with so much effort and loss of Indian blood, had
+been retaken by the enemy; that the war spirit he had with so much labor
+aroused had been put to sleep.
+
+But his hopes were not easily dashed. There were the letters from the
+French. The English said they were false, but the English were his
+enemies. The French were his friends. Enemies might deceive each other,
+but friends must trust each other.
+
+His confidence in the French was encouraged by the fact that several of
+the forts in the Illinois country were still occupied by French
+garrisons.
+
+Pontiac resolved to make another effort to rouse his people. He set his
+squaws to work on a wampum war belt, broad and long, containing symbols
+of the forty-seven tribes which belonged to his confederacy. When the
+belt was done he sent a delegation of chiefs to the south with it. These
+messengers were instructed to show the war belt and offer the hatchet to
+all the tribes along the Mississippi River as far south as New Orleans.
+They were then to visit the French Governor at New Orleans and invite
+him to assist them in war against their common enemy.
+
+Pontiac, in the meantime, went about among his old French friends asking
+for their help, and among the Illinois Indians urging them with threats
+and promises to join him in making war against the English. He met with
+some success, but his dreams were rudely broken by the return of his
+chiefs with the news that the Governor of New Orleans had indeed yielded
+to the British, and by the arrival of a company of British from Fort
+Pitt, offering terms of peace to the Illinois Indians. Daily Pontiac's
+allies deserted him, and accepted the terms of the English.
+
+Again the day had come when it seemed to Pontiac wise to let his hatred
+of the English sleep. He sent his great peace-pipe to Sir William
+Johnson and promised to go to Oswego in the spring to conclude a treaty
+with him.
+
+True to his promise, in the spring of 1766, Pontiac, greatest war chief
+and sachem of the Ottawas, presented himself in the council chamber of
+Sir William Johnson. There was nothing fawning in his attitude; he
+conducted himself with the dignity of a fallen monarch. "When you speak
+to me," he said, "it is as if you addressed all the nations of the
+west." In making peace he submitted not to the will of the British but
+to that of the Great Spirit, whose will it was that there should be
+peace. He made it clear that in allowing the English to take the forts
+of the French the Indians granted them no right to their lands. When he
+promised friendship for the future, he called his hearers to witness how
+true a friend he had been to the French, who had deceived him and given
+him reason to transfer his friendship.
+
+It would be hard to say how sincere Pontiac was, or how readily he would
+have let go the chain of friendship he had been forced to take up, had
+opportunity offered. He went back to his camp on the Maumee River, and
+there among his own people tried to live the life of his fathers. Little
+was heard of him for a year or two, but whenever an outbreak occurred
+among the Indians there were those who said Pontiac was at the bottom of
+it.
+
+In the spring of 1769, anxious to see his French friends once more, he
+made a visit to St. Louis. He was cordially received and spent several
+days with his old acquaintances. Then he crossed the river with a few
+chiefs to visit an assembly of traders and Illinois Indians.
+
+After feasting and drinking with some of the Illinois, Pontiac sought
+the quiet of the forest. He wandered through its dim aisles, living over
+again the hopes and ambitions of the past, which his visit with the
+French and the Illinois had vividly recalled. He had forgotten the
+present and was again the mighty warrior who had made the hearts of the
+palefaces quake with fear. Little he dreamed that behind him stood an
+assassin with up-raised tomahawk.
+
+The murderer of the great chief was an Illinois Indian who had been
+bribed to do the deed by an English trader.
+
+During his life Pontiac had tried to overcome the tribal feeling of the
+Indians, and to unite them as one people. Over his grave the old tribal
+instinct awoke. The Illinois rallied about their kinsman to protect him;
+the Ottawas flew to arms to avenge their chief--such a sachem, such a
+chief, could not be forgotten. Wrong to him could not be forgiven. The
+fury of the Ottawas was not slaked until they had avenged the death of
+their chief, through the destruction of the powerful tribes of the
+Illinois.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+BY
+
+FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF TECUMSEH
+
+
+
+
+I. EARLY YEARS
+
+
+The great Indian leader, Pontiac, died in 1769, disappointed in his
+attempt to unite the Indians in a confederacy strong enough to withstand
+the white race. But the struggle between the red man and the white was
+not ended.
+
+At about the time of the old chief's death a child was born among the
+Shawnee Indians who was to take up the cause of his people with equally
+great courage and intelligence. This child was called Tecumseh, which
+means shooting-star.
+
+The tribe to which Tecumseh belonged had not yielded to the temptations
+offered by the white man. Although many of the tribes north of the Ohio
+River, through the influence of alms and whisky, were fast losing their
+savage virtues and becoming spiritless beggars, idle, drunken,
+quarrelsome, the Shawnees were still strong and warlike.
+
+Several of the Shawnee tribes lived together in a large village on Mad
+River, not far from the place where Springfield, Ohio, now stands. There
+they had built for themselves rude huts made of sapling logs. Around
+these lodges, on the fertile land along the river were corn fields,
+where the Indian women worked while the men hunted or went to war.
+
+In this village, on a bluff near the river, stood Tecumseh's first home.
+His father was chief of a small tribe and was highly respected for his
+courage and good sense. His mother, the daughter of a chief, was a woman
+of strong character.
+
+As Tecumseh was the son of such worthy parents, and as he was one of
+three brothers born on the same day, he was regarded even in babyhood
+with uncommon interest. The superstitious Indians believed that the
+three little boys would become extraordinary men. Two of them, Tecumseh
+and his brother, Laulewasikaw, fulfilled the largest expectations of
+their friends.
+
+The child, Tecumseh, was a bright-eyed, handsome little fellow, at once
+winning and masterful in manner. His favorite pastime was playing war.
+The boys he played with always made him chief and were as devoted to him
+as ever Indians were to a real chief.
+
+It is no wonder that at this time the Shawnee children played war; for
+their elders were almost constantly fighting with the settlers.
+
+Tecumseh's childhood was far from a peaceful, happy one. He learned
+early the oppressive gloom and the wild excitement that accompany war.
+He was called upon, now to take part in the fierce rejoicing that
+followed an Indian victory; again, to join in the mournful wailing of
+the women when the dead warriors were brought from the battlefield.
+
+But his experience of war was not limited to celebrating and mourning
+distant victories and defeats. The enemy did not spare the village in
+which he lived. He knew that when the braves were on the warpath the
+children must stay near their mother's lodge. For, several times runners
+had come in hot haste bidding the squaws flee with their pappooses to
+the forest and hide there till the palefaces had passed. It made little
+Tecumseh's heart beat hard to think of the excitement and terror of
+those days.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN WARRIORS]
+
+Even in time of peace Tecumseh was accustomed to suffering and
+discontent. Food and clothing were so scarce that the Indians were often
+in want of enough to eat and wear. Children died from the effects of
+hunger and cold, and men and women grew gaunt and stern. Frequently the
+hunters came home empty-handed or bringing only small game.
+
+They attributed all their troubles to the "Long Knives," as they called
+the white men, who, they said, had stolen their hunting grounds. So when
+Tecumseh was but a child he hated the palefaces, and was glad when his
+tribe made war against them.
+
+In 1774 the Ohio Indians learned that the Virginians were coming into
+their country to destroy their villages. Accordingly, all able-bodied
+warriors took up their weapons and went with the proud chief, Cornstalk,
+to meet the enemy. Tecumseh's father and eldest brother, Cheeseekau,
+were among the number.
+
+After anxious waiting, those who had stayed behind were gladdened by the
+good news that for the present their homes were safe. But many of those
+homes had been made desolate by the battles waged in their defense.
+Cheeseekau came home from the war alone. His father had fallen in
+battle.
+
+The mother and her children ceased their wailing and for the time forgot
+their loss, as they sat by the fire with Cheeseekau and heard the young
+warrior talk of his first battle. He said that he wished to die on the
+battlefield, as his father had done, for an Indian could hope for no
+better end. He told what a good fight the Indians had made and how brave
+their leader had been.
+
+"All over the field," he said, "you could hear Cornstalk shout to his
+men 'Be strong! Be brave!' The warriors had more fear of Cornstalk's
+hatchet than of the Long Knives' guns. They did not dare to run. Some
+tried it. But Cornstalk buried his tomahawk in the head of the first,
+and the rest turned back to fight the palefaces. When the battle was
+over Cornstalk called a council and said: 'The palefaces are coming
+against us in great numbers. We can not drive them back. What shall we
+do? Shall we fight a while longer, kill a few more of them, and then
+yield? Shall we put to death our women and children and fight till we
+die?' No one spoke. Then he said: 'I see you will not fight. I will go
+and make peace with the white men.' And he made us a good peace.
+Cornstalk is the greatest chief we have had since Pontiac."
+
+Then followed stories of the great Pontiac, who had tried to make the
+Indian tribes stop fighting with one another and unite their strength
+against the white man. Thus, before Tecumseh could talk plainly, he
+heard about the heroes of his race, and learned what was expected of a
+good Indian.
+
+From this time the youthful warrior Cheeseekau took his father's place
+as head of the family. He not only provided the family with food and
+clothing, but also looked after the education of his younger brothers.
+Tecumseh was his favorite, and he strove to teach him all that was
+needful to make him a brave warrior and a good man.
+
+
+
+
+II. YOUTH
+
+
+During Tecumseh's boyhood the Revolutionary war was being fought. The
+Indians took the part of the British. It was natural that they should
+feel a more bitter hatred for the colonists who had actually taken their
+lands and fought against them, than they had for the distant mysterious
+"king," whom they had been taught to call "father," and to regard as a
+superior being. Besides, they little doubted that the king who had
+already beaten the French could subdue his own rebellious subjects. And
+they looked forward to the reward he would give them for their aid when
+the war was over.
+
+The victories of the colonists were familiar topics of discussion among
+the Indians. They spoke with increasing uneasiness of the deeds of
+Washington, Putnam, and Greene. But the name to them more terrible than
+all the rest was that of George Rogers Clark. With sinking hearts they
+heard of his victories on the frontier.
+
+In the summer of 1780 scouts brought word to the Shawnees on Mad River
+that this dreaded soldier was approaching with his army. Though alarmed,
+the Indians determined to do what they could to save the cabins and fort
+which they had built with much toil, and the growing corn upon which
+they depended for their winter food.
+
+Three hundred warriors assembled in the village. They held a hurried
+council and decided to advance to meet Clark's army and surprise it with
+an attack at daybreak. But if there was a surprise where Gen. Clark
+was concerned, he was usually the man to give it. Accordingly, the
+Indians learned with dismay that their plan could not be carried out,
+for General Clark's army by forced marches had reached and was already
+surrounding their village. The Indians had built a fort, but now they
+were afraid to use it and took refuge in their log huts. They began to
+cut holes in the walls, so that they might fire on the enemy.
+
+When General Clark heard this, he said: "Hold on a minute, and I'll make
+holes enough for them." With that he ordered up his cannon and caused it
+to be fired into the village.
+
+The Indians were so terrified that all who could do so fled into the
+woods and swamps. The rest fell an easy prey to the soldiers, who killed
+many warriors, made prisoners of the women and children, burned the
+houses, and cut down the corn.
+
+[Illustration: GEORGE ROGERS CLARK]
+
+Tecumseh and his brothers were among those who escaped the sword of
+Clark, but they could not forget the distress of their kindred.
+Tecumseh was too young to take part in this battle. Although he spent
+much time in fighting sham battles, it was not until six years later
+that he had an opportunity to fight in a real one. In 1786 he and his
+elder brother went out with a band of warriors to check or drive back
+Captain Logan, who was advancing toward Mad River.
+
+In an encounter near Dayton the boy was forced for the first time to
+face a cavalry charge. He had never imagined anything so terrifying. He
+saw those great, rushing horses, the cruel flash of steel. He forgot his
+hatred of the white man, his dreams of glory. His only thought was to
+save his life. He threw down his gun and ran.
+
+As soon as he recovered from his fright he felt very much ashamed of his
+cowardly conduct. He was eager for another opportunity to test his
+courage. Fortunately for him he did not have to wait long.
+
+Tecumseh was with a party of Indians who attacked some flatboats on the
+Ohio River. The boats were taken and all the men in charge of them were
+killed except one, who was made prisoner.
+
+This was an important occasion in the life of Tecumseh. He acted with
+such daring and bravery that the old warriors of the party were
+astonished. From that night the Shawnees spoke of Tecumseh as a brave.
+Besides winning the good opinion of others, he regained his self-respect
+and conquered fear.
+
+The memory of this victory was not pleasant to Tecumseh. It was
+followed by the burning of the prisoner. Although the burning of
+prisoners was not rare among the Shawnee Indians this was the first time
+Tecumseh had seen a man put to death in that barbarous manner, and he
+grew sick and faint with horror at the sight. But this time he was
+terrified not for himself but for another, and he was not ashamed of his
+feelings.
+
+Boy though he was, he stood before the older Indians and told them
+plainly what he thought of their cruel act. He spoke with so much power
+that he made all who heard him feel as he did about it. And they all
+agreed never again to take part in so inhuman a practice.
+
+On this night Tecumseh gave glimpses of the man he was to be. He proved
+his valor; he showed mercy; he influenced warriors by his words.
+
+
+
+
+III. ADVENTURES OF THE YOUNG BRAVE
+
+
+A short time after Tecumseh had proved himself worthy to be considered
+an Indian brave, he started with his brother Cheeseekau on a journey
+across the woods and prairies of Indiana and Illinois. The brothers were
+accompanied by a band of Kickapoo Indians. Such a journey was an
+important part of the training of young warriors.
+
+The party tramped through the country, courting hardships and adventure,
+getting acquainted with the wilderness, hunting buffaloes, visiting
+friendly tribes, learning many languages, breaking bread with
+strangers, and visiting vengeance on enemies. To fall upon the
+defenseless cabin of some sleeping frontiersman and murder him and his
+family was in their eyes a feat to boast of.
+
+But their warlike exploits were not confined to attacks on the white
+settlers. If they found friendly tribes at war with other tribes they
+joined them. In one of these battles Cheeseekau met his death, singing
+and rejoicing that it was his lot to fall like a warrior on the field of
+battle. This young man is said to have had a vision that he should die.
+Before going into battle he made a formal speech, telling his friends
+that he would be shot in the forehead in the thick of the fight, and his
+prophecy was fulfilled.
+
+After Cheeseekau's death Tecumseh took his place as leader of the
+company and continued his wanderings to the South. There he made many
+friends and had numerous stirring adventures. One evening just as he and
+his eight followers were about to go to bed their camp was attacked by
+thirty white men. Tecumseh ordered his frightened comrades to follow him
+and rushed upon the enemy with such spirit and force that his little
+company killed two of the assailants and frightened the rest away.
+
+Tecumseh returned to Ohio after an absence of three years. He discovered
+that it is not always necessary to go away from home to find adventures.
+His friends and neighbors were greatly excited about a victory which
+they had just gained over the United States troops under General Harmer.
+
+The next year, 1791, the new republic sent General St. Clair with a
+large army into the Indian country. Tecumseh's recent expedition had
+fitted him to be a good scout, and he was therefore sent out to watch
+the movements of St. Clair's troops. While he was employed scouting, the
+main body of Indians fell suddenly upon St. Clair's troops and
+completely routed them. During the next few years there was no lack of
+opportunity for the Shawnees to indulge their love of battle; for
+General Wayne, "Mad Anthony Wayne," as he was called, proved a more
+formidable foe than had General St. Clair. Tecumseh's reputation as a
+warrior was soon firmly established.
+
+He was equally noted as a hunter. Though he had long been pointed out as
+one of the best Shawnee hunters, many young men had claimed as great
+success as he. At length some one suggested a way to decide who was the
+ablest hunter.
+
+"Let us," said he, "each go alone into the forest, for three days, to
+hunt the deer, and the one who brings home the largest number of deer
+skins shall be considered the greatest hunter."
+
+All agreed to this test, and several noted hunters started out. After
+three days each returned bearing the evidence of his skill as a hunter.
+Some proudly displayed ten skins, some twelve. Last of all came Tecumseh
+with thirty-five deer skins. Then the other Indians stopped boasting,
+and declared Tecumseh the greatest hunter of the Shawnee nation.
+Tecumseh was a generous hunter as well as a skillful one. He made it his
+business to provide many who were old or sick with meat and skins.
+
+Among the Indians the hero was the man who could do most to help his
+tribe. He could do that by hunting, to supply its members with food and
+clothing, by speaking wisely in council, to lead them to act for their
+highest welfare, and by fighting to defend their rights or avenge their
+wrongs. A brave who could do all this was worthy of being a chief, even
+if he was not the eldest son of a chief.
+
+Tecumseh had shown that he could hunt, that he could speak in council,
+that he could fight. He had therefore all the requirements for a chief.
+Moreover, he had great influence with the young men of the neighboring
+tribes.
+
+
+
+
+IV. TECUMSEH DISSATISFIED
+
+
+The suffering among the Indians was so great because of the ceaseless
+war they had carried on against the white people, that in 1795 many of
+the tribes were ready to accept the terms of peace offered by the United
+States government.
+
+Accordingly, in June a treaty was made at Greenville, Ohio. The Indians
+promised to give up all claim to many thousand acres of land in the
+Northwest Territory, to live at peace with the white settlers occupying
+the land, to notify them of the hostile plans of other tribes, to
+surrender whatever prisoners they had, to give up evil doers for trial,
+to protect travelers and traders, and to recognize no "father" but the
+President of the United States.
+
+In return for all this the national government pledged itself to give
+the Indians a yearly "present" of food, blankets, powder, and other
+necessities, to respect the boundary lines and prevent settlers from
+hunting or intruding on Indian lands, and to punish white men who were
+found guilty of robbing or murdering Indians.
+
+Tecumseh would not attend the council at which the treaty was made. Much
+as he felt the need of peace he was unwilling to pay for it a price
+which he thought the white man had no right to ask. He was unwilling to
+give up the lands which the Great Spirit had allotted to the Indians,
+and which were necessary to their very existence.
+
+He foresaw that in the years of peace to which the Indians had pledged
+themselves, white men without number would come to make their homes in
+the fertile lands secured by the treaty. He foresaw that while the
+settlements flourished the tribes would become more and more dependent
+and submissive to the will of their civilized neighbors.
+
+The injurious effect of civilization upon the Indian tribes was only too
+evident to all. The Superintendent of Indian Affairs later wrote to
+President Jefferson: "I can tell at once upon looking at an Indian whom
+I may chance to meet whether he belongs to a neighboring or to a more
+distant tribe. The latter is generally well-clothed, healthy, and
+vigorous; the former, half-naked, filthy, and enfeebled by intoxication,
+and many of them are without arms excepting a knife, which they carry
+for the most villainous purposes."
+
+What wonder that the patriotic Tecumseh refused to sanction a treaty
+which he considered a step toward the downfall of his race! He
+remembered the dead hero Pontiac, and wished that the red men had such a
+chieftain to unite them and rouse their manhood. He determined
+henceforth to take Pontiac for his model and to do what he could to
+unite his people and prepare them to resist the next attempt of the
+palefaces to take the land of the redskins. With this idea in view he
+used his influence to collect from various tribes a band of followers,
+who made him their chief.
+
+The new chief was not an unworthy successor of the great Pontiac. Though
+living at a time when the Indians were beginning to lose much of their
+native vigor and virtue, Tecumseh had grown to be one of the most
+princely red men we know anything about.
+
+[Illustration: TECUMSEH]
+
+His appearance was dignified and pleasing. Colonel W. S. Hatch gave the
+following picturesque description of him: "His height was about five
+feet nine inches; his face, oval rather than angular; his mouth,
+beautifully formed, like that of Napoleon I., as represented in his
+portraits; his eyes, clear, transparent hazel, with a mild, pleasant
+expression when in repose, or in conversation; but when excited in his
+orations or by the enthusiasm of conflict, or when in anger, they
+appeared like balls of fire; his teeth, beautifully white, and his
+complexion more of a light brown or tan than red; his whole tribe, as
+well as their kindred, the Ottawas, had light complexions; his arms and
+hands were finely formed; his limbs straight; he always stood very
+erect, and walked with a brisk, elastic, vigorous step. He invariably
+dressed in Indian tanned buckskin; a perfectly well-fitting hunting
+frock descending to the knee was over his underclothes of the same
+material; the usual cape with finish of leather fringe about the neck,
+cape, edges of the front opening, and bottom of the frock; a belt of the
+same material, in which were his sidearms (an elegant silver-mounted
+tomahawk and a knife in a strong leather case); short pantaloons,
+connected with neatly fitting leggings and moccasins, with a mantle of
+the same material thrown over his left shoulder, used as a blanket in
+camp, and as a protection in storms."
+
+Tecumseh's character was not that of the typical Indian, because it was
+broader. The virtues that most Indians exercise only in the family, or,
+at best, in the tribe, he practised toward his entire race, and, to some
+extent, toward all mankind. He once said: "My tribe is nothing to me; my
+race, everything." His hatred of the white man was general, not
+personal. Able, brave men, whether red or white, he respected and
+admired. While most Indians thought it necessary to be truthful to
+friends only, Tecumseh was honest in his dealings with his enemies. He
+often set white men an example of mercy.
+
+An amusing story is told of him, which shows how kindly tolerant he was
+where he could feel nothing but contempt for a man: One evening on
+entering the house of a white man with whom he was acquainted, Tecumseh
+found a gigantic stranger there, who was so badly frightened at sight of
+him that he took refuge behind the other men in the room, begging them
+to save him. Tecumseh stood a moment sternly watching the great fellow.
+Then he went up and patted the cowering creature on the shoulder, saying
+good naturedly, "Big baby; big baby!"
+
+In 1804 and 1805, before the new chief was ready for decided action,
+Governor Harrison, of Indiana Territory, made additional treaties with a
+few weak and submissive tribes, by which he laid claim to more land.
+This measure aroused such general indignation among the more hardy and
+warlike Indians that Tecumseh felt the time had come when he might win
+them to support his cherished plan of united opposition to the whites.
+
+
+
+
+V. TECUMSEH'S BROTHER, THE PROPHET
+
+
+Tecumseh had not been alone in his anxiety for the future of his race.
+After the death of his elder brother he had made his twin brother,
+Laulewasikaw, his trusted comrade. Together they had talked over the
+decay in power and manliness that was swiftly overtaking the tribes, and
+the wrongs the red men suffered at the hands of the white. They had not
+spent their strength in useless murmurings, but had analyzed the causes
+of trouble and decided how they might be removed.
+
+[Illustration: THE PROPHET]
+
+One day after brooding deeply over these matters Laulewasikaw fell upon
+the earth in a swoon. For a long time he lay quite stiff and rigid, and
+those who saw him thought he was dead. But by and by he gave a deep moan
+and opened his eyes. For a moment he looked about as if he did not know
+where he was. On coming to his senses he explained to his friends that
+he had had a vision in which he had seen the Great Spirit, who had told
+him what to do to save the Indian people from destruction.
+
+From that time he styled himself "Prophet" and claimed to act under the
+direction of the Great Spirit. He changed his name to Tenskwatawa to
+signify that he was the "Open Door," through which all might learn the
+will of the Great Spirit.
+
+Though professing to have supernatural power himself, Tenskwatawa
+realized the degrading effect of petty superstition and the terror and
+injury the medicine men were able to bring upon the simple-minded
+Indians who believed in their charms and spells. He denounced the
+practice of sorcery and witchcraft as against the will of the Great
+Spirit.
+
+Many of the Prophet's teachings were such as we should all approve of.
+Wishing to purify the individual and family life of the Indians, he
+forbade men to marry more than one wife, and commanded them to take care
+of their families and to provide for those who were old and sick. He
+required them to work, to till the ground and raise corn, and to hunt.
+
+Some of his teachings were intended to make the Indians as a people
+independent of the white race. The Great Spirit, said Tenskwatawa, had
+made the Indians to be a single people, quite distinct from the white
+men and for different purposes. The tribes must therefore stop fighting
+with one another and must unite and live peaceably together as one
+tribe. They must not fight with the white men, either Americans or
+British. Neither must they intermarry with them or adopt their customs.
+The Great Spirit wished his red children to throw aside the garments of
+cotton and wool they had borrowed from the whites and clothe themselves
+in the skins of wild animals; he wished them to stop feeding on pork and
+beef, and bread made from wheat, and instead to eat the flesh of the
+wild deer and the bison, which he had provided for them, and bread made
+from Indian corn. Above all, they must let alone whisky which might do
+well enough for white men, but was never intended for Indians.
+
+Furthermore, Tenskwatawa taught the Indians that a tribe had no right to
+sell the land it lived on. The Great Spirit had given the red people the
+land that they might enjoy it in common, just as they did the light and
+the air. He did not wish them to measure it off and build fences around
+it. Since no one chief or tribe owned the land, no single chief or tribe
+could sell it. No Indian territory therefore could be sold to the white
+men without the consent of all tribes and all Indians.
+
+The words of the Prophet were eagerly listened to. Indians came from far
+and near to hear him. Some were so excited by what he said against
+witchcraft that they put to death those who persisted in using charms
+and pronouncing incantations.
+
+[Illustration: ECLIPSE OF THE SUN]
+
+The sayings and doings of the Shawnee Prophet soon attracted the
+attention of the Governor of Indiana Territory. Pity for the victims of
+the Prophet's misguided zeal, and alarm because of the influence
+Tenskwatawa seemed to be gaining, led Governor William Henry Harrison to
+take measures to check the popularity of a man who seemed to be a fraud
+and a mischief-maker. He sent to the Delaware Indians the following
+"speech":
+
+"My Children: My heart is filled with grief, and my eyes are dissolved
+in tears at the news which has reached me. * * * Who is this pretended
+prophet who dares to speak in the name of the Great Creator? Examine
+him. Is he more wise and virtuous than you are yourselves, that he
+should be selected to convey to you the orders of your God? Demand of
+him some proofs at least of his being the messenger of the Deity. If God
+has really employed him, He has doubtless authorized him to perform
+miracles, that he may be known and received as a prophet. If he is
+really a prophet, ask him to cause the sun to stand still, the moon to
+alter its course, the rivers to cease to flow, or the dead to rise from
+their graves. If he does these things you may believe that he has been
+sent from God. He tells you that the Great Spirit commands you to punish
+with death those who deal in magic, and that he is authorized to point
+them out. Wretched delusion! Is, then, the Master of Life obliged to
+employ mortal man to punish those who offend Him? * * * Clear your eyes,
+I beseech you, from the mist which surrounds them. No longer be imposed
+on by the arts of the impostor. Drive him from your town and let peace
+and harmony prevail amongst you."
+
+This letter increased rather than diminished the influence of the
+Prophet. He met the Governor's doubt of his power with fine scorn and
+named a day on which he would "put the sun under his feet." Strange to
+say, on the day named an eclipse of the sun occurred, and the affrighted
+savages quaked with fear and thought it was all the work of Tenskwatawa.
+
+
+
+
+VI. GREENVILLE
+
+
+Tenskwatawa met with strong opposition from some of the Indians. The
+small chiefs especially were displeased with the idea that the tribes
+should unite to form one people, as that would take away their own
+power. They, therefore, heard the Prophet with anger, and carried away
+an evil report of him.
+
+Still, many believed all that he said, and wished to gain the good will
+of the Great Spirit by doing his bidding. They were willing to leave
+their tribes to follow the Prophet. So it happened that in 1806
+Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh with their followers established a town at
+Greenville, Ohio. There all lived in accordance with the Prophet's
+teachings. They strengthened their bodies by running and swimming and
+wrestling. They lived at peace without drunkenness. They minded their
+own affairs. Now, all this was just what President Jefferson, the
+Indians' friend, had often advised the red men to do.
+
+Yet the white neighbors were greatly disturbed and wished to break up
+the Prophet's town. In the first place the town was on land that had
+been ceded to the United States, or the Seventeen Fires (as the Indians
+picturesquely named the new nation), by the treaty of Greenville. Then,
+the visiting Indians who came from all parts of the country to hear the
+words of the Prophet were a constant source of alarm to the border
+settlers. And, although he professed to preach peace, the Prophet was
+believed by many to be preparing secretly for war.
+
+Besides, innocent as most of his teachings appeared, those regarding
+property rights were hostile to the white race and decidedly annoying to
+the men who coveted the hunting grounds of the savages. The United
+States government in acquiring land from the Indians had usually
+proceeded as if it were the property of the tribe that camped or hunted
+upon it. The Indian Commissioners had had little difficulty in gaining
+rich tracts of land from weak tribes, at comparatively little expense,
+by this method. When it came to a question of land, even Jefferson had
+little sympathy for the Indians. He had not scrupled to advise his agent
+to encourage chiefs to get into debt at the trading posts, so that when
+hard pressed for money they might be persuaded to part with the lands of
+their tribes.
+
+Now Tecumseh had seen that the whole struggle between the red men and
+the white was a question of land. If the white men were kind to the
+Indians and came among them with fair promises and goodly presents,
+their object was to get land. If they came with threats and the sword,
+their object was, still, to get land. They needed the land. They could
+not grow and prosper without it. But if the white men needed land in
+order to live how much more did the Indians need it! Where a few acres
+of farm land would give a white family comfortable support, many acres
+were needed to support an Indian family by the chase. Tecumseh argued in
+this way: The Seventeen Fires unite to get our lands from us. Let us
+follow their example. Let us unite to hold our lands. Let us keep at
+peace with them and do them no harm. Let us give them no reason to fight
+with us and take our land in battle. When they offer to buy we will
+refuse to sell. If they try to force us to part with our lands we will
+stand together and resist them like men.
+
+He heartily agreed with his brother's teachings concerning property
+rights, and possibly suggested many ideas that Tenskwatawa fancied he
+received from the Great Spirit. Certain it is that Tecumseh had long
+held similar views and had done his best to spread them. Although
+Tenskwatawa was more conspicuous than Tecumseh, the latter had the
+stronger character. For a time he kept in the background and let his
+brother do the talking, but his personal influence had much to do with
+giving weight to the Prophet's words.
+
+The brothers had not been at Greenville long before they were summoned
+to Fort Wayne by the commandant there to hear a letter from their
+"father," the President of the Seventeen Fires. Tecumseh refused to go.
+He demanded that the letter be brought to him. This put the officer in a
+trying position, but there was nothing left for him to do but send the
+letter to Greenville. It proved to be a request that the Prophet move
+his town beyond the boundaries of the territory owned by the United
+States. The letter was courteous, and offered the Indians assistance to
+move and build new homes.
+
+To the President's request Tecumseh sent a decided refusal. He said:
+"These lands are ours; we were the first owners; no one has the right to
+move us. The Great Spirit appointed this place for us to light our fires
+and here we will stay."
+
+The settlement continued to be a source of annoyance to the government.
+Indians kept coming from distant regions to visit the Prophet. Rumor
+said that the brothers were working under the direction of British
+agents, who were trying to rouse the Indians to make war on the United
+States.
+
+To counteract the British influence the Governor of Ohio sent a message
+to Greenville. At a council called to consider the Governor's letter,
+the chief, Blue Jacket, and the Prophet made speeches in which they
+declared their wish to remain at peace with the British and the Long
+Knives, as they called the settlers.
+
+Tecumseh accompanied the commissioners on their return and held a
+conference with the Governor of Ohio. He spoke plainly, saying the
+Indians had little cause for friendliness to either the British or the
+people of the United States, both of whom had robbed them of their lands
+by making unjust treaties. But he assured the governor that for their
+own sake the Indians wished to remain at peace with both nations.
+
+The Governor, like all who heard Tecumseh speak, was impressed with his
+sense and honesty, and believed that the Indians were not planning war.
+
+A little later Tecumseh was again called to Springfield to attend a
+large council of Indians and white men. The council was held to
+determine who was responsible for the murder of a white man, who had
+been found dead not far from Springfield. On this occasion Tecumseh
+attracted much attention. In the first place he refused to give up his
+arms, and entered the council with the dignity of manner and the arms of
+a warrior.
+
+He made a speech of such passion and eloquence that the interpreter was
+unable to keep up with him or translate his ideas. The white men were
+left to guess his meaning by watching his wrathful face and the
+excitement of his hearers. The Indians, however, understood him
+perfectly, and when the council was over and they went to their homes
+all repeated what they could remember of the wonderful speech.
+
+The influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh increased. The excitement
+among the Indians became more general. Governor Harrison again wrote to
+the Shawnee tribes. He began by reminding them of the treaties between
+the Indians and the people of the United States:
+
+"My children, listen to me. I speak in the name of your father, the
+great chief of the Seventeen Fires.
+
+"My children, it is now twelve years since the tomahawk, which you had
+raised by the advice of your father, the King of Great Britain, was
+buried at Greenville, in the presence of that great warrior, General
+Wayne.
+
+"My children, you then promised, and the Great Spirit heard it, that you
+would in future live in peace and friendship with your brothers, the
+Americans. You made a treaty with your father, and one that contained a
+number of good things, equally beneficial to all the tribes of red
+people who were parties to it.
+
+"My children, you promised in that treaty to acknowledge no other father
+than the chief of the Seventeen Fires, and never to listen to the
+proposition of any foreign nation. You promised never to lift up the
+tomahawk against any of your father's children, and to give notice of
+any other tribe that intended it. Your father also promised to do
+something for you, particularly to deliver to you every year a certain
+quantity of goods, to prevent any white man from settling on your lands
+without your consent, or from doing you any personal injury. He promised
+to run a line between your land and his, so that you might know your
+own; and you were to be permitted to live and hunt upon your father's
+land as long as you behaved yourselves well. My children, which of these
+articles has your father broken? You know that he has observed them all
+with the utmost good faith. But, my children, have you done so? Have you
+not always had your ears open to receive bad advice from the white
+people beyond the lakes?"
+
+Although Governor Harrison writes in this letter as if he thought the
+white men had kept their part of the treaty, he had written quite
+differently to President Jefferson, telling him how the settlers were
+continually violating the treaty by hunting on Indian territory and
+reporting that it was impossible for the Indians to get justice when
+their kinsmen were murdered by white men; for even if a murderer was
+brought to trial no jury of white men would pronounce the murderer of an
+Indian guilty. "All these injuries the Indians have hitherto borne with
+astonishing patience." Thus Mr. Harrison had written to the President,
+but it was evidently his policy to try to make the Indians think they
+had no cause for complaint. In his letter to the Shawnees he went on to
+say:
+
+"My children, I have heard bad news. The sacred spot where the great
+council fire was kindled, around which the Seventeen Fires and ten
+tribes of their children smoked the pipe of peace--that very spot where
+the Great Spirit saw his red and white children encircle themselves with
+the chain of friendship--that place has been selected for dark and
+bloody councils.
+
+"My children, this business must be stopped. You have called in a number
+of men from the most distant tribes to listen to a fool, who speaks not
+the words of the Great Spirit, but those of the devil and of the British
+agents. My children, your conduct has much alarmed the white settlers
+near you. They desire that you will send away those people, and if they
+wish to have the impostor with them they can carry him. Let him go to
+the lakes; he can hear the British more distinctly."
+
+To this letter the Prophet sent a dignified answer, denying the charges
+the Governor had made. He spoke with regret rather than anger, and said
+that "his father (the Governor) had been listening to evil birds."
+
+
+
+
+VII. THE PROPHET'S TOWN
+
+
+In 1808 Tecumseh and the Prophet moved with their followers to the
+Wabash Valley, and established on the Tippecanoe River a village known
+as the Prophet's Town.
+
+Several advantages were to be gained by moving from Greenville to
+Tippecanoe, all of which probably had their weight in influencing the
+brothers to make this change. In the first place, there seems to be
+little doubt that Tecumseh wanted peace, at least until he had built up
+a confederacy strong enough to fight the Americans with some hope of
+success. At Greenville the Indians were so near the settlers that there
+was constant danger of trouble between them. And Tecumseh realized that
+any wrong done by his people might be made an excuse for the government
+to take more lands from the Indians.
+
+Then, too, this redskinned statesman realized in his way that the best
+way to prevent war was to be ready for it. He wished his people to be
+independent of the whites for their livelihood. The Wabash Valley
+offered the richest hunting grounds between the Lakes and the Ohio. Here
+they need not starve should they be denied aid by the United States
+government.
+
+The location of the new village had further political value. It was in
+the center of a district where many tribes camped, over which the
+brothers wished to extend their influence. From the new town
+communication with the British could be more easily carried on. This was
+important in view of the troubled relations existing between the United
+States and Great Britain. Tecumseh was shrewd enough to see that though
+under ordinary circumstances the Indians were not sufficiently strong to
+be very formidable to the United States government, their friendship or
+enmity would be an important consideration in the war that threatened.
+And he hoped that the Long Knives' anxiety lest they should join the
+British would prevent their doing anything to gain the ill will of the
+Indians.
+
+The brothers wished Governor Harrison to understand that their desire
+was for peace, and that they did not intend to make war unless driven to
+do so. Accordingly, in August, Tenskwatawa, with a band of followers,
+made the Governor a visit. The Indians stayed at Vincennes for about two
+weeks. Harrison was surprised to find the Prophet an intelligent and
+gifted man. He tested the sincerity of the Prophet's followers by
+questions as to their belief and by putting in their way opportunities
+to drink whisky. He was again surprised to find them very earnest in
+their faith and able to resist the fire water. In Tenskwatawa's farewell
+speech to Harrison, he said:
+
+"Father: It is three years since I first began that system of religion
+which I now practice. The white people and some of the Indians were
+against me, but I had no other intention but to introduce among the
+Indians those good principles of religion which the white people
+profess. I was spoken badly of by the white people, who reproached me
+with misleading the Indians, but I defy them to say that I did anything
+amiss. * * *
+
+"The Great Spirit told me to tell the Indians that he had made them, and
+made the world--that he had placed them on it to do good and not evil.
+
+"I told all the redskins that the way they were in was not good and they
+ought to abandon it; that we ought to consider ourselves as one man, but
+we ought to live according to our customs, the red people after their
+fashion and the white people after theirs; particularly that they should
+not drink whisky; that it was not made for them, but for the white
+people who knew how to use it, and that it is the cause of all the
+mischiefs which the Indians suffer, and that we must follow the
+directions of the Great Spirit, and listen to Him, as it was He who made
+us; determine to listen to nothing that is bad; do not take up the
+tomahawk should it be offered by the British or by the Long Knives; do
+not meddle with anything that does not belong to you, but mind your own
+business and cultivate the ground, that your women and children may have
+enough to live on.
+
+"I now inform you that it is our intention to live in peace with our
+father and his people forever.
+
+"My father, I have informed you what we mean to do, and I call the Great
+Spirit to witness the truth of my declaration. The religion which I have
+established for the last three years has been attended by all the
+different tribes of Indians in this part of the world. Those Indians
+were once different people; they are now but one; they are determined to
+practise what I have communicated to them, that has come directly from
+the Great Spirit through me."
+
+The Prophet made a favorable impression on the Governor, and after his
+visit affairs went smoothly for a time. The Prophet preached and his
+followers worked. Tecumseh traveled about north and south, east and
+west, talking with the Indians and trying to unite the tribes and to
+persuade them to follow his brother's teachings.
+
+In the meantime, settlers came steadily from the south and the east, and
+the governor felt the need of more land. Since he saw no prospect of
+immediate trouble with the British and was convinced that the Prophet
+had not been preparing the Indians for war, he determined to attempt to
+extend the United States territory.
+
+On the thirtieth of September, 1809, Governor Harrison called all the
+tribes that claimed certain lands between the White and Wabash rivers to
+a council. Only a few of the weak and degenerate tribes answered the
+summons. Nevertheless, he went through the ceremony of making a treaty
+by which the United States government claimed three million acres of
+Indian land.
+
+This act of Harrison's lighted a hundred council fires. Everywhere the
+Indians denounced this treaty. Soon word reached Vincennes that tribes
+that had before stood apart cherishing their independence had declared
+their willingness to join the brothers at Tippecanoe. At the Prophet's
+town the voice of the warrior, Tecumseh, sounded above that of the
+preacher, Tenskwatawa; and running and wrestling were said to have given
+place to the practice of shooting and wielding the tomahawk.
+
+When the annual supply of salt was sent to Tippecanoe, the Prophet
+refused to accept it, and sent word to the Governor that the Americans
+had dealt unfairly with the Indians, and that friendly relations could
+be renewed only by the nullification of the treaty of 1809.
+
+The Indians were evidently ready for war, and repeated rumors of plots
+to attack the settlements caused great anxiety among the frontiersmen.
+The Indians now recognized Tecumseh as their leader, and looked to him
+for the word of command. Realizing how much loss of life and land a
+defeat would bring to the Indians, he worked tirelessly to make his
+people ready for war, but resolved not to hazard a battle unless driven
+to do so.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. THE COUNCIL BETWEEN HARRISON AND TECUMSEH
+
+
+Governor Harrison sent agents to Tippecanoe, who brought back word that
+the Indians were preparing for war; that Tecumseh had gathered about him
+five thousand warriors, and that the British were encouraging them to go
+to war, and promising them aid. He therefore sent a letter to the
+Prophet telling him of the reports he had received, and warning him not
+to make an enemy of the Seventeen Fires. He wrote:
+
+"Don't deceive yourselves; do not believe that all the nations of
+Indians united are able to resist the force of the Seventeen Fires. I
+know your warriors are brave; but ours are not less so. But what can a
+few brave warriors do against the innumerable warriors of the Seventeen
+Fires? Our blue-coats are more numerous than you can count; our hunters
+are like the leaves of the forest, or the grains of sand on the Wabash.
+Do not think that the red-coats can protect you; they are not able to
+protect themselves. They do not think of going to war with us. If they
+did, you would in a few moons see our flag wave over all the forts of
+Canada. What reason have you to complain of the Seventeen Fires? Have
+they taken anything from you? Have they ever violated the treaties made
+with the red men? You say they have purchased lands from those who had
+no right to sell them. Show that this is true and the land will be
+instantly restored. Show us the rightful owners. I have full power to
+arrange this business; but if you would rather carry your complaints
+before your great father, the President, you shall be indulged. I will
+immediately take means to send you, with those chiefs that you may
+choose, to the city where your father lives. Everything necessary shall
+be prepared for your journey, and means taken for your safe return."
+
+[Illustration: HARRISON'S COUNCIL WITH TECUMSEH AT VINCENNES]
+
+Instead of answering this letter, Tenskwatawa said he would send his
+brother, Tecumseh, to Vincennes to confer with the Governor. Early in
+August a fleet of eighty canoes started down the Wabash for the capital.
+Tecumseh, with four hundred warriors at his back, all armed and painted
+as if for battle, was on his way to meet in council for the first time
+the man who was responsible for the treaty of 1809.
+
+The party encamped just outside of Vincennes, and on the morning
+appointed for the council Tecumseh appeared attended by forty warriors.
+He refused to meet the Governor and his officers in council on the porch
+of the Governor's house, saying he preferred to hold the conference
+under a clump of trees not far off. The Governor consented and ordered
+benches and chairs to be taken to the grove. When Tecumseh was asked to
+take a chair he replied pompously: "The sun is my father; the earth is
+my mother; on her bosom I will repose," and seated himself on the
+ground. His warriors followed his example. In his speech Tecumseh stated
+plainly the grievances of the Indians. He said:
+
+"Brother, since the peace was made, you have killed some Shawnees,
+Winnebagoes, Delawares, and Miamis, and you have taken our land from us,
+and I do not see how we can remain at peace if you continue to do so.
+You try to force the red people to do some injury. It is you that are
+pushing them on to do mischief. You endeavor to make distinctions. You
+wish to prevent the Indians doing as we wish them--to unite, and let
+them consider their lands as the common property of the whole; you take
+tribes aside and advise them not to come into this measure; and until
+our plan is accomplished we do not wish to accept your invitation to go
+to see the President. You want by your distinctions of Indian tribes in
+allotting to each a particular tract of land, to make them to war with
+each other. You never see an Indian come and endeavor to make the white
+people do so. You are continually driving the red people; when, at last,
+you will drive them into the Great Lake, where they can neither stand
+nor walk.
+
+"Brother, you ought to know what you are doing with the Indians. Perhaps
+it is by direction of the President to make these distinctions. It is a
+very bad thing and we do not like it. Since my residence at Tippecanoe
+we have endeavored to level all distinctions--to destroy village chiefs,
+by whom all mischief is done. It is they who sell our lands to the
+Americans. Our object is to let our affairs be transacted by warriors.
+
+"Brother, only a few had part in the selling of this land and the goods
+that were given for it. The treaty was afterwards brought here, and the
+Weas were induced to give their consent because of their small numbers.
+The treaty at Fort Wayne was made through the threats of Winnemac; but
+in future we are prepared to punish those chiefs who may come forward
+to propose to sell the land. If you continue to purchase of them it will
+produce war among the different tribes, and, at last, I do not know what
+will be the consequence to the white people.
+
+"Brother, I was glad to hear your speech. You said that if we could show
+that the land was sold by people that had no right to sell, you would
+restore it. Those that did sell it did not own it. It was me. Those
+tribes set up a claim, but the tribes with me will not agree to their
+claim. If the land is not restored to us you will see when we return to
+our homes how it will be settled. We shall have a great council, at
+which all the tribes will be present, when we shall show to those who
+sold that they had no right to the claim they set up; and we will see
+what will be done to those chiefs that did sell the land to you. I am
+not alone in this determination; it is the determination of all the
+warriors and red people that listen to me. I now wish you to listen to
+me. If you do not, it will appear as if you wished me to kill all the
+chiefs that sold you the land. I tell you so because I am authorized by
+all the tribes to do so. I am the head of them all; I am a warrior, and
+all the warriors will meet together in two or three moons from this;
+then I will call for those chiefs that sold you the land and shall know
+what to do with them. If you do not restore the land, you will have a
+hand in killing them."
+
+Governor Harrison began his reply by saying that the Indian tribes were
+and always had been independent of one another, and had a right to sell
+their own lands, without interference from others.
+
+Tecumseh might have answered that the Seventeen Fires had already
+recognized that the land was the common property of the tribes by
+treating with ten of them in making the Greenville purchase. But instead
+he and his followers lost their temper and jumped to their feet in a
+rage, as if to attack the Governor. And the council ended in an
+undignified row.
+
+Tecumseh regretted this very much. He sent an apology to Governor
+Harrison and requested another meeting. Another council was called and
+this time the Indians controlled their anger; but Tecumseh maintained
+till the last that the Indians would never allow the white people to
+take possession of the land they claimed by the treaty of 1809.
+
+The next day Governor Harrison, accompanied only by an interpreter,
+courageously visited Tecumseh's encampment and had a long talk with him.
+Tecumseh said the Indians had no wish for war, and would gladly be at
+peace with the Long Knives if the Governor could persuade the President
+to give back the disputed land. He said he had no wish to join the
+British, who were not the true friends of the Indians, but were always
+urging them to fight against the Americans for their own advantage.
+
+Governor Harrison said he would report to the President all that
+Tecumseh had said, but that he knew the President would not give up the
+land he had purchased.
+
+"Well," said Tecumseh, bluntly, "as the great chief is to determine the
+matter, I hope the Great Spirit will put sense enough into his head to
+induce him to direct you to give up this land. It is true, he is so far
+off he will not be hurt by the war; he may sit in his town and drink his
+wine, while you and I will have to fight it out."
+
+
+
+
+IX. PREPARATIONS FOR WAR
+
+
+A year of unrest and anxiety followed the council at Vincennes. The
+United States government made an attempt to survey the new purchase, but
+the surveyors were driven off by the Indians.
+
+Occasional outrages were committed on both sides. Horses were stolen.
+Several white men were murdered by Indians, and several Indians were
+murdered by white men.
+
+In the spring of 1811, when the usual supply of salt was sent up the
+Wabash to be distributed among the tribes, the Indians at the Prophet's
+town, instead of again rejecting it, seized it all. This was done in the
+absence of Tecumseh, who seemed in every way to seek to avoid bringing
+about war.
+
+Governor Harrison knew the treacherous nature of Indians and feared that
+Tecumseh's desire for peace might be feigned in order to throw him off
+his guard. He reasoned that it was scarcely to be expected and little to
+be wished that the United States should relinquish the territory for
+which the Indians were contending. The Indians would hardly give up the
+land without war. Delay only gave Tecumseh time to strengthen his band.
+Harrison thought it wise to force the brothers to open war or to give
+assurance of peace. Accordingly, he wrote them a letter or speech, in
+which he said:
+
+"Brothers, this is the third year that all the white people in this
+country have been alarmed at your proceedings; you threaten us with war;
+you invite all the tribes to the north and west of you to join against
+us.
+
+"Brothers, your warriors who have lately been here deny this, but I have
+received information from every direction; the tribes on the Mississippi
+have sent me word that you intended to murder me, and then to commence a
+war upon our people. I have also received the speech you sent to the
+Pottawottomies and others to join you for that purpose; but if I had no
+other evidence of your hostility to us your seizing the salt I lately
+sent up the Wabash is sufficient. Brothers, our citizens are alarmed,
+and my warriors are preparing themselves, not to strike you but to
+defend themselves, and their women and children. You shall not surprise
+us as you expect to do; you are about to undertake a very rash act. As a
+friend, I advise you to consider well of it; a little reflection may
+save us a great deal of trouble and prevent much mischief; it is not yet
+too late.
+
+"Brothers, if you wish to satisfy us that your intentions are good,
+follow the advice I have given you before: that is, that one or both of
+you should visit the President of the United States and lay your
+grievances before him. He will treat you well, will listen to what you
+say, and if you can show him that you have been injured, you will
+receive justice. If you will follow my advice in this respect it will
+convince the citizens of this country and myself that you have no design
+to attack them. Brothers, with respect to the lands that were purchased
+last fall, I can enter into no negotiations with you on that subject;
+the affair is in the hands of the President. If you wish to go and see
+him, I will supply you with the means."
+
+If either of the brothers should act upon the Governor's advice and go
+to Washington he would be virtually a hostage in the hands of the
+government, and the Indians would not dare to do the settlers any harm
+lest their leader should come to grief because of their misdoing.
+
+Tecumseh sent the Governor a brief, friendly reply, in which he promised
+to go to Vincennes himself in a short time. Governor Harrison did not
+know just what to expect from the proposed visit, but he remembered
+Pontiac's attempt to capture Detroit by surprise and he prepared to give
+his guest a warlike reception if need be.
+
+Late in July the chief arrived, attended by about three hundred Indians.
+A council was held which the Governor opened by recounting the injuries
+the white men had suffered at the hands of the Indians, and by again
+making the charge that the Indians were preparing for war. Tecumseh
+replied with a counter enumeration of injuries, and said again that the
+Indians would never give up the land in dispute, but that it was his
+wish and hope that the matter could be settled peaceably. He said that
+he was trying to build up a strong nation of red men, after the model of
+the Seventeen Fires, and that he was on his way to visit the southern
+tribes to invite them to join his league. He assured Governor Harrison
+that he had given the strictest orders that the northern Indians should
+remain at peace during his absence, and that as soon as he returned he
+would go to Washington to settle the land question.
+
+[Illustration: TECUMSEH INCITING THE CREEKS]
+
+Tecumseh then hastened to the South, where he worked to good effect
+among the Creeks and Seminoles, persuading them to join his confederacy.
+It is said that where he could not persuade he threatened. One story
+illustrating his manner of dealing with those that resisted him is as
+follows: Visiting a tribe which listened coldly to his words and seemed
+unwilling to take part in his plans he suddenly lost all patience. With
+fierce gestures and a terrible look he shouted: "You do not think what I
+say is true. You do not believe this is the wish of the Great Spirit. I
+will show you. When I reach Detroit I will stamp my foot on the earth
+and the earth will tremble and shake your houses down about your ears."
+The tale goes on to say that after due time had elapsed for Tecumseh to
+reach Detroit an earthquake shook down all the dwellings of the village
+he had left in anger. Whether this is true or not, Tecumseh certainly
+had wonderful influence over all tribes. Governor Harrison wrote to the
+Secretary of War about him: "If it were not for the vicinity of the
+United States, he would perhaps be the founder of an empire that would
+rival in glory Mexico or Peru. No difficulties deter him. For four years
+he has been in constant motion. You see him to-day on the Wabash, and in
+a short time hear of him on the shores of Lake Erie or Michigan, or on
+the banks of the Mississippi; and wherever he goes he makes an
+impression favorable to his purpose. He is now upon the last round to
+put a finishing stroke to his work. I hope, however, before his return
+that that part of the work which he considered complete will be
+demolished, and even its foundation rooted up."
+
+In the meantime Tecumseh trusted Governor Harrison with child-like
+simplicity. It seems not to have occurred to him that the Governor would
+not remain inactive until he had completed his arrangements and opened
+the war. Indeed, there were those at Washington who also thought this
+was what Harrison would and ought to do; that is, keep on the defensive
+until the Indians made some outbreak.
+
+This was not the feeling on the frontier, however. The frontiersmen were
+in no humor to sit still and wait for the Indians to scalp them at their
+plows or burn them in their beds. Their cry was, "On to Tippecanoe!"
+
+This spirit was in accord with the Governor's inclination. A man of
+action, and bred to military life, Harrison favored prompt, vigorous
+measures. He believed this a favorable time for an attack on the
+Prophet's town. Tecumseh was well out of the way, and had left orders
+for the tribes to remain at peace during his absence. As many would
+hesitate to disobey his command, there would be no united resistance.
+Besides, the Prophet had been left in charge, and a victory over him
+would destroy the Indians' faith in his supernatural power. This faith
+Harrison had come to regard as the backbone of the Indian alliance.
+Moreover, the British were not in a position to give the Indians open
+assistance and they would learn from a few battles fought without their
+aid how little trust was to be put in British promises.
+
+For these reasons, Harrison wrote to the War Department urging immediate
+action and asking for troops and authority to march against Tippecanoe.
+The troops were granted, but with the instruction that President
+Madison wished peace with the Indians preserved if possible.
+
+
+
+
+X. THE BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE
+
+
+In August, in the year 1811, Governor Harrison sent stern "speeches" to
+the Indian tribes, threatening them with punishment if they did not
+cease their preparations for war and comply with his demands.
+
+On September the twenty-fifth the Prophet's reply arrived at Vincennes.
+He gave repeated assurances that the Indians had no intention of making
+war on the settlers, and he promised to comply with whatever demands the
+Governor might make. To this message Harrison sent no answer.
+
+The Governor was now ready for action. He had a force of about a
+thousand fighting men. The militia were reinforced by three hundred
+regulars, and one hundred and thirty mounted men, under a brave
+Kentuckian, J. H. Daveiss, who wanted a share in the glory of an
+encounter with the Indians. Later two companies of mounted riflemen were
+added to this force. Harrison sent a detachment of men up the river to
+build a fort on the new land. By this act he took formal possession of
+it.
+
+He felt his hands tied by the President's instructions to avoid war with
+the Indians if possible, and awaited developments with impatience. He
+expected the Indians to oppose in some way the building of the
+fort--and his expectations were at length realized. One of the
+sentinels who kept guard while the soldiers worked on the fort was shot
+and severely wounded. Harrison thought this might be regarded as the
+opening of hostilities, and determined to march upon the Prophet's town.
+A letter from the War Department received at about this time left him
+free to carry out his plans.
+
+It was late in October before the new fort, named Fort Harrison in honor
+of the Governor, was finished, and the force ready to leave. Then
+Harrison sent messengers to the Prophet demanding that the Indians
+should return stolen horses to their owners, and surrender Indians who
+had murdered white men. He also demanded that the Winnebagoes,
+Pottawottomies and Kickapoos who were at Tippecanoe should return to
+their tribes. Without waiting for a reply or appointing a time or place
+where the Prophet's answer might find him, Harrison began his march on
+Tippecanoe. Through the disputed land the armed forces marched; on, on,
+into the undisputed territory of the Indians.
+
+Still they met with no opposition. Not an Indian was seen until November
+the sixth, when the troops were within eleven miles of Tippecanoe. And
+although many of them were seen from that time on, they could not be
+tempted to any greater indiscretion than the making of threatening signs
+in response to the provoking remarks of the interpreters. When within
+two miles of Tippecanoe, Harrison found himself and his army in a
+dangerous pass that offered the Indians a most inviting chance for an
+ambush. But he was not molested.
+
+When the troops were safe in the open country once more, Harrison held a
+conference with his officers. All were eager to advance at once and
+attack the town. They held that if there was any question about the
+right or the necessity of an attack it should have been decided before
+they started; now that they had arrived at the stronghold of the Indians
+there was only one safe course, and that was immediate attack.
+
+Perhaps the circumstances of the march had persuaded Harrison of the
+sincerity of the Indians' plan for peace, and he felt that after all the
+affair might be settled without bloodshed. At any rate, he was most
+reluctant to comply with the wishes of his aids. But at last yielding to
+their urgency he gave the order to advance and storm the town. Scarcely
+had he done so, however, before he was turned from his purpose by the
+arrival of messengers from the Prophet begging that the difficulties be
+settled without a battle. Harrison sent back word that he had no
+intention of making an attack unless the Prophet refused to concede to
+his demands. He consented to suspend hostilities for the night and give
+Tenskwatawa a hearing in the morning.
+
+Greatly against the will of his officers, who had no faith in the
+Indians' professions of friendliness and saw that every hour of delay
+might be put to good use by the Prophet, Harrison encamped for the
+night. He seems to have had little fear of an attack, as he did not
+even fortify his camp with intrenchments. But his men slept on their
+arms that night, and, although no sound from the Indian village
+disturbed the stillness, there was a general feeling of restlessness.
+
+Between four and five in the morning, in the dark that comes before the
+dawn, a sentinel's shot followed by the Indian yell brought every man to
+his feet. As the soldiers stood in the light of the camp fires, peering
+into the blackness with cocked muskets, they were shot down by savages,
+who rushed upon them with such force that they broke the line of guards
+and made an entrance into the camp. Had the number of assailants been
+greater, or had Harrison been less alert, they would doubtless have
+created a panic. But Harrison was already up and on the point of rousing
+his soldiers when the alarm sounded. With perfect self-possession he
+rode about where bullets were flying thickest, giving orders and
+encouraging his men.
+
+The brave Daveiss, having gained Harrison's consent, recklessly plunged
+with only a few followers into a thicket to dislodge some Indians who
+were firing upon the troops at close range. He was soon surrounded and
+shot down.
+
+The Indians fought with great persistence and kept up the attack for two
+hours, during which the troops held their ground with admirable
+firmness. As day dawned the Indians gradually withdrew.
+
+Harrison's situation was perilous. Counting killed and wounded he had
+already lost one hundred and fifty fighting men. The Indians might
+return at any moment in larger numbers to attack his exhausted force.
+Provisions were low and it was cold and raining. The men stood at their
+posts through the day without food or fire. All day and all night the
+soldiers kept watch. The second day, the horsemen cautiously advanced to
+the town. To their relief they found it empty. The Indians had evidently
+fled in haste, leaving behind large stores of provisions. Harrison's
+troops helped themselves to what they wanted, burned the deserted town,
+and returned to Vincennes with rapid marches.
+
+[Illustration: BATTLE OF TIPPECANOE]
+
+As a result of the battle of Tippecanoe, Harrison was the hero of the
+hour. News of the destruction of the Prophet's town carried cheer into
+every white man's cabin on the frontier.
+
+
+
+
+XI. REORGANIZATION OF THE INDIANS
+
+
+Of the six hundred Indians that Harrison estimated had taken part in the
+battle of Tippecanoe, thirty-eight were found dead on the field. Though
+that was not a large number from a white man's point of view, the
+Indians regarded the loss of thirty-eight of their warriors as no light
+matter.
+
+But that was not the heaviest blow to the confederation that Tecumseh
+and the Prophet had worked so hard to establish. Tippecanoe had been
+regarded with superstitious veneration as the Prophet's town, a sort of
+holy city, under the special protection of the Great Spirit. The
+destruction of the town, therefore, seriously affected the reputation of
+the Prophet.
+
+It is hard to tell what part the Prophet played in the attack on
+Governor Harrison's forces. In their anxiety to escape punishment from
+the United States government many Indians who were known to have taken
+part in the battle excused their conduct by saying they had acted in
+obedience to the Prophet's directions. They told strange stories of his
+urging them to battle with promises that the Great Spirit would protect
+them from the bullets of the enemy.
+
+On the other hand, the Prophet said the young men who would not listen
+to his commands were to blame for the trouble.
+
+The fact that the Indians did not follow up their advantage over
+Harrison, and instead of renewing the attack with their full force,
+fled from him, would indicate that there certainly was a large party in
+favor of peace. It seems probable that that party was made up of the
+Prophet and his most faithful followers, rather than of those Indians
+who, while pretending to be the friends of the United States and
+accusing the Prophet, admitted that they had done the fighting.
+Tenskwatawa had had advice from the British, and strict orders from
+Tecumseh to remain at peace, and he had shown in many ways his anxiety
+to appease Harrison and keep the Indians from doing violence. For some
+time the influence of Tenskwatawa and Tecumseh had been more to restrain
+and direct than to excite the anger of the Indians which had been
+kindled by the treaty of 1809, and was ready to break out at any
+instant. It is hard, too, to believe that young warriors who had never
+been trained to act on the defensive could be constrained to wait until
+they were attacked, and so lose the advantage to be gained by surprising
+the enemy, or that they could be made to withdraw without striking a
+blow.
+
+But however blameless the Prophet may have been, he suffered for a time,
+as Harrison had supposed he would. He was the scapegoat on whom all
+placed the responsibility for the battle of Tippecanoe. Even Tecumseh is
+said to have rebuked him bitterly for not holding the young men in
+check.
+
+That Tecumseh disapproved of the affair is evident from the answer he
+sent the British, who advised him to avoid further encounters with the
+Americans:
+
+"You tell us to retreat or turn to one side should the Big Knives come
+against us. Had I been at home in the late unfortunate affair I should
+have done so; but those I left at home were--I cannot call them men--a
+poor set of people, and their scuffle with the Big Knives I compared to
+a struggle between little children who only scratch each other's faces."
+
+[Illustration: INDIANS THREATENING "THE PROPHET"]
+
+In the spring, Tecumseh presented himself at Vincennes saying that he
+was now ready to go to Washington to visit the President. The Governor,
+however, gave him a cold welcome, telling him that if he went he must go
+alone. Tecumseh's pride was hurt and he refused to go unless he could
+travel in a style suited to the dignity of a great chief, the leader of
+the red men.
+
+Harrison soon learned that the brothers were again at Tippecanoe, with
+their loyal followers, rebuilding the village and strengthening their
+forces.
+
+In April, 1812, a succession of horrible murders on the frontier alarmed
+the settlers. A general uprising of the Indians was expected daily. The
+militiamen refused to leave their families unprotected. The Governor was
+unable to secure the protection of the United States troops. Panic
+spread along the border; whole districts were unpeopled. Men, women, and
+children hastened to the forts or even to Kentucky for safety. There was
+fear that Vincennes would be overpowered.
+
+Had the Indians chosen this time to strike, they could have done
+terrible mischief. But Tecumseh's voice was still for peace. At a
+council held in May, he said:
+
+"Governor Harrison made war on my people in my absence; it was the will
+of God that he should do so. We hope it will please the Great Spirit
+that the white people may let us live in peace. We will not disturb
+them, neither have we done it, except when they come to our village with
+the intention of destroying us. We are happy to state to our brothers
+present that the unfortunate transaction that took place between the
+white people and a few of our young men at our village, has been settled
+between us and Governor Harrison; and I will further state that had I
+been at home there would have been no bloodshed at that time.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"It is true, we have endeavored to give all our brothers good advice,
+and if they have not listened to it we are sorry for it. We defy a
+living creature to say we ever advised any one, directly or indirectly,
+to make war on our white brothers. It has constantly been our misfortune
+to have our view misrepresented to our white brothers. This has been
+done by the Pottawottomies and others who sell to the white people land
+that does not belong to them."
+
+
+
+
+XII. TECUMSEH AND THE BRITISH
+
+
+Greatly as Tecumseh wished the Indians to remain at peace with the
+citizens of the United States, he saw that it was impossible for them to
+do so unless they were willing to give up their lands. The British,
+meanwhile, promised to regain for the Indians all the land north of the
+Ohio River and east of the Alleghany Mountains. They roused in the heart
+of Tecumseh the hope that the old boundaries between the territory of
+the Indians and the territory of the white man would be reestablished.
+When war broke out in 1812, between Great Britain and the United States,
+Tecumseh joined the British at Malden. In making this alliance he was
+not influenced by any kindly feeling toward the British. He simply did
+what seemed to him for the best interests of the Indians.
+
+At the outset, fortune favored the British flag. Fort Mackinac, in
+northern Michigan, fell into the hands of a force of British and
+Indians. Detroit was surrendered to General Brock without resistance.
+Fort Dearborn, at Chicago, was burned and its garrison was massacred by
+the Indians. The English seemed in a fair way to fulfill their promise
+of driving the American settlers from the Northwest. Fort Harrison and
+Fort Wayne were the only strongholds of importance left to guard the
+frontier. These forts Tecumseh planned to take by stratagem.
+
+[Illustration: FORT DETROIT IN 1812]
+
+The victories of the British won to their side the tribes that had
+hesitated, and hundreds of warriors flocked to the standard of Tecumseh.
+He became an important and conspicuous figure in the war. His bravery,
+his knowledge of the country, and his large following made it possible
+for him to give his allies invaluable aid. Without Tecumseh and his
+Indians the British war in the West would have been a slight affair.
+
+The Americans fitted out a large military force to retake Detroit, and
+overthrow the Indians who threatened the settlements. General Harrison
+was put in command of the expedition. He set out with his army in grand
+array, but was unable to reach Detroit because of the swampy condition
+of the land over which he must march. He was forced to camp on the
+Maumee River. His advance into the territory of the Indians thwarted the
+enterprise that Tecumseh had set on foot against Fort Wayne.
+
+While Harrison was encamped at Fort Meigs there were several encounters
+between the hostile forces. A division of Harrison's army, under General
+Winchester, having allowed itself to become separated from the main
+army, was attacked on the River Raisin by a party of British and
+Indians. After a fierce struggle the remnant of General Winchester's
+force surrendered to the British. In the absence of Tecumseh many of the
+prisoners were cruelly massacred by the Indian victors.
+
+Major Richardson's description of General Winchester's men gives us a
+good idea of the hardihood of the frontier soldiers, and shows us how
+they came to be called "Long Knives" by the Indians:
+
+"It was the depth of winter; but scarcely an individual was in
+possession of a great coat or cloak, and few of them wore garments of
+wool of any description. They still retained their summer dress,
+consisting of cotton stuff of various colors shaped into frocks, and
+descending to the knee. Their trousers were of the same material. They
+were covered with slouched hats, worn bare by constant use, beneath
+which their long hair fell matted and uncombed over their cheeks; and
+these, together with the dirty blankets wrapped round their loins to
+protect them against the inclemency of the season, and fastened by broad
+leathern belts, into which were thrust axes and knives of an enormous
+length, gave them an air of wildness and savageness."
+
+[Illustration: ONE OF THE "LONG KNIVES"]
+
+Later, General Proctor, who had succeeded General Brock in command of
+the British forces at Detroit, laid siege to Fort Meigs. Tecumseh, who
+took part in the siege, was anxious to meet the enemy in open country.
+He sent the following unceremonious challenge to his old acquaintance:
+
+     "General Harrison: I have with me eight hundred braves. You have
+     an equal number in your hiding place. Come out with them and give
+     me battle. You talked like a brave when we met at Vincennes, and I
+     respected you; but now you hide behind logs and in the earth, like
+     a ground-hog. Give me answer.
+
+     TECUMSEH."
+
+When Harrison did venture to send out a detachment it was beaten by the
+Indians, and many of the Americans were made prisoners. For all the
+effort General Proctor made to prevent it, a terrible massacre might
+have followed this victory. Just as the Indians had begun to murder the
+prisoners, Tecumseh rode upon the scene of slaughter. When he saw what
+was going on he exclaimed in a passion of regret and indignation, "Oh,
+what will become of my Indians!" He rushed into the midst of the
+savages, rescued the man they were beginning to torture, and, with
+uplifted tomahawk, dared the whole horde to touch another prisoner. They
+cowered before him, deeply ashamed of their conduct.
+
+On discovering that General Proctor was present, Tecumseh demanded
+impatiently why he had not interfered to prevent the massacre. General
+Proctor answered that Tecumseh's Indians could not be controlled. To
+this Tecumseh responded with scorn: "Say, rather, you are unable to
+command. Go put on petticoats."
+
+In September, 1813, Commodore Perry's splendid victories on Lake Erie
+gave to the Americans control of the Lakes, and this made it impossible
+for the British to hold Detroit and Malden. Harrison was advancing with
+a land force to take these towns and General Proctor was eager to get
+out of his way. He began to prepare for retreat, but tried to conceal
+his purpose from Tecumseh. The latter's suspicions were aroused,
+however, and he demanded a council, in which he made his last formal
+speech. He spoke boldly and bitterly against General Proctor's course.
+He said:
+
+"You always told us you would never draw your foot off British ground;
+but now, father, we see that you are drawing back, and we are sorry to
+see our father doing so without seeing the enemy. We must compare our
+father's conduct to a fat dog that carries its tail on its back, but
+when affrighted it drops it between its legs and runs off. Father,
+listen! The Americans have not yet defeated us by land; neither are we
+sure they have done so by water; we therefore wish to remain here and
+fight our enemy, should they make their appearance. If they defeat us we
+will retreat with our father. * * * We now see our British father
+preparing to march out of his stronghold. Father, you have the arms and
+ammunition which our great father sent to his red children. If you have
+an idea of going away, give them to us and you may go and welcome. For
+us, our lives are in the hands of the Great Spirit. We are determined to
+defend our lands, and if it be His will, we wish to leave our bones upon
+them."
+
+Notwithstanding the wish of Tecumseh, General Proctor kept his purpose
+to retreat. He promised, however, that if they were pursued by the
+Americans he would turn at the first favorable site and give them
+battle. Accordingly, Tecumseh accompanied the retreating General. He
+repeatedly urged Proctor to keep his promise and face the enemy. On the
+fifth of October, Proctor learned that the American forces were at his
+heels. Valor, therefore, seemed the better part of discretion, and,
+choosing a ridge between the Thames River and a swamp, he arranged his
+forces for battle.
+
+Colonel Richard M. Johnson managed the charge of the Americans. One
+division of his regiment, under command of his brother, attacked and
+quickly routed the British regulars under General Proctor. The other
+division he himself led against Tecumseh's Indians.
+
+The Indians waited under protection of the thick brush until the
+horsemen were within close range; then in response to Tecumseh's war cry
+all fired. Johnson's advance guard was nearly cut down. The horses could
+not advance. Johnson ordered his men to dismount and a terrible struggle
+followed. Soon Tecumseh was shot, and, the Indians missing him, gave up
+the battle and fled. One of them afterwards described the defeat in a
+few words: "Tecumseh fell and we all ran."
+
+The war was now ended in the Northwest. The Americans had regained the
+posts taken by the British; they had subdued the Indians, and gained
+possession of the lands in the Wabash Valley. The power of the Prophet
+was destroyed. Tecumseh was dead. The Long Knives had crushed forever
+the Confederacy of Tecumseh, but it had taken upward of five million
+dollars and an army of twenty thousand men to do it.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+BY FRANCES M. PERRY
+
+
+THE STORY OF OSCEOLA
+
+
+
+
+I. THE EXODUS OF THE RED STICKS
+
+
+The sun was low in the west and sent long shafts of light across the
+tops of the trees that bordered a quiet, shining lake in northern
+Florida. It shone upon a company of Indians who were straggling along
+the shore, and made their bright turbans and many colored calicoes look
+gay in spite of dirt and tatters.
+
+The company was a large one. In it were not only braves, but also squaws
+and pappooses, and a few negroes. They trooped along with the unhurried
+swiftness and easy disarray of men and women who have journeyed for many
+days and have many days of travel still before them.
+
+Here and there a strapping brave bestrode a horse, while his squaw
+trudged beside him, sharing with a black slave the burden of household
+goods. But for the most part ceremony had given way to necessity and the
+warriors went afoot, leaving the horses and mules to carry the old men,
+aged squaws, and young children, who were too feeble to walk.
+
+This was a band of Red Stick Indians who had left forever the camping
+grounds of their fathers on the Chattahoochee River, to escape the
+oppression of their powerful kinsmen, the Creek Indians. They had
+rebelled against the rule of the Creeks, because the Creeks refused them
+their share of plunder in battle, and laid claim to their lands and
+their slaves. The Red Sticks hated the Creeks so bitterly that they
+could no longer live near them. They were resolved to leave altogether
+the territory that the United States government recognized as belonging
+to the Creeks, and seek homes with the Seminoles or runaways in Florida.
+
+[Illustration: CREEK INDIANS]
+
+The Red Sticks had left the Creek country far behind them, and had
+arrived, as we have seen, in northern Florida. The land into which they
+had come was uncultivated, wild, and sweet. The lakes and rivers were
+full of fish; the forests were full of game; fruits and berries grew in
+abundance. Everything seemed to invite the wanderers to tarry there and
+build themselves homes. Still they marched on over rich brown fields,
+past dancing lakes and streams, over fertile hillsides shaded with live
+oak and magnolia. No spot, however beautiful, could induce them to pause
+for more than a few days' rest. Their object was not to find a pleasant
+camping ground but to escape the hated Creeks. They were bound for a
+distant swamp. On the borders of the Okefinokee marsh they planned to
+make their homes. There they would be reasonably safe from the enemy,
+and even if the Creeks should follow them there, the swamp would afford
+them a secure retreat.
+
+But this goal was still many miles away, and the fugitives were now
+pressing toward a little hill, where they expected to make a short halt.
+
+The young men were silent but alert. Now and again one raised his bow
+and brought down a goose or a wild turkey, and some youngster plunged
+into the thicket to find it and fetch it to his mother. Here and there
+were groups of women burdened with kettles and pans and bundles of old
+clothes, or carrying small children and raising a great clamor of
+chatter and laughter.
+
+A little apart from the main company a tall and handsome Indian woman
+plodded silently along by herself. The splendor of her kerchief had been
+faded by sun and rain; her skirts were torn by briers, but the necklace
+of silver beads wound many times about her throat retained its glory. On
+one hip rested a huge basket, packed and corded. Astride the other rode
+a sturdy-limbed boy of about four years of age. Nearly all day the child
+had run by her side without complaint. But toward evening he had begun
+to lag behind, until at last, when, after a good run, he caught up with
+his mother, he clutched her skirts to help himself along. Then she had
+stooped and picked him up with a sort of fierce tenderness and in a
+moment he had fallen asleep.
+
+Soon the Indians reached the hilltop where they were to camp for a few
+days. Their preparations for the night's rest consisted chiefly in
+building camp fires; for, though the days were warm, the nights were
+chilly. Besides, fires were needed to cook food and to keep the wild
+beasts away during the darkness. A small fire of light brush was made
+first. Then several large logs were placed about it, each with one end
+in the flame, so that they looked like the spokes of a great wheel
+radiating from a center of fire. As the ends of the logs burned away,
+the fiery ring at the center grew wider and dimmer. When a hotter fire
+was wanted, the logs were pushed toward the center till the glowing ends
+came together once more and burned briskly.
+
+On the morning after the Red Sticks went into camp on the hill, while
+others lounged and talked together, the woman wearing the necklace of
+silver beads still kept apart. She sat on the unburned end of a fire log
+and for a time paid no heed to the question her small son had repeated
+many times. At last she looked up and said: "Do not ask again about the
+baby with the blue eyes. Do not think of her. She does not cry for you.
+She plays with little Creek pappooses. She is not your sister any more.
+Go, play at shooting turkeys with black Jim. He loves you like a
+brother."
+
+The woman was the daughter of a chief. She had married a man of her own
+tribe, but after he fell in battle she married a Scotch trader, named
+Powell, who lived among the Creeks. When the time came for the flight of
+the Red Sticks her heart turned to her people. She enjoyed too much the
+glory of being a trader's wife to give up her position and her home
+without much bitterness. But she was too true an Indian to desert her
+tribe. As her husband had no notion of leaving his trading station among
+the Creeks, she had left him and her blue-eyed baby and had come with
+her kindred, bringing with her her little son, a true Indian, the child
+of her first husband.
+
+The boy played at shooting wild turkeys with black Jim that day, and
+many times afterward. As time passed he thought less and less of the
+blue-eyed sister and more and more of his comrade with a black skin.
+
+
+
+
+II. THE FLORIDA HOME
+
+
+These Red Sticks were not the first wanderers who had sought homes and
+safety in Florida. For some fifty years bands of Indians enticed by the
+rich hunting grounds, or driven by the persecutions of the Creeks, had
+left their kindred in Georgia and Alabama to try their fortunes in
+Florida.
+
+They had found other tribes in possession of the peninsula, but the
+newcomers were more warlike and soon made themselves and their claim to
+the land respected by the natives. Indeed, the immigrants soon came to
+be looked upon as the ruling people. They were called Seminoles, which
+means runaways.
+
+The Seminoles would not attend Creek councils. They refused to be bound
+by treaties made by the Creeks. In all ways they wished to be considered
+a separate and distinct people.
+
+[Illustration: SEMINOLE INDIANS]
+
+Among the Florida Indians there lived a people of another race, the
+Maroons or free negroes. In those days Florida was owned by Spain.
+Therefore, American slaves once safely within its borders were free men.
+They became Spanish subjects and their former masters had no power to
+reclaim them. Florida formed a convenient refuge, and slaves were sure
+of welcome there, especially if they were willing to exchange a white
+master for a red one. Most negroes were glad to do this, for the slaves
+of the Indians were happy, independent slaves. Their chief duty to their
+masters was to raise for them a few bushels of corn each year. Though
+the Indians in general regarded themselves as superior to the negroes,
+the two races of exiles felt strong sympathy and affection for each
+other. They lived in the same manner, observing common customs. They
+fought together against a common enemy. They even intermarried.
+
+But the country was extensive and only thinly settled; and so,
+notwithstanding the frequent increase of their force by Indians and
+negroes, warriors were still more valuable than land in the eyes of the
+Seminoles. The tribe of Red Sticks that went to Florida in 1808 was
+received with great friendliness.
+
+The Indian woman with the silver beads soon married another brave, and
+went to live on a "hammock" near Fort King, not far from the place where
+Ocala now stands. She took with her her son. He was called Powell by
+some who remembered his stepfather, the trader. But his mother called
+him Osceola, which means the rising sun. Osceola grew up loving Florida
+as his home. And, indeed, it was a home that any Indian might have
+loved.
+
+The climate was healthful for the Indians, and so warm and pleasant that
+clothing was a matter of small concern. The soil was rich, and corn and
+koontee were to be had in abundance. The forests were full of deer and
+small game.
+
+A few skins thrown over some poles afforded sufficient protection for
+ordinary weather. But if rains made a more substantial dwelling
+necessary the palmetto furnished material for posts, elevated floor, and
+thatched roof.
+
+Not least among the advantages of the Florida home were its wonderful
+waterways leading off through dense mysterious forests, where strange
+birds called and strange plants grew--a labyrinth full of danger for the
+intruder, but a safe and joyous retreat for the Seminole floating on the
+dark water in his dugout.
+
+Though the Indians could have lived comfortably in this country without
+much effort, the Seminoles did not choose to live in idleness. They saw
+the flourishing farms of the Spanish settlers and wished to have farms
+of their own.
+
+So it happened that when Osceola was a boy he saw the Indians around him
+make the beginnings of what they believed would be permanent homes. He
+saw them cultivate the soil and tend their herds of cattle and horses
+and hogs. He watched them build their dwellings and
+storehouses--palmetto lodges without walls for themselves, substantial
+log cribs for their corn and potatoes.
+
+When a child, he imitated not only the warriors and hunters, but made
+cornfields of sand with tall grass spears for cornstalks, and built
+"camps" and corncribs out of little sticks.
+
+[Illustration: FISHING WITH A SPEAR]
+
+As he grew older he often hoed the corn and ground the koontee and drove
+the cattle. He did cheerfully the work of a farmer, though he liked best
+to hunt and fish and explore. He had a strong boat made by burning out
+the heart of a large cypress log. In this he often glided swiftly and
+noiselessly down some stream where the salmon trout lived. He held in
+his right hand a tough spear, made of a charred reed with a barbed end.
+When he saw a fish almost as large as himself close at hand he hurled
+his harpoon at it with all his force. And the fish darted off, leaving a
+trail of crimson in the clear water and dragging the boat behind it; for
+the boy clung to the end of the spear and soused the wounded fish in the
+water until its strength was exhausted. Then with the help of a friend
+he dragged it into the boat, and began to watch for another fish.
+
+Osceola was so energetic that he enjoyed work for its own sake. He had
+unusual endurance, and could keep at work or play long after others were
+tired. He was a famous ball player, and distinguished himself at the
+green corn dances. There he drank without flinching such large draughts
+of the bitter "black drink" that he was nick-named by some "Asseola,"
+which means "black drink."
+
+Once when acting as a guide for a party of Spanish horsemen he asked
+them why they rode so slowly. They told him that as he was unmounted
+they traveled easily to accommodate him. He laughed and replied that
+they might go as fast as they liked, they would hear no complaint from
+him. At this they spurred their horses to a livelier pace. Then seeing
+that Osceola still seemed to be making little effort they rode faster
+and faster to test his swiftness and strength. They were soon convinced
+that the young Indian had made no idle boast, and rode the entire day as
+if all the members of the party had had horses. When they reached the
+end of their journey Osceola seemed less tired than the horsemen.
+
+Osceola was not only active and enduring. He was also generous and
+helpful. His bright face, his frank manner, and true kindness made him a
+great favorite with all who knew him, Indians, negroes, or white men.
+
+
+
+
+III. THE FIRST SEMINOLE WAR
+
+
+When Osceola was a light-hearted boy of twelve, with kind impulses
+toward every one, something happened to rouse in him a bitter hatred, a
+thirst for blood.
+
+During the War of 1812 large numbers of negroes in the South took
+advantage of the general excitement to make good their escape from
+bondage. The Indians welcomed them and shielded them from bands of slave
+hunters that made sallies into the Spanish territory for the purpose of
+recapturing them. In this the Indians were aided by the British, who saw
+an opportunity to make trouble for the republic on its southern border,
+while the United States troops were occupied on the Canadian frontier. A
+British agent built a strong fort on Spanish soil on the Appalachicola
+River. After the close of the war the British withdrew and left the
+fort, well filled with ammunition, in the hands of the Indians and
+negroes.
+
+The Seminoles and their negro friends rejoiced over this. They could not
+foresee the doom that this fort was to bring upon them.
+
+For many years the Southern people had complained bitterly against the
+Seminole Indians for "stealing," as they said, their slaves. The
+"stealing" consisted in receiving and protecting runaways. The feeling
+against the Indians was so strong that expeditions into Spanish
+territory had been made by people on the frontier to capture slaves and
+punish the Seminoles. But this fort would now be a hindrance to such
+forays, and the slaveholders demanded that it should be destroyed.
+They were so persistent in their demands that General Andrew Jackson
+gave General Gaines directions to invade Spanish territory with United
+States troops to blow up the fort and return the "stolen negroes" to
+their rightful owners.
+
+For miles up and down the Appalachicola River the land along the banks
+was cultivated and divided into small farms, where Indians and negroes
+lived. When these farmers learned of the approach of the enemy they fled
+with their wives and children to the fort for protection. Over three
+hundred men, women, and children crowded into the fort, feeling sure of
+safety. But when the troops attacked them by land and water, and the
+cannon roared about the walls of the fort, they were panic-stricken. The
+women and children shrieked and wrung their hands. The men did not know
+what to do; they rent the air with fearful yells, but made little
+attempt at resistance. What would they not have given to exchange the
+fort walls for an open boat and the endless waterways of the forest?
+
+They were not left long to fear and regret. The enemy promptly
+accomplished its purpose. A redhot ball reached the powder magazine of
+the fort. A terrible explosion followed, destroying the fort and
+bringing instant death to two hundred and seventy of its inmates.
+
+The story of the horrible death, of the mutilated bodies of the injured
+men carried off on the boats of the white men, spread all over Florida.
+At every camp fire the tale was told, and all the old savage thirst for
+vengeance was stirred in the hearts of men who had begun to care for
+crops and herds and to dream of days of peace.
+
+The Indians knew that peace with the white man was best for them. But
+Indian blood had been shed and peace was impossible. Preparations began
+at once for what was afterward known in history as the First Seminole
+War. The Indians bought arms and powder from Spanish and British
+traders. They practised shooting. They explored the country for safe
+retreats and excellent ambushes. They raised their crops and harvested
+them. A year passed before the first stroke of vengeance fell.
+
+A boat carrying supplies to Fort Scott was surprised by Indians, and its
+crew, passengers, and military escort were overpowered and killed. The
+War Department had been expecting some hostile act on the part of the
+Seminoles, and was ready for war. The massacre in the vicinity of Fort
+Scott is usually regarded as the cause of the war of 1818, though it was
+not without its cause, as has been shown.
+
+General Jackson promptly invaded Florida with a strong force of United
+States troops and Creek Indians, to punish the Seminoles. He was met by
+a motley crowd of Indians and negroes. Even children joined their
+fathers to resist the approach of the whites and Creeks. Though they did
+not present an imposing appearance, the Florida Indians and their allies
+proved to be desperate fighters.
+
+[Illustration: ANDREW JACKSON]
+
+General Jackson first moved against the settlements on the
+Appalachicola. The Indians and negroes made a stand and fought a battle,
+but were obliged to retreat. Jackson then secured the provisions the
+Indians had stored there, burned the villages and pushed on to St. Marks
+and then to the valley of the Suwanee.
+
+On this march he was much troubled by Indians who hung along his path,
+making frequent swift attacks and then vanishing in the wilderness. At
+Old Town a battle was fought in which the Maroons gave the Indians brave
+assistance. Here again the forces of Jackson were victorious. After
+suffering heavy losses, the Indians and their allies retreated. They
+were pursued by a detachment of Jackson's men and driven far to the
+south.
+
+The Indians had taken the precaution to move the negro women and
+children out of reach of the American army, fearing that they would be
+captured and carried back into slavery, but they had been less careful
+to conceal their own squaws and pappooses, and Jackson made hundreds of
+them captives.
+
+The battle of Old Town closed the war. Jackson, feeling that the Indians
+had been thoroughly beaten, withdrew from Florida, leaving fire and
+desolation in his track.
+
+The boy Osceola, strong and straight, and with the spirit of an eagle,
+had played a man's part in the war. He combined with the reckless
+courage of youth a determination that made him capable of good service
+in Indian warfare. He was a good scout and an unexcelled messenger.
+Swift and light, and sure as the arrow he shot from his bow, he had
+carried signals from chief to chief, he had crept as a spy past the
+pickets of the enemy, he had acted as runner and guide, taking women and
+children from exposed villages to the secret recesses of the forest. Nor
+had his youth exempted him from doing the more deadly work of war.
+
+The Seminoles had lost heavily in the war, but as a nation they had
+gained some things of great value. The hardships they had suffered
+together gave the various tribes a stronger feeling of fellowship than
+they had had before. Black men had fought shoulder to shoulder with red,
+and would henceforth be less their inferiors and more their friends.
+
+
+
+
+IV. GRIEVANCES
+
+
+Not many days passed after General Jackson withdrew his army from
+Florida before the Seminoles were again established on the fertile lands
+from which they had been driven. They brought with them their flocks and
+herds. Before long their simple dwellings were re-built and the Seminole
+villages seemed as prosperous as ever.
+
+The slaveholders of the South felt that Florida was still a dangerous
+neighbor. They saw that to mend matters it was necessary that Florida
+should be made a part of the United States in order that the government
+should have authority over the Seminoles. So, in the year 1821, through
+the influence of Southern statesmen the territory of Florida was
+purchased from Spain for five million dollars.
+
+Now that the people of the United States owned Florida they wished to
+occupy the land, but the Seminoles claimed it. Many were unwilling to
+recognize the justice of this claim, however; for it was held that as
+the Indians were not native tribes but were Creeks they should be
+compelled to go back to Georgia and live with their kindred.
+
+This proposal gave the Indians great alarm. They expected momentarily
+that an attempt would be made to expel them from their homes. By
+spreading a report that Jackson was coming to seize their property and
+drive them back to live with the Creeks, bands of lawless men created
+such a panic among the Indians that they fled into the forests and
+swamps, leaving their provisions and property for the plunderers to
+carry off.
+
+Border troubles increased until action could not be postponed longer. A
+council was called at Camp Moultrie in 1823, where a treaty was made
+between the United States government and the Seminole Indians.
+
+By the terms of this treaty the Indians were to give up all their land
+north of the Withlacoochee River, except a few tracts reserved for
+chiefs. They were bound to stay within the limits of the lands assigned
+them, and if found in the northern part of the territory without
+passports were to suffer thirty-nine stripes on the bare back, and give
+up their firearms. They were also pledged to assist in recapturing
+fugitive slaves, who in the future should seek refuge among them.
+
+In return for what they had given up the Seminoles were to receive from
+the United States at once, provisions for one year and six thousand
+dollars worth of cattle and hogs; and for twenty years thereafter, an
+annuity of five thousand dollars was to be paid to them. They were also
+assured that their rights would be protected. The United States promised
+"to take the Florida Indians under their care and patronage, and afford
+them protection against all persons whatsoever," and to "restrain and
+prevent all white persons from hunting, settling, or otherwise
+intruding, upon said lands."
+
+The effects of this treaty were neither beneficial nor lasting. The
+Indians were moved from their homes to the southern part of the
+peninsula, where the land was poor. While they had once been happy and
+prosperous, they now became miserable and destitute, and dependent on
+the annual allowance from the government. The lands they relinquished
+were soon occupied by white settlers, and the red men and the white were
+again neighbors. Of course, the border troubles were renewed. The white
+men would never be satisfied until the Indians were expelled from the
+peninsula altogether.
+
+The Indians were aware that the white settlers were eager to have them
+sent away. They tried to keep peace and avoid trouble. If any of their
+number violated the treaty, the Indians punished him themselves, even
+inflicting the ignominious thirty-nine stripes. The white men, however,
+were bent on making mischief. Indeed, one of the lawmakers of the
+Territory said frankly: "The only course, therefore, which remains for
+us to rid ourselves of them, is to adopt such a mode of treatment
+towards them as will induce them to acts that will justify their
+expulsion by force."
+
+The Indians had yielded many points for the sake of peace, but they were
+determined not to leave Florida. They believed that if they could abide
+by the terms of the treaty of Camp Moultrie for its full period of
+twenty years the United States government would admit their right to
+stay in Florida permanently.
+
+Osceola was most active in trying to preserve peace. He had now grown to
+manhood. He had married Morning-Dew, the daughter of a chief, and they
+were living together happily near Fort King. Osceola was not a chief,
+but he was well known and liked among the Indians. He used his influence
+to keep the rash young men from violating the treaty. He wished to see
+the Seminoles do their full duty to the white people, not because he was
+fond of the white race, but because he thought it well for the Indians
+that the peace should not be broken.
+
+[Illustration: OSCEOLA]
+
+His eagerness to keep the Indians in order made him greatly liked at
+Fort King. His services were often demanded there as guide or informer.
+But while he made every effort to keep the Indians from doing wrong, he
+did not think the white men blameless and said so frankly. He accused
+them of failure to punish men who were guilty of committing crimes
+against the Indians, of unfairness in seizing negroes, of theft of
+property, and of withholding annuities. Osceola's was a good kind of
+patriotism--he did not consider his enemies right, but he wanted his
+own people to be right, and did his best to make them so.
+
+But Indians, who are by nature revengeful, could not be expected to
+endure wrongs without some retaliation. Their complaints of injustice
+were met by the proposition that they move beyond the Mississippi, out
+of the white man's reach.
+
+The nature of their grievances is clearly shown in a "talk" which Chief
+John Hicks sent to the President in January, 1829. He said:
+
+" * * * We are all Seminoles here together. We want no long talk; we wish
+to have it short and good. We are Indians and the whites think we have
+no sense; but what our minds are, we wish to have our big father know.
+
+"When I returned from Washington, all my warriors were scattered--in
+attempting to gather my people I had to spill blood midway in my path. I
+had supposed that the Micanopy people had done all the mischief, and I
+went with my warriors to meet the Governor with two. When I met the
+Governor at Suwanee he seemed to be afraid; I shook hands with him. I
+gathered all my people and found that none was missing, and that the
+mischief had been done by others. The Governor had them put in prison. I
+was told that if one man kills another we must not kill any other man in
+his place, but find the person who committed the murder and kill him.
+One of my people was killed and his murderer's bones are now white at
+Tallahassee. Another one that had done us mischief was killed at
+Alpaha. A black man living among the whites has killed one of my people
+and I wish to know who is to give me redress. Will my big father answer?
+When our law is allowed to operate, we are quick; but they say the black
+man is subject to the laws of the white people; now I want to see if the
+white people do as they say. We wish our big father to say whether he
+will have the black man tried for the murder of one of our people. If he
+will give him up to us, the sun shall not move before he has justice
+done to him. We work for justice, as well as the white people do. I wish
+my friend and father to answer. In answer we may receive a story, for
+men going backwards and forwards have not carried straight talks.
+
+"I agreed to send away all the black people who had no masters, and I
+have done it; but still they are sending to me for negroes. When an
+Indian has bought a black man they come and take him away again, so that
+we have no money and no negroes, too. A white man sells us a negro and
+then turns around and claims him again, and our father orders us to give
+him up. There is a negro girl in Charleston that belongs to my
+daughter--her name is Patience. I want her restored to me. She has a
+husband here; she has a child about a year old. I want my big father to
+cause them to be sent to me, to do as he compels me to do, when I have
+just claims. If my father is a true friend, he will send me my property
+by our agent, who has gone to Washington. I have been told by the
+Governor that all runaway negroes must be given up, but that all those
+taken in war, were good property to us; but they have taken away those
+taken in war, and those we have raised from children. * * *
+
+"Will my father listen now to the voice of his children? He told me we
+were to receive two thousand dollars' worth of corn--where is it? We
+have received scarcely any, not even half, according to our judgment, of
+what was intended for us. If the Governor and the white people have done
+justly in this we wish our big father to let us know. We were promised
+presents for twenty-one years; we have received nothing but a few
+promises. It seems that they have disappeared before they reached us, or
+that our big father did not intend to give them to us. We were promised
+money, but we have not received a cent for this year. What has become of
+it? We wish our big father to ask the Governor. The white people say
+that we owe them, which is not true. We did take some goods of an Indian
+trader, Mr. Marsh, to whom the Governor had promised part of our money.
+We took the goods because we were afraid we should never get what was
+ours in any other way; they amounted to fifteen hundred dollars. We
+understand that Mr. Bellamy has received from the Governor sixteen
+hundred dollars; what is it for? The Indians do not owe him
+anything,--he has lost no property by us,--we have taken none of his
+cattle. If a tiger has killed one, it is charged to the Indians. If they
+stray away and are lost for a time, it is charged to the Indians. He has
+lost nothing by us; but my people have suffered loss from him. He has
+taken all the Indians' hogs that he could lay his hands on. * * * He has
+taken hogs--one hundred head--from one man. We can not think of giving
+away sixteen hundred dollars for nothing. According to the white man's
+laws, if a man takes that which does not belong to him, he has to return
+it and pay for the damages. Will our great father see that this man
+restores to us what he has unjustly taken from us, for we look to our
+big father to fulfill his promises and give us the presents and money
+that are due to us. We understand that Colonel Piles has received some
+of the money that is due to us; he is a good man; when we were perishing
+with hunger he gave us to eat and drink. He is entitled to what he has
+received. It appears that the Seminoles who have done no mischief, have
+to suffer, as well as the few that have been guilty--this does not
+appear to be right to us. By stopping our money, the Governor has
+prevented our paying just debts, the debts we owe to the licensed Indian
+traders, who have trusted us under the expectation that we would pay
+them when we received our money. Our father has put two agents to look
+over us; our agent, Colonel Humphries, has not seen any of the money or
+presents that belong to us. * * *
+
+"I am getting to be very old, and I wish my bones to be here. I do not
+wish to remove to any other land, according to what I told my father.
+When great men say anything to each other, they should have good
+memories. Why does Colonel White plague me so much about going over the
+Mississippi? We hurt nothing on this land. I have told him so before."
+
+
+
+
+V. THE TREATY OF PAYNE'S LANDING
+
+
+One day when Osceola was at Fort King he was told that a great council
+was to be held at Payne's Landing, about twenty miles from the fort. The
+Indians' "white father" had sent special messengers to talk with the
+Seminoles, and all the leading men of the nation were summoned to come
+to hear his words.
+
+Osceola knew that the message was about the Seminoles' leaving Florida.
+He was bitterly opposed to that project. He knew that some of the old
+chiefs were very easily influenced, and that the white men had a way of
+getting them to make promises in council which they afterwards
+regretted. He therefore wished that none of the Indians would attend the
+council. Then no action could be taken.
+
+He went around advising men not to go to Payne's Landing. But the white
+men sent their messengers near and far, calling in the chiefs and head
+men. Early in May the streams were full of canoes and the forest paths
+were traveled by bands of Indians on their way to Payne's Landing.
+Seeing this, Osceola decided to go to the council himself, and do what
+he could there to prevent the chiefs from making any rash agreements.
+
+Osceola was not a chief, but he was a recognized leader of the young
+men, and as he sat in the council house, stern and alert, many a glance
+was cast in his direction to see how he was impressed by the white man's
+talk.
+
+He listened to the interpreter eagerly and learned that the President
+wished the Seminoles to give up the land that had been reserved for them
+by the treaty of Camp Moultrie. In exchange they were to occupy a tract
+of land of the same extent west of the Mississippi River in Arkansas
+among the Creek Indians. A delegation of chiefs was to visit the country
+and if "they" were satisfied with the country, the Seminoles were to be
+transported to it in three divisions, one in 1833, one in 1834, and the
+last in 1835. Something was said about the payment of annuities, about
+the distribution of blankets and homespun frocks, and compensation for
+cattle and slaves stolen by the whites. But the point that concerned
+Osceola most of all was that the Seminoles were expected to leave
+Florida and live among the Creeks west of the Mississippi! Still there
+was no reason to be distressed about it, he thought, for it was to be
+done only if the Florida Indians were willing to make the change, and he
+knew that the Seminoles would never consent to leave Florida. With arms
+folded across his breast and a calm eye he watched one chief after
+another take the pen and make at the end of the treaty his mark or
+signature.
+
+A short time afterwards seven chiefs and the faithful negro interpreter,
+Abraham, left for Arkansas to examine the new country. The delegation
+returned in April, 1833.
+
+Then the Indians asked, "When will the white men meet the red to hear
+what they think about going towards the setting sun?"
+
+"There will be no council," said the agent. "You promised to go if the
+delegates liked the land. They like the land. Now you must go without
+any more talk."
+
+"No, no! We promised to go if we were suited with the land when they
+told us about it!" exclaimed the Indians.
+
+The agent repeated, "You gave your word to your white father that you
+would go if the country pleased your chiefs. The chiefs were well
+pleased." Then he added, "They met your white father's messengers on the
+new land and pledged their faith that you would go. They promised for
+you. They signed another treaty. You agreed to do as your chiefs wished.
+Your chiefs have promised your white father. There is no help for it.
+You must go."
+
+When Osceola heard this he was in a rage. The white men had got the
+chiefs away from their own people and induced them to make promises they
+had no right to make. What right had Charley A. Mathla to promise for
+him or to promise for Micanopy, the head chief of the nation?
+
+Osceola was not the only indignant one. All the Indians were in a fury
+with the government agents. They felt that they had been tricked, caught
+by a phrase they did not understand. They believed that undue influence
+had been brought to bear upon their chiefs. Had the delegates been
+allowed to return to Florida to give their report, some Indians would
+have heard it with favor, but all were angered because the chiefs had
+been influenced to make an additional treaty at Fort Gibson without
+consulting their people. But the Indians were usually as severe in their
+judgment of their own race as in their condemnation of another and they
+did not spare the chiefs who had signed the additional treaty. Men and
+women alike held them in supreme contempt. They scolded, they ridiculed
+till the men in self defense declared that they had not signed the
+treaty, and gave so many reasons why the Seminoles should not go west
+that the spirit against emigration was more positive than ever.
+
+The faith of even those Indians who had striven to keep peace with the
+United States was destroyed by the "Additional Treaty" and a general
+feeling of ill will prevailed. The Indians refused to surrender negroes
+claimed as slaves by the white people, and were so hostile that in 1834
+General Jackson, then president of the United States, determined to
+force them to leave if necessary. He had the treaties ratified by the
+Senate, appointed a new Indian agent, and ordered that preparations for
+the removal of the Indians should be pushed with all speed.
+
+In October the new Indian agent called a council. This time Osceola went
+about urging the Indians to attend and advising the chiefs about their
+talks. In the council the slender, energetic, young warrior sat next to
+the fat, inactive old chief, Micanopy. Osceola had no right to speak in
+council, but there was no man there who had more influence. If Micanopy
+wavered under the stern eye of the white man, he heard the voice of
+Osceola in his ear and did the young man's bidding.
+
+Micanopy denied signing the treaty of Payne's Landing. When shown his
+mark he declared that he had not touched the pen, though he had been on
+the point of doing so, "for," he said, "the treaty was to examine the
+country and I believed that when the delegation returned, the report
+would be unfavorable. It is a white man's treaty, and the white man did
+not make the Indian understand it as he meant it." He finished by saying
+that he had agreed to the treaty of Camp Moultrie and that by the terms
+of that treaty southern Florida belonged to the Seminoles for twenty
+years, scarcely half of which had passed.
+
+Other chiefs spoke and said bitter things. The agent became angry and
+threatened to withhold the annuity unless the Indians signed a paper
+agreeing to leave without further trouble.
+
+At this Osceola's eyes flashed fire; he sprang up like a tiger and
+declared that he did not care if the Indians never received another
+dollar of the white man's money; he and his warriors would never sign
+away their liberty and land for gold. Then, drawing his knife from his
+belt, he raised it high in the air and plunged it through document and
+table, exclaiming, "The only treaty I will sign is with this!"
+
+
+
+
+VI. HOSTILITIES
+
+
+The new Indian agent, General Thompson, had marked Osceola as a man of
+power. He thought it wise to make friends with him. So when Osceola went
+to Fort King he was cordially received by the agent. Once on returning
+from New York the latter brought Osceola a beautiful new rifle, which
+was worth one hundred dollars. Osceola was pleased with the rifle and
+pleased with this evidence of General Thompson's regard for him. But he
+was not to be bought by gifts to forsake the cause of the Seminoles.
+
+He saw that the white men were actually getting ready to move the
+Indians; they were preparing transports at Tampa and making ready for
+the sale of the Indians' cattle. Another council was called at Fort
+King.
+
+On the night before this council, Osceola spoke to a gathering of chiefs
+who had met secretly in Micanopy's village. He told them that, whatever
+happened in council, they must be prepared to resist force with force
+should the white men attempt to compel the Indians to emigrate. They
+must take advantage of every opportunity to buy powder and lead, to
+increase their store of food and ammunition. He advised them to declare
+in council their wish for peace, but to maintain firmly that they were
+determined never to leave Florida.
+
+[Illustration: ARREST OF OSCEOLA]
+
+At the council the next day, Jumper acting as spokesman for the Indians
+expressed these views. When he had finished, the agent arose and rebuked
+the Indians for breaking their word. His charge of dishonor excited the
+Indians and many lost their tempers. In the confusion that followed,
+General Clinch threatened to order in the soldiers if the Indians did
+not sign the compact to leave Florida, without further parley. This
+threat proved to be effectual. Several chiefs signed, but three of the
+leading chiefs refused to do so. For punishment General Thompson ordered
+that their names should be stricken from the list of chiefs. This
+enraged the Indians and the agent realized that he had lost more than he
+had gained by the council. He sent word to Washington that the Indians
+were in no mood to leave Florida and that there would be bloodshed if an
+attempt was made to enforce the treaty of Payne's Landing. Accordingly,
+the date for embarking was changed to a more distant date.
+
+Osceola made good use of the delay in adding to his war supplies; but
+one day he was refused powder. This indignity surprised and offended
+him. A refusal to give an Indian firearms or powder was evidence of
+distrust, and Osceola was used to respectful usage. "Am I a negro, a
+slave?" he exclaimed. "My skin is dark, but not black. I am a red man, a
+Seminole. The white man shall not treat me as if I were black. I will
+make the white man red with blood and then let him grow black in the sun
+and rain." His language became so violent that General Thompson ordered
+him put in irons and cast into prison.
+
+Alone in the dark, Osceola ceased to rave. Thoughts of a terrible
+vengeance soothed him. He planned it all carefully. After several days
+had passed he seemed repentant. He asked to see General Thompson and
+said he had spoken in anger. He expressed his friendship for the agent
+and his willingness to assist in persuading the Indians to live up to
+their treaty.
+
+After he was liberated Osceola seemed as good as his word. His manner at
+the Fort changed. He even brought in two or three sub-chiefs to sign the
+treaty. The agent was completely deceived and believed he had gained a
+powerful ally.
+
+When the Indians learned that Osceola had been put in irons they felt
+his wrong as their own and wished to visit the agent with swift
+punishment. But Osceola looked at the place on his wrist where the
+fetters had been and said: "That is my affair. Leave General Thompson to
+me. Your part is to see that no Indian leaves Florida."
+
+Almost daily something happened to show both Indians and white men that
+they could no longer live together in peace. One evening while a little
+company of Indians was camping in a hammock cooking supper, a party of
+white men came upon them, seized their rifles, examined their camping
+equipment and then fell to beating them. While they were occupied in
+this way some friends of the campers came up and seeing the plight of
+their comrades opened fire on the white men. The latter returned the
+fire and killed an Indian.
+
+While the Indians blamed the white men for this affair the white men
+held the Indians responsible for it. They ordered out the militia to
+protect the citizens and punish the Indians. Both parties believed that
+the time had come for definite action. By definite action the white men
+meant the transportation of the Seminoles, the Indians meant war. The
+former pushed forward preparations at Tampa, and issued a summons to all
+Indians to come in, sell their cattle and pledge themselves to assemble
+on the first of January 1836 for their journey. The latter held a
+council and decided that while the Indians promised to assemble at the
+beginning of the year it should be for war rather than emigration. They
+further agreed that the first Indian to sell his cattle and prepare in
+good faith to go should be punished with death.
+
+As might be inferred from this decision, there were some Seminoles whose
+loyalty to their race could not be counted on. A chief, Charley A.
+Mathla, who had been one of the delegates to visit Arkansas, was one of
+these. As he was known to be on good terms with the white people,
+Osceola ordered that he should be closely watched. He soon learned that
+there was only too much ground for his suspicion. Charley was getting
+ready to leave; he had driven his cattle to Tampa and sold them to the
+white people. If he were allowed to go unpunished other wavering ones
+would soon follow his example. Osceola wished his warriors to know from
+the start that punishment for disobedience to him would be more swift
+and terrible than anything they need fear for disobeying the white man.
+
+With a few faithful followers he hastened through the wilderness towards
+the village of Charley A. Mathla. There scouts brought him word that
+Chief Charley was on his way home from Tampa. The war party hid among
+the trees where the trail to the village passed through a hammock. They
+had not waited long before the chief came swiftly along the path.
+Osceola rose and fired. His comrades followed his example. Charley A.
+Mathla fell forward on the path without a word, dead.
+
+One of the party seized a handkerchief that the dead chief grasped in
+his hand and showed Osceola that it was full of money. Osceola took the
+offered treasure and cast the glittering coins far from him. The Indians
+watched them disappear among the green leaves with surprise and regret.
+But their leader said, "Do not touch his gold; it was bought with the
+red man's blood."
+
+
+
+
+VII. THE WAR OPENED
+
+
+In a short time news of the murder of Charley A. Mathla reached Fort
+King. With it came a rumor that the Indians were holding councils of war
+in the villages of the Big Swamp. But it was impossible for the agent to
+get definite information, as the woods were full of hostile Indian
+scouts. The runners who were on friendly terms with the men at the fort
+feared to venture beyond the protection of its guns lest they should
+suffer the fate of Charley A. Mathla.
+
+After the shooting, Osceola and his followers repaired to the fastnesses
+of Wahoo Swamp, where for some time Indians had been assembling from
+exposed villages. Here were collected vast stores of ammunition and food
+supplies, herds of cattle, women and children and old men, both red and
+black, and many warriors of the two races.
+
+Osceola was now recognized as a war chief. In council no one was
+listened to more eagerly than he. While addressing the assembled
+warriors he said: "Remember, it is not upon women and children that we
+make war and draw the scalping knife. It is upon men. Let us act like
+men. Do not touch the money of the white man or his clothes. We do not
+fight for these things. The Seminole is fighting for his hunting
+grounds."
+
+Definite plans were made for opening the war at once. Negroes living in
+the neighborhood of Fort Brooke near Tampa had brought word that Major
+E. L. Dade was to conduct reenforcements from Fort Brooke to Fort King.
+The detachment would pass on its march within a short distance of Wahoo
+Swamp and might easily be surprised and overpowered. Plans were formed
+for such an attack. Several days would probably pass, however, before
+Major Dade's force, encumbered with cannon and marching through marshes,
+would reach the point best suited for the Indians' attack.
+
+In the meantime Osceola must make a visit to Fort King. There was a
+white man there whose scalp he had sworn should be the first one taken
+in the war. With a small band of warriors he started on his errand of
+vengeance.
+
+Osceola knew General Thompson's habits. He was accustomed to take a walk
+after dinner while he smoked a cigar. Frequently he walked some distance
+from the fort, going out towards the sutler's house, where he sometimes
+had business. Osceola determined to wait for him in that vicinity.
+
+He and his comrades lay closely concealed, and watched without ceasing.
+But for several days the weather was unpleasant and the agent did not go
+beyond the fort. Still the Indians waited. At last a fine day dawned,
+and shortly after noon Osceola saw from his hiding place two men
+approaching the sutler's house. From afar he knew that one was General
+Thompson. He crept closer to the path; his friends followed; all were
+silent as serpents. The unsuspecting men came nearer, laughing and
+talking in easy security. Rising on one knee, Osceola took steady aim
+and fired. Instantly other shots rang through the still air and the two
+men lay dead on the earth.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN DEPREDATIONS]
+
+The Indians quickly scalped their victims. Then they hurried to the
+sutler's house, where they found several men at dinner; they surrounded
+the house and shot and scalped its inmates. When this was done they set
+fire to the house and took their leave with an exultant war whoop. No
+one pursued them; those who heard the shots and the war whoop, and saw
+the flaming house supposed a large war party had come to attack the
+place, and were afraid to investigate.
+
+The Indians meanwhile left the neighborhood with all speed. They had
+stayed longer than they had intended and they were anxious to reach the
+swamp in time to share in the attack on Major Dade and his men. They set
+off through the forest, a grim and terrible company, smeared with war
+paint and stained with human blood. Their knives and tomahawks were red;
+fresh scalps dangled from their belts or swung from poles carried over
+their shoulders. At the head of the company strode Osceola. On his head
+he wore a red and blue kerchief twisted to form a turban, from whose
+center waved three splendid ostrich plumes.
+
+Darkness fell before the company reached the swamp, but as they drew
+near to its outskirts they saw the luminous smoke of camp fires over the
+trees and heard faint yells. This told them they had come too late for
+the struggle, but in time to celebrate the victory. They were greeted by
+the revelers with wild shouts of delight. All joined in a hideous dance
+about a pole on which were fastened the scalps that had been taken that
+day.
+
+From the old chief, Micanopy, and his sub-chiefs, Jumper and Alligator,
+Osceola learned the details of that day's action. About two hundred
+warriors had taken their station in the outskirts of the swamp to await
+the coming of Major Dade and his one hundred and ten soldiers. They sent
+out scouts who brought them exact information concerning Dade's route
+and all his movements. They knew the information to be reliable, for
+they obtained it from Dade's guide, Louis, a slave, who was in sympathy
+with the Indians and Maroons. On the third day of their march the troops
+reached the point the Indians had decided upon as best adapted to their
+purpose. But neither Micanopy nor Osceola was present and many were
+unwilling to act without them. Some young warriors set out for
+Micanopy's camp and forced him to come with them to the scene of action.
+Even then he advised delay and it took all Jumper's eloquence to induce
+the old man to give the command for attack on the following morning.
+
+Meanwhile Dade's men spent a good night in their camp, little dreaming
+how near to them was the enemy. On the morning of the twenty-eighth of
+December they resumed their march in good spirits.
+
+The Indians had left the swamp and hidden themselves in a pine barren,
+near which the roadway wound. On one side was a deep swamp; on the
+other, a thin pine forest with a swamp beyond it. They found hiding
+places behind trees or on the ground sheltered by the saw palmetto and
+brush.
+
+From their hiding places the Indians saw the advance guard come into
+sight, reach, and pass them. Still Micanopy did not fire the signal
+shot. Now the main division was coming with Major Dade on horseback at
+the head. On marched the soldiers with unwavering tramp, tramp. The
+warriors crouched with muskets ready. Micanopy fired and Jumper raised
+the yell. Instantly the green waste was awake with the flash and bang of
+muskets, with death cries and savage yells. A white smoke hid the scene
+for a moment. When it cleared away, the road was strewn with the dead
+and dying. The Indians having reloaded their guns, rushed from their
+hiding places to finish their work.
+
+[Illustration: FLORIDA SWAMP]
+
+Some of Dade's men sprang to the thicket to seek refuge behind trees.
+They were followed and shot down. Others caught their feet in the heavy
+stems of the palmetto and, stumbling, fell an easy prey to their
+pursuers. The officers who had escaped the first fire did their best to
+rally the men. The cannon was brought into action and added its roar to
+the din of battle. But its balls went over the heads of the Indians and
+they succeeded in shooting the gunners before they could do any harm.
+
+The contest seemed over. The warriors were scattered in pursuit of
+fugitives or busy scalping the dead, when a negro brought word to Jumper
+that a number of the soldiers had collected and were building a fort of
+logs with the cannon to protect them. Jumper raised the yell and called
+together his Indians for a charge on the little company of brave men who
+were making their last stand behind tree trunks placed on the ground in
+the form of a triangle. The soldiers had exhausted their powder and were
+able to offer only a feeble resistance to the savages, who shot them
+down without mercy.
+
+The Indians carried off their own dead and wounded--three dead and five
+wounded. But they left the bodies of Dade's men to tell their own story
+to those who should find them. So well were the commands of Osceola
+heeded that months later when white troops found the dead, their money,
+watches and clothes were untouched.
+
+The battle over, the Indians returned to the swamp to await Osceola,
+count scalps, and celebrate their victory. Of one hundred and ten
+soldiers only four escaped.
+
+
+
+
+VIII. OSCEOLA A WAR CHIEF
+
+
+As a fire that has smoldered long flames up in many places at once, so
+the war broke out with several actions in quick succession. The tidings
+of the slaughter at Fort King had not become generally known and the
+Indians had not slept after Dade's massacre, before preparations were
+afoot for another assault.
+
+[Illustration: INDIAN RUNNER]
+
+Scarcely had the victors wearied of shouting and dancing when an Indian,
+exhausted, not with revelry, but with swift running through forest and
+swamp, came into the camp, bringing important news. A council of chiefs
+was called. The bowl of honey water was passed around and when all had
+drunk from the deep ladle, the messenger rose to give his message. He
+told the chiefs that General Clinch had left Fort Drane with two hundred
+regulars and four hundred Florida volunteers, and was already far
+advanced into the Indian country. Indeed he was even now approaching
+the Withlacoochee River.
+
+Micanopy, with his usual caution, advised the Indians to keep out of the
+way of such a large force. But his hearers were in no mood to listen to
+his faint-hearted advice; they had been emboldened by their recent
+victories and responded to the fearless daring of Osceola. One hundred
+and fifty Indians and fifty negroes volunteered to go with Osceola and
+Alligator to intercept General Clinch and his six hundred soldiers.
+
+With one accord the warriors bounded off towards the ford of the
+Withlacoochee. There the water was only two feet deep, and as it was the
+only place where the river could be crossed without boats, there could
+be little doubt that the white general would lead his forces to this
+point before attempting to cross the river.
+
+For a day and a night the Indians waited to give their enemy a deadly
+welcome. In the neighborhood of the ford there was no sound to interrupt
+the music of the river, no sight to disturb the peace of the dense
+forest. But on the morning of the following day, scouts came skulking
+through the trees, and in a few minutes the apparently unpeopled place
+was alive with red men.
+
+The scouts brought word that General Clinch and two hundred of his men
+had already crossed the river. They had made the passage slowly and
+laboriously in an old canoe that carried only eight at a time. But they
+were now advancing on this side of the river. Many a warrior's heart
+failed him when he heard this. But Osceola's dauntless spirit rose to
+the emergency. He cheered his men with words of such good courage that
+they were soon following him with new enthusiasm to a hill, where he
+posted them in a hammock to await the enemy.
+
+On the morning of the last day of the year, General Clinch advanced
+towards the hammock. He was aware of the presence of hostile Indians,
+but not knowing of the outrages they had already committed, he felt
+reluctant to attack them. He sent messages to Osceola telling him that
+it was useless for the Indians to struggle against the white man and
+advising him not to enter upon a war that could end only with the
+destruction of his race.
+
+To this humane counsel Osceola replied with haughty independence: "You
+have guns, and so have we; you have powder and lead, and so have we; you
+have men, and so have we; your men will fight, and so will ours until
+the last drop of the Seminoles' blood has moistened the dust of his
+hunting grounds." He added, what then seemed to the whites an idle
+boast, that after a few weeks' further preparation the Seminoles would
+be ready to enter upon a five years' struggle for the hunting grounds of
+Florida.
+
+At about noon General Clinch charged up the hill. He was greeted with a
+lively fire, but his men were tried fighters and were not checked. On
+they came calmly returning the fire of the enemy. The Indians and
+negroes offered a determined resistance. If they wavered, the shrill and
+terrible "Yo-ho-e-hee" of their leader gave them new courage. Everywhere
+his white plumes waved in the thick of the fight. The fire of his
+warriors broke upon the enemy always at the most unexpected point, and
+had it not been for the bravery of General Clinch, the Indians would
+have driven the soldiers back to the river, on the other side of which
+four hundred volunteers were watching the battle. But they held their
+ground, and at last Osceola was so seriously wounded that he ordered a
+retreat.
+
+For an hour and twenty minutes the battle had raged. The loss of the
+Indians was slight. When at Osceola's signal the wild yells ceased and
+the Indians disappeared in the forest, they bore with them only three
+dead and five wounded. General Clinch had suffered much heavier loss.
+Eight of his men had been killed and forty wounded.
+
+The Seminoles were highly elated by the success of the first engagements
+of the war. They regarded the battle on the Withlacoochee as a great
+victory, and Osceola's praises were on every lip. The old and timid
+Micanopy, head chief of the Seminoles by birth, kept that title of
+honor. But Osceola who, before the war opened, was not so much as a
+sub-chief and had but two constant followers, had been the real power in
+planning the hostile acts that opened the second Seminole war. All knew
+this and they now made him head war chief of the nation. He was only
+thirty-two years old, but he had the respect of all. With his own hand
+he had taken vengeance on the great white man who had wronged him; with
+his own hand he had punished the traitor chief, Charley A. Mathla. He
+had planned the massacre of Dade's troops. With a small band of Indians
+and negroes he had engaged the forces of General Clinch for more than an
+hour, inflicting heavy loss. His words had kindled the spirit of war
+throughout Florida.
+
+On the border, lawless young men were spreading terror and desolation;
+in the month of January sixteen well stocked plantations were laid waste
+by the Indians. In the distant swamp, Indian women were moulding bullets
+for the warriors. Through all the forest paths war parties were hurrying
+towards the camp of Osceola. The leader of each carried a bundle of
+sticks, each stick representing a warrior under his command. These were
+given to Osceola--but how many sticks there were only the Seminoles
+knew.
+
+
+
+
+IX. THE SEMINOLES HOLD THEIR OWN
+
+
+The hostile actions of the Seminoles at the close of the year 1835
+convinced the War Department of the United States that the Seminole
+Indians would not submit to be driven from one section of the country to
+another like sheep. Though the combined force of Indian and negro
+warriors was not supposed to be greater than twelve hundred, their
+treacherous nature and the wildness of the country, made the task of
+subduing them so difficult as to require many times that number of
+soldiers. General Clinch was already in the field quartered at Fort
+Drane, not far from the village of Micanopy. There were several forts in
+the Indian country, but they were meagerly garrisoned. General Scott was
+made commanding general of the army in Florida, with authority to call
+on the governors of South Carolina, Georgia, and Alabama for assistance.
+He went to work at once to raise a force for an Indian war.
+
+Meanwhile Major General Gaines, who was commander of the Western
+Military Department, started to Florida with a force of more than a
+thousand men. He ventured into the Seminoles' country with the hope of
+meeting them and fighting a decisive battle. He passed the scene of the
+Dade massacre and saw the work the savages had done, and after burying
+the dead he continued his march to Fort King. But in the whole of his
+march he saw not a single Indian. He had expected to find supplies for
+his army at Fort King, but being disappointed in this, he was obliged to
+return to Tampa with all speed.
+
+While looking for the ford across the Withlacoochee River he ran into an
+Indian ambush and was so harassed by the savages that he had to give up
+his plan of crossing the river and go into camp. He had ordered General
+Clinch to meet him in this neighborhood, and he sent out expresses to
+see what prospect there was of his arrival. The Indians were gathering
+in large numbers, and he believed that if General Clinch arrived in time
+their combined forces could surround them and crush them. But his supply
+of food was so reduced that he was obliged to have his horses killed to
+provide the men with meat. All the while the Indians were lying in wait
+and assailing all who ventured beyond the fortifications of the camp.
+
+On the fifth of February a negro who spoke good English came to the camp
+and asked to see General Gaines. The latter supposed he was a messenger
+from General Clinch, and ordered that the negro be sent at once to his
+tent. To the general's surprise the negro announced that he was Caesar,
+the slave of the Seminole chief Micanopy, and that he had been sent by
+the Indians to say that they were tired of fighting and wished to make a
+treaty of peace. General Gaines told Caesar that he had no power to make
+treaties, but that if the chiefs would pay him a visit the next day, he
+would grant them a truce and notify the President of the United States
+that his red children wanted to be at peace.
+
+[Illustration: CAESAR AND GENERAL GAINES]
+
+Caesar had acted without consulting any one; he had been a favorite and
+had his own way with Micanopy until he thought himself greater than his
+master. He had grown tired of the hardships of war and decided to put a
+stop to it. When he returned and gave a report of his visit, the Indians
+were so angry that they were ready to kill him. The negroes, however,
+defended him, and Osceola, fearing trouble between the allies, used his
+influence to save him. Osceola's interference in Caesar's behalf
+displeased some of the chiefs so much that they deserted without
+ceremony.
+
+As Osceola was ready enough to visit the camp of General Gaines to see
+his force, he went with other chiefs on the following day, as Caesar had
+promised, to hold an interview with General Gaines. Scarcely had the
+interview begun when General Clinch arrived and seeing a crowd of
+Indians at the entrance of the camp fired on them. This action broke up
+all parley; the Indians thought they had been dealt with treacherously
+and fled.
+
+Since the Indian forces had been weakened and the strength of the enemy
+greatly increased, Osceola decided that it would be best for his
+warriors to withdraw and gave directions for them to disperse. The next
+day the two generals found their enemy gone. Their supplies were too low
+to justify an attempt to pursue them, and General Gaines returned to
+Tampa and General Clinch to Fort Drane without accomplishing anything.
+
+Though General Clinch had not attempted to follow the Indians, Osceola
+and his warriors lost no time in finding his stronghold. They succeeded
+in making his fine plantation at Fort Drane so uncomfortable that in
+July when his crops were at their best he was obliged to leave it.
+Osceola immediately took possession of the place, and occupied it with
+grim pleasure until he was driven out a month later by Major Pearce.
+
+During the spring and summer several skirmishes between the Indians and
+United States soldiers occurred, in which the Indians and their black
+allies fought with remarkable pluck, perseverance, and success.
+
+The want of troops trained for Indian fighting, the unwholesome climate,
+ignorance of the country, the absence of roads and bridges, and the
+difficulty of getting supplies had made it almost impossible to invade
+Florida without large sacrifice of life and treasure. The people of the
+United States, not appreciating the difficulties, complained so much of
+the delay that General Scott was removed from the command and General
+Jesup was promoted to the command in Florida.
+
+In November, before General Jesup assumed control, an engagement took
+place which for a time threatened to close the war. On the eighteenth of
+November a force of five hundred soldiers attacked a company of Indians.
+After a fierce battle the Indians fled, leaving twenty-five dead on the
+field. This was counted by them their first defeat, for so long as they
+carried away their dead they did not admit themselves to be defeated.
+Three days later they rallied to meet General Call, who was advancing
+upon Wahoo swamp with over a thousand men. This was the stronghold of
+the Indians. Here their provisions, their cattle, their wives and
+children were hidden. The Indians had much at stake and made a strong
+defense. At last, however, they were compelled to retreat across the
+river. But they took their stand on the opposite bank behind a sand
+ridge, prepared to fight to the death.
+
+The commander knew that if he could penetrate the Wahoo swamp
+successfully he would bring the Seminole War to an end; but before him
+rolled the swift dark waters of the Withlacoochee, and beyond waited the
+Indians like tigers at bay. He decided not to make the attempt.
+
+
+
+
+X. OSCEOLA AND GENERAL JESUP
+
+
+On the eighth of December 1836, under most favorable circumstances,
+General Jesup took command of the Florida War and entered upon an
+energetic campaign. He had under his command about eight thousand men.
+Among these were several hundred Creek Indians hired to fight the
+Seminoles with the promise of "the pay and emoluments, and equipments of
+soldiers in the army of the United States and such plunder as they may
+take from the Seminoles."
+
+It will be remembered that Osceola had told the Indians that the war was
+not against women and children. General Jesup took a different view of
+the matter. His first step was to make a series of sudden raids upon the
+villages on the Withlacoochee in which he seized unprotected women and
+children. By his frequent sorties he drove the Indians south or divided
+them. On the twelfth of January he reported that he had sent mounted men
+in pursuit of Osceola, who was hiding with only three followers and his
+family.
+
+The capture of women and children broke the spirit of the Indians. They
+felt that if their wives and children must be sent to Arkansas perhaps
+they would be happier there with them than in Florida without them.
+Accordingly many listened with favor to General Jesup's invitation to
+come to Fort Dade and hold a council to decide on terms of capitulation.
+
+On the sixth of March, 1837, five chiefs and a large number of
+sub-chiefs met General Jesup at Fort Dade. They agreed to emigrate
+according to the terms of the treaty of Payne's Landing, but insisted
+that their negroes should be allowed to accompany them. This point was
+at last conceded them, and the fifth article of the terms of
+capitulation contained these words: "The Seminoles and their allies who
+come in and emigrate to the west shall be secure in their lives and
+property; their negroes, their _bona fide_ property, shall accompany
+them west."
+
+Large numbers of Indians expressed their willingness to sign these terms
+and assembled at a point near Fort Brooke on Tampa Bay, where
+twenty-eight vessels waited in the harbor to transport them. Even
+Osceola is said to have sent word that he and his family would emigrate
+with the rest. The camp at Fort Brooke grew larger every day.
+
+General Jesup was well satisfied. He reported that the Florida war was
+ended. And indeed it might have been had the terms of the agreement been
+adhered to. But slave claims were pushed; unprincipled men went into
+the Indians' territory and seized negroes; there was bitter complaint
+against the fifth article of the compact. At last General Jesup was
+induced to change that article so that it should contain a promise by
+the Indians to deliver up all negroes, belonging to white men who had
+been taken during the war.
+
+This change was made with the knowledge and consent of only one chief,
+Alligator. When the Indians in general became aware that the terms of
+capitulation had been tampered with they were highly indignant.
+
+General Jesup appointed a day on which all negroes taken during the war
+were to be brought in, but no attention was paid to his order. He then
+sent Osceola the following message: "I intend to send exploring parties
+into every part of the country during the summer, and I shall send out
+all the negroes who belong to the white people, and you must not allow
+the Indians or their negroes to mix with them. I am sending for
+bloodhounds to trail them, and I intend to hang every one of them who
+does not come in."
+
+When Osceola received this message and learned that ninety negroes had
+already been seized by General Jesup as belonging to the whites he
+declared that the agreement had been violated and that the signers were
+therefore no longer bound by it. He instructed those encamped at Tampa
+to disperse. The old chief, Micanopy, refused to do so or to give the
+command to his people. One night early in June, Osceola entered the camp
+and visited the tent of the sleeping Micanopy. As he had always done
+before, the old man yielded to the wonderful personal influence of
+Osceola and did his bidding like a child.
+
+On the morning of the fifth of June, General Jesup was awakened by an
+officer who came hurrying to tell him that the Indians had gone. Surely
+enough the great camp had vanished in the night. The captives had fled.
+Already they were safe in their marshy fastnesses. Families were
+reunited; all had had rest and food and clothes. The coming sickly
+season would make it impossible to pursue them till their growing crops
+were harvested. The Seminole war with all its difficulties was reopened.
+
+Osceola, who a few months before had been a hunted fugitive with only
+three followers, without hope for himself or his people, was again a
+powerful war chief. With a brighter outlook his natural cheerfulness of
+disposition returned, and he hoped and planned great things for the
+coming autumn.
+
+Early in September he learned that his good friend "King Philip" had
+been captured with eleven followers by General Joseph Hernandez. King
+Philip's son, Wild Cat, came to him, saying he had been to St. Augustine
+to see his father, that the palefaces had treated him well and had
+allowed him to carry his father's messages to his friends. The old chief
+wanted Osceola to come to St. Augustine to arrange for his liberation.
+
+Osceola, always generous and ready to serve a friend, sent back to
+General Hernandez a finely wrought bead pipe and a white plume to
+indicate that the path between them was now white and safe and to
+inquire whether it would be safe for his return.
+
+Wild Cat soon returned to Osceola with presents and friendly messages
+from the general. With the hope of gaining the release of King Philip,
+Osceola started for St. Augustine with a large attendance of warriors.
+Wild Cat went in advance to announce his coming. With a great show of
+regard General Hernandez went out to meet Osceola with a store of
+supplies. He met his advance guard, and learning that Osceola would not
+arrive till evening, left word that Osceola should choose a camping
+ground near Fort Peyton, and went back to communicate with General
+Jesup.
+
+The next morning General Hernandez rode out dressed in full uniform and
+escorted by his own staff and many of the officers of General Jesup's
+staff. He found Osceola and Chief Alligator with seventy-one picked
+warriors assembled under the white flag for council. The warriors had
+brought with them the women of King Philip's family, and about one
+hundred negroes to be given up in exchange for the prisoner.
+
+After the usual greetings and ceremonies General Hernandez took out a
+paper and said that General Jesup wanted to know the Indians' answer to
+these questions: "What is your object in coming? What do you expect? Are
+you prepared to deliver up at once the slaves taken from the citizens?
+Why have you not surrendered them already as promised by Alligator at
+Fort King? Have the chiefs of the nation held a council in relation to
+the subjects of the talk at Fort King? What chiefs attended that council
+and what was their determination? Have the chiefs sent a messenger with
+the decision of the council? Have the principal chiefs, Micanopy,
+Jumper, Cloud, and Alligator, sent a messenger, and if so, what is their
+message? Why have not those chiefs come in themselves?"
+
+When Osceola heard these questions he struggled to answer. He began a
+sentence but could not finish it. Turning to Alligator he said in a low
+husky voice: "I feel choked. You must speak for me." Perhaps his
+suspicions were aroused by the questions; perhaps he saw afar the lines
+of soldiers closing round his camp--at any rate he was deeply troubled.
+
+Finding the answers given by Alligator unsatisfactory, General
+Hernandez, following the orders of General Jesup, gave the signal and
+the troops surrounding the camp closed in upon the dismayed Indians and
+marched them off to the fort.
+
+In this way was the man that the generals in Florida pronounced the war
+spirit of the Seminoles conquered.
+
+
+
+
+XI. THE IMPRISONMENT OF OSCEOLA
+
+
+Osceola and his warriors were taken by their captors to St. Augustine
+where they were imprisoned within the strong walls of the old Spanish
+castle of San Marco. It was very hard for these Indians who loved
+liberty better than life to be shut up in narrow dark cells, to be
+obliged to give up the warpath, to sit for hours, and days, and weeks,
+and months in inaction, not knowing what need their friends had of them
+but imagining the heaviest possible misfortunes for those they held
+dear.
+
+[Illustration: FORT SAN MARCO]
+
+Osceola could have stood the torture of wrenched limbs and of fire with
+haughty spirit unbent. What was that to this torture of the white man's,
+the dim light, the quiet, the narrow walls, the waiting, the not
+knowing, the fearing of evil?
+
+The warrior still held his head high, but gradually the fierce gleam in
+his eye changed to a look of gentleness, of unspeakable sadness, and his
+winning smile came to have so much sorrow in it that men said to each
+other after they left him, "His heart is breaking." He was allowed to
+see and talk with other prisoners. When Micanopy and other chiefs were
+brought to the fort he was told of their arrival. When Wild Cat, after
+fasting many days, escaped through the small window in his wall with the
+help of a rope made from his blanket, Osceola was aware of it. But none
+of these things seemed to move him.
+
+General Jesup told the chiefs that he would urge the United States
+authorities to let them and their people stay in southern Florida if
+they would agree to keep their tribes at peace, guard the frontier, and
+themselves accompany him to Washington. Micanopy showed a little
+distrust when he heard the proposition, but Osceola took off his proud
+head dress and removing one of the beautiful plumes from it handed it to
+the man who had betrayed him, saying simply: "Give this to my white
+father to show him that Osceola will do as you have said."
+
+The suggestion made by General Jesup was not considered favorably by the
+government, but he was instructed to carry out the Jackson policy of
+transportation. He had collected so many captives at St. Augustine that
+he feared trouble and decided to separate them. He sent all the negroes
+to Tampa and the Indians to Charleston, S. C. Late in December the
+Indians were shipped on the steamer Poinsett. Among them were Osceola,
+Micanopy, Alligator and Cloud. Besides the chiefs one hundred and
+sixteen warriors and eighty-two women and children were sent to Fort
+Moultrie. Osceola's two wives and little daughters were in the company.
+They arrived at Charleston on the first day of January, 1838, after a
+quiet voyage.
+
+At Fort Moultrie, Osceola was treated with much consideration; he was
+allowed to walk about the enclosure and to receive visitors in his room.
+Still he ate little and every day grew more wan and thin. All the chiefs
+were so low-spirited that great efforts were made to cheer them. A very
+popular actress was then playing at the Charleston theater, and knowing
+the Indian's love of whatever is gay and spectacular, the authorities at
+the fort decided to take the chiefs to the theater on the sixth of
+January.
+
+Public sympathy had been excited by reports of the capture,
+imprisonment, and failing health of the once terrible Osceola. The
+theater was crowded with Charleston people more anxious to see the chief
+than the beautiful actress. The Indians were led into the brilliantly
+lighted hall filled with staring men and women. They looked neither to
+the right nor to the left, but took their places in quiet and watched
+with steady eyes and unsmiling faces the entertainment provided for
+them. Osceola had made no objection to coming, but he sat amidst the
+mirth and glamor, so sad and stern that those who had brought him there
+and those who had come to see him felt rebuked. His trouble was too real
+to be easily comforted, too deep to be an amusing spectacle. The papers
+of the day recorded the strange scene of the captive Osceola at the play
+in poetry and prose.
+
+Later an incident happened in which Osceola took some interest. George
+Catlin, who had traveled for several years among the Indians and was
+regarded by them as a friend, came to the fort to paint the portraits of
+the chiefs for the United States government. When Mr. Catlin asked
+Osceola if he might paint his portrait the latter seemed greatly
+pleased. He arrayed himself in his gayest calico hunting shirt, his
+splendid plumed turban, and all his ornaments, and stood patiently while
+the artist worked. Mr. Catlin enjoyed painting the fine head, with its
+high forehead and clear eye. He made two portraits of Osceola, both of
+which are now in the collection of Indian portraits at the Smithsonian
+Institution, in Washington.
+
+Mr. Catlin came to be well acquainted with the chiefs whose portraits he
+painted, and used to have them come to his room in the evenings, where
+they all talked with great freedom. He felt deep sympathy for Osceola,
+who told him all the details of his capture. When Osceola learned that
+Mr. Catlin had been west of the Mississippi he asked him many questions
+about the country and the Indians living there.
+
+But every day Osceola's health grew more feeble and, on the day when the
+second portrait was finished, he became so ill that he was thought to be
+dying. He rallied, however, and when Mr. Catlin left a few days later,
+it was with the hope that Osceola would regain his health and strength.
+He requested the fort doctor to keep him informed about the chief's
+condition.
+
+
+
+
+XII. THE END
+
+
+The day after George Catlin left Fort Moultrie, Osceola had a severe
+attack of throat trouble. He refused to take the doctor's medicine. A
+Seminole medicine man came and gave the sick man Indian remedies.
+Osceola's wives nursed him tenderly, but in spite of all they could do
+he grew rapidly worse and died on the thirtieth of January, 1838, after
+three months of captivity.
+
+Dr. Wheedon sent the following interesting account of his death to Mr.
+Catlin:
+
+[Illustration: "MEDICINE MAN"]
+
+"About half an hour before he died, he seemed to be sensible that he was
+dying; and, although he could not speak, he signified by signs that he
+wished me to send for the chiefs and for the officers of the post, whom
+I called in. He made signs to his wives by his side, to go and bring his
+full dress which he wore in time of war; which having been brought in,
+he rose up in his bed, which was on the floor, and put on his shirt, his
+leggings and his moccasins, girded on his war belt, bullet-pouch and
+powder-horn, and laid his knife by the side of him on the floor.
+
+"He then called for his red paint and looking-glass, which latter was
+held before him. Then he deliberately painted one half of his face, his
+neck, and his throat with vermilion, a custom practised when the
+irrevocable oath of war and destruction is taken. His knife he then
+placed in its sheath under his belt, and he carefully arranged his
+turban on his head and his three ostrich plumes that he was in the habit
+of wearing in it.
+
+"Being thus prepared in full dress, he lay down a few moments to recover
+strength sufficient, when he rose up as before, and with most benignant
+and pleasing smiles, extended his hand to me and to all of the officers
+and chiefs that were around him, and shook hands with us all in dead
+silence, and with his wives and little children.
+
+"He made a signal for them to lower him down upon his bed, which was
+done, and he then slowly drew from his war-belt his scalping-knife,
+which he firmly grasped in his right hand, laying it across the other on
+his breast, and in a moment smiled away his last breath without a
+struggle or a groan."
+
+Osceola was buried with some ceremony near the fort. Officers attended
+his funeral and a military salute was fired over his grave. This show of
+respect comforted a little the grief-stricken friends of the chief.
+
+It is said that Osceola was not allowed to rest in peace, even in death.
+A few nights after his burial men of the race that despised him as a
+barbarian came by night, opened his grave and cut his head from his
+body. But openly only respect was shown to the remains of the greatest
+chief of the Seminoles. His grave was inclosed with an iron railing and
+marked with a stone bearing the following inscription:
+
+   Osceola,
+   Patriot and Warrior,
+   Died at Fort Moultrie,
+   January 30, 1838.
+
+[Illustration: REMOVAL OF SOUTHERN INDIANS]
+
+The war did not close with the death of Osceola. Wild Cat took command
+and the trouble continued till 1842. During the war the Seminoles lost
+many brave warriors; several thousand Indians and five hundred of their
+allies were driven from their homes in Florida to a strange land which
+they were obliged to share with their old enemies, the Creeks.
+
+The white men gained the lands of the Indians, a vast and rich new
+territory for settlement, removed a refuge for runaway slaves, and
+established peace on the Southern frontier. For these gains, however,
+they had paid a heavy price in treasure, in human lives, and in honor.
+
+END
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Four American Indians, by
+Edson L. Whitney and Frances M. Perry
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOUR AMERICAN INDIANS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 25538.txt or 25538.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/5/3/25538/
+
+Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/25538.zip b/25538.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3714a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/25538.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a71b0ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #25538 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25538)